p 



Students, and others who desire to shorten their hours of study, can 
do so by using 

HAMILTON, LOOKE & CLARK'S 

Ml OF CLASSICAL INSTRUCTION. 

A GREAT AID TO STUDENTS. 



The poet Milton says : " We do amiss to spend seven or eight years merely scraping 
together so much miserable Latin and Greek as might be learned otherwise easily and 
delightfully in one year." 

LATIN INTERLINEAR TRANSLATIONS. 
In one volume, Royal 12mo, Half Turkey. Price, $2.25 each. 



VIRGIL. By Hart and Osborne. 
CAESAR. By Hamilton and Clark. 
HORACE. Stirling, Nuttall, Clark. 
CICERO. Bv Hamilton and Clark. 



SALLUST. By Hamilton and Clark. 
OVID. By George W. Heilig. 
JUVENAL. By Hamilton and Clark. 
LIVY. By Hamilton and Clark. 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 

©§ajt ©oj^rig^ !f a 

ShelfZKf^T 



>ach. 



Ii 

HOMI 

GOSP 

XENC 

To be folloT 

When the 
international 
more import 
mended by ( 
beth, and by 
in testimony 
and English „- 

tongue, he may then be advanced a little further. Nor let the objection that he 
will then know it only by rote fright any one. This, when well considered, 
is not of any moment against, but plainly for, this way of learning a language. 
The languages are only to be learned by rote, and he that speaks them well 
has no other rule but that." In teaching classes by oral dictation , these works 
present advantages that no others do. 



UNITED STATES OF AMERICA!. 



Kit 

the same plan. 

y and scientific 
s considered of 
as then recom- 
o Queen Eliza- 
f his time; and 
iterlining Latin 
Ige of the Latin 



CLARK'S PRACTICAL AND PROGRESSIVE LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Adapted to the Interlinear Series of Classics, and to all other Systems. 
In one volume, Royal 12 mo. Half Turkey. Price, $1.50. 

The plan of this Grammar is altogether of a practical nature ; for while the 
scholar is learning the declensions and conjugations, he has them exemplified 
in lessons extracted from the Classics. Where this method has been properly 
applied, a more rapid and thorough knowledge of the elements of Latin has 
always been the result. 

Address 



k 



CHARLES DE SILVER & SONS, 

Publishers and Booksellers, 
Philadelph 



lb 



hia./ 



I - ■ , _ C$> 

Xmporfast to Stndeats 5 

AND OTHERS. 



TO THE SERIES OF LATIN AND GREEK INTERLINEAR CLASSICS, 
we would call the attention of the trade, and to all interested. By the use 
of these valuable works one can easily and delightfully learn as much of Latin 
and Greek in one year as would take seven or eight years by the old method 
of delving amongst whole columns of finely italicized definitions to find out, 
if at all, barely the shade of the meaning of a Latin or Greek word. 

THE SALE OP THE INTERLINEARS is constantly increasing, and book- 
sellers in the vicinity of schools, colleges, etc., will find it to their interest to 
keep a stock of these valuable works on hand. Circulars will be furnished 
upon application, which may be distributed among the students in the vicinity, 
giving notice that you have the Interlinear works for sale. 

A liberal discount, which will be made known upon application, will be al- 
lowed to those desiring to interest themselves in the sale of these works. Should 
you not feel disposed to interest yourself, please hand this circular to some 
interested party who will. Persons having leisure time will find this a profit- 
able business, and one which may be pursued without interfering with their 
regular employment. 

All orders must be accompanied by the cash or postal order, or the goods 
will be sent by express, C. O. D., and express charges for collection added to 
the bill. 

i ^t f i 

LIST OF CATALOGUES. 

1.— NEW DESCRIPTIVE CATALOGUE OF ALL OUR VALUABLE EDUCATIONAL 

PUBLICATIONS. 
2.— SPECIMEN PAGE AND INTERLINEAR CATALOGUE. 
3.— ILLUSTRATED BOOKS FOR AGENTS' CATALOGUE. 
4— COMPLETE CATALOGUE OF ALL THE SCHOOL AND COLLEGE TEXT BOOKS 

PUBLISHED. 64 Page?, with Teachers' and Retail Prices. This will be valuable 

to educational book buyers. 
5.— DITTO. 8vo Edition, with Subject Classified List. 
6.-ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE OF PATENTED SPECIALTIES IN STATIONERY 

ARTICLES. 

70^* Remember we make a specialty of the Mailing of Books. Any Books 
you may desire will be promptly mailed upon receipt of the advertised price. 

7^* Information about Books cheerfully given. 

7^" Any or all of the above Catalogues mailed, post free, upon application. 
Please state WHICH Catalogue you want, when writing to us. 



$®* SPECIAL NOTICE. Endorsements of Teachers, Eminent Men of 
Letters, and Opinions of the Press, etc., furnished upon application. 

• m • 

4&^ Teachers, School Committees, and the Trade generally, may obtain our 
Publications from the leading JBooJcsellers throughout the United States 
and the Dominion of Canada, or, when not to be had of thetyi, the books will 
be forwarded on application to the Publishers. 

CHARLES DE SILVER & SONS, Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA. 



PRACTICAL 
AND PROGRESSIVE 

LATIN GRAMMAR. 

ELEMENTARY COURSE. 



BY 

THOMAS CLARK, 

if 

EDITOR OP THE FORMER ASSOCIATION OF THE PHILADELPHIA BOOKSELLERS FOR TH1 
PUBLICATION OF THE LATIN AND GREEK CLASSICS ; ALSO, EDITOR OF SEVERAL 
UA±11* CLASSICS WITH NOTES; AS, LIKEWISE, OF THE POPULAR 
SERIES OF INTERLINEAR TRANSLATIONS, COMPRISING HO- 
RACE, CESAR, CICERO, SALLUST, XENOPHON, ETC. 



A NEW AND CAREFULLY REVISED EDITION, 



TO WHICH HAS BEEN ADDED A 

SECOND, 



# 



FULL COURSE OF THE LATIN GRAMMAR 




PHILADELPHIA: 

CHARLES De SILVER & SONS, 
PUBLISHERS. 



c — o 



^ 



.* 









Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1859, by 

CHARLES DESILVER, 

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for 
the Eastern District of Pennsylvania. 

Sl£fa.£.oTYP£D BY J. FAOAN. 



ET. 
JSS DE SILVER <& SONS, 



1886. 



PREFACE TO THE ENLARGED EDITION. 



This, revised edition of the Practical and Progressive Latin 
Grammar, contains a second or full Supplementary Course, 
U which embodies all that was purposely omitted in the Ele- 

mentary Course, with the view of relieving the pupil's 
memory from a burden which it was unnecessary to impose 
on him, until he had made some progress in the language. 

The second or full course contains all the exceptions and 
minute rules for declensions and conjugations, the derivation 
and composition of words, &c. ; also, a full supplementary 
syntax ; together with a treatise on prosody, containing all 
the rules of quantity and of versification. 

In combination with the elementary part, these additions 
render this Latin Grammar as ample and complete as any 
now used ;n our schools and colleges, and afford the student 
many practical advantages and facilities not procurable in 
any other Latin grammar. 

The division into a first, practical and elementary, course, 
containing only those rules and forms most necessary to be 
learned, accompanied by practical exercises, — and into a 
second, supplementary and full, course, will be found very 
advantageous to teachers, and also to students of the Latin 
language. 

THOMAS CLARK. 

Philadelphia, September 16, 1859. 

(Hi) 



PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 



The object of this Grammar is to obviate the disgust 
and tediousness which pupils feel in merely learning the 
grammatical forms of the Latin language, without any prac- 
tical application of the same while learning them, and also 
to prevent the loss of time resulting from such method. 

The plan here followed is, that, at the same time the pupil 
commences to learn the declensions, he also commences to 
translate and to learn words and sentences. This is made 
easy to him by means of interlinear translations, and re- 
ferences, by means of signs and abbreviations, to the declen- 
sions and conjugations he is learning. The attention of the 
pupil is, at first, only directed to those grammatical forms 
that he has learned, or is learning, by references to the same : 
those grammatical forms that he has not learned, his atten- 
tion is not drawn to, and he only learns the signification of 
the words and sentences by rote, as respects their gramma- 
tical forms; he not being troubled with such forms, till he 
commences learning them. So that, by the time he has 
learned his declensions and conjugations, he will have ac- 
quired some knowledge of the Latin language; and his 
studies, instead of being disgusting and tedious, will become 
attractive and agreeable; and, in less time than other pupils 
take to learn their declensions and conjugations, he will also 
have learned them, and, moreover, have obtained such prac- 
tical knowledge of the language as will make his future 
progress therein pleasant. 

1 (Y) 



VI PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 

The practical part of this Elementary Course is arranged 
in one hundred Lessons, or, rather, fifty double Lessons. 
Each double lesson consists, first, of a lesson in interlinear 
translation, arranged according to the English order of 
words; next, of a lesson in the order of the text of the 
author, without any interlinear translation. To these two 
lessons there next succeeds exercises on the same : — first, of 
words to be translated from Latin into English; next, of 
words to be translated from English into Latin ; then of 
Latin sentences to be translated into English, and, lastly, of 
English seutences to be translated into Latin. All these 
words and sentences are taken from the lessons, or slightly 
altered from them. 

These fifty double lessons are dispersed through the Gram- 
mar, and illustrate and exemplify the forms of grammar that 
the pupil is learning, or has learned. In the interlinear les- 
sons, all the forms of declension and conjugation that the 
pupil is learning, or has learned, are marked by signs and 
abbreviations, denoting or pointing out the different parts of 
the declensions and conjugations; so that the pupil, in pre- 
paring his lessons, requires no aid from a dictionary; the use 
of which, in the commencement of his studies, would be 
extremely vexatious to him, and would scarcely enable him 
to prepare his lessons, either as respects the signification of 
the words, or the forms of declensions and conjugations. 

In those forms of declension and conjugation that the 
pupil has learned, he is continually to be exercised in the 
different lessons, thus impressing such forms more strongly 
in his memory, by seeing the use and meaning of such forms, 
than they would be if merely learned by heart, without un- 
derstanding their application ; in addition to this, he would 
be gradually acquiring a stock of Latin words and sentences, 
which he would not in the usual method. 

This Introductory, or Elementary Latin Grammar, contains 
all that is necessary to be learned previous to the com- 
mencement of the study of the Latin Classics; and, in 



PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. * Vll 

schools, is all that is usually taught, or required to be 
learned, in a first c .urse of grammar, all the rest being left 
to subsequent study. 

Many eminent men have much lamented the great loss of 
time, and disgust to the pupil, and vexation to the teacher, 
occasioned by the usual mode of teaching Latin at the com- 
mencement of learning the language — especially the great 
poet and distinguished Latin scholar, Milton, and the emi- 
nent metaphysician and writer on education, Locke, who 
both assert that, in the usual method of teaching Latin, 
years are lost in imperfectly acquiring that which, by a more 
perfect method, might be better learned in a year. Both 
have suggested plans for such improved method, which, in 
both, is that, as the pupil gradually learns the elementary 
part of the language, he should, at the same time, be taught 
the application of such elements, in any easy and practical 
manner by translations, especially those of an interlinear 
nature; and thereby not subjecting the pupil to the annoy- 
ing, and, at the beginning of his studies, nearly, for him, im- 
practicable method of preparing his lessons by the aid of a 
dictionary. 

In this Elementary Practical and Progressive Grammar, 
the suggestions of these two eminent men, as well as of 
others, have been fully carried out, and a method of teach- 
ing the elements of the Latin language, for beginners, has 
been formed, that, perhaps, may be considered as even ex- 
tending and improving their suggestions. For, not only are 
the words and sentences explained by literal interlinear trans- 
lations, but constant references are made to the forms of de- 
clensions and conjugations, by signs and abbreviations, 
which, in the commencement, are quite, if not more neces- 
sary, than the explanation of words. To this, also, is added 
the Exercises on the Lessons, often so varied from the text 
as to be perfectly understood by the student, and thus prac- 
tically leading him gradually to the formation of sentences in 



Vlll PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 

Latin from English, and to the understanding of sentences 
in Latin, when somewhat varied from the text. 

This method, applied in learning a language, has always 
resulted in the most decided advantage to the pupil, and his 
progress has always been more rapid, than if he had been 
taught on any other plan. 

This practical and progressive method might not only be 
used in schools, for boys commencing the study of the Latin 
language; but might also be used by ladies desirous to ac- 
quire some knowledge of the Latin language in an easy and 
agreeable manner; as also by those who, not having learned 
Latin in their youth, yet, either from the nature of their pro- 
fession, or from other circumstances, feel the want of not 
being acquainted with Latin. 

Even those teachers who are opposed to translations of 
every kind in learning Latin, could not reasonably object to 
this practical progressive method, especially in this ele- 
mentary course, which has only in view the teaching of the 
first, or necessary principles of the language, previous to the 
commencement of the study of the classics; for the lessons 
here given haye principally in view the exemplifying of the 
declensions and conjugations, and, by showing their practical 
use and application, to impress them more strongly on the 
mind of the pupil ; thus, also, removing the disgust of com- 
mitting to memory things that he does not understand, or 
see the use of. 

The signs and abbreviations used in the lessons, and ex- 
plained in different parts of the Grammar, where their use 
first occurs, have all been collected under one head, for the 
purpose of easy reference, and will be found in the four 
following pages. 

THOMAS CLARK. 
Philadelphia, November, 1857. 



SIGNS AND ABBREVIATIONS 

USED IN THIS GRAMMAR, IN THE INTERLINEAR TRANSLATION. 



English Part. — The hyphen (-) denotes that several English words 
are placed under one Latin one to denote its meaning : as, 

appellantur. 
are-called. 

When two or more English words, denoting one Latin word, have one 
or more words interposed between them, then the separated words, de- 
noting the one Latin word, are designated by having the hyphen placed 
perpendicularly before them, or by the figure ' : as, 

egregia virtute. 
1 by (their) l excellent courage. 

The parentheses ( ) are used when words are added in English, and 
form part of the sentence : as, 

nostra Galli. 

in-our (language) Gauls. 

When an English word or sentence is enclosed in brackets [ ], it de- 
notes that such word or sentence is used to express the meaning more 
intelligibly, and is used in place of the word or sentence immediately pre- 
ceding it, the commencement of which is denoted by a straight line | ; as, 

lingu& ipsorum. 

j *in (the) * language of- themselves [in their own language] 

When the word or sentence in brackets is not preceded by a straight 
line, such word or sentence is to be considered as an explanatory note : as, 

qudd erant cogniti. 

because * they [the Boii] * were known. 

Latin Part in General. — When a dot is placed above and after a 
word, it is thereby denoted that such word is separated from another word, 
to the end of which it is added, and which other word has also a dot after 
it : as, que' sua' for suaque. 

1 * ~ ( ix ) 



X SIGNS AND ABBREVIATIONS. 

Latin Parts of Speech. — Nouns. —First Declension. — The simple 
numbers , » 2 ' 3 > 4 » 5 or 6 » placed immediately before the words of the first 
declension, denote the cases that they are in, in the singular: as, 1 de- 
notes the nominative, 2 the genitive, 3 the dative, 4 the accusative, 5 the 
vocative, and 6 the ablative. When pi. is placed before the same num- 
bers, it denotes the same cases in the plural. 

Second Declension. — £ placed before the numbers denoting case, both 
in the singular and plural, indicates the form in us; r placed before the 
same numbers, denotes the form when the c is retained before the r in the 
genitive and other cases ; er denotes that the e is dropped in the genitive, 
&c: as, erA ager, gen. er - 2 agri. The form in um is denoted by m placed 
before the numbers, both in the singular and plural. 

Third Declension. — To denote the third declension, the terminating let- 
ters of the nominative singular and genitive singular, separated by a hy- 
phen, are placed before the numbers denoting cases : as, o-onis.l in sermo. 

Fourth Declension. — The genitive singular, (is, is placed before the 
numbers of cases for those nouns ending in us in the nominative singular; 
and, in like manner, u for those ending in u. 

Fifth Declension is denoted by placing the termination, ei, of the geni- 
tive singular, before the numbers denoting case. 

To denote exceptions in gender, (m.) is placed after the noun, in paren- 
theses, for the masculine, (/.) for the feminine, and (n.) for the neuter. 

Adjectives. — The declensions of adjectives are indicated in the same 
manner as those of nouns. The comparative degree is designated by c. 
placed between parentheses after the word: as, mitior(c). The super- 
lative is denoted by s., placed in like manner: as, mitissimus(s.). In some 
irregular comparatives or superlatives, the positive degree may be placed 
before the c. or a., in parentheses : as, melior (bonus, c), or maximus (mag- 
nus, 8.). 

Pronouns. — The substantive pronouns are denoted by placing l in 
parentheses after the first person; the second person by, in like manner, 
placing 2 after the second person ; and the third person by placing 3 after 
it. The case for all three persons is denoted by simply placing the num- 
bers denoting case before the persons: as, i ego,0) ] tu,W 4 «e.( 3 > 

Demonstrative Pronouns. — To designate the demonstrative pronoun hie, 
ic is used for the masculine, cec for the feminine, and oc for the neuter, 
placed before the numbers denoting cases. To designate is, is is used for 
the masculine, ea for the feminine, and id for the neuter, placed in like 
manner. To indicate the demonstrative ille, le is used for the masculine, 
la for the feminine, and hid for the neuter, placed before the numbers. 
Iste has, in like manner, te for the masculine, ta for the feminine, and tud 
for the neuter. The emphatic pronoun, ipse, has se for the masculine, sa 
for the feminine, and sum for the neuter. 

Relative and Interrogative Pronouns. — Qui and its compounds, either 
relative or indefinite, are denoted by ui for the masculine, u<b for tho 



SIGNS AND ABBREVIATIONS. XI 

feminine, and od for the neuter, placed before the numbers denoting cases. 
Quis and its compounds, either interrogative or indefinite, have uis for the 
masculine, ucb for the feminine, and uid for the neuter, before the numbers. 

Verbs. — Voice. — P. placed before the numbers indicating tense, or 
before the sign sb. of the subjunctive, denotes the passive voice; the active 
voice requires no sign. When the verb is deponent, d is used, in place of p. 

Moods. — The indicative mood requires no sign. The subjunctive mood 
is denoted by sb. placed before the numbers denoting tense. The impera- 
tive has im. placed in like manner, and the infinitive in. 

Tense*. — Tenses are denoted by numbers placed in parentheses before 
the verb : as, (') indicates the present tense, ( 2 ) the imperfect, ( 3 ) the fu- 
ture, ( 4 > the perfect, ( 5 > the pluperfect, and < 6 > the future perfect. 

Numbers and Persons. — Persons are denoted by placing ' for the first 
person, 2 for the second person, and 3 for the third person, in brackets HI, 
after the verb. The plural is indicated by placing pi. before these num- 
bers : as, OamamusfP 1,1 !, ice love. The singular requires no sign. 

Participles, Gerunds, and Supines. — Participles are denoted by placing 
part, in brackets, after the verb : as, OawmHs.tP"*-! The declension of the 
participle is placed next it after the sign of tense : as, ( , )- DS - ntis - , amaHstP arl 0, 
loving. Gerunds are indicated by placing [ger.] after the verb. These 
gerunds have only the signs of cases before them. The supine in urn is 
denoted by placing [nm] in brackets after the verb, and that in u by, in 
like manner, placing [n]. 

The letters or terminations indicating the three principal tenses, or 
parts, from which all the other tenses and forms are derived, are placed 
first before the verb: as, l»r-»vi-atum.(i) a)no [i] ) I love. 

The first conjugation is denoted by ar-avi-atum — ar denoting either 
the present indicative active, by dropping ar and adding o : as, amo — 1 
love; or the infinitive of the same, by adding e : as, amare — to love. 
When any irregular form of this conjugation occurs, other letters must be 
added to all or to some of these three principal tenses or forms : as in 
do — I give, ar-edi-atum ; indicating that these, and the tenses formed 
from them, are added to the commencing d of do. 

The second conjugation is denoted by er-ui-itum, or by er-evi-etum ; 
the r of the first form is dropped, and o is added to form the present 
tense, indicative, and e is added to the end of ir for the present infinitive. 
Besides these, there are irregularities in these principal forms, which will 
require to be indicated by other or additional letters. 

The third conjugation is very irregular, especially in the perfect and 
supine. The conjugation itself is always denoted by er for the present 
and infinitive present — the er being dropped and o added for the indicative 
present, first person, and an e added to er for the infinitive; but er would 
often require more letters before it: as in rego — to rule, ger-xi-ctum ; 
making rego, regSre, rexi, rectum. When the perfect begins with a differ- 
ent letter from the present, it may be necessary to put the entire verb in 



Xll SIGNS AND ABBREVIATIONS. 

italics to express this: as in ago — to act, ger-egi-ctum ; making ago t 
agere, egi, actum. 

The fourth conjugation is denoted by ir-ivi-itum ; the r of the first 
form is dropped and o added to form the first person present, indicative, 
and e added to the end of ir to form the infinitive. The irregular verbs 
of this conjugation are denoted as above. 

When, in any of the four conjugations, a letter or letters, that belong 
to the first principal part, are dropped in the second or third principal 
parts, or in both, such dropped letter or letters are placed in parentheses 
( ) before the first principal part: as in jubeo — I order, (b)er-88i-ssum ; 
making jubeo, jubere, jussi, jussum. 

A perpendicular line is placed before one of these principal tenses or 
forms, to denote that the tense or form of the verb is derived from it : as, 

ar-|avi-atum.(5.^ wm 3. eram rl^ / farf l oveo [ j or I ar-avi-atum.(2) amaoat l^) ) he loved 
or was loving. 

When the present differs altogether from the infinitive, both are denoted 
entire in italics, between parentheses: as in sum — I am, (sum-es8e).e-ui ; 
or in eo — I go, (eo-ire). ir-ivi-itum. When any principal part differs en- 
tirely from its regular termination, it will be necessary to substitute the 
entire verb, in italics, therefor: as in do — I give, ar-dedi-datum ; making 
do, dare, dedi, datum. 

In all cases where a number, letter, or abbreviation, is placed after a 
word, in parentheses ( ), or in brackets [ ], such parentheses or brackets 
are followed by two dots: as, virtus.(f.) m * These dots denote that the 
signs before them belong to the preceding word, and not to the following. 

When the future periphrastic conjugation is to be particularly desig- 
nated,/, is placed in the parentheses before the numbers denoting tense: 
as, < f>1 ) amaturus sumS 1 ^ When the periphrastic conjugation of necessity 
is to be denoted, n. is placed in like manner in the parentheses : as, 
(n* 1 ) amandus sum.W 

Should it be required to denote the adverb in the comparative, or in 
the superlative degree, it may be done by placing ad. before c. or s. in 
parentheses, after the adverb: as, facilito (ad. c), or doctissime' (ad. *.). 



CONTENTS OF THE ELEMENTARY COURSE. 



Letters • Page 13 

Nouns , 14 

Declensions 14 

First Declension 14 

Second Declension 21 

Form in us 21 

Form in um 24 

Forms in r and er 26 

Third Declension 29 

General Form of the Third Declension 30 

Form of the Third Declension, having turn in the Genitive 

Plural 33 

Form of the Third Declension having em or im in the Accusa- 
tive Singular 36 

Form of the Third Declension having ia in the Nominative 

Plural . 39 

Fourth Declension 41 

Form of the Fourth Declension in us , 41 

Form of the Fourth Declension in it 44 

Fifth Declension 47 

Adjectives 50 

Adjectives of the First and Second Declension 51* 

Form of the same in us-a-um 51 

Form of the same in er and r 54 

Adjectives of the third Declension 58 

Form of the same in Three Terminations , 59 

Form of the same in two terminations , 62 

Form of the same in one termination.... 66 

Comparison of Adjectives 69 

Numerals 74 

Pronouns 79 

Substantive Pronouns 80 

Adjective Pronouns 87 

Demonstrative Pronouns 87 

( xiii ) 



XIV CONTENTS OF THE ELEMENTARY COURSE. 

Relative Pronouns 98 

Interrogative Pronouns 99 

Possessive Pronouns 102 

Indefinite Pronouns 102 

Verbs 103 

First Conjugation, Active Voice, Indicative Mood 108 

" " Subjunctive Mood 115 

" Sum, Indicative Mood 121 

" Sum, Subjunctive Mood 127 

" Possum 130 

" Passive Voice, Indicative Mood 136 

" " Subjunctive Mood 142 

Deponent Verbs 145 

Second Conjugation, Active Voice, Indicative Mood 148 

" " Subjunctive Mood 153 

" Passive Voice, Indicative Mood 159 

" " Subjunctive Mood 164 

Third Conjugation, Active Voice, Indicative Mood 170 

" " Subjunctive Mood 176 

" Passive Voice, Indicative Mood 183 

" " Subjunctive Mood 188 

Fourth Conjugation, Active Voice, Indicative Mood 195 

" " Subjunctive Mood 201 

" Passive Voice, Indicative Mood 207 

" " Subjunctive Mood 213 

Irregular Verbs 219 

Volo — Indicative Mood 219 

Volo — Subjunctive Mood 220 

Fero — Indicative Mood 224 

Fero — Subjunctive Mood 225 

Fio 226 

Edo i 228 

Eo 229 

Defective Verbs 231 

Periphrastic Conjugations 234 

Future Periphrastic Conjugation 235 

Periphrastic Conjugation of Necessity 237 

Impersonal Verbs 239 

Particles 242 

Adverbs 242 

Prepositions 243 

Conjunctions 244 

Interjections 244 

Syntax 247 

Prosody 267 



CONTENTS OF THE SUPPLEMENTARY COURSE. 



Letters < Page 269 

Nouns — Gender 270 

First Declension 271 

Greek Nouns 272 

Second Declension 272 

Third Declension 274 

Greek Nouns 274 

Formation of the Genitive Singular -. 275 

Exceptions in Gender 278 

Fourth Declension 2S1 

Fifth Declension 281 

Declension of Compound Nouns 281 

Irregular Nouns 282 

Variable Nouns 282 

Defective Nouns , 283 

Redundant Nouns, 286 

Nouns differing in Meaning in Singular and Plural 288 

Adjectives — First and Second Declensions 289 

Third Declension...! 289 

Irregular Adjectives 290 

Defective Adjectives 290 

Redundant Adjectives 290 

Comparison of Adjectives 291 

Defective Comparison 291 

Numeral Adjectives 292 

Pronouns 293 

Demonstrative Pronouns 293 

Emphatic Pronoun ipse 294 

Relative Pronouns 294 

Interrogative Pronouns 294 

Possessive Pronouns 295 

Indefinite Pronouns 295 

Verbs — Formation of the Three Principal Parts 295 

First Conjugation 295 

Second Conjugation 296 

Third Conjugation 299 

Inceptives 305 

Fourth Conjugation 307 

Deponent Verbs 308 

Defective Verbs 311 

(XV) 



XVI CONTENTS OF THE SUPPLEMENTARY COURSE. 

Derivation and Composition of Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs. 314 

Derivation of Nouns 314 

Composition of Nouns 316 

Derivation of Adjectives 317 

Composition of Adjectives.. 318 

Derivation of Verbs 319 

Composition of Verbs 320 

Adverbs — Derivation of Adverbs 320 

Composition of Adverbs 321 

Prepositions 322 

SYNTAX. 

Concord 323 

Pronouns — Relative Pronouns 324 

Demonstrative Pronouns, <fcc * 325 

The Nominative Case 326 

Government — The Genitive Case 327 

The Dative Case 330 

The Accusative Case 332 

The Ablative Case 333 

The Subjunctive Mood 334 

The Infinitive Mood 335 

Adverbs 336 

PROSODY. 

Quantity 336 

General Rules 336 

Special Rules 338 

Derivatives 339 

Increments of Nouns 340 

Increments of Verbs 342 

Penult Syllables 343 

Antepenult Syllables 347 

Final Syllables..... 347 

Compound Words 350 

Accents 351 

Versification — Feet 352 

Metre. 353 

Verse 354 

Arsis and Thesis 354 

Caesura 355 

Different Kinds of Metre 356 

Combination of Verses 361 

Horation Metres 361 

Metrical Key to the Odes of Horace 363 

Figures of Prosody 364 



LATIN GRAMMAE. 



FIRST, OR ELEMENTARY COURSE. 



LETTERS. 

There are twenty-four letters in the Latin language, or 
\r<th k twenty-five, namely : a, £>, c, d, e> f, g, h, i, j, (&,) I, 
m, n, o, p, q } r, s } t, u, v, x, y, z. 

The exact pronunciation of these letters not being accu- 
rately known, the different nations pronounce them, nearly as 
they do the letters of their own alphabet. 

The vowels are a, e, ?*, o, u, (y). These were, in all pro- 
bability, pronounced as the Italians now pronounce them; 
that is, a like a in/ar, e like a in fate, i like e in me, o like 
o in no, u like u in hull; y is not properly a Latin vowel, but 
is used to express the Greek v in Greek words, and by the 
Romans was pronounced like their i. 

Of the diphthongs, it may be observed that se and ce are 
sounded like e. 

PARTS OF SPEECH. 

The parts of speech in Latin are eight, namely : Noun, 
Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, 
and Interjection. In Latin there is no Article, either defi- 
nite, as the, or indefinite, as a. 

2 (13) 



L4 NOUNS FIRST DECLENSION. 

NOUNS. 

Nouns have different terminations, which are called 

DECLENSIONS. 

The Latin language has five declensions ; each declension 
denotes various modes of changing the termination of nouns ; 
each has also two numbers, the singular and plural, with six 
cases in each number. The cases denote the particular ter- 
mination of words, often expressed in English by preposi- 
tions : as, 1 ? the nominative, denoting the actor or doer; 2, 
the genitive, as "of a man/' or "man's"; 3, the dative, as 
"to a man"; 4, the objective or accusative, as "man" in the 
sentence, "I found the man"; 5, the vocative, as "0 man"; 
6, the ablative, as "in, with, by, from, &c, a man." 

FIRST DECLENSION. 

Latin words of the first declension end in a in their nomi- 
native singular, and have their genitive singular in a?, 
diphthong. 

All nouns, in all the words of the first, as well as in all 
those of the other declensions, are to be looked for in the 
dictionary in their nominative singular. The genitive sin- 
gular determines the first declension, as does the genitive 
singular, in all the other declensions, indicate the declension ; 
such genitive singular being always placed after the noun, in 
the dictionaries, to denote the particular declension. 

Form of First Declension, 



Singular. lermiuatiotis. 

1. Norn. Stella; a star, a, 

2. Gen. Stellae; of a star, or star's, ee. 

3. Bat. Stellae; to, or for a star, ae. 

4. Ace. Stetlam; star, 1 am. 

5. Voc. Stella; star, a. 

6. Abl. Stella; in, with, from, 

or bj' a star, a. 



Plural. Terminations. 

pi. 1. N. Stellae ; stars, se. 

pi. 2. G. Stellarum : of stars, arum. 
pi. 3. D. Stellis; to, or for stars, is. 
pi. 4. A. Stellas ; stars, as, 

pi. 5. Y. Stellas ; stars, se. 

pi. 6. A. Stellis ; in, with, from, 

or by stars, is. 



1 Accusative; as video, " I see stellam, a star." 



NOUNS — FIRST DECLENSION. 15 

Observe, that the nominative, vocative, and ablative sin- 
gular end in a. The ablative has a circumflex over it, as a; 
but this circumflex is often omitted. The genitive and da- 
tive singular, and the nominative and vocative plural, end in 
as, diphthong. The dative and ablative plural end in ts; 
some few words have abus, in place of is, in the dative and 
ablative plural. The accusative singular ends in am; and 
the accusative plural in as. The genitive plural ends in 
arum. 

Lesson 1. 

The Latin words are here arranged in the same order as 
the English words are, and have a literal English translation 
under them. The English word, placed under a Latin word, 
gives the signification of the Latin word placed over it. 

Observe, that in the Latin language great freedom is 
allowed in placing words in a sentence. 

The numbers, placed before the Latin words in the lessons, 
denote the cases of this first declension, in the singular. 
When pi. is placed before the same numbers, the plural of 
the same cases is denoted : as, 1, stella, nominative singular, 
pi. 1, steUae, nominative plural ; 2, Stellas, genitive singular, 
pi. 2, stella rum, genitive plural, &c, as designated in the 
declension. 

The three genders of the Latin language, when it is in- 
tended to direct the attention of the learner to them, will be 
denoted by m. for the masculine, f. for the feminine, and n. 
for the neuter, placed before the letters denoting declension : 
as,/. 1, stella, f. pi. 1, stellar. As these genders are mostly 
determined, by the ending of the nominative singular of the 
noun, they do not always indicate the proper or natural mas- 
culine, feminine, or neuter, as in English ; but many words 
that in English would be neuter, would be masculine or 
feminine in Latin. 

The nominative singular, a, of this first declension denotes 
the feminine gender, and will require no sign or letter desig- 



16 NOUNS FIRST DECLENSION. 

nating gender to point its gender out; but as there are some 
words in this declension with other genders, such exceptions 
may be denoted by the letters of genders, when required, in 
parenthesis, as (wi.) masculine, (/.) feminine, (n.~) neuter, 
placed after the word to which they belong : as, poeta,(m.)* # 
a poet. 

When, in any case whatever, a letter, number, &c, as a 
sign, is placed in parentheses ( ), or brackets [ ], after a 
word, two dots** follow such parentheses, or brackets, to -in- 
dicate that the sign belongs to the preceding word, and not 
to the following one. 

It is to be borne in mind, that the adjective agrees with 
its noun, in number, gender, and case; that is, the adjective 
is always in the same number, gender, and case, as the noun 
to which it relates. 

When several English words are united together by a 
hyphen (-), and placed under a Latin word, such united words 
express the meaning of the one Latin word : as, 

appellantur. 
axe-called. 

When two or more English words, denoting one Latin 
word, have one or more words interposed between them, then 
the separated words, denoting the one Latin word, are de- 
signated by having the hyphen placed perpendicularly before 
them, or by the figure 1 : as, 

egregi& virtute. 

1 by (their) Excellent -virtue [courage]. 

When, in Latin, a word is united to another word by being 
placed either before or after it, and is separated in order to 
correspond with the English, such separated word is denoted 
by a dot placed either before or after it, and either before or 
after the word from which it is separated ; the dot being 
placed after each separated word, when the first, or separated 
word, is to be added to the end of the following word : as, 



NOUNS FIRST DECLENSION. 17 

que* sua* for suaque. 

and their their-and. 

When an English word, or part of a sentence, is enclosed 
in parentheses ( ), it denotes that such word, or part of sen- 
tence, is added, in order to express the sense of the Latin 
more distinctly and intelligibly in English, and that it may 
be considered as a part of the English sentence : as, 

6 nostr^ Galli. 

in-our (language) Gauls. 

When an English word, or sentence, is enclosed in brack- 
ets [ ], it denotes that the word or sentence, thus inclosed, 
is used to express the meaning of the word or sentence im- 
mediately preceding, in better and more intelligible English, 
and may be used in place of such preceding word or sentence, 
so that the word or sentence does not constitute a part of the 
English sentence, but is to be considered as a substitute for 
a part or whole of the immediate preceding English sentence; 
the commencement of the English word or sentence, for 
which the word or sentence included in brackets is substi- 
tuted, is indicated by a straight line : as, 

lingu& ipsorum. 

| in-(the)-language of-themselves [in their own language]. 

Here, "in their own language" is used for "in the language 
of themselves." 

The word or sentence included in brackets may also be 
used as a species of explanatory note, without either consti- 
tuting a part of the English sentence, or being a substitute 
for the part immediately preceding ; in this case there is no 
straight line preceding the brackets : as, 

quod erant cogniti. 

"because * they [the BoiiJ * were known. 

Here "Boii" is used to explain "they." 
2* 



18 NOUNS — FIRST DECLENSION 

Omnis ! Gallia est divisa in tres partes : unam quarum 

All Gaul is divided into three parts : one of-which 

rU Belga3 incolunt; aliam Aquitani ; 

(the) Belgas inhabit; another (of which) (the) Aquitani (inhabit); (and) 

4 tertian) , qui 6 li n gu ft 

(the) third (of which, th^se inhabit), who | ! in (the) 'language 

ipsorura appellantur pU Celtse, 

of-themselves [in their own language] are-called Celts, (but) 

nostra Galli. Omnes hi differunt inter se 

in-our (language) Gauls. AH these differ among themselves 

6 lingua, institutis, legibus. Flumen 1 Garumna dividit 
in-language, in-customi,, 'and) in-laws. (The) river Garonne divides 

Gallos ab Aquitanis, l Matrona et 

(the) Gauls from (the) Aquitani, (and the rivers) Marne and 

l Sequana a pL6 Belgis. 

Seine (divide them) from (the) Belgae. 

The learner should make himself well acquainted with the 
signification of each Latin word in this first lesson, as also 
with all the cases of the first declension that occur therein : 
at the same time he should also begin to commit the form of 
the first declension to memory. 

The learner should also remember, that the English word, 
placed immediately under a Latin word, denotes the meaning 
of such Latin word in English; and that, when there are 
two or more words placed under one Latin word, and united 
by a hyphen (-), such words, so united, express the meaning 
of the one Latin word over them. Also, when these two or 
more English words, denoting one Latin word, are separated 
from one another by an interposed English word, or words, 
that the words thus separated have the figure ' placed before 
them, as in the above lesson : 

Lingua. 
Hn (the) * language. 

Here "in'' and "language," which express the Latin word 
"lingua^" are separated by the definite article "the," which 
is not expressed in Latin ; as the Latin has no definite article. 



NOUNS — FIRST DECLENSION. 19 

The scholar will also remark, that the words included in 
parentheses ( ), in this lesson, have no corresponding word 
in Latin over them ; and that these words, between paren- 
theses, are merely added to make a more complete and intel- 
ligible English sentence, constituting, at the same time, a 
part of the English sentence, which, without them, would 
be defective. He will also observe, that in this lesson, the 
words included in brackets [ ], and following a word, or sen- 
tence, that has a straight line before it, does not form a con- 
tinuous part of the English, but expresses, in intelligible 
English, a sentence immediately preceding it, that is either 
uncouth, or unintelligible by the mere translation of the 
Latin words; as, 

qui linguae ipsorum. 

who | 1 in (the) * language of- themselves [in their own language]. 

Here it will be perceived, that " in their own language" is 
to be substituted for " in the language of them"; the verti- 
cal line | marking the commencement of the sentence in 
English, for which the words enclosed in brackets are to be 
substituted. 

Lesson 2. 

This lesson is the same as Lesson 1, only that the words 
are placed in the same order that the Latin author has them. 
The interlinear translation is here omitted. 

G-allia est omnis divisa in partes tres, quarum unam inco- 
lunt Belgae, aliam Aquitani, tertiam, qui ipsorum lingua 
Celtae, nostra Galli, appellantur. Hi omnes lingua, insti- 
tutis, legibus inter se differunt. Gallos ab Aquitanis Ga- 
rumna flumen, a Belgis Matrona et Sequana dividit. 

Exercises on Lessons 1 and 2. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Partes. Legibus. Appellantur. Tres. Omnis. Est. 
Divisa. Aliam. Differunt. Incolunt, Quarum. Qui. 



20 NOUNS — FIRST DECLENSION. 

Nostra. Unarm Tertiam. Ipsorum. Ab. A. Dividit. 
Se. Inter. Hi. Lingua. Fluinen. Institutis. 



English words to be translated into Latin, 

All. Three. Is. Inhabit. Divided. Are called. Third. 
Of themselves. Who. Our. Language. In a language. 
Of a language. Languages. To languages. Of languages. 
Divides. Differ. River. Among. Themselves. These. 
From. The Belgae. From the Belgae. Of the Belgae. 
Gaul. Of Gaul. From Gaul. In Gaul. To Gaul. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Tres partes. Gallia est divisa. Omnis Gallia. Lingu& 
nostra. Ipsorum lingua. Celtae appellantur. Quarum 
Aquitani incolunt aliam. Hi omnes inter se differunt. Le- 
gibus, institutis differunt. Gallos ab Aquitanis Garumna 
flumen dividit. A Belgis flumen Sequana dividit. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

All Gaul is divided. One of which the Belgae inhabit. 
Into three parts. The other the Aquitani inhabit. Who, 
in our language, are called Gauls. In their own language 
are called Celts. These differ among themselves. They 
differ in language. The river Seine divides the Gauls from 
the Belgae. Among themselves. 

In these two first lessons it is only the cases of the first 
declension that the pupil is required to point out. He might 
also be exercised in declining the several nouns, in the first 
declension, that occur in these two lessons : as, lingua, in 
singular and plural; Gallia, in singular; and Gallise and 
Belgae, in plural. 

These exercises may be written, and also translated orally 
from the book. 

Note. — Some few peculiarities and exceptions, in this first 



NOUNS SECOND DECLENSION. 21 

declension, as also those Greek nouns having a peculiar form, 
will be reserved for the second or full course. 

SECOND DECLENSION. 

The Latin words of the second declension end in us, um, 
or r, in their nominative singular. Those nouns that end in 
us or r in the nominative singular, are mostly in the mascu- 
line gender, though not all; those ending in um are neuter. 
Those ending in r, in the nominative singular, have two 
forms; in the one, the termination of the cases are placed 
after the nominative without change : as, Nom. puer, (Jen. 
pueri; in the other, ending er, the e before the r is dropped 
in the other cases : as, ager, agri. 

All nouns of the second declension are known by having 
their genitive singular in i. In nouns ending in us, or «m, 
the us or um is changed into i ; in those ending in r, the % of 
the genitive is added to r ; but in the greater part of those 
ending in er, the e is dropped before r in the genitive and 
other cases. 

Form of Second Declension in "us": as, "dominus — master" 



Singular. Terminations. 

1. Nom. Dominus ; a master, . us. 

2. Gen. Domini; of a master, or 

master's, i. 

3. Dat. Domino; to a master, . o. 

4. Ace. Dominum : a master, um. 

5. Voc. Domine; master,. . e. 

6. All. Domino; in, with, by, or 

from a master, o. 



Plural. Terminations. 

pi. 1. N. Domini ; masters, . i. 

pi. 2. G. Dominorum; of mas- 
ters, orum. 

pi. 3. D. Dominis ; to masters, is. 

pi. 4. A. Dominos ; masters, . os. 

pi. 5. V. Domini ; masters, . i. 

pi. 6. ^46.Dominis ; in, with, by, 

or from masters, .... is. 



Observe, the nominative singular of this form ends in us, 
the genitive singular, nominative and vocative plural end in 
i, the dative and ablative singular end in o, the accusative 
singular ends in um, the vocative singular ends in e, the da- 
tive and ablative plural end in is, the genitive plural ends in 
orum, and the accusative plural in os. 

To designate the second declension, the terminations of the 



22 NOUNS — SECOND DECLENSION. 

nominative, denoting the four different forms of this second 
declension, are placed before the numbers denoting cases : as, 
s. 1, dominus ; r. 1, puer, when the e before r, in the nomi- 
native singular, is retained, in the other cases; er. 1, ager, 
Gen. ayri, when the e is dropped before r, in all the cases, 
except the nominative singular;??!. 1 denotes the form m: 
as, m. 1, regnum. 

Lesson 3. 

s.pi.i JJelvetii jam transduxerant pu suas pU copias pei 

(The) Helvetii ' had now Med-over their forces through 

pU angustias, et fines spl2 Sequanorum, et pervenerant 

(the) denies, and borders ' of (the) * Sequani, and had-coine 

in fines s,pK2 iEduorum, que* populabantur er - pU agros 

into (the) borders *of (the) *iEdui, and did-lay-waste '(the) fields 

eorum*. s,pl,1 ^Edui quum non possent 

of- them [their fields]. (The) iEdui when they- 1 were not 'able 

defendere se, que* sua* ab his, 

to-defend themselves, and their (property) from these (Helvetii), 

mittunt s,pu legatos ad Caesarem rogatum m - 4 auxilium; 

send ambassadors to Caesar an-asking aid; 

" se omni tempore, 

(and to say, that) " they | in-all time [at all times], 

meritos esse ita de s6 Romano 8,6 populo, 

| to-have-merited [had deserved] so (well) of (the) Roman people, 

ut erpU1 agri debuerint non vastari, pene 

that (their) fields ought not to-be-ravaged, almost 

conspectu nostri exercittis, r - pU liberi eorum 

Mn (the) 'sight of-our army, (the) | children of-them [their children] 

abduci in servitutem m " pl,1 oppida 

to-be-led-away into slavery (and their) towns 

expugnari." 

to-be- taken-by-storm." 

It will be observed in this third lesson, that que (and) has 
a dot after it, which indicates that it is to be united to the 
end of the word following it, that has also a dot after it. 
This que (and) is never used alone, but is always added to 
the end of a word. 



NOUNS — SECOND DECLENSION. 23 

Lesson 4. 

Helvetii jam per angustias, et fines Sequanorum, suas 
copias transduxerant, et in .iEduorum fines pervenerant, 
eorumque agros populabantur. iEdui, quum se suaque ab 
his defendere non possent, legatos ad Caesarem inittunt roga- 
tum auxilhim : " ita se, omni tempore, de populo Romano 
meritos esse, ut pene in conspectu exercitus nostri, agri vas- 
tari, liberi eorum in servitutem abduci, oppida expugnari non 
debuerint." 

Exercises on Lessons 3 and 4. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Exercitus. Angnstias. Populus. Fines. Abduci. Suas. 
Populabantur. Copias. Jam. Mittunt. Quum. Trans- 
duxerant. Legatos. Auxilium. Conspectu. JNostri. De- 
fendere. Agri. Oppida. Liberi. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Now. Had. Led. Over. Fields. They arrived. They 
send. The borders. Laid waste. In the sight. Of our. 
Assistance. Army. Towns. Ambassadors. Of an ambas- 
sador. To an ambassador. From ambassadors. Children. 
Of children. With children. From the people. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Helvetii suas copias transduxerant. In fines pervenerant. 
Eorumque agros populabantur. Se defendere non possent. 
Ad Caesarem mittunt. Omni tempore. In conspectu exer- 
citus nostri. Liberi in servitutem abduci. Oppida expuo-- 
nari non debuerint. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

The Helvetii had led their forces through the defiles. 
They had come into the borders of the iEdui. They did lay 



2\ NOUNS — SECOND DECLENSION. 

waste their fields. The iEdui send ambassadors to Caesar. 
They could not defend themselves. Nearly in the sight of 
our army. At all times. To be led into slavery. From the 
Roman people. Ought not. Their children. 

The attention of the pupil is now to be directed to the 
second declension, as well as to the first declension. He 
might also be exercised in declining the several words of the 
first and second declensions, that occur in the third and 
fourth lessons; but especially the form us, of the second 
declension. 

Form in "urn": as, "regnum, a kingdom." 



Singular. Terminations. 

1. Norn. Regnum ; a kingdom, um. 

2. Gen. Pvegni ; of a kingdom, i. 

3. Dat. Regno ; to a kingdom, o. 

4. Ace. Regnum ; a kingdom, um. 

5. Voc. Regnum; kingdom, um. 

6. AM. Regno ; in, with, by, 

or from a kingdom, . . o. 



Plural. Terminations 

pi. 1. N. Regna; kingdoms, . a. 

pi. 2. G. Regnorum ; of king- 
doms, orum. 

pi. 3. D. Regnis; to kingdoms, is. 

pi. 4. A. Regna; kingdoms, . a. 

pi. 5. V. Regna; kingdoms, a. 

pi. 6. J.6.Regnis; in with, by, 

or from kingdoms, ... is. 



The nominative singular of this form ends in um ; the 
accusative singular and vocative singular end also in um ; the 
nominative, accusative and vocative plural end in a; all the 
other cases are like those of the form us. 

Lesson 5. 

Jam ubi arbitrati sunt se paratos esse 

Now when they-deemed themselves to-have-been-prepared 

ad earn rem, incendunt omnia 

| to that thing [for leaving their country], they-set-on-fire all 

sua mp, - 4 oppida ad duodecim s - 6 numero, 8pl,4 vicos ad 

their towns to twelve in-number, (all their) villages to 

••p'- 4 quadringentos, mp '* 4 reliqua m - pM privata 

four-hundred, (in number, and all the) remaining private 

"M^gedificia; comburunt omne m - 4 frumentum, praeter 

buildings; they-burn all (their) corn, - except 



NOUNS — SECOND DECLENSION. 25 

quod erant portaturi cum- se-; 

what they-were-about-to-carry with themselves; (so) 

ut spe reditionis domum sublata, essent 

that (the) hope of-a-return home being-taken-away, they-might-be 

paratiores ad omnia m - pK4 pericula subeunda : 

more-ready for all dangers necessary-to-be-undergone : 

jubent quemque efferre domo m,p1,4 molita m - pU cibaria 

they-order each-one to-bring from-home ground provisions 

trium mensium sibi. 

| of-three months for-himself [enough for three months for himself]. 

In this fifth lesson the dot placed after c t wm* and se*, de- 
notes that cum is to be placed after se, so as to form one 
word, secum. 

Lesson 6. 

Ubi jam se ad earn rem paratos esse arbitrati sunt, oppida 
sua omnia, numero ad duodecim, vicos ad quadringentos, 
reliqua privata aedificia incendunt : frumentum omne, prseter 
quod secum portaturi erant, comburunt; ut, domum redi- 
tionis, spe sublata, paratiores ad omnia pericula subeunda 
essent; trium mensium molita cibaria sibi quemque domo 
effere jubent. 

Exercises on Lessons 5 and 6. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Oppida. Vicos. Duodecim. iEdificia. Jubent. Rem. 
Incendunt. Frumentum. Praeter. Spe. Ad. Domum. 
Molita. Quadringentos. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Now. To bring from. Their. Private. Towns. In 
the town. Themselves. In number. Remaining. Of a 
return. They order. Dangers. In danger. Of danger. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Vicos incendunt. Oppida sua omnia. Numero ad duo- 
decim. Ad earn rem paratos esse. Paratiores ad omnia 
3 



26 



NOUNS — SECOND DECLENSION. 



essent. Privata aedificia. Frumentuni omne comburunt. 
Quod secum portaturi erant. Domo effere jubent. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

They set all their towns on fire. To the number of four 
hundred. They set fire to private buildings. Except what 
they were about to carry with them. They burn all the corn. 
Hope being taken away. Dangers necessary to be encoun- 
tered. They might be more ready. To bring from home. 

Form of Second Declension in "r": as, " puer — a boy. n 

Plural. Terminations. 

pi. 1. N. Pueri ; boys, ... i. 
pi. 2. G. Puerorum; of boys, orum. 
])l. 3. B. Pueris ; to boys, . . is. 
pi. 4. A. Pueros ; boys, . . os. 
pi. 5. V. Pueri j boys, ... i. 
pi. 6. Ab. Pueris ; in, with, from, 

or by boys, ..... is. 



Terminations. 



Singular. 

1. iVom.Puer; a boy, . . . . 

2. Gen. Pueri : of a boy, . . . 

3. Bat. Puero ; to a boy, . . 

4. Ace. Puerum ; a boy, . . u 

5. Voc. Puer; boy, .... 

6. Abl. Puero; in, with, from, 

or by a boy, 



r. 



Form of Second Declension in "er": as, u ager — a field.' 



Singular. Terminations. 

1. JVom.Ager; afield, . . . ger. 

2. Gen. Agri; of a field, 

3. Bat. Agro ; to a field, 

4. Ace. Agrum ; field, . 

5. Voc. Ager ; field, . 

6. Abl. Agro ; in, with, from, 

or by a field, .... 



gn. 

gro. 

grum. 



gro. 





Plural. Terminations. 


pi. 


1. N. Agri; fields, . . . gri. 


pi. 


2. G. Agrorum ; of fields, grorum. 


pi. 


3. B. Agris ; to fields, . . gris. 


pi. 


4. A. Agros ; fields, . . gros. 


pi. 


5. V. Agri ; fields, . . gri. 


pi. 


6. Ah. Agris ; in, with, from, 




or by fields, gris. 



In the form r, of puer — a boy, all the cases are the same 
as in the form us, of dominus — a master, except the nomi- 
native and vocative singular, both of which end, in this de- 
clension, in r. The terminations of all the other cases, except 
the vocative singular, which is here like the nominative sin- 
gular, are added to the nominative singular. 

The form er, of ager — afield, is exactly like the form r, 
of puer — a boy, with the exception, that in all the cases, ex- 
cept the nominative and vocative singular, the e is dropped 
before r, as agri in place of ageri. 



NOUNS — SECOND DECLENSION. 27 



Lesson 7. 
Fecit id maxime ea ratione, quod noluit 

He-did that chiefly with-that reason, because he-wished-not 

euui 8 - 4 locurn, unde 8,pU Helvetii discesserant 
(that) that place, whence (the) Helvetii had-departed 

vacare, ne propter bonitatem 

to-be-void (of inhabitants), lest on-account-of (the) goodness 

er - pL2 agrorum 8 - pM Grermani, qui incolunt trans 

1 of (the) * fields (the) Germans, who dwell beyond (the river) 

8 - 4 Rhenuni transirent a suis finibus in fines 

Rhine might-pass-over from their borders into (the) territories 

8 - pK2 Helvetiorurn, et essent ' pU finitinii 3 provincia3 

1 of (the) 'Helvetii, and would-be neighbors 'to (our) * province 

'Galliae, que- Allobrogibus*. Concessit '- pl - 3 iEduis 

of- Gaul, and 'to (the) 'Allobroges. He-granted * to (the) 'JEdui 

petentibus, ut collocarent 8 - pl,4 Boios in suis 

asking (for it), that they-might-place (the) Boii in their 

finibus, quod cogniti erant 

(own) territories, because l they [the Boii] * had-been-known 

6 egregia virtute : quibus illi dederunt erpU agros, 

1 by (their) Excellent courage: to- whom they gave lands, 

que- quos- postea receperunt, in parem conditionem 
land whom ' they afterwards x received, in equal condition 

juris que- libertatis-, atque ipsi erant. 

of-right and of-liberty, and (as) they-themselves were [and after- 
wards they conferred on these Boii, the same rights and privileges that 
they themselves enjoyed]. 

In this lesson, [the Boii] between brackets, having no 
straight line before any of the words preceding it, is to be 
considered merely as an explanatory note for "they," pre- 
ceding it, and is not to be substituted for it. 

Lesson 8. 

Id ea maxime ratione fecit, quod noluit eum locum, unde 
Helvetii discesserant vacare; ne propter bonitatem agrorum, 
Germani, qui trans Bhenum incolunt, e suis finibus in Hel- 



28 NOUNS — SECOND DECLENSION. 

vetiorum fines transirent, et finitimi Galliae provincial Allo- 
brogibusque essent. Boios, petentibus iEduis ; quod egregift 
virtute erant cogniti, ut in finibus suis collocarent, concessit; 
quibus illi agros dederunt, quosque postea in parem juris 
libertatisque conditionem, atque ipsi erant, receperunt. 

Exercises on Lessons 7 and 8. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Locum. Loci. Loco. Quod. Fecit. Unde. Agro. 
Trans. Incolunt. Provincia. Concessit. Virtute. Quos. 
Libertatis. Receperunt. Erant. Postea. Parein. Illi. 
Conditionem. Atque. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

They. Themselves. Territories. Liberty. Beyond. 
Equal. Afterwards. In the fields. Goodness. They had 
departed. In the place. By courage. Grave. They might 
place. That. He granted. In the province. Neighbors. 
Would be. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

In parem conditionem. Quos receperunt. Cogniti erant 
virtute. Id ea ratione fecit. Propter bonitatem agrorum. 
Noluit eum locum vacare. Qui incolunt. In Hel vetiorum 
fines transirent. Finitimi Allobrogibus. Quibus JEdui de- 
derunt agros. Petentibus iEduis concessit. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

And would be neighbors to the Helvetii. In equal con- 
dition of liberty. He granted to the iEdui. Whom they 
received. To whom they gave. By their excellent courage. 
That they might place the Boii. In their own territories. 
Lest the Germans might pass over the Rhine. Who dwell 
beyond the Rhine. He did not wish the place to be void 



NOUNS THIRD DECLENSION. 29 

(of inhabitants). On account of the goodness of the fields. 
He did that with that reason. 

All further details respecting the second declension will 
be left for the second, or full course. 

THIRD DECLENSION. 

Latin nouns of the third declension have a great variety 
of terminations in the nominative singular, if the terminating 
syllable of such nominative is taken into consideration. The 
terminating single letters in the nominative singular of the 
third declension are twelve, namely : five vowels, a, e, i, o, 
y, and seven consonants, c, I, », r, s, t, x. 

All nouns of the third declension are known by having 
the genitive singular in is. When the genitive singular has 
a greater number of syllables, or letters, than the nominative 
singular, such genitive singular is said to increase. 

The third declension has all the three genders, denoted by 
the different terminations of the nominative singular, but 
such terminations are subject to many exceptions. 

Nouns having, in their nominative singular, o, er, or, os, 
and es, increasing in the genitive singular, are generally 
masculine. 

Nouns having as, is, ys, aus, x, s, preceded by a consonant, 
and es, not increasing in the genitive, are generally feminine. 

Nouns terminating, in their nominative singular, in a, e, 
i, y, c, I, n, t, ar, ur, and us, are generally neuter. 

To distinguish the third declension from all the other de- 
clensions, the terminating letter or syllable of the nominative 
singular is used, followed by the genitive singular in is, with 
such letters before is that are changed from the terminating 
letters or syllables of the nominative singular : as, s-tis in 
ars, Gen. artis — art. Here tis is substituted for s to form 
the genitive singular, and s is substituted for tis to form the 
nominative singular; the nominative singular being always 
g* 



30 



NOUNS — THIRD DECLENSION. 



the form of the word, to be looked for in the dictionary. So, 
also, o—onis in sermo, Geu. sermon Is — speech; es—itis in 
miles j Gen. militis — a soldier ; ter—tris in pater. Gen. patrh 
— a father ; cs-is in rupes, Gen. rupis — rock; is— is in turris, 
Gen. turris — a, tower; and in like manner for others. These ter- 
minations are always placed before the figures denoting cases. 



Forms of Third Declension — General Form. 



Singular. Terminations. 

1. Nom. Sermo ; speech, . . o. 

2. Gen. Sermonis j of speech, . onis. 

3. Bat. Sermoni ; to speech, . oni. 

4. Ace. Sermonem ; speech, onem. 

5. Voc. Sermo ; speech, . . o. 

6. Abl. Sermone; in, with, 

from, or by speech, . . one. 



Plural. Terminations. 

pi. 1. N. Sermones ; speeches, ones. 
pi. 2. G. S e r m o n u m ; of 

speeches, onum. 

pi. 3. D. S e r m o n i b u s ; to 

speeches, onibus. 

pi. 4. A. Sermones; speeches, ones. 
pi. 5. V. Sermones,- Ospeeches,ones. 
pi. 6. Ah. Sermon ibus; in, 

with, &c, speeches, . onibus. 



The nominative and vocative singular are alike in this 
form, and have different terminations; the genitive singular 
ends in is, the dative singular ends in i, the accusative sin- 
gular in em, the ablative singular in e ; the nominative, ac- 
cusative, and vocative plural end in es, the genitive plural 
in um, the dative and ablative plural in ibus. 

The dative singular is formed by changing the is of the 
genitive singular into i, the accusative singular by chang- 
ing the same is into em, and the ablative singular by changing 
this is into e; the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural, 
are formed by changing* the is of the genitive singular into 
es, the genitive plural by changing the same is into um, and 
the dative and ablative plural by changing the same is into 
ibus. 

Lesson 9. 

r - r,3j Arar(m.)** est en - ini8il numen, quod influit in 
(The) Arar is (a) river, which flows into 

'• 4 Rhodanum i8 - is - 6 incredibili ""^lenitate per u -"- pU fines 
(the) Rhone with-incredible slowness through (the) territories 



NOUNS THIRD DECLENSION. 31 

s - pL2 iEduorum et s p1,2 Sequanorum, ita ut, non 

'of (the) 'iEdui and 'of (the) ' Sequani, so that, it 'is not 

possit judicari 8pl,6 oculis in 4 utram s_tis * 4 partem 

'possible to-judge by (the) eyes | towards which-of-the-two part(s) 

fluat; 8,pU Helvetii transibant 

it-flows [in what direction it flows] ; (the) Helvetii did-pass-over 

id, junctis is ~ is,pI 6 ratibus ae 

that (river), having-joined-together rafts and 

t e r-tri S .pi.6 li ntr ibus.(/.) * # Ubi r -™ A Cgesar factus 

boats (to cross over on them). When Caesar | was 

est ^-'certior per or -° ris - pU exploratores, 

made more-certain [was informed] by by scouts, (that) 

8 .pi.4 Helvetios jam transduxisse id en_in,s - 4 numen tres 

(the) Helvetii 'had now 'led-over that river three 

Mis - 4 partes pl-2 copiarum, vero 4 quartam "~ tis - 4 partem 

parts 'of (their) 'forces, but (that) the fourth part 

reliquam esse citra en_hlb - 4 flumen r ~ ris ' 4 Ararim ; de 

remained on-this-side (of the) river Arar; about 

6 tertia 6 vigilia, profectus e m,p1 - 6 castris cum tribus 

(the) third watch, having-set-out from 'from (the) 'camp with three 

°-° DispL6 Iegionibus ; (/.)*• pervenit ad earn 8 ~ ,is - 4 partem, 
legions, he-arrived at that part 

quae nondum transierat en_inis - 4 flumen : 

(of the Helvetii), which 'had not-yet 'passed-over (the) river: 

aggressus eos 8,pU impeditos et *~ tis - pU inopinantes concidit 

having-attacked them embarrassed and unawares he-slew 

4 magnam 8_,is4 partem eorum; m,pU reliqui mandarunt sese 
(a) great part of-them ; (the) rest | committed themselves 

3 fugae atque abdiderunt in pU proximas 

to-flight [fled] and hid (themselves) in (the) nearest 

rU silvas. 
woods. 

The learner's attention is now to be directed also to the 
third declension, as well as to the first and second. 

It is only necessary to designate the gender when it is an 
exception to any of the general rules for forming gender. 
Arar is here noted as an exception to neuter nouns in ar; 
but rivers are, by a general rule, masculine. 



32 NOUNS THIRD DECLENSION. 



Lesson 10. 



Flumen est Arar, quod per fines iEduorum et Sequanorum 
in Rhodanum influit incredibili lenitate, ita ut oculis, in 
utram partem fluat, judicari non possit : id Helvetii, ratibus 
ac lintribus junctis, transibant. Ubi per exploratores Csesar 
certior factus est, tres jam copiarum partes Helvetica id flu- 
men transduxisse, quartam vero partem citra flumen Ararim 
reliquam esse; de tertia vigilia cum legionibus tribus e cas- 
tris profectus ad earn partem pervenit, quag nondum flumen 
transierat; eos impeditos et inopinantes aggressus, magnam 
partem eorum concidit : reliqui sese fugas mandarunt ; atque 
in proximas silvas abdiderunt. 

Exercises on Lessons 9 and 10. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Flumen. Silvas. Castris. Influit. Lenitate. Oculis. 
Transibant. Tertia. Pars. Legionibus. Vigilia. Copiae 
Exploratores. Tres. Fuga. Ubi. . Legio. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

By the eyes. Through. With incredible. A boat. With 
the scouts. To the river. The forces. A part. In a 
legion. Of the legion. To the legions. Of the camps. 
He arrived. He slew. Of them. The rest. The woods. 
Hid. The nearest. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Quod in Rhodanum influit. Arar est flumen incredibili 
lenitate. Oculis judicari non possit. Id flumen Helvetii 
transibant. Quartam partem copiarum. Per exploratores 
certior factus est. De tertia vigilia e castris profectus Cum 
legionibus tribus ad earn partem pervenit. Eos inopinantes 
aggressus. In proximas silvas abdiderunt sese Magnam 
partem concidit. Reliqui sese fugae mandarunt. 



NOUNS — THIRD DECLENSION. 



33 



English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Having set out from the camp. The rest fled. They hid 
themselves in the nearest woods. In what part it flows. 
When Caesar was informed. The Helvetii had led over the 
river three parts of their forces. On this side of the river. 
A river, which flows into the Rhone. With incredible slow- 
ness. So that it was impossible to be judged. 



Forms of Third Declension — u ium" in Gen. Plural. 



Singular. Terminations. 

L JVbm.Rupesj a rock, . . . es. 

2. Gen. Rupis; of a rock, 

3. Bat. Rupi; to a rock, 

4. Ace. Rupein; rock, . . . em. 

5. Voc. Rupes; rock, . . . es. 

6. All. Rupe ; in, with, from, 

or by a rock, e. 



Plural. Terminations, 

pi. 1. N. Rupes ; rocks, ... es, 
pi. 2. G. Rupium ; of rocks, . 
pi. 3. B. Rupibus; to rocks, . 
pi. 4. A. Rupes ; rocks, . . . 
pi. 5. Y. Rupes ; rocks, . . 
pi. 6. Ah. Rupibus ; in, with, 
from, or by rocks, . 



mm. 
ibus. 



ibus. 



The terminations of this form follow the general form 
above exemplified by sermo — a speech , except the genitive 
plural, which ends in ium, in place of um. 

The nouns of the third declension that have ium, in place 
of um, in the genitive plural, are those that end in es or is 
in their nominative singular, and do not increase in the geni 
tive ) those monosyllables that end in two consonants : as 
ars, ortium — art; also nouns of two or more syllables 
ending, in their nominative singular, in ns or rs : as, cliens, 
clientium — a client ; likewise, nouns which have i, or e, or i 
only, in their ablative singular, have also ium in the genitive 
plural, besides some few other nouns. 



Lesson 11. 

6 Priina x " cis,6 luce, quum sl summus 

| 'In (the) first Might [at dawn of day], when (the) highest 

•"*"•' mons(m.) ## teneretur a 8 - 6 Tito 8,6 Labieno, ipse 

^mountain was-held by Titus Labienus, he-himself [Caesarl 



84 NOUNS THIRD DECLENSION. 

abesset non longius mille et 8 - pU6 quingentis 

was-distant not farther (than) a thousand and five-hundred 

passibus ab m,p1,6 castris is_is - pK2 hostium, neque ut postea 

paces from (the) camp * of (the) ! enemy, nor as x he afterwards 

comperit ex spK6 eaptivis, aut adventus ipsius aut 
1 found from (the) captives, either (the) arrival of-himself or 

s2 Labieni cognitus esset; s,1 Considius, 8,6 equo 

ofLabienus had-been-known • Considius, (his) horse 

s,6 admisso, accurrit ad eum; dicit, 

being-spurred-on, runs to him [Caesar] ; (and) he says, (that) 

8 " tis * 4 montem,(m.) e * quern voluerit occupari a 

(the) mountain, which he-wished to-be-occupied by 

s,6 Labieno, teneri ab ls ~ is,p1,6 hostibus ; se 

Labienus, was-held by (the) enemy; (and that) he-himself 

cognovisse id a mp,,6 Gallicis m - pl - 6 arniis, atque 
knew that from (the) Gallic arms, and 

*~ is - pl - 6 insignibus. r ' is<1 Caesar subducit suas pU copias in 

ensigns. Caasar leads his forces to 

B - 4 proximum ii_is - 4 collem ; (m.) ## instruit aciem. 

(the) nearest hill; (and) draws-up (the) line-of-battle. 

•- 1 Labienus, ut prseceptum erat ei a r ~ i8,6 Cassare, 

Labienus, as had-been-directed him by Caasar, (that) 

ne committeret m * 4 prceliuin, nisi pU copiae 
he-should not 1 engage (in) battle, | unless (the) forces 

ipsius visae essent prope m,pl - 4 castra 

of-himself had been seen [unless his forces were seen] near (the) camp 

* sis - pL2 hostium, ut impetus fieret in is " ispL4 hostes 

1 of (the) 'enemy, that (the) attack might-be-made against (the) enemy 

undique uno us_ons - b tempore, 

on-every-side, | one time [at the same time], 

s.ii 8 .6 mon te (m .) ° * s - 6 occupato, expectabafc 

(the) mountain being-occupied (by Labienus), he-waited-for 

• rpU4 nostros que* abstinebat m - 6 proelio\ 

our (men) and he-abstained from-battle. 

Lesson 12. 

Prima luce, quum summus mons a Tito Labieno teneretur, 
ipse ab hostium castris non longius mille et quingentis passibus 
abesset; neque, ut postea ex captivis comperit, aut ipsius ad- 



NOUNS — THIRD DECLENSION. 35 

ventus, ant Labieni, cognitus esset; Considius, equo admisso, 
ad eum accurrit; dicit, montem, queni a Labieno occupari 
voluerit, ab hostibus teneri; id se a Gallicis armis atque insig- 
nibus cognovisse. Caesar suas copias in proximuni collem 
subducit, aciem instruit. Labienus, ut erat ei praeceptum a, 
Cassare, ne proelium coinmitteret, nisi ipsius copiae prope hos- 
tiuui castra visae essent, ut undique uno tempore in hostes 
impetus fieret; monte occupato, nostros exspectabat ; proelio- 
que abstinebat. 

Exercises on Lessons 11 and 12. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Lux. Mons. Mille. Luce. Hostium. Captivus. Ad- 
ventus. Equus. Dicit. Occupari. Hostis. Insigne. Collis. 
Prcelio. Tempus. Monte. Abstinebat. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

The forces. Of the enemy. Of the enemies. The 
mountain. He awaited. A hill. Ensign. By the enemies. 
He runs. Horses. Of horses. Arrival. A captive. Five 
hundred. Was distant. The highest. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English 

Ipsius adventus cognitus esset. Ut ex captivis comperit. 
Ab hostium castris. Ad eum accurrit. Dicit, montem ab 
hostibus teneri. Se id insignibus cognovisse. In proximum 
collem aciem instruit. Ut erat Labieno praeceptum. Undique 
impetus in hostes fieret. Labienus nostros exspectabat. 
Prcelio abstinebat. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

At dawn of day. Either his arrival, or that of Labienus, 
was known. He was distant not farther than a thousand 
paces from the camp. He said that the mountain was held 
by the enemy. He led his forces to the nearest hill. Labi- 



36 



NOUNS THIRD DECLENSION. 



enus, as it was commanded him, awaited our men. That, at 
the same time, an attack might be made on the enemy. 
Labienus abstained from battle. 



Forms of Third Declenshn — "em" or "im" in Accusative 
Singular. 



Singular. Terminations. 

1. JVW.Turris : a tower, . . . is. 

2. Gen. Turris; of a tower, . . is. 

3. Bat. Turri; to a tower, . . i. 

4. Ace. Turrein or Turrim ; 

tower, einorim. 

5. Voe. Turris ; tower, . . is. 

6. All. Turre or Turri ; in, 

with, by, &c, a tower, . e or i. 



Plural. Terminations. 

pi. 1. iV. Turres ; towers, . . es. 
pi. 2. G. Turrium ; of towers, ium. 
pi. 3. D. Turribus ; to towers, ibus. 
pi. 4. A. Turres; towers, . . es. 
pi. 5. V. Turres ; towers, . es. 
pi. 6. Ab. Turribus; in, with, 

from, &c, towers, . . . ibus. 



This form differs from the general form by having its 
accusative singular in em or im, its ablative singular in e or 
?, and its genitive plural in ium. Some of the nouns of this 
form have im only, others em or im. 

If the accusative singular has im only, the ablative has i 
only; if the accusative singular has em or im, the ablative 
has e or i. 

The genitive plural is always in ium. 



Lesson 13. 



Ubi 

When 



ea 

that 



quam 

which 



dies venit, 

day came, 

s -p K6 legatis, et s - pU legati 

(the) ambassadors, and (the) ambassadors 

negat se, ^"^more 

he-denies (that) he, a by (the) Custom and 'by (the) 'example 

8 - 2 Eomani 8 - 2 populi, posse dare er - inerh - 4 iter (??.)•• ulli 

'of (the) l Roman people, could grant (a) passage to-any (one) 

per 4 provinciam; et ostendit 

through (the Roman) province; and he-shows (that he) 



constituerat cum 

he-had-appointed with 

reverterunt ad eum, 

returned to him, 

et m - 6 exemplo 



prohibiturum, 
was-about-to-prohibit (it), 



province; 

si 
I if 



conentur 
they-attempt 



tacere 
to-make 



NOUNS THIRD DECLENSION. 37 

**<vim. s - pM Helvetii, 

force [if they attempted to force a passage]. (The) Helvetii, 

dejecti ea spe, conati, 

| cast-down froin-that hope [disappointed in that hope], endeavored, 

nonnunquam interdiu, septus noctu, si posscnt 

sometimes in-the-day-time, more-often by-night, if they-could 

perrumpere, is_is ' p1 - 6 navibus 

| break-through [force the passage of the Rhone], (some of them), ships 

junctis, que* compluribus is ~ is,pL6 ratibus* 

[boats] being-joined-together, and many rafts 

factis, alii m - pU3 vadis 

being-made, (endeavored to pass over on them), other x by (the) x fords 

8 - 2 Rhodani, qua erat Minima ^""-'altitudo (/.)*• 

1 of (the) * Rhone, where (there) was (the) least depth 

en-mi S .2 fl um i n i s . re p U lsi °-° nis - 6 munitione (/•)** us_eris ' 2 °peris 
1 of (the) ' river; repulsed | * by (the) fortification x of (the) * work 

et concursu, 

[by the strength and defences of the works] and *by (the) Encounter, 

et ""-P'-Helis es " ,,,s * p,,2 militura, destiterunt hoc conatu. 
and weapons * of (the) 'soldiers, they-desisted from-this endeavor. 



Lesson 14. 

Ubi ea dies, quam constituerat cum legatis, venit; et 
legati ad eum reverterunt; negat, "se more et exemplo 
populi Romani posse iter ulli per provinciam dare : et si vim 
facere conentur, prohibiturum ostendit." Helvetii e& spe 
dejecti, navibus junctis, ratibusque compluribus factis, alii, 
vadis Rbodani, qua minima altitudo fluminis erat, nonnun- 
quam interdiu, ssepius noctu, si perrumpere possent, conati, 
operis munitione, et militum concursu, et telis repulsi, hoc 
conatu destiterunt. 

Exercises on Lessons 13 and 14. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Legatus. Dies. Exemplo. Iter. Venit. Dare. Vim. 
Ostendit. Spe. Navibus. Vis. Navis. Vi. Ratibus. 
4 



38 



NOUNS — THIRD DECLENSION. 



Flumen. Vadis. Perrumpere. Opus. Miles. Munitio. 
Hoc. Teiis. 

English words to be translated into Latin, 

Of the soldiers. Fortification. By night. The ford. A 
ship. Force. By force. He denies. Custom. Day. 
Ambassadors. They returned. Road. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English, 

Helvetii ea spe dejecti. Ratijms compluribus factis. Ubi 
dies venit. Legati reverterunt. Se posse iter ulli dare. 
Si vim facere conentur. Vadis Rhodani. Si perrumpere 
possent. Telis repulsi. Conatu destiterunt. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

The ambassadors return to him. By the custom of the 
Roman people. That day came. If they should attempt 
force. Where the river was least deep. More often by 
night. If they could force a passage. They desist from 
this endeavor. 



Forms of Third Declension — Neuters Plural in " ia." 



Singular. Terminations. 

1. iVom. Sedile ; a seat, . . . e. 

2. Gen. Sedilis; of a seat, . . is. 

3. Bat. Sedili ; to a seat, . . . i. 

4. Ace. Sedile ; seat, . . . . e. 

5. Voc. Sedile ; seat, . . . e. 

6. Abl. Sedili j in, with, by, <fec, 

a seat, ..*.... i. 



Plural. Terminations. 

pi. 1. N. Sedilia; seats, . . . ia. 
pi. 2. G. Sedilium ; of seats, . ium. 
pi. 3. D. Sedilibus j to seats, . ibus. 
pi. 4. A. Sedilia; seats, . . ia. 
pi. 5. V. Sedilia; seats, . . ia, • 
pi. 6. Ab. Sedilibus; in, with, 

by, &c, seats, .... ibus. 



This form differs from the general form by having the 
ablative singular in i } in place of e; the nominative plural in 
ia, in place of a; and the genitive plural in ium, in place 
of um. 

It is to be observed, that all neuter nouns, of all declen- 
sions, have the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular 



NOUNS — THIRD DECLENSION. 39 

alike : that is, the accusative and vocative singular end like 
the nominative singular; and, also, that in all declensions 
the nominative, accusative, and vocative neuter plural end 
in a. 

Those neuters that end in t, in the ablative singular : that 
is, those ending in e, I, and ar, in the nominative singular, 
have ia in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural, 
in place of a 

Lesson 15. 

Postquam Caesar advertit 8,4 animum id, subducit 

After Caesar turns (bis) mind (to) that, he-leads 

pL4 suas pU copias in s,4 proximum is-is,4 collem(m.) ## que- misit 

his forces to (the) nearest hill and sent 

equitatunr, qui sustineret impetum is ~ is - pl - 2 h ostium, 
cavalry, that might-sustain (the) attack ■ of (the) l enemy. 

Interim ipse instruxit X_1C1S - 4 triplicem aciem 

1 In-(the)- 1 mean-time *he-hiuiself *drew-up (a) triple line 

quatuor pL2 veteranarum °^ Dis ' pL2 legion uru (/.)** in s,6 medio 

of-four veteran legions | in middle 

is - is - 6 colle;(m.)** ita uti collocaret 

hill [in the middle part of the hill]; so that he-might-place 

duas °-° nis - pU legiones (/)**. supra se, in m - 6 summo 

two legions above himself, | on (the) highest 

m - 6 jugo, quas 

top (of the hill), [on the summit thereof], which (legions) he- 1 had 

proxime conscripserat in or ~ oris * 6 citeriore 6 Gallia, et 
very-lately l levied in hither Gaul, and (likewise) 

^ is - pU omnia m - p! - 4 auxilia, et compleret m * 4 totum 

all (the) auxiliaries, and (so that) he-might-fill (the) whole 

n.-ntis.4 mon tem (m.y °- inis - pl - 6 hominibus. Interea 

mountain with-men. 'ln-(the)- 1 mean-time 

jussit pl4 sarcinas conferri in s,4 unum 

he-ordered (the) baggage to-be-brought-together into one 

64 locum, et eum muniri, ab iis, qui 

place, and (ordered) that (place) to-be-defended, by those, who 

constiterant in or -° ris - 6 superiore acie. 8 - pU Helvetii 

stood in (the) higher line-of-battle. (The) Helvetii 



40 NOUNS THIRD DECLENSION. 

secuti cum "" isp1 * 6 omnibus s - pK6 suis 8 - pK6 carris, 

followed with all their wagons, (and) 

contulerunt mpU impedimenta in 8,4 unum '- 4 locum, 

brought-together (their) baggage into one place. 

Lesson 16. 

Postquam id animum advertit, copias suas Caesar in proxi- 
mum collem subducit, equitatumque, qui sustineret, hostium 
impetum misit. Ipse interim, in colle medio, triplicem aciem 
instruxit legionum quatuor veteran arum, ita uti supra se in 
summo jugo duas legiones, quas in Gallia citeriore proxime 
conscripserat, et omnia auxilia collocaret, ac totum montem 
houiinibus compleret. Interea sarcinas in unum locum con- 
ferri, et eum ab iis, qui in superiore acie constiterant, muniri 
jussit. Helvetii, cum omnibus suis carris secuti, impedi- 
menta in unum locum contulerunt. 

Exercises on Lessons 15 and 16. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Animus. Collis. Misit. Equitatum. Hostium. Omnia. 
Colle. Legiones. Mons. Homo. Jussit. Locus. Om- 
nibus. Impedimenta. 

English woi*ds to be translated into Latin. 

In the mean time. Wagons. They brought. To be de- 
fended. The mountains. Highest. Four. Of the vete- 
rans. He himself. Drew up. He sent. The attack. 
The nearest. Afterwards. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Copias in proximum collem subducit. Legiones, quas in 
Gallic conscripserat. Triplicem aciem instruxit. Sarcinas in 
unum locum conferri jussit. Helvetii secuti cum suis carris. 
Omnia impedimenta in unum locum contulerunt. 



NOUNS FOURTH DECLENSION. 



41 



English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

In the mean time lie ordered the baggage to be brought 
into one place. Caesar ordered that place to be defended. 
Caesar sent the cavalry, who might sustain the attack of the 
enemy. He placed all the auxiliaries. He drew up a triple 
line of battle. Four legions of veterans. He filled the 
mountain with men. 

FOURTH DECLENSION. 

Nouns of the fourth declension have two terminations in 
the nominative singular, us and u. 

Those in us are, with but few exceptions, masculine ; those 
in u are neuter. 

This fourth declension is known by having its genitive 
singular in us, over the u of which a circumflex is generally 
placed : as, us. 

To distinguish this fourth declension, the genitive, ending 
in Us, is placed before the numbers denoting case, for the form 
in us; and for the form in u, u alone is placed before the 
numbers denoting case. 



Form of Fourth Declension in "us.' 



Singular. Terminations. 

1. Norn. Fructus; fruit, ... us. 

2. Gen. Fructus ; of fruit, . . us. 

3. Bat. Fructui ; to fruit, . . ui. 

4. Ace. Fructuin ; fruit,. . . um. 

5. Voe. Fructus ; fruit, . . us. 

6. AM. Fructu; in, with, by, 

<fcc, fruit, u. 



Plural. Terminations. 

pi. 1. N. Fructus ; fruits, . . us. 
pi. 2. G. Fructuum ; of fruits, uum. 
pi. 3. D. Fructibus ; to fruits, ibus. 
pi. 4. A. Fructus; fruits, . . us. 
pi. 5. V. Fructus j fruits, . us. 
pi. 6. Ab. Fructibus; in, with, 

by, &c, fruits, .... ibus. 



In this fourth declension the nominative, genitive, and 
vocative singular, and the nominative, accusative, and voca- 
tive plural are alike, all ending in us ; the genitive singular 
being generally distinguished by having a circumflex over it : 
as, lis. The dative singular ends in ui, the accusative sin- 
4* 



42 



NOUNS FOURTH DECLENSION. 



gular in urn, the ablative singular in u ; the genitive plural 
ends in uum } and the dative and ablative plural in thus. 

The dative singular sometimes has u, in place of ui ; and 
some words have uhus in the dative and ablative plural, in 
place of ibus. 

Domus—a house, feminine, is partly declined according to 
the fourth, and partly according to the second declension, 
and has this form : 



Singular. 

1. Nom.Domus. 

2. Gen. Domfts or Domi. 

3. Dat. Dornui or Dorno. 

4. Ace. Domum. 

5. Voc. Domus. 

6. Abl. Domo. 



Plural. 
pi. 1. N. Doraus. 
pi. 2. G. Domuum or Domorum. 
pi. 3. I). Dornibus. 
pi. 4. A. Domus or Domos. 
pi. 5. V. Domus. 
pi. 6.Ab. Domibus. 



The genitive singular in ^ denotes "at home"; the geni- 
tive singular in Us denotes " of a house." 

Lesson 17. 

Postero die movent mpU castra ex eo 8 - 6 loco- 

1 On (the) 'next day they-move (their) camp from that place; 

r ' ri8 - 1 Caesar facit idem, que- prsemittit is ~ i3 - 4 omnem 

Caesar does (the) same, and sends-forward a ll 

fis - 4 equitatunr ad s - 4 numerum quatuor millium, quern habebat 

(the) cavalry to (the) number of-four thousand, which he-had 

coactum ex ,Vis - 6 omni 6 provincia, et 8 - pK6 iEduis 

collected from all (the) province, and 'from (the) Vffldui 

atque 8,p, - 6 sociis eorum; q u i 

| and 'from (the) * allies of-them [and from their allies]; who 

videant in quas s " tis - pU partes is - is ' p1 - 4 hostes faciant 

might-observe | into what parts (the) enemy might-make 

er - ineris ' 4 iter(7l.) #0 Q ui 

(their) journey [in what direction the enemy might march]. Who' 

insecuti cupidius mA novissimum D * inis - 4 a«-men 

having-followed too-eagerly | (the) hindmost troop [the rear], 

eommittunt m - 4 proelium cum 0g6 equitatu 8 - p1 - 2 Helvetiorum, 
J° in ba "le with (the) cavalry * of (the) * HelvetU, 



NOUNS — FOURTH DECLENSION. 4S 

■ c alieno 8>6 loco: et 8 - pU pauci de er - pK6 nostris 

1 in (a) disadvantageous place: and (a) few of our (men) 

cadunt. Quo m>6 prcelio 5pK1 Helvetii sublati, quod 

fall. By-which battle (the) Helvetii were-elevated, because 

8,p1 - 6 quingentis es " iti8 ' pL6 equitibus propulerant Hantarn 
with-five-hundred horsemen they-had-repulsed so-great 

do^inis.4 miI ltitudinem (/.) ** es - itis,pK2 equitum, coeperunt 

(a) multitude of-horsemen, they-began 

subsistere audacius; nonnunquam ex m - 6 novissimo 

to-withstand more-boldly j | (and) sometimes from (their) hindmost 

eD - iois - 6 agmine lacessere ni - 6 proelio er - pU nostros. 

troop to-challenge with-battle our (men) [and 

sometimes from their rear, they provoked our men to fight]. 

Lesson 18. 

Postero die castra ex eo loco movent. Idem Caesar facit, 
equitatumque omnem ad nuinerum quatuor millium, quern 
ex omni Provincial et iEduis, atque eorum sociis coactum 
habebat, praemittit ; qui videant, quas in partes hostes iter 
faciant : qui cupidius novissimum agmen insecuti, alieno 
loco, cum equitatu Helvetiorum proelium comrnittunt, et 
pauci de nostris cadunt. Quo proelio sublati Helvetii, quod 
quingentis equitibus tantam multitudinem equitum propul- 
erant, audacius subsistere, nonnunquam ex novissimo agmine 
prcelio nostros lacessere coeperunt. 

Exercises on Lessons 17 and 18. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Locus. Equitatui. Movent. Facit. Quatuor. Pars. 
Equitatu. Socius. Hostes. Pauci. Proelium. Quingentis. 
Multitudo. Nonnunquam. Coeperunt. Equitum. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

He does. Battle. So great. By the horsemen. With 
the cavalry. All. Which. He had. Part. Road. In 
the place. From the battle. Because. Multitude. They 



44 



NOUNS FOURTH DECLENSION. 



Latin sentences to be translated into English, 

Quod tantam multitudineni propulerant. Postero die cas- 
tra movent. Equitatum oninem praemittit. Quem ex omni 
Provincial coactum habebat. Quas in partes iter faciant. 
Cum equitatu proslium committunt. Nostros lacessere 
eoeperunt. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

They join battle with the cavalry, in a disadvantageous 
place. They sometimes provoked our men to battle, from 
their rear. A few of our men fall. Because, with five hun- 
dred horsemen, they had repelled so great a number of horse- 
men. Next day they move their camp. Caesar sends for- 
ward all the cavalry. In what direction the enemy might 
march. 

Form of Fourth Declension in "u." 



Singular. Terminations. 

1. Nom.Comu ; a horn, . . . u. 

2. Gen. Cornu or Cornus; of a 

horn, uorus. 

3. Bat. Cornu; to a horn, . . u. 

4. Ace. Cornu; a horn, . . . u. 

5. Voc. Cornu ; horn, . . . u. 

6. Abl. Cornu ; in, with, from, 

Ac, a horn, ... . u. 



Plural. Terminations. 

pi. 1. N. Cornua; horns, . . ua. 

pi. 2. G. Cornuum; of horns, uum. 

pi. 3. D. Cornibus ; to horns, ibus. 

pi. 4. A. Cornua; horns, . . ua. 

pi. 5. V. Cornua; horns, . ua. 
pi. 6. Ab. Cornibus ; in, with, 

from, Ac, horns, . . . ibus. 



In this form of the fourth declension in w, the singular is 
often said to be indeclinable : that is, all the terminations of 
the singular are the same as the nominative singular; but 
the genitive in us is also used. 

The nominative, accusative, and vocative plural are alike, 
and end in ua ; the genitive plural ends in unm, the dative 
and ablative plural end in ibus. 



NOUNS — FOURTII DECLENSION. 45 

Lesson 19. 
r_risl Caesar praefecit s,pU singulos s,pU legatos " ,pI - 3 singulis 

Caesar set-over single lieutenants to-each 

°" OD,8 - p1 - 3 legion ibus, et or_oris - 4 quaes tore m, uti quisque haberet 
legion, and (a) quaestor, that every-one might-have 

cos is - is ' pU testes 2 suse u " u,is - 2 virtutis.(/) ## Ipse a 

thein (as) witnesses of-his valor. He-hiinself from 

m6 dextro u - 6 cornu cornrnissit m,4 proelium, quod 

the right | horn [wing] joined battle, because 

animadverterat 4 eani rs_rtis ' 4 partem is-isp1 - 2 h ostium esse 

he-had-observed that part 1 of (the) * enemy to-be 

minimi 4 firmam. Ita er,pU nostri, m,6 signo m5 dato, 

least firm. So our (men), (the) signal being-given, 

fecerunt fis * 4 impetum acriter in is_ispl - 4 hostes; itaque 
made (an) attack sharply on (the) enemy; then 

h-is.pu } 10S t es procurrerunt repente que- celeriter-, ut 

(the) enemy 'ran suddenly and quickly 'forward, (so) that 

m,1 spatium non daretur eonjiciendi mpl,4 pila in 

space * was not 'given (for) throwing (the) javelins against 

is - is - pU hostes. mpK6 Pilis rejectis, pugnatum est 

(the) enemy. (The) javelins being-thrown, it-was-fought 

cominus B - p1 - 6 gladiis. At s - pl l Gerinani, x " gis - 6 phalange 

hand-to-hand with-swords. But (the) Germans, (a) phalanx 

facta, celeriter ex 6 sua d ^ inis - 6 consuetudine,(/)** 

being-made, quickly according-to their custom, 

exceperunt as,pU impetus m,pl - 2 gladiorum. Complures 

received (the) attacks x of (the) 'swords. Many (of) 

er - pU nostri es ~ itis pU milites reperti sunt, qui insilirent in 

our soldiers were-found, who would-leap-up on 

*f»-p>-4 phalanges, et revellerent mpL4 scuta Qs - pL6 man ibus, (/.)** 

(the) phalanxes, and pull-back (the) shields ' with (their) 'hands, 

et vulnerarent desuper. Quum acies is_i8pl,2 h ostium 

and wound from-above. When (the) line ■ of (the) 'enemy 

pulsa esset a m6 sinistro u6 cornu, atque con versa in 4 fugam, 
had-been-repulsed on (the) left wing, and put to flight, 

premebant vehementer 4 nostram aciem a 

they-pressed vehemently (on) our line from (their) 

m - 6 dextro u6 cornu d ^ nk,J mnltitudine (/.)•• s - pL2 suorum. 

right wing 'by (the) ' multitude of-their (men). 



46 NOUNS — FOURTH DECLENSION. 

Lesson 20. 

Caesar singulis legionibus singulos legatos et quaestorem 
praefecit, uti eos testes suae quisque virtutis haberet. Ipse 
a. dextro cornu, quod earn partem minimi firiuam hostium 
esse animadverterat, proelium commisit. Ita nostri acriter 
in hostes, signo dato, impetum fecerunt; itaque hostes 
repente, celeriterque procurrerunt, ut spatium pila in hostes 
conjiciendi non daretur. Rejectis pilis, coxnminus gladiis 
pugnatum est. At Gerrnani celeriter, ex consuetudine sua, 
phalange facta, impetus gladiorum exceperunt. Reperti sunt 
complures nostri milites, qui in phalanges insilirent, et scuta 
manibus revellerent, et desuper vulnerarent. Quum hostium 
acies a sinistro cornu pulsa, atque in fugam conversa esset, a 
dextro cornu vehementer, multitudine suorum, nostram 
aciem premebant. 

Exercises on Lessons 19 and 20. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Legatus. Praefecit. Proelium. Hostis. Cornu. Pars. 
Impetus. Milites. Gladiorum. Fecerunt. Spatium. Pila. 
Gladiis. Consuetudo. Manibus. Acies. Fuga. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Wing of the army. Flight. They pressed. Javelins. 
Space. With swords. Quickly. Custom. Many. Re- 
ceived. Who. Shields. A hand. Legion. Witnesses. 
Battle. A part. Signal. They made. They ran. Attack. 
Suddenly. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Legioni legatum praefecit. Uti testes suae virtutis habe- 
rent. Ipse h dextro cornu proelium commisit. Nostri 
milites in phalanges insilirent. Comminus gladiis pugnatum 
est. Gerrnani impetus gladiorum exceperunt. Scuta mani- 



NOUNS FIFTH DECLENSION. 47 

bus revellerent. Acies in fugarn conversa esset. A dextro 
cornu, nostram aciem preniebant. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin, 

The Germans, according to their custom. Space for 
throwing javelins against the enemy. They quickly received 
the attack. Many were found, who would leap on the pha- 
lanxes. When the line of the enemy had been repulsed. 
The soldiers pulled back the shields with their hands. They 
pressed on our line from their right wing. That every one 
might have a witness. He himself joined battle. He had 
observed that part to be least firm. Our men made an 
attack on the enemy. 

FIFTH DECLENSION. 

All nouns of the fifth declension end in es, and are femi- 
nine ; dies — a day, is masculine or feminine in the singular, 
but always masculine in the plural. 

Nouns of this declension are known by the genitive sin- 
gular ending in ei. 

To distinguish this fifth declension, ei is placed before the 
numbers denoting cases. 

Form of the Fifth Declension, 



Singular. Terminations. 

1. Nom.Res ; a thing, 

2. Gen. Rei; of a thing, 

3. Dat. Rei; to a thing, 

4. Ace. Rem; a thing, . . . em. 

5. Voc. Res ; thing, . . . es. 

6. All. Re; in, with, from, by, 

<fcc, a thing, e. 



Plural. Terminations. 

pi. 1. N. Res; things, ... es. 
pi. 2. G. Rerum ; of things, erum. 
pi. 3. D. Rebus ; to things, ebus. 
pi. 4. A. Res ; things, ... es. 
pi. 5. V. Res ; things, . . es. 
pi. 6. Ab. Rebus; in, with, from, 

by, &c, things, .... ebus. 



In this fifth declension, the nominative and vocative sin- 
gular, and the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural 
are alike, and end in es. The genitive and dative singular 
end in ei, the accusative singular ends in em, and the abla- 



48 NOUNS — FIFTH DECLENSION. 

tive singular in e; the genitive plural ends in erum, and the 
dative and ablative plural in ebiis. 

But few nouns of this declension have a plural. 

The genitive and dative singular is sometimes found in e, 
in place of ei ; and the same two cases are sometimes in i, 
in place of ei. 

Lesson 21. 

Postridie ejus ei2 diei ? quod 

| On-the-day-after of-that day [the day after that], because 

omnino ni,, biduum supererat, quum oporteret 

altogether (a) space-of-two-days remained, when it-was-necessary 

metiri m,4 frumentum Qs3 exercitu; [u for ui~\ et 

to-rneasure-out corn 'to (the) 'army; and 

quod aberat a Bibracte, longe n,,6 maximo ac 

because he-was-distant from Bibracte, by-far (the) greatest and 

m,6 copiosissimo m,6 oppido 8 ' pl - 2 iEduorum, non amplius 

richest town l of (the) 'iEdui, not more (than) 

octodecim millibus fispL2 passuum; existimavit 

eighteen thousand paces; | he-thought 

prospiciendum 3 frumentarise ei,3 rei 

it-ought-to-be-foreseen for corn thing [he thought it necessary 

et avertit er-inem.4 j ter (n.y 

to take care for provisions] and he-turns-aside (his) route 

ab 8 - pL6 Helvetiis, ac contendit ire Bibracte. Ea 

from (the) Helvetii, and hastens to-go (to) Bibracte. That 

eU res nuntiatur is - i8pK6 hostibus per 8 - pU fugitivos 

thing is-announced x to (the) 'enemy by fugitives 

s - 2 Lucii 8 ' 2 JEmilii °-° nis - 2 decurionis ** i * u equitum 

of-Lucius JEmilius (a) captain of-horsemen 

'-^Grallorum. s,pU Helvetii seu quod existimarent, 

'of (the) l Gauls. (The) Helvetii either because they-thought, (that) 

••p 1 - 4 Romanos discedere 8,pU perterritos or_oris - 6 timore, 

(the) Romans departed dismayed with-fear, (and) 

eo magis, quod pridie, or - orispK6 superioribus 

so-much (the) more, because on-tbe-day-before, (the) higher 

s - pK6 locis occupatis, non commisissent m,4 proelium, 

places being-occupied, they-' had not x committed battle, 



NOUNS FIFTH DECLENSION. 49 

sive quod confiderent posse intercludi 

or because they-confided (that) they-would-be hindered 

6 frumentaria ei,6 re; 

from-corn thing [that they would be able to intercept the provi- 

m,6 consilio m,6 commutato, atque 
sions of the Romans] ; (their) counsel being-changed, and 

er - ineris ' 6 itinere(ri.)°* m6 con verso, coeperunt insequi, ac 

the route being-altered, they-began to-follow, and 

lacessere er,pU nostros a m-6 novissimo n " lnis ' 6 agmine. 

to-provoke our (men) | from (the) last troop [from 

the rear]. 

Lesson 22. 

Postridie ejus diei, quod omnino biduum supererat, quum 
exercitu frumentum metiri oporteret, et quod a Bibracte 
oppido iEduorum longe maximo ac copiosissimo, non amplius 
millibus passuum octodecim aberat, rei frumentariae prospi- 
ciendum existimavit ; et iter ab Helvetiis avertit, ac Bibracte 
ire contendit. Ea res per fugitivos L. iEmilii, decurionis 
equitum Gallorum, hostibus nunciatur. Helvetii seu quod 
timore perterritos Romanos, discedere existimarent, eo magis, 
quod pridie, superioribus locis occupatis, proelium non com- 
misissent; sive quod re frumentaria intercludi posse confi- 
derent, commutato consilio, atque itinere con verso, nostros a- 
novissimo agmine insequi ac lacessere coeperunt. 

Exercises on Lessons 21 and 22. 

Latin words, to be translated into English. 

Timor. Locis. Discedere. Agmen. Iter. Proelium. 
Res. Equites. Nunciatur. Ire. Rebus. Oppidum. 
Passuum. Exercitus. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Of the day. The road. To follow. Because. The army. 
In the town. The greatest. Was distant. He thought. 
To go. Of the horsemen. To the enemy. Fear. The 
more. Counsel. 
5 



50 ADJECTIVES. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English, 

Nostros insequi coeperunt. Quod pridie, proelium non 
commisissent. Ea res per fugitivos nunciatur. Timore per- 
territos discedere existimarent. Frumentum metire opor- 
teret. Oppidum longe maximum ac copiosissimum. Iter ab 
Helvetiis avertit. Rei fruroentariae prospiciendum existi- 
mavit. Bibracte ire contendit. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

These things were announced by fugitives. Because they 
thought that the Romans departed dismayed. Because they 
had not committed battle. That they would be able to in- 
tercept the provisions of the Romans. They began to follow. 
On the day after that. It was necessary to measure out corn 
to the army. He was distant from Bibracte, not more than 
eighteen thousand paces. 

The learner should be well exercised in declining the 
nouns of the above five declensions, as his attention is suc- 
cessively directed to each of them, and as they occur in the 

lessons. 



ADJECTIVES. 



Adjectives may be considered under the heads of De- 
clension, and of Comparison. 

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

It may here be also observed, that adjectives are in the 
same number, gender, and case, as the noun they qualify. 

Adjectives have gender, number, and case, denoted by 
their terminations. 

Adjectives are declined in the same manner as nouns, and, 



ADJECTIVES FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 51 

as respects their declension, may be divided into two classes; 
the first, those which follow the first and second declension — 
the masculine and neuter gender being in the second declen- 
sion, and the feminine gender in the first declension : as, 
bonus, bona, bonum — the masculine always ending in us or 
r, the feminine in a, and the neuter in um. The second 
class contains all those which follow the forms of the third 
declension, and have different terminations to denote gender. 

ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 

The Form in "us," "a," "um." 

SINGULAR. 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

1. Nom. Bonus (us) bona (a) bonum (um) good. 

2. Gen. Boni (i) bonae (ee) boni (i) of good. 

3. Dat. Bono (o) bonae (ae) bono (o) to good. 

4. Ace. Bonum (um) bonam (am) bonum (um) good. 

5. Voc. Bone (e) bona (a) bonum (um) O good. 

6. Abl. Bono (o) bona (a) bono (o) in,with,<fcc, 

good. 

PLURAL. 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

pi. 1. N. Boni (i) bonae (ae) bona (a) good. 

pi. 2. G. Bonorum(orum) bonarum..(arum) bonorum..(orum) of good. 

pi. 3. D. Bonis (is) bonis (is) bonis (is) to good. 

pi. 4. A. Bonos (os) bonas (as) bona (a) good. 

pi. 5. V. Boni (i) bonae (ae) bona (a) good. 

pi. 6. Ab. Bonis (is) bonis (is) bonis (is) in,with,<fcc, 

good. 

The letters between the parentheses ( ), denote the termi- 
nations of the different cases, in masculine, feminine, and 
neuter singular, and the same in the plural. 

The cases are denoted in the same manner as in the first 
and second declension of nouns ; s, placed before the figures 
denoting cases, denotes the form in us, or the masculine, of 
the second declension. So, also, er or r, the masculine form 
in er or r, of the second declension ; a, or only the figures 



52 ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 

denoting cases, denotes the first declension, or feminine ; m 

denotes the second declension, or neuter. The nominative 

masculine singular, of all adjectives, is to be looked for in 

the dictionaries. 

Lesson 23. 

Quum venisset eo de B - 6 iinproviso, que- 

| When he-had-coine thither from unexpected, and 

celerius- °- onis - 6 opinione (/.)** is " is ' p1,2 omnium, 

inore-quickly (than) (the) opinion of-all [when he had ar- 

E - pU Rhemi, 
rived more speedily there, than all had supposed he would do], (the) Rheini, 

qui sunt 8,pll proxiini ex pL6 Belgis 3 G-alliae, miserunt ad 

who are (the) nearest of (the) Belgae to-Graul, sent to 

eum 8 - pU4 legatos s4 Iccium et s - 4 Antebrogium 

him (as) ambassadors Iccius and Antebrogius 

B,pL4 primos 2 suae as_atis - 2 civitatis, qui dicerent 

(the) first (men) of-their state, who said (that) 

"perniittere se, que- e_ispU omnia m - pM sua* 

" they-confided themselves, and all their (property) 

in eU fidem atque as " atis - 4 potestatem s ' 2 Romani s,2 populi, 
to (the) faith and power * of (the) 'Roman people, 

neque se consensisse cum s,pl - 6 reliquis pL6 Belgis, 

nor *had they Consented with (the) remaining Belgae, 

neque conjurasse omnino contra s,4 Romanum 

nor had-they-conspired at-all against (the) Roman 

8,4 populum; que* paratos- esse, et dare ""^''^'^obsides, 

people ; and (that) they-were-ready, both to-give hostages, 

et facere m,pU imperata, et recipere mpl,6 oppidis, 

and to-do (their) commands, and to-receive (them) 'in (their) ' towns, 

et juvare m,6 frumento, que- p1 - 6 ceteris* ei,p1 - 6 rebus ; 

and to-assist (them) with-corn, and with-other things; 

is-is. P i.4 omnes ^^j-eiiquQs p'^Belgas esse in m - pL6 armis; 

(that) all (the) remaining Belgae were in arms; 

que* s ' pK4 G-ermanos-, qui incolunt cis s,4 Rhenum 

and (that) (the) Germans, who dwell on-this-side (the) Rhine 

conjunxisse sese cum his; que- tantum- 

had-joined themselves with these (Belgae) ; and (that) so-great 

esse or "° ris - 4 furorem is_is - p1 - 2 omnium eorum, ut potuerint 

was (the) fury of-all of-them, that they-had-been-able 



ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 53 

deterrere, ne quidem °^ nis - pl,4 Suessiones, spL4 suos er,pL4 fratres 
to-deter, not even (the) Suessiones, their brothers 

que* s,pL4 consanguineos-, qui utantur eodem u<-uris - 6 jure, 

and relations, who use (the) same right, (and) 

iisdem x_sispl,6 legibus ; habeant m,4 unum wA imperium, que- 
(the) same laws, have one government, and 

■• 4 unum- us - 4 magistratum cum ipsis, quin 

one magistracy with themselves, but-that 

consentirent cum his." 
they-would-join with these (Belgse)." 

Lesson 24. 

E6 quum de improviso, eeleriusque omnium opinione ve- 
nisset ; Rhemi, qui proximi Galliae ex Belgis sunt, ad eum 
legates Iccium et Antebrogium primos civitatis suae mise- 
runt; qui dicerent, "se suaque omnia in fidem atque potes- 
tatem populi Roinani permittere, neque se cum reliquis Belgis 
consensisse, neque contra populum Romanum, omnino con- 
jurasse; paratosque esse et obsides dare, et imperata facere, 
et oppidis recipere, et frumento cseterisque rebus juvare : 
reliquos omnes Belgas in armis esse ; Germanosque qui cis 
Rhenum incolunt, sese cum his conjunxisse; tantumque esse 
eorum omnium furoreni, ut ne Suessiones quidem fratres 
consanguineosque suos, qui eodem jure, iisdem legibus utan- 
tur, unum imperium, unumque magistratum cum ipsis ha- 
beant, deterrere potuerint, quin cum his consentirent." 

Exercises on Lessons 23 and 24. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Incolunt. Omnes. Omnia. Imperium. Lex. Frater. 
Furor. Proximus. Primus. Fides. Civitas. Miserunt. 
Potestas. Contra. Dare. Oppidum. Reliquus. Arma. 

English words to be translated into Latin, 

Magistracy. Government. So great. Relations. In 
the opinion. Nearest to. Ambassadors. Of the state. 
They sent. Power. Hostages. To receive. 
5* 



54 ADJECTIVES FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Celerius omnium opinione venisset. G-ermani incolunt cis 
Rhenuin. Unum imperium cum ipsis habeant. Qui eodem 
jure, iisdem legibus utantur. Ad eum legatos miserunt, 
Se omnia in potestatem populi Romani permittere. Paratos 
esse imperata facere. Frumento juvare. Reliquos Belgas 
esse in armis. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin, 

That all the Belgae were in arms. They sent as ambas- 
sadors to him the first men of the state. That they were 
ready to give hostages. To receive them in their towns. 
Who dwell on this side of the Rhine. With other things. 
So great was the fury of all. Who use the same laws. 
Their brothers and relations. 

The Forms of Declension in u er" and u r" in place of 
"us" — Form in " er" 

SINGULAR. 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

1. iVom.Tener (er) tenera (era) tenerum...(erum) tender. 

2. Gen. Teneri (eri) tenerae (erae) teneri (eri) of tender. 

3. Dat. Tenero (ero) tenerae (erae) tenero (ero) to tender. 

4. Ace. Tenerum (erum) teneram...(eram) tenerum...(erum) tender. 

5. Voc. Tener (er) tenera. (era) tenerum ...(erum) tender. 

6. Abl. Tenero (ero) tenera (era.) tenero (ero) in,with,&c, 

tender. 

PLURAL. 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

pi. 1. N. Teneri (eri) tenerae (erae) tenera (era) tender 

pi. 2. G. Tenero- tenera- tenero- 

rum (erorum) rum...(erarum) rum...(erorum) of tender. 

pi. 3. D. Teneris (eris) teneris (eris) teneris (eris) to tender. 

pi. 4. A. Teneros....(eros) teneras (eras) tenera (era) tender. 

pi. 5. V. Teneri (eri) tenerae (erae) tenera (era) tender. 

pi. 6.A6.Teneris (eris) teneris (eris) teneris (eris) in,with,&c, 

tender. 



ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 55 



Form 



cc~ » 



SINGULAR. 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

1. iVb??*.Piger (er) pigra (ra) pigrum (rum) slothful. 

2. Gen. Pigri (ri) pigrae (rae) pigri (ri) of slothful. 

3. Dat. Pigro (ro) pigrae (rae) pigro (ro) to slothful. 

4. Ace. Pigrum (rum) pigram (ram) pigrum (rum) slothful. 

5. Voc. Piger (er) pigra (ra) pigrum (rum) slothful. 

6. Abl. Pigro (ro) pigra (ra) pigro (ro) in,with,&c, 

slothful. 

PLURAL. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

pi. 1. N. Pigri (ri) pigrae (rae) pigra (ra) slothful. 

pi. 2. G^Pigrorun^rorum) pigrarum(rarum) pigrorum(rorum) of slothful. 

pi. 3. D. Pigris (ris) pigris (ris) pigris (ris) to slothful. 

pi. 4. A. Pigros (ros) pigras (ras) pigra (ra) slothful. 

pi. 5. V. Pigri (ri) pigrae (rae) pigra (ra) slothful. 

pi. 6. Ab. Pigris (ris) pigris (ris) pigris (ris) in,with,<fcc, 

slothful. 

Nine adjectives of frequent occurrence, and having the 
above forms of the first and second declensions, have their 
genitive singular in ius, in place of i and se, for all the gen- 
ders; and their dative singular in i, in place of o and as, for 
all the genders. Of these, there are six in us: as, alius — 
another; nullus — no one; solus — alone; totus — whole; 
ullus — any ; unus — one. There is one in er : as, alter — 
the other; and there are two in r: as, uter — which of the 
two; neuter — neither. Also, the compounds of alter, and,uter. 

Alius — another, has aliud in place of alium, in the nomi- 
native, accusative, and vocative singular neuter; and the 
same word, in the genitive singular, has alius in place of aliius. 

The following is a specimen of the declension of these words : 

SINGULAR. 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

1. A r om.Unus (us) una (a) unum (um) one. 

2. Gen. Unius (ius) unius (ius) unius (ius) of one. 

3. Dat. Uni (i) uni (i) uni (i) to one. 

4. Ace. Unum (um) unam (am) unum (um) one. 

5. Voc. Une (e) una (a) unum (um) one. 

6. Abl. Uno (o) una (ft) uno (o) in,with,<fca, 

one. 



56 ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 

The plurals of these adjectives in us are declined like 
bonus, the plurals of er like tener, and the plurals of r like 
piger. 

Lesson 25. 

r "' 8,1 Cassar, cohortatus sp1,4 Rhemos, que # 

Caesar, having-encouraged (the) Rhemi, | and 

prosecutus liberaliter °" onis - 6 oration e, (/.)** 

having-followed-up liberally with-speech [and having spoken 

jussit i8 " is ' 4 omnem Qs,4 senaturn 
kindly and encouragingly to them], ordered all (their) senate 

convenire ad se, que- r - pU liberos 

to-assenible | to himself [in his presence], and (the) children 

eps - ipisp, - 2 principum- adduci es " idis - pL4 obsides ad se; e - is - pU omnia 
*of (the) l chiefs to-be-brought as hostages to him; all 

quae diligenter facta sunt ab his ad eK4 diem. 

which (things) *were diligently l done by them to (the) day. 

Ipse, magnopere cohortatus 8,4 Divitiacum 8,4 iEduum, 

He, 1 having greatly Encouraged Divitiacus (the) iEduan, 

docet quantopere intersit ei>2 aud a - 2 Reipublicae, que- 

shows how-greatly it-concerns (the) Republic, and 

18 - is - 2 communis- u - utis - 2 salutis,(/.) •• Qs - pU manus (/) •• 

(the) common safety, (that) (the) bands 

is-i S .pi.2 hostium distineri, ne sit 

1 of (the) Enemy should-be-dispersed, (that) it l might not *be 

eonfligendum m,6 uno us -° ris - 6 tern pore cum 6 tant& 

necessary-to-fight at-one time with so-great 

do-dinis.e mu ititudine (/.) * • •**»" hostium ; id posse 

(a) multitude of-enemies ; (that) this might 

fieri, si s,pU iEdui introduxerint pL4 suas pU copias in 
be-done, if (the) iEdui should-introduce their forces into 

is_is - pU fines ,,p,,2 Bellovacorum, et coeperint populari 

(the) territories *of (the) l Bellovaci, and should-begin to-ravage 

er - p, - 4 agros eorum. His mandatis, dimittit 

(the) lands of-them. These (things) being-commanded, he-dismissed 

eum ab se. Postquam cognovit is_ispU oinnes 

him from himself. After he-knew (that) all 

pL4 copias pU2 Belgaruni pU coactas in ,,4 unum tA locum 
(the) forces *of (the) x Belgre were collected in on© .place 



ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 57 

venire ad se, neque jam longe 

to-inarch against him, nor (that) they- 1 were now far 

abesse ab his or-oris - pl,6 exploratoribus, quos miserat, 

'distant from those scouts, that he-had-sent (out), 

et ab 8,pl,6 B,hemis; maturavit transducere ™ A exercitum 

and from (the) Rhemi; he-hastened to-lead-over (his) army 

en-inis.4 £ umen 4 Auxonam, quod est in p1,6 extremis 
(across) the the river Aisne, which is in the extreme 

is - is6 finibus spL2 Ehemorum, atque ibi posuit 

confines *of (the) ' Rhemi, and there he-placed 

m,pU castra. 
(his) camp. 

Lesson 26. 

Caesar Rhemos cohortatus, liberaliterque oratione prose- 
cutus, omnem senatum ad se convenire, principumque liberos 
obsides ad se adduci jussit : quae omnia ab his diligenter ad 
diem facta sunt. Ipse Divitiacum iEduum magnopere co- 
hortatus, docet quantopere Reipublicae communisque salutis 
intersit, manus h ostium distineri, ne cum tanta multitudine 
uno tempore confligendum sit; id fieri posse, si suas copias 
iEdui in fines Bellovacorum introduxerint, et eorum agros 
populari coeperint. His mandatis eum ab se dimittit. Post- 
quam omnes Belgarum copias, in unum locum coactas, ad se 
venire, neque jam longe abesse, ab his, quos miserat explo- 
ratoribus, et ab Rhemis cognovit; flumen Axonam, quod est 
in extremis Rhemorum finibus, exercitum transducere matu- 
ravit, atque ibi castra posuit. 

Exercises on Lessons 25 and 26. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Dies. Oratio. Liberi. Jussit. Obsides. Salus. Ma£- 
nopere. Manus. Multitudo. Hostis. Ager. Man datum. 
Exercitus. Flumen. Coactus. Cognovit. Castra. Matu- 
ravit. 



58 ADJECTIVES — THIRD DECLENSION. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Common. Time. Safety. Of the enemies. Hand. To 
be done. Fields. From. All. One. From the scouts. 
The river. Army. Camp. Speech. Children. Hostages. 
Diligently. Day. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Liberos ad se adduci jussit. Senatum convenire jussit. 
Reipublicae intersit. Omnia ad diem facta sunt. Ne cum 
tanta multitudine confligendum sit. Tanta multitudine nos- 
trum. Si iEdui eorum agros populari coeperint. His man- 
datis eum dimittit. Ibi castra posuit. Flumen est in ex- 
tremis Rhemorum finibus. Omnes copias in unum locum 
coactas. Longe abesse cognovit. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

These things being ordered, he dismissed him. He knew 
that all the forces of the Belgse. He pitched his camp there. 
He led the army across the river. He knew that they were 
not far distant. Whom he had sent. He shows how greatly 
it concerns the Republic. That it may not be necessary to 
fight at one time with so great a multitude. He ordered all 
the children to be brought as hostages to him. All which 
was done to the day. 

ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

Adjectives of the third declension may be divided into 
three forms, namely : those having three endings in the 
nominative singular, those having two endings in the nomi- 
native singular, and those having only one ending in the 
same. 



ADJECTIVES THIRD DECLENSION. 59 

Form of Third Declension of Adjectives, of three endings in 
Nomin ative Singular. 

SINGULAR. 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

1. iVowi.Acer (er) acris (ris) acre (re) sharp. 

2. Gen. Acris (ris) acris (ris) acris (ris) of sharp. 

3. Bat. Acri (ri) acri (ri) acri (ri) to sharp. 

4. Ace. Acrem (rem) acrem (rem) acre (re) sharp. 

5. Voc. Acer (er) acris (ris) acre (re) sharp. 

6. Abl. Acri (ri) acri (ri) acri /. (ri) in,with,&c, 

sharp. 

PLURAL. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

pi. 1. N. Acres (res) acres (res) acria (ria) sharp. 

pi. 2. G. Acrium...(rium) acrium (Hum) acrium (rium) of sharp. 

pi. 3. D. Acribus...(ribus) acribus (ribus) acribus (ribus) to sharp. 

pi. 4. A. Acres (res) acres (res) acria (ria) sharp. 

pi. 5. V. Acres (res) acres (res) acria (ria) sharp. 

pi. 6. Ab. Acribus... (ribus) acribus (ribus) acribus (ribus) in,with,<fcc, 

sharp. 

It is here to be observed, that the ablative singular, for 
all the genders, ends in i alone; the genitive plural, for all 
the genders, in turn ; and the nominative, accusative, and 
vocative plural neuter, in ia. 

Lesson 27. 

aA Oppidum spl - 2 Ehemorum, x - chA Bibrax en " inis - 6 nomine, 

A town J of (the) : Rhemi, Bibrax by-name, 

aberat octo millia Qspl - 2 passuum ab mpI,6 castris ipsis ; 

was-distant eight thousand paces from (the) camp itself; 

pU Belgae coeperunt oppugnare id ,6 magno Q,6 impetu 
(the) Belgae began to-assault it with-great violence 

ex er-ineris - 6 itinere; (n.)* # segre sustentatum est 

on (their) march; (the assault) 'was difficultly 'sustained 

eo ei6 die.(m.)* # io - ioni8,1 Oppugnatio (/.)•* spl - 2 Gallorum 
on-that day. (The)'attack ' of (the) ' Gauls 

atque pK2 Belgarum est eadem. Ubi, °- inis6 multitudine (/)** 
and x of (the) 'Belgae is (the) same. When, a multitude 



60 ADJECTIVES THIRD DECLENSION. 

^nis. P i.2j 10m | num circumjecta s - pU totis pUa - ium - 3 moenibus, 

of-men being-thrown-round (the) whole wall, 

u_idispll lapides(m.)** coepti sunt jaci in 8,4 murum 

stones were-begun to-be-thrown against (the) wall 

undique, que* 8 - l murus- nudatus est or ~ oris ' pl,6 defensoribus, 
on-all-sides, and (the) wall was-stripped of-defenders, 

°- inis - 6 testudine (/.)•* 6 facta, 

(a) testudo being made, (by the men placing their shields 

hi succedunt pl,3 portis, que* 

over their heads), these [the Belgae] approach the gates, and 

subruunt 8,4 murum\ Quod turn facile fiebat; nam 

undermine (the) wall. Which 'was then easily 'done; for 

1 tanta <M)ni "' 1 multitudo (/.)** conjiciebant is - idispU lapides (m.)** 

so-great (a) multitude did-throw stones 

ac m - pM tela, ut as ~ atisl potestas consistendi in s,6 muro esset 

and darts, | that (the) power of-standing on (the) wall was 

8 - 3 nulli. Quum x - ct " M - , nox 

to-none [that no one could stand on the wall]. When night 

fecisset is - is,4 finem oppugnandi, 8,l Iccius ^Rhernus 

had-made (an) end of-assaulting, Iccius (the) Rhemian 

6 sutnma ^^nobilitate et 6 gratia, inter 8 * pl,4 suos, 
of-the-highest nobility and favor, among his (people), 

qui turn praeerat m,3 oppido; 8,, unus ex iis, qui venerant 

who then commanded (the) town ; one of those, who had-come 

ad r_ri8 - 4 Caesarem s - pU legati de ^^pace, mittit 

to Caesar (as) ambassadors about peace, sends 

8 - pM nuntios ad eum, "se non posse sustinere 

messengers to him, "(that) he 'was not 'able to sustain 

diutius, nisi m - 4 subsidium mittatur sibi." 
(the assault) longer, unless a subsidy is sent to-him." 



Lesson 28. 

Ab ipsis castris oppidum Rhemorurn, nomine, Bibrax, 
aberat millia passuum octo : id ex itinere, magno impetu, 
Belgae oppugnare eoeperunt; aegre eo die sustentatum est; 
G-allorum eadem atque Belgarum oppugnatio est. Hi, ubi 
circumjecta multitudine hominum totis moenibus, undique in 
murum lapides jaci coepti sunt, murusque defensoribus nu- 



ADJECTIVES — THIRD DECLENSION. 61 

datus est; testudine facta, portis succedunt, murumque 
subruunt. Quod tum facile fiebat : nam tanta niultitudo 
lapides ac tela conjiciebant, ut in muro consistendi potestas 
e^set nulli. Quum finem oppugnandi nox fecisset, .Iccius 
Rheums, surnnia nobilitate et gratia inter suos, qui tum 
oppido prseerat, unus ex iis, qui legati de pace ad Csesarem 
venerant, nuncios ad eum mittit, " nisi subsidium sibi mit- 
tatur, se diutius sustinere non posse." 

Exercises on Lessons 27 and 28. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Nox. Nobilitas. Nuncius. Diutius. Oppidum. Mul- 
titudo. Facile. Lapis. Murus. Potestas. Fiebat. Finis. 
Nomen. Impetus. Oppugnatio. Est. Atque. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

In the camp. He sends. Was distant. Road. Day. 
A pace. They began. The attack. An end. Night. 
Who. One. Peace. Longer. Easily. Stones. The wall. 
Power. Men. A stone. A gate. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English, 

Oppidum nomine Bibrax. JEgre sustentatum est. Ex 
itinere oppugnare coeperunt. Hi in murum lapides jaci 
cospti sunt. Portis succedunt. Se diutius sustinere non 
posse. Iccius oppido praeerat. Nuncios ad eum mittit. 
Finem nox fecit. Potestas esset nulli. Quod facile fiebat. 
Unus ex iis ; qui legati ad Csesarem venerant. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

One of those who had come to Caesar. That he was not 
able to sustain the assault longer. He sends a messenger to 
him. The town Bibrax was distant eight thousand paces. 
They began to attack it with great violence. A multitude 
of men. Stones were begun to be thrown. The wall was 
6 



62 ADJECTIVES — THTRD DECLENSION. 

stripped of defenders. Which was easily done. They threw 
stones and darts. No one could stand on the wall. Night 
made an end of the assault. 

Form of the Third Declension of Adjectives, of two termina- 
tions in Nominative Singular. 

SINGULAR. 
Masculine and Feminine. Neuter. 

1. iVoTn.Mitis (is) mite (e) mild. 

2. Gen. Mitis (is) mitis (is) of mild. 

3. Bat. Miti (i) miti (i) to mild. 

4. Ace. Mitem ( em ) naite (e) mild. 

5. Voc. Mitis (is) mite (e) mild. 

6. Abl. Miti (i) miti (i) in, with, Ac, mild. 

PLURAL. 
Masculine and Feminine. Neuter. 

pi. 1. N. Mites (es) mitia (ia) mild. 

pi. 2. G. Mitium (ium) mitium (ium) of mild. 

pi. 3. B. Mitibus (ibus) mitibus (ibus) to mild. 

pi. 4. A. Mites (es) mitia (ia) mild. 

pi. 5. V. Mites (es) mitia (ia) mild. 

pi. 6. Ab. Mitibus (ibus) mitibus (ibus) in, with, <fcc., mild. 

Adjectives of this form have their masculine and feminine 
alike in the nominative and vocative singular, and end in is; 
the nominative singular of the neuter gender ends in e. In 
all the other cases, this form exactly resembles the form of 
three terminations in the nominative singular. 

Comparatives have also two terminations in the nominative 
singular, but differ from the above form. Their masculine 
and feminine end in or, in the nominative singular; and 
their neuter, in the same case, in us. They are thus declined : 

SINGULAR. 
Masculine and Feminine. Neuter. 

1. iVom.Mitior (or) mitius (us) milder. 

2. Gen. Mitioris (oris) mitioris (oris) of milder. 

3. Bat. Mitiori (ori) mitiori (ori) to milder. 

4. Ace. Mitiorem (orem) mitius (us) milder. 

5. Voc. Mitior (or) mitius (us) milder. 

6. Abl. Mitiore or ri.. .(re or ri) mitiore or ri...(reor ri) in,with,<fec.,milder. 



ADJECTIVES — THIRD DECLENSION. 63 

PLURAL. 

Masculine and Feminine. Neuter. 

pi. 1. N. Mitiores (ores) mitiora (ora) milder. 

pi. 2. G. Mitiorum (orum) mitiorum (orum) of milder. 

pi. 3. D. Mitioribus ....(oribus) mitioribus (oribus) to milder. 

pi. 4. A. Mitiores (ores) mitiora (ora) milder. 

pi. 5. V. Mitiores (ores) mitiora (ora) milder. 

pi. 6. Ab. Mitioribus ....(oribus) mitioribus (oribus) in, with, <fcc, milder. 

This comparative form differs from trie form of three ter- 
minations, and from the general form above of two termina- 
tions, in having e or i in the ablative singular, in place of i 
only; and of having wm, in place of ?'wm, in the genitive 
plural ; and in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural 
neuter, a, in place of ia. 

Lesson 29. 
r ~ rh - 1 Caesar primo statuit supersedere D0 - 6 proelio, et 

Caesar at-first resolved to-forego battle, both 

propter °- inis - 4 multitudinem (/.)*• is - is - p, - 2 hostium, et 

on-account-of (the) multitude l of (the) 'enemy, and 

propter 4 eximiam o-onis.4 pi n j onem (/.)•• 

on-account-of (their) eminent reputation 

us-utis.2 yirtutis ;(/.)•* tamen quotidie periclitabatur 

for-valor; however he- 1 did daily l try 

u-i 5 .pi.6 e q U estribus m - pL6 proeliis, quid is_is * 1 hostis posset 

by cavalry battles, what (the) enemy could-do 

^^virtute, (/.)•* et quid er -P u nostri 

*by (their) l bravery, and what our (men) 

auderent. Ubi intellexit er,pU nostros esse 

might-dare (to do). When he-understood (that) our (men) were 

non or -° ris - pU inferiores, 8<6 loco pro "-^castris 

not inferior, (the) place before (the) camp (being) 

8,6 opportuno, atque s,6 idoneo 6 natura, ad ei,4 aciem 

opportune, and fit by-nature, | to (the) line (of battle) 

instruendam ; quod is 

to-be-drawn-up [for forming a line of battle]; because that 

"-''•'collis^m.)** ubi m - pl,, castra possita erant, editus 

hill, where (the) camp had-been-placed, being-raised 



64 ADJECTIVES — THIRD DECLENSION. 

paululum ex eL6 planitie patebat in °- inis - 4 latitudinem (/.)•• 

(a) little from (the) plain extended in breadth 

adversus, tantum s,2 loci, quantum 

towards (the enemy), | so-much of-place [so much in space], as 

e,,1 acies *instructa poterat occupare, atque 

(our) line (of battle) drawn-up was-able to-occupy, and 

habebat 8 - pU dejectus us " eris - 2 lateris ex 6 utraque 

it-had abrupt-descents *on (the) l flanks from either 

"-^parte, et leniter s,1 fastigiatus in 8_tis ' 6 fronte ? paulatim 

part, and gently sloped on (the) front, gradually 

redibat ad eU planitiem ; ab utroque us ~ eris - 6 latere ejus 
returned to (the) plain; from each side of-that 

is_is - 2 collis (m.) * * obduxit 4 transversam 4 fossam, 

hill *he [Caesar] Med-over a transverse trench, 

circiter spL2 quadringentoruni Qs - p,,2 passuum, et ad pU extremas 

about four-hundred paces, and at (the) extreme 

pU fossas constituit m,pU castella, que* ibi* 

(ends of) (the) trenches he-constructed castles, and there 

collocavit m,pM tormenta; ne, quum 

he-placed engines-for-throwing-stones; lest, when 

instruxisset ei,4 aciem, is ~ is,pU hostes, (quod poterant 
he-had-drawn-up (his) line, (the) enemy, (because they-might-do 

tantum °" inis - 6 multitudine,( /.)**) possent, a 

so-much * by (their) * multitude,) might-be-able, on 

us ~ eris - p! - 6 lateribus, circumvenire s,pl4 suos pugnantes. 
(the) flanks, to-surround his (men) fighting. 



Lesson 30. 

Caesar primo, et propter multitudinem hostium, et propter 
eximiam opinionem virtutis, proelio supersedere statuit ; quo- 
tidie tamen equestribus proeliis, quid hostis virtute posset, et 
quid nostri auderent, periclitabatur. Ubi nostros non esse 
inferiores intellexit, loco pro castris, ad aciem instruendam 
natura opportuno atque idoneo, quod is collis, ubi castra 
posita erant, paululum ex planitie editus, tantum adversus 
in latitudinem patebat, quantum loci acies instructa occupare 
poterat, atque ex utraque parte lateris dejectus habebat, et in 
fronte leniter fastigiatus, paulatim ad planitiem redibat; ab 



ADJECTIVES — THIRD DECLENSION. 65 

utroque latere ejus collis transversam fossam obduxit circiter 
passuum quadringentoruni ; et ad extremas fossas castella 
constituit, ibique tormenta collocavit; ne ; quum aciem in- 
struxisset, hostes (quod tantum multitudine poterant) a late- 
ribus suos pugnantes circumvenire possent. 

Exercises on Lessons 29 and 30. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Ubi. Inferiores. Propter. Proelium. Equestris. In- 
tellexit. Acies. Idoneus. Planities. Collis. Locus. Latus. 
Hostis. Collocavit. Castella. Tormenta. Pugnantes. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Engines for throwing stones. He determined. On the 
flanks. Enemy. In battle. Yalor. Paces. A trench. 
Side. Part. In the place. In the camp. Line of battle. 
Hill. The plain. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Primo prcelio supersedere statuit. Quid hostes auderent. 
Ad extremas fossas castella constituit. Quod multitudine 
poterant. Hostes suos circumvenire possent. Ubi intellexit. 
Loco idoneo. Is collis paululum ex planitie editus. Tan- 
tum in latitudinem patebat. Ab utroque latere fossam ob- 
duxit. Acies instructa. Leniter fastigiatus. Ab latere 
ejus collis. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

What the enemy could do by their courage. Daily in 
cavalry battles. On account of the reputation of their valor. 
On account of the multitude of the enemy he determined to 
forego battle. He erected castles at the extreme ends of the 
trench. From each side of the hill. It had abrupt sides. 
The hill where the camp was placed. Fit for a line of battle. 
6* 



66 ADJECTIVES — THIRD DECLENSION. 

That our men were not inferior. When he had formed the 
line of battle. Lest the enemy might be able to surround 
his men. 

Form of Adjectives of the Third Declension, with one termi- 
nation in Nominative Singular. 

SINGULAR. 
Masculine and Feminine. Neuter. 

1. Nom. Felix (x) felix (x) happy. 

2. Gen. Felicis (cis) felicis (cis) of happy. 

3. Bat. Felici (ci) felici (ci) to happy. 

4. Ace. Felicem (cera) felix (x) happy. 

5. Voc. Felix (x) felix.... (x) happy. 

6. Abl. Felice or ci....(ce or ci) felice or ci (ceorci) in,with,&c, happy. 

PLURAL. 

Masculine and Feminine. Neuter. 

pl.l. N. Felices (ces) felicia (cia) happy. 

pi. 2. G. Felicium (eiurn) felicium (cium) of happy. 

pi. 3.B. Felicibus (cibus) felicibus (cibus) to happy. 

pi. 4. A. Felices (ces) felicia (cia) happy. 

pi. 5. V. Felices (ces) felicia (cia) happy. 

pi. 6. Ah. Felicibus (cibus) felicibus (cibus) in, with, Ac, happy. 

In like manner are declined present participles, and adjec- 
tives in ens. 

Lesson 31. 

"-"^Palus (/.)** non maga erat inter er - 4 nostrum 

(A) marsh not great was between our (men) 

atque Qs,4 exercitum is * is - pU2 hostium ; is " i9 - pU hostes expectabant 

and (the) army ' of (the) 1 enemy ; (the) enemy waited, 

si er,pU nostri transirent hanc; autem 

(to see) if our (men) would-pass-over this (marsh); but 

er.pi. * nostri erant parati in m ' pL6 armis, ut ? si ml initium 
our (men) were prepared in arms, that, if (a) beginning 

transeuhdi fieret ab illis, 

of-crossing-over (the marsh) should-be-mado by them, 

aggrederentur 8 - pU impeditos. Interim 

1 they [his men] ■ might-attack (them) encumbered. In-the-mean-time 



ADJECTIVES — THIRD DECLENSION. 67 

contendebatur is_is - 6 equestri m - 6 proelio inter pM duas 
| it-was-contended * by (a) Cavalry battle between (the) two 

ei - pU acies. 

lines [a cavalry engagement took place between the two armies]. 

Ubi er,pU neutri faciunt m,4 initium transeundi, 

When neither make (a) beginning of-crossing-over (the marsh), 

ni,6 proelio er,pK2 nostrorum e8 " iti8,p,,2 equitum 

| (the) battle of-our horsemen (being the) 

or -° ris - 6 secundiore, 

more- successful [our cavalry having the advantage in the contest], 

r - ri8j Caesar reduxit spM suos in rn - p1 - 4 castra, is - is - pU Hostes 

Caesar led-back his (men) to (the) camp. (The) enemy 

protinus contenderunt ex eo s - 6 loco ad en ~ wUA fluinen 

immediately hastened from that place to the river 

4 Axonarn ; quod demon stratum est esse post m,pU nostra 

Aisne, which has-been-shown to-be behind our 

m - pL4 castra ; ibi, m - pK6 vadis m - pl - 6 repertis, conati sunt 

camp; there, fords being-found, they-endeavored 

transducere rs_rtis - 4 partem pl,2 suarum pI,2 copiarum eo 

to-lead-over (a) part of-their forces with-that 

m ' 6 consilio ; ut, si possent, expugnarent "^castellum, 
design, that, if they-could, they-would-storm (the) castle, 

cui Q. Titurius s,1 legatus praeerat 

I to-which Q. Titurius (the) lieutenant was-over [which Q. Titurius 

que- interscinderent 

the lieutenant commanded] and would-cut-down 

ns - ntis, pontem-;(m.)* # sin minus, popularentur enpM agros 
(the) bridge; or at-least, would-ravage (the) fields 

■* pl,2 Rhemorum, qui erant s3 magno Gs,? usui nobis ad 
*of (the) 'Rhemi, which were (of) great use to-us for 

m,4 bellum gerendurn, que* sustinebant er,p1,4 nostros 
(the) war to-be-carried-on, and supplied our 

Qs,pU commeatus-. 
(men with) provisions. 

Lesson 32. 

Palus erat non magna inter nostrum atque hostium exer- 
citum : banc si nostri transirent, bostes expectabant ; nostri 
autem, si ab illis initium transeundi fieret ; ut impeditos 



68 ADJECTIVES — THIRD DECLENSION. 

aggrederentur, parati in arniis erant. Interim proelio equestri 
inter duas acies contendebatur. Ubi neutri transeundi 
initium faciunt, secundiore equitum nostrorum proelio, Caesar 
suos in castra reduxit. Hostes protinus ex eo loco ad flumen 
Axonam contenderunt, quod esse post nostra castra demon- 
stratum est; ibi vadis repertis, partem suarum copiarum 
transducere conati sunt, eo consilio, ut, si possent, castellum, 
cui praeerat Q. Titurius legatus, expugnarent, pontemque 
interscinderent ; sin minus, agros Rhemorum popularentur, 
qui magno nobis usui ad belluni gerendum erant, commea- 
tusque nostros sustinebant. 

Exercises on Lessons 31 and 32. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Legatus. Pons. Ager. Magnus. Usus. Commeatus. 
Bellum. Qui. Proelium. Eques. Reduxit. Secundior. 
Flumen. Yadum. Pars. Consilium. Exercitus. Hostis. 
Initium. Interim. Palus. Inter. 

English words to be translated into Latin, 

In the battle. Horsemen. The enemy. River. Place. 
Fords. A part. Forces. Castle. The army. Prepared. 
A beginning. Battle. When. Marsh. Great. Bridge. 
Fields. Use. Provisions. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English, 

Proelio equestri contendebatur. Nostri parati in armis 
erant. Palus erat inter nostrum atque h ostium exercitum. 
Ut hostes impeditos aggrederentur. Nostri transeundi ini- 
tium faciunt. Exercitum in castra reduxit. Hostes ad 
flumen contenderunt. Ibi partem suarum copiarum trans- 
ducere conati sunt. Castellum cui praeerat legatus. Qui 
magno nobis usui erant. 



ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. by 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Or at least would ravage the fields. Which were of use 
for carrying on the war. Our cavalry having the advantage. 
He led back his men to the camp. The enemy hastened 
from that place to the river. Fords being found there. 
With the design, that they would storm the castle. They 
endeavored to lead over a part of their forces. Between our 
army and the army of the enemy. Our men were prepared. 
A cavalry engagement took place between the two armies. 
If a beginning of crossing over should be made by them. 

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

In Latin, as in English, there are three degrees of com- 
parison, the positive , comparative, and superlative : as, posi- 
tive, mitis — mild; comparative, mitior — milder; superlative, 
m it iss im us — m ildest. 

It is in the positive form, nominative singular masculine, 
that an adjective is to be looked for in the dictionary. 

The positive is declined according to the different forms 
given above. 

The comparative is regularly formed, for adjectives declined 
according to the first and second declensions, by adding or to 
the genitive masculine singular of the positive : as, positive, 
alius — high, Gen. mas. alti — of high ; comparative, altior — 
higher; and for adjectives declined according to the third 
declension, by changing the s of the genitive singular mas- 
culine positive into or : as, positive, mitis — mild, Gen. mitis 
— of mild ; comparative, mitior — milder; or, positive, felix 
— happy, Gen. felicis — of happy ; comparative, felicior — 
more happy. The comparatives are declined like mitior — 
milder, as given above. 

The superlative is regularly formed, for adjectives declined 
according to the first and second declensions, by adding 
ssimus to the genitive masculine singular of the positive : as, 
positive, alius — high, Gen. alti — of high; superlative, altis- 



70 ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. 

simus — highest ; and for adjectives declined according to the 
third declension, hy changing the s of the genitive singular 
masculine or feminine into ssimus: as, positive, mitts — mild. 
Gen. mitts — of mild; superlative, mitissimus — mildest. 
The superlatives are declined according to the first and 
second declensions, like bonus — good, as above. 

All adjectives in er, as well those of the first and second 
declensions, as those of the third declension, form their 
superlatives by adding rimus to the nominative singular mas- 
culine : as, tener — tender; superlative, tenerrimus — most 
tender; acer — sharp; superlative, acerrimus — sharpest; 
but their comparatives are formed in the general manner, as 
above. 

Some adjectives, ending in His, form their superlatives by 
substituting limus, in place of is : as, facilis — easy ; super- 
lative, facillimus — easiest. 

Some adjectives, ending in ficus, as beneficus — beneficent, 
form their comparatives by changing us into entior : as, 
beneficentior — more beneficent; and their superlatives by 
changing us into entissimus : as, beneficentissimus — most 
beneficent. 

Some few adjectives are regular in the comparative, but 
irregular in the superlative, or have even double irregular 
superlatives : as, 

Dexter — right; dexterior; dextimus. 

Exterus — outward; exterior; extimus or extremus. 

Posterus — hind; posterior; postremus or postuuius — hindmost. 

Inferus — low ; inferior ; infimus or imus. 

Superus — high; superior; supremus or summus. 

Some adjectives are altogether irregular in their com- 
parisons : as, 

Bonus — good; melior — better; optimus — best. 
Malus — bad; pejor — worse; pessimus — worst. 
Magnus — great; major — greater; maximus — greatest. 
Parvus — little ; minor — less ; minimus — least. 
Multus — much; (plus) — more; plurimus — most. 



ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. 71 

It will not generally be necessary to designate the positive, 
but, when required, the comparative may be designated by a 
c, placed after the word between parentheses, and the super- 
lative by an s, placed in like manner: as, mitior (c.) ; mitis- 
simus(s.°). When the comparison is irregular, the positive 
may sometimes be placed before the c or the s, in paren- 
theses : as, m el ior (bonus , c.) ; maximusfmagnus, s.). 



Lesson 33. 

r_ri8 * 1 Caesar factus certior(c)** a. 

Caesar j having-been-made more-sure [being informed] by 

•• 6 Titurio, transducit ns - tis>4 pontem (m.)* * is_is - 4 omnem 

Titurius, leads-over (the) bridge all 

Gs - 4 equitatum et pU Numidas isis - 2 levis 2 armaturae, 

(the) cavalry and (the) Numidians of-light armor, 

or -° ris -P u fundi tores que* 8 - pU sagittarios-, atque contendit 
(the) slingers and (the) archers, and hastens 

ad eos. Pugnatum est acriter in eo ^loco; er ' pl,l nostri 

to them. It-was-fought sharply in that place; our 

aggressi is " is,pM hostes, 8 - pU impeditos in 

(men) having-attacked (the) enemy, entangled in 

en " iDis - 6 flumine, occiderunt sA magnum 8 * 4 numerum eorum : 

(the) river, slew (a) great number of-them : 

repulerunt d<wlini, - 6 multitudine (/.)** ro ' pK2 telorum 

1 they [our men] 'repulsed 1 with (a) ' multitude of-darts 

s.pi.4 r eliqnos -w^pw conan t es 

(and other weapons) (the) remainder (of the enemy) endeavoring 

audacissime transire per us -° ris -p'- 4 corpora eorum; 
most-boldly to-cross-over | on (the) bodies of-them [on 

interfecerunt s * pl,4 primos, 

the bodies of their own men] ; Hhey [our men] 'killed (the) first, 

qui transierant s,pM circumventos as6 equitatu. Ubi 

who had-passed surrounded l by (the) * cavalry. When 

ls -"- pl - 1 hostes intellexerunt eU spem fefelisse se, et 

(the) enemy understood (that) hope had-deceived them, both 

de m,6 oppido expugnando, et de 

as-respects the town (intended) to-be-stormed, and as-respects 



72 ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. 

en ~ ims,b fTumine transeundo, neque viderunt 

(the) river (intended) to-be-crossed-over, nor saw-they 

er,pL4 nostros progredi in r ~ ris4 iniquiorem (c.)** 

our (men) to-advance into (a) more-dLsadvantageous 

8,4 locum, 6 caus^ pugnandi, atque ^rumentaria 

place, *for (the) 'purpose of-fighting, and corn 

eU res eoepit deficere eos m,6 concilio 

thing [provisions] began to-fail them; (a) council 

m - 6 convocato, constituerunt esse 

being-called, the3 T -resolved (that) it-was 

mJ optimum (bonus, s.)** quemque reverti 4 suam 

best (for) every-one to-return (to) his 

,,4 domum, (/".)*• et convenire undique ad eos 

home, and to-assemble from-all-sides to those 

defendendos, in h ~ isp '- 4 fines 

(whom it was necessary) to-be-defended, (and) into (the) territories 

quorum 8,pL1 Romani primum introduxissent 

of-whom (the) Romans ' might first * have-led 

08,4 exercitum ; lit potius decertarent, 

(an) army; so-that they- 1 might rather l contend (with them), 

in suis, quam ,pL6 alienis is ~ is - pl,6 nnibus, 

| in their-own, than in-others borders [in their own coun- 

et uterentur pK6 domesticis 

try, than in that of others], and might-use (their) domestic 

p1 - 6 copiis * frumentariae ei * 2 rei. Quoque hsec °~° nis - ! ratio (/ ) * * 

supplies of provisions. Also this reason 

cum p,,6 reliquis pU6 causis deduxit eos ad earn 4 sententiam, 

with (the) remaining motives led them to that determination, 

quod cognoverant, * A Divitiacum atque 8 " p,,4 iEduos 

because they-knew, (that) Divitiacus and (the) ^Edui 

appropinquare is " isp, - 3 finibus spL2 Bellovacorum. 

were-approaching to-the-territories * of (the) l Bellovaci. | It- 1 was 

non poterat persuaderi his, ut morarentur 

not *able to-be-persuaded to-these, that they-should-delay 

diutius, neque 

longer [they could not be persuaded to remain longer], | noi 

ferrent m,4 auxilium ,,pL3 suis. 

should bring [nor from bringing] assistance to-their (countrymen). 



ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. 73 

Lesson 34. 

Caesar certior factus a Titurio, omnem equitatum, et levis 
armaturae Nuuiidas, funditores, sagittariosque pontem trans- 
ducit, atque ad eos contendit. Acriter in eo loco pugnatum 
est; hostes impeditos nostri in flumine aggressi, magnum 
eorum numerum occiderunt : per eorum corpora reliquos au- 
dacissime transire conantes, multitudine telorum repulcrunt : 
prinios, qui transierant, equitatu circumventos interfecerunt. 
Hostes ubi et de expugnando oppido, et de flumine transeundo 
spem se fefellisse intellexerunt, neque nostros in locum ini- 
quiorem progredi pugnandi causa viderunt, atque eos res 
frumentaria deficere coepit; concilio convocato, constituerunt 
optimum esse domum suam quemque reverti ; et quorum in 
fines primum Romani exercitum introduxissent, ad eos de- 
fendendos undique convenire ; ut potius in suis, quam alienis 
finibus decertarent; et domesticis copiis rei frumentariaa 
uterentur. Ad earn sententiam, cum reliquis causis, haec 
quoque ratio eos deduxit, quod Divitiacum atque iEduos 
finibus Bellovacorum appropinquare cognoverant; his per- 
suaderi, ut diutius morarentur, neque suis auxilium ferrent, 
non poterat. 

Exercises on Lessons 33 and 34. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Locus. Corpus. Transire. Telum. Primus. Equi- 
tatus. Omnis. Pons. Oppidum. Flumen. Spes. Nostri. 
Causa, Res. Coepit. Optimum. Finis. Domus. Exer- 
citus. Potius. Auxilium. Diutius. Ratio. Cognoverant. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Longer. Assistance. First. Army. Rather. Than. 

Supplies. Reason. Led. Hope. Town. River. More. 

Disadvantageous. Thing. Place. They resolved. Best. 

House. Archers. The enemy. Great. Slew. The re- 

7 



74 ADJECTIVES — NUMERALS. 

mainder. Number. Most boldly. Bodies. Cavalry. 
When. Bridge. Slingers. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Acriter pugnatum est. Caesar ad eos contendit. Nostri 
magnum numerum occiderunt. Reliquos multitudine telorum 
repulerunt. Hostes ubi intellexerunt. In locum progredi 
pugnandi causa. Constituerunt optimum esse domum reverti. 
Ad eos defendendos convenire. Ad earn sententiam hsec 
ratio eos deduxit. Quod Divitiacum appropinquare cogno- 
verant. His persuaderi non poterat. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

That they should delay longer. Into whose territories the 
Romans might have led an army. So that they might rather 
contend with them in their own country, than in that of 
others. This reason led them to that determination. They 
knew that Divitiacus was approaching. They understood 
that hope had deceived them. They saw our men advance 
into a more disadvantageous place. Provisions began to fail 
them. They resolved that it was best to return home. It was 
sharply fought in that place. Our men slew a great number 
of them. To cross over on the bodies of their own men. 
Caesar being informed. He leads all the cavalry over the 
bridge. 

NUMERALS. 

Cardinals. Ordinals. 

I. 1. Unus, one Primus, first. 

II. 2. Duo, two Secundus, second. 

III. 3. Tres, three Tertius, third, [rest.) 

IV. 4. Quatuor, four (and so for the rest) Quartus, fourth (and so for the 
V. 5. Quinque Quintus. 

VI. 6. Sex Sextus. 

VII. 7. Septem Septimus. 

VIII. 8. Octo Octavus. 

IX. 9. Novem Nonus. 

X. 10. Decern ,. Decimus. 



ADJECTIVES — NUMERALS. 



75 



XI. 


11. 


XII. 


12. 


XIII. 


13. 


XIV. 


14. 


XV. 


15. 


XVI. 


16. 


XVII. 


17. 


XVIII. 


18. 


XIX. 


19. 


XX. 


20. 


XXI. 


21. 


XXII. 


22. 


XXX. 


30. 


XL. 


40. 


L. 


50. 


LX. 


60. 


LXX. 


70. 


LXXX. 


80. 


xc. 


90. 


c. 


100. 


CI. 


101. 


cc. 


200. 


ccc. 


300. 


CD. 


400. 


D. 


500. 


DC. 


600. 


DCC. 


700. 


DCCC. 


800. 


DCCCC. 


900. 


M.1000. 



Cardinals. Ordinals. 

Undecim Undecimus. 

Duodecirn Duodecimus. 

Tredecim Tertius decimus. 

Quatuordeciin Quartus decimus. 

Quindecim Quintus decimus. 

Sedecim or sexdecim Sextus decimus. 

Septendecim Septimus decimus. 

Octodecim Octavus decimus. 

Novendecim or novemdecim Nonus decimus. 
Viginti Vicesimus or vigesimus. 

Viginti unus or unus et vi- 
ginti Vicesimus primus. 

Viginti duo or duo et viginti Vicesimus secundus. 

Triginta Tricesimus or trigesimus. 

Quadraginta Quadragesimus. 

Quinquaginta Quinquagesimus. 

Sexaginta Sexagesimus. 

Septuaginta Septuagesimus. 

Octoginta Octogesimus. 

Nonaginta Nonagesimus. 

Centum Centesimus. 

Centum unus or centum et 

unus Centesimus primus. 

Ducenti, ae, a Ducentesimus. 

Trecenti, ae, a Trecentesimus. 

Quadringenti, ae, a Quadringentesimus. 

Quingenti, ae, a Quingentesimus. 

Sexcenti, ae, a Sexcentesimus. 

Septingenti, ae, a Septingentesimus. 

Octingenti, ae, a Octingentesimus. 

Nongenti, ae, a Nongentesimus. 

Mille Millesimus. 



All the ordinal numbers are declined like bonus, bona, 
bonum. 

Some of the cardinal numbers are declined, others are not. 
Unus — one is declined, as above denoted, under the head of 
adjectives declined according to the first and second de- 
clensions. 

Duo — two is thus declined : 



76 ADJECTIVES — NUMERALS. 



Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

pl.l.N.Duo (o) duae (ae) duo (o). 

p>l. 2. G. Duorum (orum) duarum (arum) duorum..... (orum). 

pi. 3. D. Duobus (obus) duabus (abus) duobus (obus). 

pi. 4. A. Duos or duo.(os or o) duas (as) duo (o). 

pi. 5. V. Duo (o) duae (ae) duo (o). 

pi. 6.J.6.Duobus (obus) duabus (abus) duobus.. (obus). 

Ambo — both is declined like duo. 

Tres — three is declined like adjectives of the third declen- 
sion in the plural, with two endings : as, like rnitis, pi. mites. 

Cardinal numbers, from quatuor — four to centum — a hun- 
dred, both included, are indeclinable; that is, their termina- 
tions remain the same, and are not changed, either by case, 
number, or gender. 

From ducenti to nongenti, both included, those numbers 
are declined as the plural of bonus : as, boni, a?, a, as de- 
noted above. 

Mllle — a thousand is indeclinable when used as an adjec- 
tive; when used as a substantive it is indeclinable in the 
singular, but is declinable in the plural : as, millia. 

Lesson 3d. 

spu Bellovacos valere plurimum inter eos, et 

(That) (the) Bellovaci prevail most among them, both 

^ u,is - 6 virtute,(/.)** et as - atis - 6 auctoritate, et s6 numero 

*by (their) * valor, and authority, and *by (the) dumber 

°" inis - p,-2 hominum; hos posse conficere centum 

1 of (their) l men; (that) these were-able to-raise a hundred 

pU millia m - pL4 armata ; s - pU pollicitos sexaginta 

thousand armed [armed men] ; having-promised sixty 

1)1,4 millia m - pU lecta ex eo 8,6 numero, que* 

thousand chosen out-of that number, ar\d (that) 

postulare m,4 imperium "^totius* m * 2 belli 

they-demand (the) chief-command of-all (the) war 

sibi. pM Suessiones esse s,pU suos s,pU finitimos; 

for-themselves. (That the) Suessiones are their neighbors; 



ADJECTIVES — NUMERALS. 77 

possidere *- pU latissimos(s.)** que- 

(and that) they-possess (the) raost-extended and 

"• pl,4 feracissImos* («.)*• er,pU agros; 8 - 4 Divitiacum fuisse 

most-fertile lands; (that) Divitiacus had-been 

x-gi8.4 re g em apud eos, etiam 6 nostra 6 memoria, 

king over them, even in-our memory, 

8 - 4 potentissimum(s.)** ^^totius 2 Gralliae, qui quum 

(the) most-powerful (man) of-all Gaul, who not-only 

obtinuerit m,4 imperium a2 inagnae r8_rtls - 2 partis harum 
had-obtained (the) empire 'of (a) 1 great part of-these 

io - ionis - pL2 regionum ; (/.)* # turn etiam 2 Britannise; 4 Galbam 
regions, but also of-Britain; (that) Galba 

esse nunc x_gis - 4 regein ; 4 summam 

was now (their) king; (that) (the) supreme-command 

m * ius - 2 totius m ' 2 belli deferri ad hunc propter 

'of (the) ' whole war is-conferred on him on-account-of (his) 

4 justitiam que* 4 prudentiam- as_atis * 6 voluntate is ~ is,pL2 omnium ; 
justice and prudence 'by (the) 'will of-all; 

habere duodecim m,pU oppida 
(that) 'they [the Suessiones] 'have twelve towns 

8,6 numero polliceri quinquaginta pU millia 

in-nuuiber (that) they-promise fifty thousand 

m - pU armata ; 8 - pM Nervios totidem, 

armed [armed men] ; (that) (the) Nervi (promise) as-many, 

qui habeantur maxime 8,pU feri inter ipsos, 

| who [they] are-deemed (the) most wild among these-same 

que- longissime- absint; as ^ tis - pK4 Atrebates, 
(nations), and 'are farthest 'distant; (that) (the) Atrebates, 

quindecim pu niillia; " pU Ambianos, decern 

(promise) fifteen thousand; (that) (the) Ambiani, ten 

pU rnillia; 8,pU Morinos, viginti et quinque pK4 millia; 
thousand; (that) (the) Morini, twenty and five thousand; 

s.pi.4 Menapios, novem pU miIlia; 8 - pU Caletos, decern 

(that) (the) Menapii, nine thousand; (that) (the) Caleti, ten 

p,,4 millia; pL4 VeIocasses et s,pU Veromanduos totidem; 

thousand; (that) (the) Velocasses and Veromandui as-many; 

s.pi.4 Aduaticos, viginti novem pU inillia; 
(that) (the) Aduatici, twenty nine thousand; (that) 

8 - pU Condrusos, pU Eburones, 8,pU Caeraesos, 8 - pL4 P86manos, qui 
(the) Condrusi, Eburones, Caeresi, Paemani, who 

7* 



78 ADJECTIVES — NUMERALS. 

appellantur m,6 uno efl_inis - 6 nomine spll Germani, arbitrari 
are-called by-one name Germans, are-reekoned 

ad quadraginta pL4 millia. 
at forty thousand. 

Lesson 36. 

Plurimum inter eos Bellovacos, et virtute, et auctoritate, 
et hominum nuniero valere; hos posse conficere armata 
millia centum; pollicitos ex eo numero lecta millia sexaginta, 
totiusque belli imperium sibi postulare. Suessiones suos esse 
finitimos; latissimos, feracissimosque agros possidere; apud 
eos fuisse regem, nostra etiam memorial Divitiacuin, totius 
Galliae potentissimum ; qui quum magnae partis harum 
regionum, turn etiam Britanniae, imperium obtinuerit, nunc 
esse regem Galbam : ad hunc propter justitiam, pruden- 
tiamque, summam totius belli omnium voluntate deferri : 
oppida habere numero duodecim; polliceri millia armata 
quinquaginta ; totidem Nervios, qui maxime feri inter ipsos 
habeantur, longissimeque absint ; quindecim millia Atrebates; 
Ambianos decern millia; Morinos viginti quinque millia; 
Menapios novem millia; Caletos decern millia; Velocasses et 
Yeromanduos totidem; Aduaticos viginti novem millia; 
Condrusos, Eburones, Caeraesos, Paemanos, qui uno nomine 
G-ermani appellantur, arbitrari ad quadraginta millia. 

Exercises on Lessons 35 and 36. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Quadraginta. Nomen. Appellantur. Virtus. Inter. 
Potentissimus. Rex. Agri. Latissimus. Finitimi. Im- 
perium. Sexaginta. Millia. Auctoritas. Magnus. Pars. 
Bellum. Duodecim. Quinquaginta. Ferus. Centum. 
Quindecim. Decern. Viginti. Quinque. Qui. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Forty. Name. One. Twenty. Ten. Nine. Fifteen. 
Distant. Among. Farthest. Of all. Part. Now. King. 



PRONOUNS. 79 

War. Will. Towns. In number. As many. Who. Men. 
A hundred. Chosen. Most extended. Lands. Among. 
Most powerful. Yalor. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English, 

Qui Germani appellantur. Ambianos polliceri millia ar- 
mata decern. ( Qui longissime absint. Nervii inaxime feri 
inter ipsos habeantur. Omnium voluntate deferri. Ad 
hunc summam totius belli deferri. Magnae partis harum 
regionum imperium obtinuerit. Rex Galba. Totius Galliae 
potentissimus. Nostra memorial Suessiones feracissimos 
agros possidere. Totius belli imperium postulare. Hos 
posse conficere armata millia centum. Bellovacos, auctori- 
tate, et hominum numero valere. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

The Germans are reckoned at forty thousand. They are 
deemed the most wild among these same nations. They are 
the farthest distant. That the Atrebates promise fifteen 
thousand. The Yeromandes as many. Who are called 
Germans. The most powerful man of all Gaul. He had 
obtained the empire of these regions. That Galba was now 
their king. The supreme command of the whole war. That 
they could raise a hundred thousand armed men. That the 
Suessiones possess the most extended lands. A most pow- 
erful king. That the Bellovaci prevail most by their valor. 



PRONOUNS. 



Pronouns, in Latin, may be divided into two principal 
classes, the substantive pronouns, and the adjective pronouns. 



80 



SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 



SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 

The substantive pronouns are: ego — 1; tu — thou; sui — 
of himself ) herself itself. Ego — 1, or the first person, is 
thus declined : 



Singular. 

1. AWEgo ; I. 

2. Gen. Mei; of me. 

3. Bat. Mihi ; to me. 

4. Ace. Me; me. 

5. voc. : 



6. Abl. Me; in, from, with, by, Ac, 
me. 



Plural. 
pi. 1. N. Nos ; we. 
pi. 2. G. Nostrum or nostri ; of us. 
pi. 3. D. Nobis ; to us. 
pi. 4. A. Nos; us. 

pj. 5. V. 

pi. 6. Ab. Nobis ; in, from, with, by, 

<fec, us. 



This first person, or ego, is denoted by placing 1, in pa- 
rentheses, after the pronoun: as, me (l) ; the cases are de- 
noted, for the singular, by placing the numbers for cases be- 
fore this pronoun ; and the same numbers, with pi., for the 
plural: as, 3 mihi (l) ; p1,3 nobis . (1) 



Lesson 37. 

8 - p1 - 3 Conscripti ei " ris - p1 - 5 patres video °*-° ris - pU ora(tt.)* # atque 
Conscript fathers I-see (the) countenances and 

,,pl,4 oculos vestrum is_is,p1,2 omnium esse conversos in 4 me; (1)M 
eyes of-you all to-be turned on me; 

video vos esse s,pK4 sollicitos non solum de er,6 vestro 
I-see you to-be solicitous not only concerning your (own) 

m,6 periculo, ac eL2 aDd 2 reipublicae, verum etiam, si id 

danger, and (that) J of (the) Republic, but also, if that 

depulsum sit, de m6 meo 

(danger) may-have-been-repelled (by me), concerning my (own) 

m,6 periculo. ' Vestra as_atisl voluntas erga 

peril (in accomplishing it). Your good-will towards 

4 me (1) " est ! jucunda 3 mihi (,)# * in mpl>6 malis, et grata 
me is pleasant to-me in danger, and grateful 

in or "° ris - 6 dolore ; sed quaeso per is ~ is - pU immortal es 

in grief; but I-entreat (you) by the immortal 

•.pi.4 deos ! deponite earn, atque 

gods ! lay-aside this (your good will towards me), and- 



SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 81 

obliti 2 meae us " utis - 2 salutis,(/) # * cogitate de vobis 

having-forgotten my safety, think of yourselves 

ac de er - pU6 vestris rp, - 6 liberis. Si quideni haec 

and of your children. If indeed | this 

io - onis - 1 conditio (/.)** as ' 2 consulates data, est 

condition * of (the) x consulship has-been-given 

3 mihi/ ,)## ut 

me [this condition, of being consul, has been imposed on me], that 

perferrem is ~ is,pU omnes as ~ atis - pU acerbitates, isispU onines 

I-should-bear all bitter-inflictions, all 

or ori8,pU dolores que- Qs,pU cruciatus*, ferara non solum 

griefs and torments, I-will-bear (them) not only 

fortiter, sed etiam libenter, dummodo a3_atis - 1 dignitas 

courageously, but even willingly, provided-that dignity 

que' U8 * utisl salus •(/.)*• pariatur vobis que* 

and safety may-be-procured for-you and 

8 - 3 Romano 8 * 3 populo- 8 - pI ' 6 meis »**hU laboribus. 

x for (the) 'Roman people by-my labors. 

»Ego (1)## sum ille Mis - 1 Consul, s5 conscripti er_ris - 5 patres, 

I am that Consul, conscript fathers, 

cui non mA forum, in quo ^""^omnis as - atis,1 8equitas 

to-whom not (the) forum, in -which all equity 

continetur; non sI campus, 8,1 consecratus 

is-contained ; not (the) Campus-Martius, consecrated 

is-is.pi.3 CO nsularibus m,pL3 auspiciis ; non * curia, 

to-consular auspices; not (the) senate-chamber, 

"•'summum m,, auxilium is_is - p1 - 2 omnium 

(the) highest aid (and refuge) of-all 

ns - Dtis - p1 - 2 gentium; non fcI domus,(/.) ## 

nations ; not (my) house, (for a man's house is his), 

e " is - 1 commune nU perfugium ; non '-'lectus 

common (and inviolable) refuge; not (my) bed 

s,1 datus ad eMtis - 4 quietem ; (/.)** denique non haec 

given for repose; finally not this (consular) 

^•'sedes 0IM)ris - 2 honoris unquam fuit * vacua 

seat of-honor x has ever x been free 

ro - 6 periculo r8 ^ ti5,2 mortis, atque pL6 insidiis. 
from (the) danger of death, and from-snares. 



82 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 

Lesson 38. 

Video, patres conscripti, in me omnium vestrum ora atque 
oculos esse conversos ; video vos non solum de vestro ac rei- 
publicae, verum etiam, si id depulsum sit, de meo periculo 
esse sollicitos. Est mihi jucunda in malis, et grata in dolore, 
vestra erga me voluntas ; sed earn, per deos immortales ! 
quaeso, deponite, atque, obliti salutis meae, de vobis ac de 
liberis vestris cogitate. Mihi quidem si haec conditio con- 
sulates data est, ut omnes acerbitates, omnes dolores crucia- 
tusque perferrem ; feram non solum fortiter, sed etiam liben- 
ter, dummodo meis laboribus vobis populoque Romano dig- 
nitas salusque pariatur. Ego sum ille consul, patres con- 
scripti, cui non forum, in quo omnis sequitas continetur ; non 
campus, consularibus auspiciis consecratus; non curia, 
sum mum auxilium omnium gentium ; non domus, commune 
perfugium ; non lectus, ad quietem datus ; non denique haec 
sedes honoris, unquam vacua mortis periculo, atque insidiis 
fuit. 

As the substantive pronouns are very irregular, the stu- 
dent should be made to decline them as they occur. So also, 
hereafter, the demonstrative and relative pronouns, which 
also are irregular. 

Exercises on Lessons 37 and 38. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Quies. Sedes. Mors Unquam. Labor. Pater. iEqui- 
tas. Summus. Domus. Gens. Perfugium. Lectus. 
Salus. Liberi. Consulatus. Mihi. Dolores. Cruciatus. 
Fortiter. Oculos. Me. Video. Respublica. Gratus. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

I. Repose. Bed. A nation. To me. Aid. With 
me. Senate chamber. Consular. We. Equity. To 



SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 



83 



whom. Of me. Father. To us. People. For you. My. 
Willingly. Torments. Griefs. Indeed. Children. Of 
us. Think. Us. Safety. Pleasant. Towards. Peril. 
Also. Only. Countenances. Eyes. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Non haec sedes unquam vacua periculo fuit. Lectus ad 
quietem datus. Ego sum ille consul. Forum, in quo omnis 
aequitas continetur. Consularibus auspiciis consecratus. 
Auxilium omnium gentium. Video, in me omnium oculos 
esse conversos. Video, vos de meo periculo esse sollicitos. 
Est mihi jucunda et grata vestra erga me voluntas. Quseso, 
de vobis ac de liberis vestris cogitate. Mihi quidem, si haec 
conditio consulates, data est. Omnes dolores perferrem. 
Non solum fortiter, sed etiam libenter. Meis laboribus 
populo Romano salus pariatur. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Not my bed given for repose. This seat of honor. That 
safety may be procured for you by my labors. I am that 
consul. The forum in which all equity is contained. Con- 
secrated to consular auspices. The aid of all nations. Think 
of yourselves and of your children. If this condition, of 
being consul, has been imposed on me. That I should bear 
all griefs and torments. Not only courageously, but even 
willingly. I see the eyes of you all to be turned on me. I 
see you to be solicitous concerning my peril. Your good 
will towards me is pleasant. 

Tu — thou, the second person, is thus declined : 



Singular. 

1. iVow.Tu ; thou. 

2. Gen. Tui; of thee. 

3. Dot. Tibi ; to thee. 

4. Ace. Te ; thee. 

5. Voc. Tu ; thou. 

6. Abl.- Te ; in, with, by, <fcc, thee. 



Plural. 
pi. 1. N. Vos ; ye or you. 
pi. 2. G. Vestrum or vestri; of you. 
pi. 3. D. Vobis ; to you. 
pi. 4r. A. Vos ; you. 
pi. 5. V. Vos ; ye or you. 
pi. 6. Ah. Vobis ; in, with, by, <fcc, 

you. 



84 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 

Sui — of himself j of herself of itself or the third person, 
is thus declined : 



Singular. 
1. Norn. 



Plural. 

pl 1. jV. , 

pl. 2. G. Sui; of themselves. 
pl. 3. D. Sibi; to themselves. 
pl. 4. A. Se ; themselves. 

pl 5. V. « — . 

pl. Q.Ab. Se ; in, with, by, &c, 

themselves. 



2. £en. Sui ; of himself, of herself, 

of itself. 

3. Bat. Sibi; to himself, to herself, 

to itself. 

4. Ace. Se; himself, herself, itself. 

5. Voc. . 

6. All, Se ; in, with, by, &c, him- 

self, &c. 

In sui, the third person, the nominative and vocative sin- 
gular and plural are wanting. The plural of sui is like the 
singular. 

As the first person, ego, has been denoted by placing (I) 
between parentheses, after the pronoun, so the second person, 
tu, is denoted by placing (2) between parentheses after it, 
and the third person, sui, by placing (3) in like manner, 
after it. 

The syllable met is sometimes added to the end of these 
substantive pronouns, for the sake of emphasis : as, egomet — 
I myself In the nominative and vocative singular of tu — 
thou, te or tement is used : as, tute or tutement ; and in the 
accusative and ablative singular of the same tu, te is added : 
as, tete ; and se is added to se : as, sese ; all in the same em- 
phatic sense as met. 

Lesson 39. 
Quid, quod ! tu®** ipse 

| What [what shall I say of this], that you yourself 

dedisti 4 te (2)eo in 4 custodiam? 

have-given yourself into (the) custody (of a private person)? 

Quid, quod 6 caus& io " ionis - 2 suspicion is (/.)•* 

What, that | for-(the)-sake of-suspicion (necessary) 

2 vitandse, dixisti, 

to-be-avoided [for the purpose of doing away with suspicion], you-said, 



SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 85 

4 te (2)# * velle habitare apud s4 M. Lepidum ? A quo 

(that) you wished to-reside with M. Lepidus ? By whom 

non receptus, ausus es etiam venire ad 

not having-been-received, you-dared even to-come to 

4 me; (1) ** atque rogasti, ut asservarem 4 te (2)# * 2 meae 

me; and you-asked, that I-would-guard you (in) my 

^domi^/.)** cum tulisses id m - 4 responsum quoque 

house, when you-had-received this answer also 

a 6 me/ 1)M 4 me (1)M posse esse 8,6 nullo 5,6 tuto s,6 modo 
from me, (that) I could be in-no safe manner 

cum- 6 te* (2)# * iisdem es - €lisp1 - 6 parietibus, qui 

with you x in (the) ' same walls (of my house), who 

essem in m,6 magno m,6 periculo, quod contineremur 

was in great danger, because we-were-contained 

iisdem ^'-p 1 - 6 mcenibus ; venisti ad 

1 in (the) 'same walls- 1 of (the) x city; *you (then) l came to 

8,4 Q. Metellum, or "° ris - 4 praetorem; a. quo ^repudiatus, 

Q. Metellum, (the) praetor; by whom being rejected, 

demigrasti ad 6,4 tuum is_is,4 sodalem (m.) #0 

you-went-away to your companion (that) 

M optimum (s.) # * F - 4 virum 8 - 4 M. Marcellum, 

most-excellent man [said ironically] M. Marcellus, 

quern *tu (2) ** videlicet putasti fore et 

whom you certainly thought would-be-both 

8 - 4 diligentissimum(s.)*° ad 8 ' 4 custodiendum 4 te/ 2)## et 

most-diligent for guarding you, and 

8 - 4 sagacissimum (s.) * * ad 8 - 4 suspicandum, et 

most-sagacious for suspecting (you), and 

8 - 4 fortissimum(s.)* # ad 8 - 4 vindicandum. Sed quam 

most-resolute for punishing (you). But how 

longe videtur, debere abesse k er_eris - 6 carcere 

far does-it-seem, (that) he-ought to-be-distant from prison 

atque a m - p1 - 6 vinculis, qui ipse jam judicaverit 4 se (3)# * 
and from bonds, who himself now has-judged himself 

'• 4 dignum 6 custodia ? 
worthy (of) custody? 

8 



86 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 



Lesson 40. 



Quid, quod tu te ipse in custodiam dedisti? Quid, quod 
vitandae suspicionis causa, apud M. Lepidum te habitare 
velle dixisti ? A quo non receptus, etiam ad me venire 
ausus es ; atque ut domi meee te asservarem, rogasti ; cum h, 
me quoque id responsum tulisses, me nullo modo posse iisdem 
parietibus tuto esse tecum, . qui magno in periculo essem, 
quod iisdem moenibus contineremur ; ad Q. Metellum prse- 
torem venisti; a quo repudiatus, ad sodalem tuum, virum 
optimum, M. Marcellum demigrasti ; quern tu videlicet et ad 
custodiendum te diligentissimum, et ad suspicandum saga- 
cissimum, et ad vindicandum fortissimum fore putasti. Sed 
quam longe videtur a carcere atque a vinculis abesse debere, 
qui se ipse jam dignum custodia judicaverit. 

Exercises on Lessons 39 and 40. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Sodalis. Yir. Fortissimus. Fore. Optimum. Te. 
Carcere. Se. Sibi. Sui. Custodia.* Dignus. Vobis. 
Vos. Vestrum. Me. Domus. Responsum. Modus. 
Paries. Tibi. Dixisti. Habitare. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Me. You. House. Answer. Manner. Wall. Danger. 
In the same. Great. Yourself. Custody. What. Sus- 
picion. You said. Companion. Best, or most excellent. 
Most sagacious. Whom. Most diligent. Prison. To be 
distant. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Ad praetorem venisti. Ad sodalem tuum demigrasti. 
Quern tu ad custodiendum te diligentissimum fore putasti. 
Se ipse dignum custodia judicaverit. Tu te ipse in costo- 
diam dedisti. Ad me venire ausus es. Cum id responsum 
tulisses. Quod iisdem moenibus contineremur. 



ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 87 

English sentences to be translated into Latin, 

By whom being rejected. That most excellent man, M. 
Marcellus. Whom you thought would be most diligent. 
Most resolute for punishing you. How far ought he to be 
distant from a prison. You dared to come to me. You 
asked that I would guard you in my house. Who was in 
great danger. For the purpose of doing away with suspicion. 

ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

Adjective pronouns are those pronouns which, like adjec- 
tives, denote gender in addition to number and case. They 
may be divided into several classes, as demonstrative, rela- 
tive, possessive, &c. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Demonstrative pronouns are those which specify or point 
out a person or thing. They are : is — this, that, he, she, it ; 
ille — that, he, she, it ; hie — this, he, she, it ; iste — this, he } 
she, it ; used often in contempt. 

Hie — this, is thus declined : 

SINGULAR. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

1. Nom.Ihe haec hoc this. 

2. Gen. Hujus hujus hujus of this. 

3. Dat. Huic huic huic to this. 

4. Ace. Hunc hanc hoc this. 

5. Voc [<fcc, this. 

6. Abl. Hoc hac hoc in, with, by, 



Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

pl.l.N. Hi hae haec these. 

pi. 2. G. Horuna harum horum of these. 

pi. 3. D. His his his to these. 

pi. 4. A. Hos has haec these. 

pLb.V. [<fcc, these. 

pi. 6. A b. His his his in, with, by, 



00 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 

It is here to be observed, that the neuter nominative, 
accusative, and ablative singular, with the masculine ablative 
singular, are alike; that the feminine nominative singular, 
and the nominative and accusative neuter plural, are alike; 
that the genitive singular, for all genders, is alike ; that the 
dative singular, for all genders, is alike ; that the masculine 
and neuter genitive plural are alike; that the dative and 
ablative plural, for all the genders, are alike. 

The emphatic ce is sometimes added to the end of the 
cases of hie : as, hvjusce, hosce, &c. 

To designate this demonstrative pronoun hie, ic is placed 
for the masculine, see for the feminine, and oc for the neuter. 

Lesson 41. 

^Hac ei,6 re statim 6 cognita per 

This thing 'being immediately 'known by 

or-oris.pi.4 S p eC ulatores, ar_aris - 1 Caesar sA veritus pU insidias, 

(the) scouts, Caesar having-feared snares, 

quod nondum perspexerat de qu& 6 caus& 

because he- 1 had not yet 'perceived from what cause 

discederent, continuit Qs * 4 exercitum que- ^equitatunr 
they-departed, kept (his) army and cavalry 

"'•p'^castris. Prima ^^luce, eL6 re 

in-camp. | 'In (the) 'first light [at daybreak], the thing 

6 confirmata ab or_oris ' p1 - 6 exploratoribus, praemisit 

being-confirmed by (the) scouts, he-sent-before 

is ~ is - 4 omnem Gs ' 4 equitatum, qui moraretur m,4 novissimum(s.)** 
all (the) cavalry, | who might-detain (the) last 

en-inu.4 a g men# 

troop [who might detain the rear of the retreating enemy]. 

Prsefecit icpL3 his 6 - pU legatos s - 4 Quintum s - 4 Pedium, 

He-placed-over these (the) lieutenants Quintus Pedius, 

et s,4 Lucium 8 - 4 Aurunculeium 4 Cottam. Jussit s - 4 Titum 

and Lucius Aurunculeius Cotta. He-ordered Titus 

,,4 Labienum s - 4 legatum subsequi cum is_is - p '- 6 tribus 

Labienus (the) lieutenant to-follow with three 

io-onispi.6 legioni b U s ; (/.) •• ic -P u hi BpU adorti 

legions; these having-attacked 



ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 89 

"•p'^novissirnos,^.)** et 8,pU prosecuti 

the-last [the rear], and having-pursued (them) 

mpU ;multa pU millia Gs - pl - 2 passuuin, conciderunt 4 magnam 
many thousand paces, cut-up a great 

d0 ^ ini8 * 4 multitudiiiem (/.)*• eorum DS - ntis - pl - 2 fugientium. Quum 
multitude of-them flying- When 

ic,pU hi ab m - 6 extremo en - inis - 6 agmine, ad quos 

these | from (the) hindmost troop [in the rear], to | whom 

ventum erat, consisterent, 

it-had-been-come [with whom our men had come up], halted, 

que* fortiter- sustinerent Gs,4 impetum er - pl,2 nostrorum 
and bravely sustained (the) attack of-our 

es-itis.pi. 2 m iii tum . ^^-p^priores^c.) •* quod 

soldiers; | (those) first [those in the front], because 

viderentur abesse a m,6 periculo, neque continerentur 
they-seemed to-be-distant from danger, nor were-held-together 

6 ulla as - atis - 6 necessitate, neque m - 6 iinperio, or_&ris - 6 clam ore 

by-any necessity, or authority, (the) noise 

s - 6 exaudito, d0 ^ in »-pi- 6 ordinibus s - pK6 perturbatis, is - is ' pU omnes 
being-heard, (the) ranks being-disturbed, all 

posuerunt m - 4 subsidium pl - 3 sibi (3)# * in 6 fuga. 
placed safety to-themselves in flight. 

Lesson 42. 

Hac re statim, Caesar, per speculators cognita, insidias 
veritus, quod qua de causa discederent nondum perspexerat, 
exercitum equita turn que castris continuit. Prima luce, con- 
firmata re ab exploratoribus, omnem equitatum, qui novis- 
simum agmen moraretur, praemisit. His, Q. Pedium, et L. 
Aurunculeium Cottam legatos praefecit : T. Labienum lega- 
tum cum legionibus tribus subsequi jussit. Hi novissimos 
adorti, et multa millia passuum prosecuti, magnam multitu- 
dinem eorum fugientium conciderunt. Quum ab extremo 
agmine hi, ad quos ventum erat, consisterent, fortiterque im- 
petum nostrorum miiitum sustinerent; priores, quod abesse 
a periculo viderentur, neque ulla necessitate, neque imperio 
continerentur, exaudito clamore, perturbatis ordinibus, omnes 
in fuga sibi subsidium posuerunt. 
8* 



90 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 

Exercises on Lessons 41 and 42. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Hi. Passus. Fugiens. Agmen. Fortiter. Miles. 

Impeturn. Abesse. Periculum. Hos. Clamor. Hanc. 

Fuga. Hujus. Speculator. Exercitus. Harum. Lux. 
Equitatus. His. Legatus. Huic. Jussit. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Bravely. Attack. To be distant. Danger. Authority. 
Noise. Flight. He ordered. Three. These. Many. To 
this. Paces. Of this. Immediately. To these. Scouts. 
Snares. Not yet. Army. Cavalry. Light. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Quum hi consisterent. Fortiter impetum militum sustine- 
rent. Quod abesse a periculo. Omnes in fuga sibi subsi- 
dium posuerunt. Caesar insidias veritus. Exercitum castris 
continuit. Prima luce omnem equitatum praemisit. Lega- 
tum subsequi jussit. Magnam multitudinem conciderunt. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

From the rear. They sustained the attack of our soldiers. 
Nor were they held together by any authority. All placed 
safety to themselves in flight. He placed lieutenants over 
these. He ordered the lieutenant to follow with two legions. 
They cut up a great multitude of them flying. Because he 
had not yet perceived. At daylight he sent forward all the 
cavalry. He kept his army in camp. 

7s — this, that, is thus declined : 

SINGULAR. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

1. Nom.ls he, this ea she, this id it, this. 

2. Gen. Ejus ejus ejus of this. 

3. Dat. Ei ei ei to this. 

4. Ace. Eum earn..., id this, 

5. Voc [Ac, this, 

0. Abl. Eo eft eo in, with, by, 



-ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 91 



Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

pl.l.N.Ii (ei) eae ea these. 

pi. 2. G. Eorum earura eorum of these. 

pi. 3. D. lis or eis iis or eis iisoreis to these. 

pi. 4. A. Eos eas ea these. 

pl.b.Y. , [&c, these. 

])l. 6. Ab. lis or eis iis or eis..... iis or eis in, with, by, 

Observe, that the nominative and ablative feminine sin- 
gular, and the nominative and accusative neuter plural, are 
alike; that the genitive singular, for all genders, is alike; 
that the dative singular, for all genders, is alike; that the 
dative and ablative plural are alike, for all genders. 

Bern is sometimes added to the end of is, in all the cases, 
numbers, and genders, the s of the nominative singular mas- 
culine, and the d of the nominative and accusative singular 
neuter being omitted : as, nominative singular, idem, eadem, 
idem. 

The m of the accusative singular masculine and feminine, 
and of the genitive plural, is changed into n : as, accusative 
singular, eundem, eandem ; genitive plural, eorundem, earun- 
dem, eor undent. 

To designate the demonstrative pronoun is } is is placed for 
the masculine, ea for the feminine, and id for the neuter. 

Lesson 43. 
s.pi.i Helvetii s,pU commoti 8,6 repentino fis6 adventu is,2 ejus, 

The Helvetians moved *by (the) Sudden arrival of-him 

quum intelligerent, ilium fecisse s,6 uno ei,6 die 

[Caesar], when they-understood, (that) he had-done in-one day 

id - 4 id, quod ipsi aegerrime confecerant viginti 

that, which themselves l had scarcely Accomplished in-twenty 

ei - pL6 diebus, ut transirent en - inis - 4 numen, 

days, (namely) that they-might-pass the river, 

mittunt ,,pl4 legatos ad i,,4 eum; cujus 

they-sent ambassadors to him; of-which 



92 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 

io - ionis ' 2 legationis (/.)•* Divico fuit ^^princeps, qui fuerat 

embassy Divico was chief, who was 

^'dux 8p, - 2 Helvetiorum m>6 Cassiano m - 6 bello. 

(the) leader ■ of (the) * Helvetians x in (the) 1 Cassian war. 

isJ Is ita egit cum ar_aris - 6 CaBsare; 

| He thus acted with Caesar [he thus addressed Caesar] ; 

"si 8,, Romanus sl populus faceret x-cis - 4 pacem cum 
"if (the) Roman people would-make peace with 

■•pi.ejjelvetiis, s p u Helvetios 8 - pU ituros in 

(the) Helvetians, (the) Helvetians | would-be-going [would go] into 

ea - 4 eam rs - rti8 - 4 partem, atque s - pU fut tiros ibi, ubi r_ris - 1 Caesar 

that part, and would-remain there, where Caesar 

constituisset, atque voluisset esse; 

might-have-appointed (for them), and wished (them) to-be,* 

sin perseveraret persequi m - 6 bello, reminisceretur 

but-if he-should-persevere to-follow with-war, he-should-remember 

et us-eris * 2 veteris m - 2 incommodi 8 ' 2 Romani s,2 populi, et 
both (the) old misfortune ' of (the) 1 Roman people, and 

2 pristinse us ~ utis - 2 virtutis (/) * * 8 ' p12 Helvetiorum. Quod 

(the) ancient valor * of (the) ■ Helvetians. Because 

improviso adortus esset 8 - 4 unum 

unexpectedly he-had-attacked (a part of the army composed of) one 

s,4 pagum, quum iB -i )U ii, qui transissent en_in ' 8 - 4 flumen 
canton, when those, who had-passed-over the river *were 

non possent ferre m,4 auxilium s,pK3 suis; 

not *able to-bring assistance to-their (people); *he [Caesar] 

ne tribueret aut magnopere 3 suae U8 " utis - 3 virtuti (/•)** 

Should not Attribute either too-much to-his valor 

ob ea,4 eam eL4 rem, aut despiceret ipsos. 

on-account-of that thing, or despise themselves. 

P i.4g e (3)»# } ta didicisse a 8 - pU6 suis er - ris - pK6 patribus que- 

That they x had so 'learned from their fathers and 

or "° rispl - 6 majoribus-, ut contenderent magis 

ancestors, . that they-should-contend more 

U8 ~ utis - 6 virtute (/.)** quam 8 - 6 dolo, aut niterentur 

by-valor than by-deceit, or strive (to succeed) 

p1 * 6 insidiis. Quare ne committeret, 

by-snares (or ambushes). Wherefore he- 1 should not * act-so, 

ut i8,1 is 8 * 1 locus, ubi constitissent, caperet en ~ inis - 4 nomen 
that (the) place, where they-had-stood, should-take (its) name 



ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 93 

ex "-atis.6 calamitate 8 - 2 Romani s * 2 populi, et 

from (the) calamity * of (the) ' Roman people, and 

io -° ni8 - 6 intern ecione (/.)** Qs,2 exercitus, ac proderet 

(the) massacre 'of (the) * army, and should-deliver 

4 rnemoriam." 

(the) memory (thereof to posterity)/' 



Lesson 44. 

Helvetii repentino ejus adventu cornmoti, quum id quod 
ipsi diebus viginti aegerrime confecerant, ut flumen transirent, 
ilium uno die fecisse intelligerent, legatos ad eum mittunt; 
cujus legationis Divico princeps fuit, qui bello Cassiano dux 
Helvetiorum fuerat. Is ita cum Caesare egit : " Si pacem 
populus Romanus cum Helvetiis faceret, in earn partem 
ituros, atque ibi futuros Helvetios, ubi Caesar constituisset, 
atque esse voluisset; sin bello persequi perseveraret, remin- 
isceretur et veteris incommodi populi Romani, et pristinae 
virtutis Helvetiorum. Quod improviso unum pagum adortus 
esset, quum ii, qui flumen transissent, suis auxilium ferre 
non possent : ne ob earn rem, aut suae magnopere virtuti 
tribueret, aut ipsos despicer.et. Se ita a patribus majoribusque 
suis didieisse, ut magis virtute, quam dolo contenderent, aut 
insidiis niterentur. Quare ne committeret, ut is locus, ubi 
constitissent ex calamitate populi Romani, et internecione 
exercitus nomen caperet, ac memoriam proderet." 



Exercises on Lessons 43 and 44. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Improviso. Flumen. Ferre. Virtus. Patres. Locus. 

Internecio. Nomen. Adventus. Ejus. Dies. Id. 

iEgerriine. Legati. Eum. Mittunt. Ei. Princeps. 

Hac. Pax. Bello. Eis. Pars. Eorum. Ubi. Ii. 
Pristinus. 



94 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Assistance. This. Fathers. Ancestors. More. Deceit. 

Place. Peace. Old. Ancient. Unexpectedly. Canton. 

Arrival. Day. Twenty. Embassy. Chief. Leader. 
War. Moved. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English, 

Quod unum pagum adortus esset. Qui suis auxilium ferre 
non possent. JSTe ob earn rem, ipsos despiceret. Se a. majo- 
ribus suis didicisse. Is locus ex calamitate populi Roniani 
nomen caperet. Helvetii ejus adventu commoti. Legatos 
ad eum mittunt. Divico ita cum Caesare egit. Si pacem 
faceret. Ibi futuros, ubi Caesar voluisset. Reminisceretur 
pristinae virtutis Helvetiorum. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

And should deliver the memory thereof to posterity. They 
were not able to bring assistance to their people. He should 
not despise them on account of that thing. They had 
learned from their fathers that they should contend more by 
valor than by deceit. The place where they had stood. If 
they would make peace with the Helvetians. He should 
remember the old misfortune. Because he had attacked one 
canton. Moved by his arrival. That which they had accom- 
plished in twenty days. They send ambassadors to Caesar. 
He thus acted with Caesar. 

Me — that, is thus declined : 

SINGULAR. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

1. JVbwi.Ille ilia illud that. 

2. Gen. Illius illius illius of that. 

3. Dat. Illi.. illi 111! to that. 

4. Ace. Ilium illam illud that. 

5. Voc [<fcc.,that. 

6.AM. Illo ilia illo in, with, by, 



ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 95 



Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

pLl.N.IWi illae ilia those. 

pi. 2. G. Illorum illarum illorum of those. 

pi. 3. D. Illis illis tills to those. 

pi. 4. A. Illos illas ilia those. 

pl.b.V. [&c, those. 

pi. 6. Ah. Illis illis illis in, with, by, 

Iste — this is declined like ille ; so is also the intensitive 
or emphatic pronoun ipse — himself , ipsa — herself and ipsum 
— itself Ipse has ipsum, instead of ipsud, in the nominative 
and accusative singular ; in all the other cases, numbers, and 
genders, it is like ille. 

Observe, that the nominative and ablative singular femi- 
nine, and the nominative and accusative neuter plural, are 
alike j that the genitive singular, for all genders, is the same ; 
that the dative singular, for all genders, is the same; as are 
also the dative and ablative plural, for all genders. 

To designate the demonstrative pronoun ille, le is placed 
for the masculine, la for the feminine, and hid for the neuter; 
in iste, te is placed for the masculine, ta for the feminine, and 
tud for the neuter; in ipse, se is placed for the masculine, sa 
for the feminine, and sum for the neuter. 

Lesson 45. 

'^Divitiacus s,1 complexus ar_aris - 4 Caesarem cum pl * 6 multis 
Divitiacus having-embraced Caesar with many 

pK6 lacrymis ccepit obsecrare, "ne statueret 

tears began to-entreat, "(that) he- 1 would not determine 

quid gravius in er " ris - 4 fratrem ; 4 se (3) * * scire 

any-thing severely against (his) brother; (that) he knew 

iud.pi.4 j J i a esse *-pi.4y era . nec quemquam capere 

those (things) to-be true; nor (that) any-one took 

plus or " oris - 2 doloris ex id,6 eo, quam 4 se; (3)# * propterea 

more grief from that (thing), than himself; because 

quod (quum scJ ipse posset plurimum 

that ( | when he-himself was-able (to do) (the) most 



96 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 

8,2 domi (/.)•* atque in 6 reliqua 6 Gallia, lel ille minimum, 

at-home and in remaining Gaul, he (the) least, 

propter 4 adolescentiam), 

on-account-of (his) youth), [when, he, Divitiacus, had the greatest 

influence at home, and in the rest of Gaul, he, his brother, on account of 

crevisset per 4 se (3)## 
his youth, had least], | he-had-grown by himself [he, his brother, 

quibus 

had grown in power through his, Divitiacus', means] which 

ps-pis.pi.6 Qpibug ac s -P L6 rjervis uteretur non solum ad 

power and strength he-did-use not only to 

4 minuendam 4 gratiam, sed pene ad 4 suam 

diminishing (his, Divitiacus',) authority, but almost to his 

eU perniciem; 4 sese (3)# * tamen commoveri 

[Divitiacus'] destruction ; (that) he however was-moved 

et 86 fraterno 01 -° ris - 6 amore, et lo - 5onis - 6 existimatione (/.)*• 

both by-fraternal love, and x by (the) 'opinion 

8 - 2 vulgi, quod si quid us_or,sl gravius(c.) ## 

1 of (the) Common-people, because if any-thing serious 

accidisset is,3 ei k ar ~ aris - 6 Caesare, quum se,I ipse 

had-happened to-him from Ca3sar, when he-himself 

teneret is,4 eum 8 - 4 locum 2 amicitise apud is,4 eum, 
[Divitiacus] held that place of-friendship with him, 

o-inis.4 nemmem existimaturum 
[Caesar] (that) no-one would-think (that this) *was 

non factum 6 sua as - atls - 6 voluntate ; ex qu& 

not *done with-his [Divitiacus'] consent; from which 

ei,6 re futurum uti 8,pU anmii a " iu8,2 totius 2 Galliae 

thing it-would-be that (the) minds of-all Gaul 

averterentur a 4 se." (3) * # Quum ""^-'flens 

would-be-turned-away from himself." , When weeping 

peteret . oc - pU ha3c h ar - aris(3 Csesare, 

he-sought those (things) from Caesar, 

s-ris.pi.s p i ur ib us (multum, c.) *• m ' pI ' 6 verbis, ar - arisJ Caesar 

with-many words, Caesar 

prebendit is - 2 ejus 4 dextram; " ,! consolatus, rogat 

takes his right-hand; having-consoled (him), he-asks 

faciat is - is - 4 finem orandi; ostendit 

(that) he- would- make (an) end of-entreating ; he-shows (that) 



ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVES. 97 

"• 2 ejus 4 gratiam esse m2 tanti apud 4 se, (3)e * uti 

his favor was so-much with himself, that 

condonet et 4 injuriam 2 reipublicae, et s,4 suum 

he-would-forgive both (the) injury x of (the) Republic, and his-own 

or-oris.4 do ] orem ...2 e j us as-ati s .3 vo l un tati ac **'•&■* precibus. 
grief x to his 1 good- will and prayers. 



Lesson 46. 

Divitiacus multis cum lacrymis Caesarem complexus obse- 
crare coepit, " ne quid gravius in fratrem statuerit, scire se, 
ilia esse vera, nee quemquam ex eo plus, quam se, doloris 
capere ; propterea quod, (quum ipse gratia plurimum domi, 
atque in reliqua Gallia, ille minimum propter adolescentiam 
posset) per se crevisset ; quibus opibus ac nervis, non solum 
ad minuendam gratiam, sed pene ad perniciem suam utere- 
tur; sese tarn en et amore fraterno, et existimatione vulgi 
commoveri; quod si quid ei a. Caesare gravius accidisset, 
quum ipse eum locum amicitiae apud eum teneret, neminem 
existimaturum non sua voluntate factum ; qua ex re futu- 
rum, uti totius Galliae animi a se averterentur." Haec quum 
pluribus verbis flens a Caesare peteret, Caesar ejus dextram 
prehendit; consolatus rogat finem orandi faciat; tanti ejus 
apud se gratiam esse ostendit, uti et reipublicae injuriam, et 
suum dolorem, ejus voluntati ac precibus condonet. 

Exercises on Lessons 45 and 46. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Coepit. Flens. Dextra. Finis. Dolor. Preces. Fra- 

fcer. Ilia. Vera. Gratia. Domi. Adolescentia. Ille. 

Pene. Pemicies. Amor. Vulgus. Ipse. Amicitiae. 
Nemo. Voluntas. 

English words to be translated into Latin, 

Authority. Destruction. However. Fraternal. The 
common people. He himself. Friendship. No one. Con- 
9 



98 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — RELATIVES 

sent. Brother. More. G-rief. Because. At home. 
Youth. Minds. Right hand. End. Prayers. Many 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Si quid ei accidisset. Sua voluntate factum. Animi k 
se averterentur. Haec quum h Caesare peteret. Ejus dex- 
tram prehendit. Rogat finem orandi faciat. Uti injuriam 
ejus precibus condonet. Divitiacus obsecrare Caesarem ccepit. 
Scire se, ilia esse vera. Quum ipse gratia plurimum domi 
posset. Quibus ad perniciem suam uteretur. Sese amore 
fraterno commoveri. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

When weeping he sought these things from Caesar. 
Having consoled him, he takes his right hand. He shows 
that his favor was so much with himself. Almost to his de- 
struction. That he, however, was moved by the opinion of 
the common people. If any thing had happened to him. 
It was done with his consent. Which he did use. He 
began to entreat. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

The relative pronouns are qui — who, with the compounds 
quicunque — whoever, and quisquis — whoever. They are 
always in the same gender and number as the nouns to which 
they relate. 

Qui — who, is thus declined : 



Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

1. Nom. Qui who, quae who, quod which. 

2. Gen. Cujus whose, cujus whose, cujus of which. 

3. Bat. Cui to whom, cui to whom, cui to which. 

4. Ace. Quern whom, quam whom, quod which. 

5. Voc [whom, [whom, [which. 

6. Abl. Quo in, with, <fcc, qua. in, with, Ac, quo in, with, Ac, 



ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS INTERROGATIVES. 99 



Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

pi. 1. N. Qui who, quae who, quae which. 

pl.2.G. Quorum whose, quaruui whose, quorum of which. 

pl.3.JD. Quibus to whom, quibus to whom, quibus to which. 

pi. 4. A. Quos whom, quas whom, quae .... which. 

pi. 5. V. [whom, [whom, [which. 

pi. 6. J.6.Quibus..in,with,&c, quibus... .in, with,&c, quibus in, with,&c, 

The nominative masculine singular and plural are alike. 
The nominative feminine singular and plural, and the nomi- 
native and accusative neuter plural, are alike. The genitive 
singular, in all genders, is the same. The dative singular, in 
all genders, is the same. The dative and ablative plural, in 
all genders, are the same. 

Quicunque — whoever, is declined like qui, cunque being 
added to the end of each case : as, cujuscunque. 

In quisquis — whoever, both words are declined : as, quern- 
quern. 

Qui is sometimes used for the ablative singular, in all 
genders. Quels or quis occurs for quibus, in the dative and 
ablative plural. 

These relative pronouns are denoted by ui for the mascu- 
line, use for the feminine, and od for the neuter. 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

The interrogative pronouns are quis and qui — who, what ; 
quisnam and quinam — who, what; likewise, ecquis, ecquis- 
nam, numquis — is there any ; also, cnjus, cujde, cujum — 
whose ; and cujas, cujatis — of what country. 

Qui is declined like the relative qui; so also quinam, 
nam being added to all the cases. 

Quis is declined like qui, except that it has quis in the 
nominative singular masculine, and quid in the nominative 
and accusative singular neuter; this variation is denoted by 
wis and by id. Quisnam is declined like quis; so also 
ecquis, ecquisnam, numquis — is there any ; ecquis has some- 



100 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS INTERROGATIVES. 

times ecqua in the nominative singular feminine; numquis, 
or nunquis, has nunqua in the neuter plural nominative and 
accusative. 

Lesson 47. 
is - 6 Eodem eK6 die sJ factus OMais - I certior(c.) ## ab 

'On (the) 'same day | being-made sure by 

or-ons.pi.6 ex ploratoribus 

(the) scouts [being informed with certainty by the scouts] 
is-i S .pu h os tes consedisse sub 

(that) (the) enemy had-set-down | under [at the foot of] 

"•- nti, - 4 moiiteni,(m.) ## octo pU millia QspL2 passuum ab 
(the) mountain, eight thousand paces from 

m - p1,6 castris se,2 ipsius; misit, 

I the camp of-him [from his, Caesar's, camp] ; he-sent (those), 

ui,pU qui cognoscerent, iSHi8,1 qualis esset ] natura 

who might-ascertain, what might-be (the) nature 

ns_ntis - 2 montis, et is ~ isl qualis fis,1 ascensus in Qs,6 circuitu 

'of (the) fountain and what (the) ascent in (the) circuit 

Renuntiatum est esse is ~ is - 4 facilem. De 6 tertia 

(thereof). It-was-announced to-be easy. At (the) third 

6 vigilia, jubet s,4 Titum s,4 Labienum s,4 legatum, pro 

watch, he-orders (his) lieutenant, | for 

or-or.s.6 p r8e tore ? cum p1 - 6 duabus 

pretor [with pretorian power], with two 

io-ini S .pi.6 legionibus, (/. ) •* et is * pK6 iis x - cis - p1 - 6 ducibus, 

legions, and (the) same guides, 

ui » pU qui cognoverant er ~ ineris - 4 iter,(7i.)°* ascendere m - 4 summum 
who knew (the) road, to-ascend (the) highest 

m - 4 jugum DS - Dti3 - 2 montis;(m.)* # ostendit "-'quid sit m - 2 sui 

top 'of (the) 'mountain; he-shows what was his 

m,2 consilii. sel Ipse de 6 quarts 6 vigilia contendit 

intention. He-himself about (the) fourth watch hastened 

ad is - ph4 eos is - 6 eodem er - iDeris - 6 itinere,(m.)* # od6 quo 

to them 'by (the) 'same road, by-which 

is ~ is,pU hostes ierant; que* mittit is ~ is,4 omnem Qs * 4 equitatunr 

(the) enemy had-gone; and sends all (the) cavalry 

ante 4 se. (3) ** s,1 Publius ^Considius, uU qui habebatur 
before him. Publius Considius, who was- held 



ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — INTERROGATIVES. 101 

8,1 peritissimus(s.)*° is_is,2 militaris * k2 rei, et fuerat in 
most-skilled (in) military affairs, and had-been in 

Gs,6 exercitu s - 2 Lucii 2 Syllae, et postea s2 Marci 

(the) army of-Lucius Syllae, and afterwards (in that) of-Marcus 

'• 2 Crassi, praemittitur cum op -° ri «-P 1 - 6 exploratoribus. 
Crassus, is-sent-forward with (the) scouts. 



Lesson 48. 

Eodem die ab exploratoribus certior factus, hostes sub 
monteni consedisse, millia passuuru ab ipsius castris octo; 
qualis esset natura montis, et qualis in circuitu ascensus, 
qui cognoseerent misit; renunciatum est, facilem esse. De 
tertia vigilia Titum Labienum legatum, pro praetore, cum 
duabus legionibus, et iis ducibus, qui iter cognoverant, sum- 
mum jugum montis ascendere jubet; quid sui consilii sit 
ostendit. Ipse de quarta vigilia eodem itinere, quo hostes 
ierant, ad eos contendit, equitatumque omnem ante se mittit. 
Publius Considius, qui rei militaris peritissimus habebatur, 
et in exercitu Lucii Syllae, et postea in Marci Crassi fuerat, 
cum exploratoribus, praemittitur. 

Exercises on Lessons 47 and 48. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Vigilia. Dux. Iter. Mons. Jubet. Quid. Ipse. 
Eodem. Hostes. Contendit. Equitatus. Mittit. Peri- 
tissimus. Exploratores. Passus. Octo. Qualis. Ascen- 
sus. Misit. Facilis. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Mountain. Paces. Who. Ascent. Circuit. Easy. 
Guides. Third. Two. Watch. The same. He orders. 
Day. Scouts. Enemy. He is sent forward. They knew. 
The highest. Road. Top. What. He hastened. He 
sends. Cavalry. Most skilled. Army. 
9* 



102 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS — INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Titum Labienum surnmum jugurn montis ascendere jubet. 
Ipse eodem itinere ad eos contendit. Equitatum ante se 
mittit. Publius Considius cum exploratoribus prsemittitur. 
Certior factus, hostes sub montem consedisse. Qui cognos- 
cerent, misit. Qualis esset natura montis. Renunciatum 
est, facilem esse. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin, 

Considius is sent forward with the scouts. Who knew 
the road. He shows what his intention was. He himself 
hastened to them. By the same road he sends all the cavalry 
before him. Who was held most skilled in military affairs. 
At the foot of the mountain. He sent those, who might 
ascertain what might be the nature of the mountain. It 
was announced to be easy. With two legions and the same 
guides. 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

The possessive pronouns are meus — my, tuus — thy, situs — 
Ms, noster — our, vester — yours, and cujus — whose. Mens, 
tuus, suus and cujus, are declined and designated like bonus, 
bona, bonum — good; noster and vester like piger, pigra, 
pigrum — slothful. Pte is sometimes added to the ablative 
singular of possessive pronouns : as, suapte manu — by his 
own hand. Met is sometimes added to meus, &c 

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

The indefinite pronouns are aliquis — some one, siquis — if 
any, nequis — lest any, quisque — every one, quisquam, — any 
one, quispiam — some one, unusquisque — each, aliquispiam — 
any, some, quidam — a certain one, quilibet and quivis — any 
one you please. 

Aliquis is declined like quis, except that it has aliqua in 
the nominative singular feminine, and in the nominative and 



VERBS. 103 

accusative plural neuter; also, in the nominative and accu- 
sative singular neuter, it has aliquod or aliquid. 

Sfquis and nequis are declined like aliquis, but sometimes 
have siquse, nequas, in the nominative singular feminine. 

Quisque, quisquam, and quispiam, are declined like quis, 
with some slight variation in the nominative and accusative 
neuter singular. 

Unusquisque is declined like unus and quis : as, nomina- 
tive, unusquisque ; genitive, uniuscujusque. 

Quidam, quilibet, and quivis, are declined like qui. Qui- 
darn has generally an n before d, in the accusative singular 
and genitive plural : as, accusative singular, quendam ; geni- 
tive plural, quorundam. 



VERBS. 

The changes that a verb undergoes are called conjugations. 
There are four conjugations. The first has a (long) before the 
infinitive active present : as, amdre — to love ; the second has 
e (long) before the same : as, monere — to advise ; the third 
has e (short) before the same: as, regere — to rule; and the 
fourth has I (long) before the same : as, audlre — to hear. 

To the conjugations of Latin verbs belong voices, moods, 
tenses, numbers, and persons; besides participles, gerunds, 
and supines. 

Voices. — There are two voices, active and passive : as, 
active, amo — I love ; passive, amor — lam loved. 

Moods. — There are four moods : — 1st, the indicative, which 
absolutely asserts an action: as, amo — Hove; 2d, the sub- 
junctive, which expresses an action as modified by some con- 
dition or circumstance, or asserts an action in an indirect or 
aot absolute manner : as, amem — 1 may love, si amem — if I 
Love; or indirect assertion, amem — Hove; 3d, the impera- 
tive mood, which commands: as, ama — love thou; and 4th ? 



104 VERBS. 

the infinitive mood, which expresses an action in an indefinite 
or unlimited sense, and has neither number nor person. 

In Latin, there is often a peculiar construction, or use, of 
the infinitive, namely : when the nominative of the verb in 
the indicative, in English, is put in the accusative, and the 
verb in the indicative, in English, is put in the infinitive. 
This construction is denoted in the interlinear transla- 
tions above, in English, by placing {that) in parentheses, 
before the sentence : as, hostes consedisse — (that) the enemy 
had set down. So that, in English, this form of the infini- 
tive is expressed by the indicative, with that commencing 
the sentence. 

Tenses. — There are six tenses in Latin, denoted by their 
termination in the active voice : — 1st, the present: as, amo 
— Hove, or am loving; 2d, the imperfect: as, amabam — 
I was loving, or did love, in the sense of not having com- 
pleted the action ; 3d, future : as, amabo — I shall love ; 4th, 
the perfect, which denotes an action finished : as, amavi — I 
have loved; 5th, the pluperfect : as, amaveram — I had 
loved ; 6th, future perfect : as, amavero — 1 shall have loved. 

Numbers. — There are two numbers, the singular and 
plural. 

Persons. — There are three persons, the first, second, and 
third. 

Participles. — Under this name adjective participles are 
denoted : that is, uniting the sense of an adjective with that 
of the verb, and having voice and tense, but no persons, and 
are declined like an adjective. There are four participles, 
namely: — two in the active voice: as, present, amans — 
loving; future, amaturus — about to love; and two in the 
passive voice: as, perfect, amatus — loved, or having been 
loved ; future, amandus — to be loved,. 

Gerunds. — Under this name noun participles are denoted : 
that is, uniting the sense of a noun with that of the verb. 
The gerund is declined like a noun of the second declension, 
but has no nominative and no plural; as, amandi— of loving. 



VERBS. 105 

Supines. — There are two supines, the supine in um, and 
the supine in u, The supine in um is a modified meaning 
of the noun participle ; its principal meaning is to be about 
to be occupied in the action, or carrying on of the action. 
It is generally used after a verb of motion or transfer : as, 
pabulatum mittere — to send a foraging. The supine in u 
may be considered as a species of adverb participles, and is 
principally used with, or to limit, or modify adjectives : as, 
mirabile dictu — wonderful to tell, or to be told, or wonderful 
in telling, or wonderful, tellingly. 

It is in the first person singular, indicative mood, active 
voice, that words are to be looked for in the dictionary : as, 
amo, moneo, rego, audio. 

There are three principal tenses, or forms, from which all 
the other tenses and forms, in the different voices and moods, 
are derived, namely : first, the present active indicative, or 
the present infinitive of the same ; second, the perfect active 
indicative ; and third, the supine in um. 

From the present active indicative, or present active infi- 
nitive, are derived, or formed, the present, the imperfect, and 
the future tenses, in each voice ; the present and imperfect 
subjunctive of each voice; the present infinitive of each 
voice ; also, the present participle, the gerund, and the future 
participle passive. 

From the perfect active indicative are derived, or formed, 
the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect indicative, active 
voice; the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive, active voice; 
and the perfect infinitive, active voice. 

From the supine in um are derived, or formed, the supines 
in um and u, the perfect participle, and all the compound 
tenses of the passive voice, formed by this participle and 
sum ; likewise, the future active participle ; also, the future 
infinitive passive, formed by the supine in um, and the pas- 
sive infinitive of the verb iri, and the future active infinitive, 
formed by the future active participle and esse. 

These principal forms, from which all the other tenses are 



106 VERBS. 

derived, are denoted in the dictionary : that is, the termina- 
tions of the infinitive, perfect, and supine, are placed after 
the indicative present, first person, active voice. 

In order to indicate the above different parts and modifi- 
cations of the verb, the following signs and abbreviations are 
used : 

Voices. — P placed before the numbers indicating tense, 
or before the sign of the subjunctive mood, denotes the pas- 
sive voice ; the active voice does not require to be indicated. 
When the verb is deponent, d is used, in place of p. 

Moods. — The indicative mood does not require to be par- 
ticularly designated. The subjunctive mood is denoted by 
an s, or sb, placed before the numbers indicating tense. The 
imperative mood has an im, placed in like manner; and the 
infinitive an in. 

Tenses. — Tenses are denoted by numbers placed in pa- 
rentheses before the verb : as, (1) indicates the present tense, 
(2) the imperfect tense, (3) the future, (4) the perfect, (5) the 
pluperfect, and (6) the future perfect. 

Numbers and Persons. — Persons are denoted by placing 
1 for the first person, 2 for the second person, and 3 for the 
third person, in brackets [I] , after the verb. The plural 
is indicated by placing pi. before these numbers : as, 
(1) amamus [p] ' n , we love. The singular requires no sign : as, 
(1, amo. [l] 

Participles, Gerunds, and Supines. — Participles are 
denoted by placing par., in brackets, after the verb : as, 
(1) ama??s rpar,] ; the declension of the participle is placed 
next it, after the sign of tense: as, (]) - us ~ a{,sA amans [ ^ rU \ 
Gerunds are, in like manner, indicated by placing [ger.~] 
after the verb These gerunds have not the signs of tense, 
but only those of declension before them. The supine iu um 
is denoted by placing [um'] in brackets after the verb, and 
that in u by, in like manner, placing [u]. 

The letters, or terminations, indicating the three principal 
tenses or parts, from which all the other tenses and forms are 



VERBS. 107 

derived, are placed first before the verb : as, |ar_avi ~ aturn - (,) amo t,J , 
/ love. 

The first conjugation is denoted by ar—avi—atum; ar de- 
noting either the first person singular, present indicative 
active, by dropping ar and adding o : as, amo — -i" love ; or 
the infinitive of the same, by adding e : as, amare — to love. 
When any irregular form of this conjugation occurs, other 
letters must be added to all or some of these three principal 
tenses or forms : as, in do — I give, ar—edi-atum indicating 
that these, and the tenses formed from them, are added to 
the commencing d of do. 

The second conjugation is denoted by er-ui-itum, or by 
er—evi—ctum ; the r of the first form is dropped, and o is 
added, to form the present tense, first person singular, and e 
is added to the end of er for the present infinitive. Besides 
these, there are irregularities in these principal forms, which 
will require to be indicated by other or additional letters. 

The third conjugation is very irregular as respects these 
three principal tenses, or forms, especially in the perfect and 
supine. The conjugation itself is always denoted by er for 
the present and infinitive present; the er being dropped, and 
o added for the present, first person singular, and an e added 
to er for the infinitive ; but, on account of the great irregu- 
larities, the er would often require more letters before it : as 
in rego — to rule, ger—xi-ctum; making rego, regere, rexi, 
rectum. Sometimes the perfect begins with a different letter 
from the present, when it may be necessary to put the entire 
verb in italics to denote this : as in ago — to act, ger—egi-ctum ; 
making ago, agere, egi, actum. 

The fourth conjugation is denoted by ir-ivi—itum ; the r 
of the first form ir is dropped, and o added to form the first 
person present singular, and e is added to the end of ir to 
form the infinitive. Those verbs of this conjugation that 
are irregular, are designated as above. 

When, in any of the four conjugations, a letter, or letters, 
that belong to the first principal part, are dropped in the 



108 VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

second or third principal part, or in both, such dropped let- 
ter, or letters, arc placed in parentheses ( ) before the first 
principal part : as in jubeo — I order, (b) er—ssi—ssum ; making 
jubeo, jubere, jussi, jussum. 

A perpendicular line is placed before one of these prin- 
cipal tenses, or forms, to denote that the tense or form of the 
verb is derived from it: as, ar-|avi " atum,(5) ama2;eram [1] , I had 
loved ; or, |ar " avi_atum(2) ama6a^ [3] , he did love, or was loving. 

When the present differs altogether from the infinitive, 
both are denoted entire in italics, between parentheses : as 
in sum — I am (sum— esse), e—ui; or, as in eo — I go (eo—iri), 
ir-ivi—itum ; all the principal parts being in this last ex- 
ample entire, and in italics. When any principal part 
differs entirely from its regular termination, it will be neces- 
sary to substitute the entire verb, in italics, therefor : as in 
do — 1 give, ar—dedi— datum ; making do, dare, dedi, datum. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 

Active Voice. 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

Present Indicative. Present Infinitive. Perfect Indicative. Supine. 

Amo. Amare (ar). Amavi (avi). Amatum (atum). 

I-love. to-love. I-have-loved. a-loving. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

"Ar." (I) Present Tense. I, &c, love. 

Terminations. 

SINGULAR. 

(1) Amo [1], I love o. 

(1) Amas [2], thou lovest as. 

(1) Amat [3], he loves at. 

PLURAL. 

(1) Amamus [pi. 1], we love amus. 

(1) Amatis [pi. 2], ye or you love atis. 

(1) Amant [pi. 3], they love ant. 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 109 

"Ar." (2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c., was loving, or did love. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

(2) Amabam [1], I was loving, or did love abam. 

(2) Atnabas [2], thou wast loving, or didst love abas. 

(2) Amabat [3], he was loving, or did love abat. 

PLURAL. 

(2) Amabamus [pi. 1], we were loving, or did love abaraus. 

(2) Amabatis [pi. 2], you were loving, or did love abatis. 

(2) Amabant [pi. 3], they were loving, or did love abant. 

"Ar." (3) Future Tense. I, &c, shall or will love. 

SINGULAR. 

(3) Amabo [1], I shall love abo. 

(3) Amabis [2], thou wilt love abis. 

(3) Amabit [3], he will love abit. 

PLURAL. 

(3) Amabimus [pi. 1], we shall love abimus. 

(3) Amabitis [pi. 2], you will love abitis. 

(3) Amabunt [pi. 3], they will love abunt. 

"Avi." (4) Perfect Tense. I, &c, have loved, or loved. 

SINGULAR. 

(4) Amavi [1], I have loved avi. 

(4) Amavisti [2], thou hast loved ....a[vi]sti. 

(4) Amavit [3], he has loved avit. 

PLURAL. 

(4) Amavimus [pi. 1], we have loved avimus. 

(4) Amavistis [pi. 2], you have loved a[vi]stis. 

(4) Amaverunt or ainavere [pi. 3], they have loved a[ve]runt or avere. 

"Avi." (5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c, had loved. 

SINGULAR. 

(5) Amaveram [1], I had loved a[ve]ram. 

(5) Amaveras [2], thou hadst loved a[ve]ras. 

(5) Amaverat [3], he had loved a[ve]rat. 

PLURAL. 

(5) Amaveramus [pi. 1], we had loved a[ve]ramus. 

(5) Amaveratis [pi. 2], you had loved ^ a[ve]ratis. 

(5) Amaverant [pi. 3], they had loved a[ve]rant 

10 



110 VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

"Avi" (6) Future Perfect. I, &c, shall or loill have loved. 

SINGULAR. t Terminations. 

(6) Amavero [1], I shall have loved a[ve]ro. 

(6) Ainaveris [2], thou wilt have loved a[ve]ris. 

(6) Amaverit [3], he will have loved a[ve]rit. 

PLURAL. 

(6) Amaverimus [pi. 1], we shall have loved a[ve]rimus. 

(6) Amaveritis [pi. 2], you will have loved a[ve]ritis. 

(6) Amaverint [pi. 3], they will have loved , a[ve]rint* 

In the above it will be seen, that the (,) present, (2) imper- 
fect, and (3) future tenses, with their numbers and persons, 
are formed from the first principal part, ar ; and that the (4) 
perfect, (5) pluperfect, and (6) perfect future tenses, with their 
numbers and persons, are formed from the second principal 
part, avi. 

In the (1) present tense, the ar is changed into o in the 
first person singular, into as in the second, and into at in the 
third person singular; in the plural, this ar is changed into 
araus in the first, into atis in the second, and into ant in the 
third person. 

In the (2) imperfect tense, the ar is changed, in the singu- 
gar, into abam in the first person, into abas in the second 
person, and into abat in the third person ; in the plural, the 
ar is changed into abamus in the first person, into abatis in 
the second person, and into abant in the third person. 

In the (3) future tense, this ar is changed, in the singular, 
into abo in the first person, into abis in the second person, 
and into abit in the third person ; in the plural, it is changed 
into abimus in the first person, in the second into abitis, and 
in the third into abunt. 

In the (4) perfect tense, avi is the same as the second prin- 
cipal part, and denotes the first person singular; in the 
second person, sti is added to avi; and in the third, t is 
added to the same ; in the plural, mus is added to avi in the 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. Ill 

first person, stis in the second person, and in the third the i 
of avi is changed into e, and runt or re added. 

In the (5) pluperfect tense, the i of avi is changed into e in 
all the numbers and persons. In the singular, first person, 
ram is added to this e, in the second ras, and in the third 
rat ; in the plural, ramus is added for the first person, ratis 
for the second, and rant for the third. 

In the (6) future perfect tense, the i of avi is changed into 
e in all the numbers and persons. In the singular, first 
person, ro is added to this e, in the second ris, and in the 
third rit ; in the plural, rimus is added to the first person, 
ritis to the second, and rint to the third. 

Av is properly the distinctive form of the second principal 
part, the i being added to form the first person singular. 

In the perfect tense, in the second person singular, ama- 
visti, the vi in the termination, a[yi~\sti, is placed in brackets; 
this denotes that the vi may be omitted, and the second per- 
son singular contracted into amdsti, instead of amavisti ; so, 
in like manner, the vi in the second person plural may be 
omitted, and amavistis contracted into amdstis. In the 
third person plural of the same, the ve in brackets in the 
termination may be omitted, and amaverunt contracted into 
amdrunt. 

In the pluperfect tense, the ve in brackets, in the termi- 
nations of all the numbers and persons, may be omitted, and 
the verb contracted : as, amaveram into amdram, amaveras 
into amdras, &c, &c. 

In the future perfect, the ve in brackets, in the termina- 
tions of all the numbers and persons, may be omitted, and 
the verb contracted : as, amavero into amdro, amaveris into 
amdris, &c, &c. 

These contractions only take place when s follows vi, or 
when r follows ve. They are here denoted by a circumflex 
over the vowel preceding the s or r. 



112 VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 



Lesson 49. 

J Ego (1)# * al - ulisJ consul video ic - pU hosce, et 

I (the) consul see these (persons), and 

I ar~avi-atum.(i) rQ ^ Q [i] • • 4 sen tentiam de 6 republics ; 

I-ask (their) opinion concerning (the) republic; 

et nondum l«**»-< , >vuliiero tll# * is ' pU eos 

and | *do not yet 'wound those 

X-cis.6 VQce ^ 

*with (nay) ' voice [I do not yet publicly charge them with their guilt], 

ui,pU quos oportebat trucidari m,6 ferro. 

whom it-did-behove to-be-slaughtered with iron [the sword]. 

Igitur 5 Catilina fuisti apud 4 Leccani, 

Therefore Catiline you-were at Lecca's (house), 

la - 6 illa x - ctis - 6 nocte; distribuisti rs - rtis - pL4 partes 2 Italise; 

on that night; you-distributed (the) parts of-Italy (to 

statuisti quo placeret 

your followers) ; you-appointed whither it-might-please (you) (for) 

uis,4 quemque proficisci; delegisti ui,pU quos 

each-one to-go; you-selected (those) whom 

relinqueres 2 Romae uLpL4 quos educeres 

you-might-leave at-Rome (and those) whom you-might-lead-out 

cum- 4 te-; (2)0# descripsisti rs " rtis - pU partes 
(of the city) with you ; you-designated (the) parts 

bs-bis.2 urbis ad m - pK4 incendia; ar - lavi - atum - (4) confirm asti/ 2]# * 
of-the-city for conflagration; you-amrmed, (that) 

4 te (2)# * se - 4 ipsum esse jam exiturum; dixisti 

you yourself were now about-to-depart; you-said (that) 

esse etiam turn paullulum 2 morae 3 tibi/ 2)# * quod 

there-was even then (a) very-little delay to-you, because 

i e go (,)0 * viverem. pU Duo s - pU Romani es - itis ' pU equites 
I (yet) lived. Two Roman knights 

reperti sunt, uipU1 qui liberarent 4 te (2)## ta6 ista 6 cura, 

were found, who would-free you from-that care, 

et pollicerentur pU sese (3) * * interfecturos 4 me (,)# * in 

and promised (that) they would-kill me in 

•■ 6 meo s - 6 lectulo 6 ilia *- ctis - 6 nocte sa>6 ipsa, paullo ante 
my bed on-that night itself, (a) little before 

^•Mucem. 'Ego^** comperi e - is - pU omnia 0C - pU ha3c, 

(day) light. I discovered all these (things), 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 113 

etiam er6 vestro Qs-6 coetu vix dum dimisso : munivi 

even your assembly ■ being scarcely yet J dismissed : I-fortified 

atque ar ~ ' **'***»»'& firniavi f,] •• 4 meam 6 - 4 domum (/.) •• 
and strengthened my house 

or-oris.pi.e m a j oribtis (c) # * m,p '- 6 prsesidiis ; exclusi is - pU eos 

with-stronger guards; I-excluded those 

ui.pu ^ uos i tu ( 2) • • m i seras ad 4 me (1) * * ar ~ avi - ' 1,um - salutatum [um] * * 

whom you had-sent to me a-saluting 

mane; quum le -p ,J illi 8e - pM ipsi venissent, 

1 in (the) horning; when those (persons) themselves had-come, 

ui. P i.4q U0S i e g O 0)»« j am praedixeram 

(and concerning) whom I l had already 'foretold 

•• pK3 multis ac "-p 1 - 3 sum mis r - pK3 viris 

to-many and * to (the) highest men (that) 

esse venturos ad 'me )** is - 4 id us,oris - 2 temporis. 

they-were-about-to-come to me (at) that time. 

The stroke before | ar, in rogo, denotes that it is formed 
from the first principal part, as also ar, in vuhiero. The 
stroke before | avi, in confirmasti, denotes that it is derived 
from the second principal part, and the circumflex over a, 
that it is contracted from confirmavisti. 

The learner, as in the declensions, must make himself 
gradually acquainted with the conjugations. In the above 
lesson, he is only to conjugate the indicative mood, active 
voice. 

Lesson 50. 

Hosce ego video consul, et de republic^ sententiam rogo ; 
et, quos ferro trucidari oportebat, eos nondum voce vulnero. 
Fuisti igitur apud Leccani ilia nocte, Catilina : distribuisti 
partes Italiae : statuisti quo quemque proficisci placeret ; 
delegisti quos lionise relinqueres ) quos tecum educeres ; de- 
scripsisti urbis partes ad incendia; confirmasti, te ipsum jam 
esse exiturum ; dixisti paullulum tibi esse etiam turn morse, 
quod ego viverem. Reperti sunt duo equites Romani, qui 
te ista cura liberarent, et sese ilia ipsa nocte paullo ante 
lucem me meo in lectulo interfecturos pollicerentur. Haec 
10* 



114 VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

ego omnia, vix dum etiara coetu vestro dimisso, comperi; 
domum meam majoribus praesidiis munivi atque firmavi \ ex- 
clusi eos, quos tu mane ad me salutatum miseras, quum illi 
ipsi venissent; quos ego jam multis ac summis viris ad me 
id temporis ventaros esse praedixeram. 

Exercises on Lessons 49 and 50. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Equites. Nox. Lux. Coetus. Firmavi. Domus. Qui- 
bus. Salutatum. Salutabo. Illi. Yiris. Tempus. Rogat. 
Ferrum. Vulnerant. Confirmasti. Confirmaverat. Mora. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

I. All. Scarcely. They strengthened. House. Guards. 
In the morning. Already. Many. City. Conflagration. 
You. You said. Who. Care. Night. I asked. They 
will ask. Not yet. He wounds. To be slaughtered. 
Whither. To go. I see. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Tu mane ad me miseras. Exclusi eos quum venissent. 
Multis viris praedixeram. Reperti sunt, qui te i-stsi cur& 
liberarent. Me interfecturos pollicerentur. Haec ego omnia 
comperi. Domum meam munivi atque firmavi. Hosce ego 
video. De republica sententiam rogat. Eos nondum voce 
vulneravi. Fuisti apud Leccam. Delegisti quos tecum edu- 
ceres. Quo proficisci placeret. Descripsisti urbis partes ad 
incendia. Confirmavit se ipsum esse exiturum. Paullulum 
tibi esse turn morae. Quod ego viverem. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

That they were about to come to me. A little before day- 
light. Your assembly being scarcely yet dismissed. I for- 
tified and strengthened my house. Whom he had sent to 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 115 

me a saluting. When those persons had come. You desig- 
nated the parts of the city for conflagration. He affirmed 
that he was about to depart. You said that there was a very 
little delay to you. Two Roman knights were found. They 
promised that they would kill me. I discovered all these 
things. You strengthened your house. When those had 
come ; whom I foretold. 

SB. SUBJECTIVE MOOD — ACTIVE VOICE. 

"Ar." sb. (1) Present Tense. I, &c, may love, if I love, &c. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

sb. (1) Amein [1], I may, &c, love em. 

sb. (1) Ames [2], thou ma} T st, &c, love es. 

sb. (1) Amet [3], he may, <fcc, love et. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (1) Amemus [pi. 1], we may, &c, love emus. 

sb. (1) Ametis [pi. 2], ye or you may, &c, love etis. 

sb. (1) Anient [pi. 3], they may, &c, love ent. 

"Ar." sb. (2) Imperfect. I, &c, might, could, icould, or should love. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (2) Amarem [1], I might, <fec, love arem. 

sb. (2) Amares [2], thou mightst, Ac, love ares. 

sb. (2) Amaret [3], he might, <fcc., love aret. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (2) Amaremus [pi. 1], we might, <fec, love aremus. 

sb. (2) Amaretis [pi. 2], you might, &c, love aretis. 

sb. (2) Amarent [pi. 3], they might, &c., love arent. 

"Avt," sb. (4) Perfect. I may, &c, have loved. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (4) Amaverim [1], I may have loved a[ve]rim. 

sb. (4) Amaveris [2], thou mayst have loved -. a[ve]ris. 

sb. (4) Amaverit [3], he may have loved a[ve]rit. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (4) Amaverimus [pi. 1], we may have loved a[ve]rimus. 

sb. (4) Amaveritis [pi. 2], you may have loved a[ve]ritis. 

sb. (4) Amaverint [pi. 3], they may have loved a[ve]rint 



116 VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

"Avi." sb. (5) Pluperfect. I, &c, might, could, would, or should 
have loved. 

singular. Terminations. 

sb. (5) Amavissem [1], I might, &c, have loved a[vi]ssem. 

sb. (5) Amavisses [2], thou mightst, &c, have loved a[vi]sses. 

sb. (5) Amavisset [3], he might, Ac, have loved a[vi]sset. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (5) Amavissemus [pi. 1], we might, <fcc., have loved a[vi]ssemus. 

sb. (5) Amavissetis [pi. 2], you might, &c, have loved a[vijssetis. 

sb. (5) Amavissent [pi. 3], they might, &c, have loved a[vi]ssent. 



"ar." im. imperative mood. 

SINGULAR. 

im. Ama or amato [2], love thou a or ato# 

im. Amato [3], let him love ato# ' 

PLURAL. 

im. Amate or amatote [pi. 2], love ye ate or atote. 

im. Amanto [pi. 3], let them love anto# 



IN. INFINITIVE MOOD. 

"Ar." in. (1) Present. 

in. (1) Amare, to love are> 

"Avi." in. (4) Perfect. 
in. (4) Amavisse, to have loved avisse. 

"Atum." in. (3) Future. 
in. (3) Amaturus esse, to be about to love aturus esse. 

PARTICIPLE [PART.]. 

"Ar." (1) Present. 

(1) ns-ntis. I. Amans [part.], loving ans# 

"Atum." (3) Future. 
(3) us-a-um. 1. Amaturus [part.], about to love aturus-a^um. 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 117 

"ar." gerund [ger.]. 

Terminations. 

2. G. Amandi, of loving andi. 

3. D. A man do, to or for loving ando. 

4. A. Amandum, loving andum. 

6.A6.Amando, by, &c, loving ando. 

"atum." supine [um] in um. 
Amatum [um], a loving atum. 

In the above, it will be perceived that the (,) present, and 
the (2) imperfect subjunctive, with the imperative, and all 
their numbers and persons, are formed from the first principal 
part, ar ; also, the present infinitive, present participle, and 
the gerunds, are formed from the same principal part, ar. 
The (4) perfect and (5) pluperfect subjunctive, with their num- 
bers and persons, are formed from the second principal part, 
avi ; also, the (4) perfect infinitive is formed from the same. 
The future participle, the future infinitive, and the supine in 
um, are formed from the third principal part, atum. 

In the present tense, the ar is changed into em in the 
first person singular subjunctive, in the second person sin- 
gular into es, and in the third person singular into et ; in the 
plural of the same, ar is changed into emus in the first, into 
etis in the second, and into ent in the third person. 

In the imperfect tense, subjunctive, the ar is changed, in 
the singular, into arem in the first, ares in the second, and 
aret in the third person ; in the plural, the ar is changed 
into aremus in the first, into aret is in the second, and into 
arent in the third person. 

In the perfect tense, subjunctive, avi, in the singular, is 
changed into avervm in the first, into averts in the second, 
and into averit in the third person ; in the plural, avi is 
changed into averimus in the first person, into averitis in the 
second person, and into averint in the third person. 

In the pluperfect subjunctive, avi, in the singular, is 
changed into avissem in the first, into avisses in the second, 



118 VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

and into avisset in the third person; in the plural, avi is 
changed into avissemus in the first, into avissetis in the second, 
and into avissent in the third person. 

In the imperative mood, in the singular, ar is changed 
into a or ato in the second, and into ato in the third person; 
in the plural, ar is changed into ate or atote in the second, 
and into anto in the third person. 

In the infinitive, in the present tense, ar is changed into 
are ; in the perfect tense, avi is changed into avisse ; and in 
the future, atum. is changed into aturus. 

In the participle present, ar is changed into arts ; in the 
future, atum is changed into aturus. 

In the gerunds, ar is changed into Gen. andi, Dat. ando, 
Ace. andum, Ab. ando. 

The supine, amatum, is the same as the third principal 
part, atum. 

The ve included in brackets, in the terminations of the 
perfect indicative subjunctive, and the vi included in brack- 
ets in the pluperfect subjunctive, may be omitted in the same 
manner as in the indicative perfect, pluperfect, and future 
perfect tenses. 

Lesson 51. 

ea - 6 Ea ei - 6 re 6 impetrata, rparU * # is - is - pU omnes ns - ntis -P u nentes 

That thing being-obtained, all weeping 

projecerunt pU sese (3) ** ad ar " aris - 3 Csesari es - edis - pU pedes 

threw themselves at Caesar's feet (saying), 

P u« se (3)o« con tendere et |ar - avi - atum - in - (,) laborare non 
(that) "they endeavored and labored no 

minus i(L4 id, idpK4 ea, odpU qu8e dixissent 

less (for) that, (that) those (things), which they-may-have-said, 

ne enuntiarentur, quam uti 

Should not ^e-divulged, than that 

I ar-avi- a tum.sb.(2) i mpe trarent [pL3] • • ld - pU ea od - pM quse 

they-might-obtain those (things) which 

vellent ; propterea quod si enuntiatum esset, 

they-might-wish; because that if it-should-be-divulged, 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 119 

viderent 4 se (3)## venturos in 

they-perceived | (that) they were-about-to-come in 

"• 4 summum Gs ' 4 cruciatum." 

(the) greatest torture [that they would have to suffer the ex- 

s,1 Divitiacus 8,1 iEduus locutus est pro 

treme of torture]." Divitiacus (the) iEduan spoke for 

ic - flK6 his; "esse pL4 duas io - ionis - pl - 4 facti ones (/.)** 

these ; (he said, that) "there-were two factions 

a - ius - 2 totius 2 Gralliae; 8 - pU iEduos tenere Gs - 4 principatura 

(in) all Gaul; (that the) iEdui held (the) sovereignty 

a - ius - 2 alterius • c - p, - 2 harum, 8 ' pU Arvernos a " ius - 2 alterius. Quum 
of-one of-these, (the) Averni ' of (the) ' other. When 

lc - pU hi contenderent tantopere inter P l - 4 se < 3 ) ## de 
these contended so-earnestly . between themselves for 

^potentatu 8 - pM multos 8,pL4 annos, factum esse, 

dominion (during) many years, | it-was-done [it 

nti s,pU Grermani accerserentur ab s ' p, * 6 Arvernis 
happened], that (the) Germans were-called-in by (the) Arverni 

que* 8 - pK6 Sequanis , ? es_edis - 6 mercede. Primo circiter 

and Sequani, for-hire. (At) first about 

quindeciin millia icp, - 2 horum transisse 8,4 Rhenum; 
fifteen thousand of-these had-crossed-over (the) Rhine; 

posteaquam "* pU feri ac 8 - pU barbari °~ iDis ' pL1 homines 

after- that (these) wild and barbarous men 

ar- I avi-atu m .sb. (5) a( J am fa^t [ P 1.3] • • er.pl.4 agrog et Qs.4 cu l tum> 

had-fallen-in-love (with) (the) lands and cultivation, 

et pM copias 8,pl ' 2 Gallorum, ,ls - Qris - pU plures (c.) ## 

and stores of-the- Gauls, (that) more 

transductos; nunc esse in 6 Gallia centum et 

were-led-over; (that) now there-were in Gaul (a) hundred and 

viginti pL2 millium, ad m,4 numerum." 

twenty thousand (Germans), in number." 



Lesson 52. 

Ea re impetrata, sese omnes flentes Caesari ad pedes pro- 
jecerunt; " non minus se id contendere et laborare, ne ea, 
quae dixissent, enunciarentur, quam uti ea, quae vellent, im- 
petrarent; propterea, quod si enunciatum esset, summum in 



120 VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

cruciatum se venturos viderent." Locutus est pro his Divi- 
tiacus iEduus; " Galliae totius factiones esse duas; harum 
alterius principatum tenere iEduos, alterius Arvernos. Hi 
quum tantopere de potentatu inter se multos annos conten- 
derent, factum esse, uti ab Arvernis Sequanisque Germani 
mercede accerserentur. Horum primo circiter millia quin- 
decim Rhenum transisse; posteaquam agros, et cultutn, et 
copias Grallorum, homines feri ac barbari adam assent, trans- 
ductos plures; nunc esse in Gallia ad centum et viginti 
millium numerum." 

Exercises on Lessons 51 and 52. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Tantopere. Potentatus. Anni. Merces. Homo. Ferus. 
Adamassent. Adamavisset. Plus. Ager. Sese. Pedes. 
Dixissent. Yellent. Impetrarent. Impetrarem. Impe- 
traretis. Totus. Duae. Alter. Principatus. Tenere. 
Laborare. Laborans. Laboravisse. Laboraturus. Labo- 
randi. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

About. After that. Wild. The lands. Stores. More. 
Now. Hundred. He spoke. Sovereignty. Dominion. 
Many. Hire. Weeping. Foot. He will labor. Less. 
He might obtain. Because. They perceived. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Locutus est Divitiacus. Principatum tenere iEduos. De 
potentatu multos annos contenderent. Factum est uti Ger- 
mani accerserentur. Agros, et cultum Gallorum adamassent. 
Sese omnes fientes Caesari ad pedes projecerunt. Non minus 
se id laborare. Ne ea enunciarentur. Uti ea, quae vellent, 
impetrarent. Si enunciatum esset. 



VERBS — SUM. 121 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Fifteen thousand of these had crossed over the Rhine. 
After that they had fallen in love with the lands, and stores 
of the Grauls. Divitiacus spoke for these. That the iEdui 
held the sovereignty. These contended for dominion. The 
Germans were called in by the Arverni. All threw them- 
selves at Caesar's feet. That those things should not be di- 
vulged. That they might obtain those things which they 
might wish. 

Before proceeding to the passive form of this first conju- 
gation, it will be necessary to give the conjugation of the 
verb sum — I am; for many of the tenses in the passive voice 
are formed by this verb sum, and the past participle. 

SUM — I AM. 

This verb, sum, is very irregular; and, from its nature, 
has no passive voice. 





PRINCIPAL PARTS. 




Sum. 


Esse (e). 


Fui (ui). 


I-am. 


to-be. 


I-have-been, 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
"Sum." (1) Present Tense. I, &c, am. 



Terminations. 

SINGULAR. 



(1) Sum [1], I am 8um . 

(1) Es [2], thou art e s. 

(1) Est [3], he is.... e8t . 



PLURAL. 



(1) Sumus [pi. 1], we are eumua. 

(1) Estis [pi. 2], ye or you are e8t i 8 , 

(1) Sunt [pi. 3], they are 8Unt , 

li 



122 VERBS — SUM 

"E." (2) Imperfect. /, dec, was. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

(2) Eram [1], I was ram. 

(2) Eras [2], thou wast rag. 

(2) Erat [3], he was rat. 

PLURAL. 

(2) Erainus [pi. 1], we were ramus. 

'2) Eratis [pi. 2], you were ratis. 

(2) Erant [pi. 3], they were rant. 

«E." (3) Future. I, &c, shall or will be. 

SINGULAR. 

(3) Ero [1], I shall be ; . ro 

(3) Eris [2], thou wilt be ris. 

(3) Erit [3], he will be rit 

PLURAL. 

(3) Erimus [pi. 1], we shall be rimus. 

(3) Eritis [pi. 2], you will be ritis. 

(3) Erunt [pi. 3], they will be runt. 

u Uu" (4) Perfect. 7, &c, have been. 

SINGULAR. 

(4) Fui [1], I have been ui. 

(4) Fuisti [2], thou hast been uisti. 

(4) Fuit [3], he has been uit. 

PLURAL. 

(4) Fuimus [pi. 1], we have been '. uimus. 

(4) Fuistis [pi. 2], you have been uistis. 

(4) Fuerunt or fuere [pi. 3], they have been uerunt or uere. 

"Ui." (5) Pluperfect. I, &c, had been. 

SINGULAR. 

(5) Fueram [1], I had been ueram. 

(5) Fueras [2], thou hast been ueras. 

(5) Fuerat [3], he had been uerat. 

PLURAL. 

(5) Fueramus [pi. 1], we had been ueramus 

(5) Fueratis [pi. 2], you had been ueratis. 

(5) Fuerant [pi. 3], they had been uerant. 



VERBS — SUM. 123 

"Ui." (6) Future Perfect. I, &c, shall or will have been. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

(6) Fuero [1], I shall have been uero. 

(6) Fueris [2], thou wilt have been ueris. 

(6) Fuerit [3], he will have been uerit. 

PLURAL. 

(6) Fuerimus [pi. 1], we shall have been uerimus. 

(6) Fueritis [pi. 2], you will have been ueritis. 

(6) Fuerint [pi. 3], they will have been uerint. 

There are only two principal parts in sum, namely : that 
denoted by e, and that denoted by ui; sum having no supine. 

The present tense is so very irregular, that it can scarcely 
be considered as formed from e, the first part; the full verb 
is therefore given, in italics, in place of the terminations. 

The imperfect may be considered as formed from the first 
principal part, e. This e is placed before the terminations 
denoting number and person, as given in the imperfect tense 
above. 

The future, in like manner, is formed from the first prin- 
cipal part, e, by placing e before the terminations of the 
future. 

The perfect is formed from the second principal part, ui, 
by placing / before the terminations of numbers and persons, 
as above given. 

The pluperfect is also formed from the second principal 
part, ui; /being placed before the terminations of numbers 
and persons. 

The future perfect is, in like manner, formed from ui; 
and / is placed before the terminations of numbers and per- 
sons, as above given. 



124 



VERBS — SUM. 



Lesson 53. 

«*-«■•< Orgetorix deligitur ad ea P u eas e! -P M res 

Orgetorix | is-chosen to those things 

conficiendas. '""'Is 

to-be-accomplished [is chosen to accomplish those things]. He 

suscepit 3 sibi (3)# * io -° nis - 4 legation em (/.)** ad 

accepted for-himself an embassy to (the different) 

as - atis -P u civitate&. In id - 6 eo er - ineris - 6 itinere(7i.)** persuadet 

states. In that journey he-persuades 

s,3 Castico s ' 3 filio e8_is ' 2 Catamantaledis, 8 ' 3 Sequano, ui,2 cujus 
Casticus (the) son of-Catamantaledes, a Sequanian, | whose 

ter "' ris - 1 pater obtinuerat m,4 regnum in 8,pl,6 Sequanis 

father had-held (the) kingdom in (the) Sequani (for) 

8 -P u multos 8 - pU annos, 

many years [whose father had ruled over the Sequani for 

et appellatus erat sJ amicus a. 0sf3 senatu que* 
many years], and had-been-called friend by (the) senate and 



| a r-avi- a tum.sb.(2) occuparet [3] • • 

he-would-seize 



86 Romano 8 ' 6 populo ■ , ut 

Roman people, that 

m - 4 regnum in 6 sua as " atis - 6 civitate, 0(U quod ter - ,ris - pater 

(the) sovereign-power in his state, which (his) father 

habuerat ante. Que- item* persuadet s - 3 iEduo 

had-had before (him). And 1 he also 'persuades (the) JSduan 

ix-igis.3 Du. mn0 rigi ? ter " tris - 3 fratri s2 Divitiaci, uU qui id - 6 

Dumnorix, (the) brother of-Divitiacus, 

us -oris.6 tempore obtinebat Qs,4 principatum in 6 sua as ' atis - 6 civitate, 

time obtained (the) command in his state, 

ac (mm-esse) | e-ui.(2) erat [3] • • max i me s.l acce pt US bs - bis3 plebi, 

and was chiefly acceptable * to (the) people, 

ut conaretur Id - 4 idem, que* 

that he-should-attempt (the) same-thing, and 

I ar-dccft-atum.(i) j at [3] • • 4 guam 4 gj- am j n m.4 m atrimonium 

he-gives his daughter 

is.3 gj^ | ar-avi-atum.(l) p^at [3] • • 

to-him. He-proves (it) 

{sum-tsie) | e-ui.in.(l) « e g ge peifacile 

" is very-easy 

m.pi.4 cona t a? propterea quod 

(this) enterprise, because that 



le -p'- 3 illis, 

to-them, 

factu, 
to-be-done, 

se,, ipse 

he-himself 



eo 

at-that 



marriage 

(that it) 

perficere 
to-execute 

esset 

was 



VERBS — SUM. 125 

ofotenturus m,4 imperium 2 suae a?_atis ' 2 civitatis, 

about-to-obtain (the) empire of-his (own) state, (that) 

(sum-esse) i e-ui.in.(i) esse non ».i diibiTam, quin 8 - pU Helvetii 

there-is no doubt, but-that (the) Helvetii 

possent plurinrum a " ius - 2 totius G-alliaB." ' "-^-^-^Connrmat t 3] •• 
could-do the most of-all Gaul." He-affirms 

4 ge (3)»» ar-avi-|atum.(3) conc ^- aturum [part.]" m.pl.4 re g na 

(that) he-was-about-to-procure kingdoms 

lepl - 3 illis pK6 suis pl - 6 copiis que- s - 6 suo* a "' 6 exercitu. 

for-them with-his means and with-his army. 

8 - pU Adducti [part ' ] •* * 5C - 6 hac io - ioni8 - 6 oration e ; (/.) ** 

Induced by-this oration, 

iar^di-atum.(i)3 ant [ P i.3]»» ei.4 fid em e t m - 4 jusjurandum inter 
| they-give faith and oath among 

4 se;( 3)# * et 

themselves [they pledge themselves to one another by an oath] ; and 

m - 6 regno m - 6 occupato, [part - ]# * per pK4 tres 

(the) sovereign-power being-possessed, by three 

8,pU potentissimos («•)** ac "' pl ' 4 firmissimos (s.) * * 8,pU populos, 
most-powerful and most-firm people, 

| ar-avi-atum.(l) S p eran t CP'-3] • • 4 gese (3) • • p 0Sge p^— 

they-hope (that) they would-be-able to-possess 

a - ius - 2 totius 2 G-allise. 

(themselves) of-all Gaul. 

Lesson 54. 

Ad eas res confieiendas Orgetorix deligitur; is sibi lega- 
tionem ad civitates suscepit. In eo itinere persuadet Castico 
Catamantaledis filio, Sequano, cujus pater regnum in Sequanis 
multos annos obtinuerat, et h senatu populoque Romano 
amicus appellatus erat, ut regnum in civitate sua occuparet, 
quod pater ante habuerat : itemque Dumnorigi iEduo, fratri 
Divitiaci, qui eo tempore principatum in civitate sua obti- 
nebat, ac maxime plebi acceptus erat, ut idem conaretur, 
persuadet; eique filiam suam in matrimonium dat. "Per- 
facile factu esse/' illis probat, " conata perficere ; propterea 
quod ipse suae civitatis imperium obtenturus esset ; non esse 
dubium, quin totius Galliae plurimum Helvetii possent; ee 
11* 



126 VERBS SUM. 

suis copiis suoque exercitu, illis regna conciliaturum," con- 
firmat. Hac oratione adducti, inter se fidem, et jusjurandum 
dant ; et regno occupato, per tres potentissimos ac firmissimos 
populos, totius Galliae sese potiri posse sperant. 

Exercises on Lessons 53 and 54. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Jusjurandum. Do. Potentissimus. Sperat. Perfacile. 
Probavit. Propterea. Civitas. Esse. Totius. Dubium. 
Exercitu. Confirmant. Deligitur. Iter. Filius. Pater. 
Multi. Cujus. Amicus. Occupavit. Habuerat. Frater. 
Tempus. Plebs. Filia. Dedit. 

English worlds to be translated into Latin. 

Acceptable. He gives. Marriage. He will prove. To 
be. Enterprise. Daughter. He himself. State. The 
most. They affirm. Kingdom. Army. Faith. Most 
powerful. I shall hope. Years. Father. Had had. 
Persuades. Brother. Who. Time. For himself. Em- 
bassy. Journey. Whose. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Non esse dubium. Perfacile esse probat. Ipse imperium 
dbtenturus esset. Se suo exercitu illis regna conciliaturum. 
Inter se fidem et jusjurandum dant. Totius Gallise sese 
potiri posse sperant. Ad eas res conficiendas ille deligitur. 
Cujus pater amicus appellatus erat. Maxime plebi acceptus 
est. Filiam suam in matrimonium dat. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

He affirms that he has procured kingdoms for them. He 
hopes that he would be able. He was acceptable to the 
people. He gives his daughter in marriage to him. I have 
proved it to them. There is no doubt, but that the Helvetii 



VERBS — SUM. 127 

could do the most. Which his father had had before him. 
He persuades the brother of Divitiacus. Orgetorix is chosen 
to accomplish those things. He persuades the son of 
Catamantaledes. 

THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD OP " SUM." 
"Sim." sb. (1) Present Tense. I, &c, may or can be. 

singular. Terminations. 

sb. (1) Sim [1], I may be , .- aim. 

sb. (1) Sis [2], thou mayst be ais. 

sb. (1) Sit [3], he may be ait. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (1) Simus [pi. 1], we may be ei'mus. 

sb. (1) Sitis [pi. 2], you may be , 8itia. 

sb. (1) Sint [pi. 3], they may be sint. 

"E." sb. (2) Imperfect. I, &c, might, could, would, or should be. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (2) Essem [1], I might be ssem. 

sb. (2) Esses [2], thou mightst be sses. 

sb. (2) Esset [3], he might be sset. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (2) Essemus [pi. 1], we might be ssemus. 

sb. (2) Essetis [pi. 2], you might be ssetis. 

sb. (2) Essent [pi. 3], they might be ssent. 

"Ui." sb. (4) Perfect. I, &c, may have been. 
SINGULAR. 

sb. (4) Fuerim [1], I may have been uerim. 

sb. (4) Fueris [2], thou mayst have been ueris. 

sb. (4) Fuerit [3], he may have been uerit. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (4) Fuerimus [pi. 1], we may have been uerimus. 

sb. (4) Fueritis [pi. 2], you may have been ueritis. 

sb. (4) Fuerint [pi. 3], they may have been uerint 



128 



VERBS — SUM. 



u Ui" sb. (5) Pluperfect. I, &c, might, could, would, or should 
have been. 

Terminations. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (5) Fuissem [1], I might have been uissem. 

sb. (5) Fuisses [2], thou mightst have been uisses. 

sb. (5) Fuisset [3], he might have been uisset. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (5) Fuissemus [pi. 1], we might have been uissemus. 

sb. (5) Fuissetis [pi. 2], you might have been uissetis. 

sb. (5) Fuissent [pi. 3], they might have been uissent. 

"e." im. imperative mood. 

singular. 

im. Es or esto [2], be thou s or s fc 0# 

im. Esto [3], let him be sto# 

PLURAL. 

im. Este or estote [pi. 2], by ye steorstote. 

im. Sunto [pi. 3], let them be sunto. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

"E." in. (1) Present Tense. 
in. (1) Esse, to be gse# 

"Ui." in. (4) Perfect Tense. 
in. (4) Fuisse, to have been uisse. 

in. (3) Future. 
in. (3) Futurus esse, to be about to be uturus-esse. 

PARTICIPLE [PART.]. 

(3) Future Tense. 

(3) Futurus [part.], about to be uturus. 

The present tense, in the subjunctive, cannot be referred 
to the first principal part, e. All the numbers and persons 
of this tense are given entire ; in italics, in place of the ter- 
minations. 



VERBS — SUM. 129 

The imperfect tense is formed from the first principal part, 
e. This e is placed before the terminations of the imperfect 
to form the different numbers and persons. 

The perfect tense is formed from the second principal 
part, ui ; f being placed before the terminations of the per- 
fect in all the numbers and persons. 

The pluperfect is formed from the second principal part, 
ui; f being placed before the terminations of the pluperfect 
in like manner. 

The imperative mood, in the second and third persons sin- 
gular, and second person plural, is formed from the first part, 
e, this e being placed before the terminations ; but the third 
person plural cannot be referred to either the first or second 
principal parts ; it is therefore given in full, in italics, in the 
terminations. 

The infinitive mood in the present tense is derived from 
the first principal part, e ; this e being placed before the ter- 
mination. The perfect tense of the same is formed from 
the second principal part, ui; f being placed before the ter- 
mination. The future is formed from a supposed supine 
and esse ; /being placed before the termination. 

Sum has properly no present participle ending in ens; but 
some of its compounds have : as, absens — being absent. 

The future participle may be considered as formed from a 
supposed supine of fuo ; f being placed before the termi- 
nation. 

The perfect, fui, is formed from the obsolete, fuo, from 
which are still in use the imperfect subjunctive : s,(2) forem v} , 
I might be; 8(2) fores [2] , thou mightst be; s - {2) foret 131 , he might 
be; *' {2) foremus CpU] , we might be; s - {2) foretis lpl21 , you might 
be; s - {2) forent [l>] ' s \ they might be. The infinitive present, 
fore — to be, has generally a future signification of about to be. 

The compounds of sum are conjugated like sum : as, 
absum — lam absent, abes, abest, &c, &c ; but prosum — i" 
am useful, or advantageous, or I profit, has a d inserted be- 
tween pro and those tenses and persons that begin with a 



130 VERBS — SUM. 

vowel: as, indicative present, {1) prosum vl , I am useful; 
0) prodes [2] , thou art useful ; 0) prodest [ * 1 , he is useful, &c, &c. 
Imperfect, {2) prod era m [X \ 1 was useful; {2) proderas [2] , thou 
wast useful ; (2) proderat [[3] , he was useful, &c, &c. 

The compound, possum — lean, or am able, compounded 
of potts — able and sum — I am, is more irregular. In com- 
position, the is of pott's is omitted, and the t of pot is changed 
into s before another s. The commencing es of the present 
infinitive, and of the imperfect subjunctive of sum, is omitted; 
the commencing f of sum, in those tenses formed from the 
second principal part, ui, is dropped. In other respects, 
possum is conjugated like sum ; but it has no imperative, or 
future participle. It is conjugated as follows : 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

Possum. Posse (e). Potui (ui). 

I-am-able. to-be-able. I-have-been-able. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

"Sum." *'E." (1) Present Tense. 

Terminations. 

SINGULAR. 

(1) Possum [1], I am able ssum. 

(1) Potes [2], thou art able tes. 

(1) Potest [3], he is able test. 

PLURAL. 

(1) Possumus [pi. 1], we are able ssumus. 

(1) Potestis [pi. 2], you are able testis. 

(1) Possunt [pi. 3], they are able ssunt. 

"E." (2) Imperfect Tense. 
SINGULAR. 

(2) Poteram [1], I was able teram. 

(2) Poteras [2], thou wast able teras. 

(2) Poterat [3], he was able terat. 

PLURAL. 

(2) Poteramus [pi. 1], we were able „. teramus. 

(2) Poteratis [pi. 2], you were able teratis. 

(2) Poterant [pi. 3], they were able terant. 



VERBS SUM. 131 

"E." (3) Future. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

(3) Potero [1], I shall be able , tero. 

(3) Poteris [2], thou wilt be able teris. 

(3) Poterit [3], he will be able terit. 

PLURAL. 

(3) Poterimus [pi. 1], we shall be able teriinus. 

(3) Poteritis [pi. 2], you will be able teritis. 

(3) Poterunt [pi. 3], they will be able terunt. 

"Uu" (4) Perfect. 

SINGULAR. 

(4) Potui [1], I have been able tui. 

(4) Potuisti [2], thou hast been able tuisti. 

(4) Potuit [3], he has been able = tuit. 

PLURAL. 

(4) Potuimus [pi. 1], we have been able tuimus. 

(4) Potuistis [pi. 2], you have been able tuistis. 

(4) Potuerunt or potuere [pi. 3], they have been able tuerunt or tuere. 

«m." (5) Pluperfect. 
SINGULAR. 

(5) Potueram [1], I had been able tueram. 

(5) Potueras [2], thou hast been able tueras. 

(5) Potuerat [3], he has been able ;.., tuerat. 

PLURAL. 

(5) Potueramus [pi. 1], we had been able tueramus. 

(5) Potueratis [pi. 2], you had been able tueratis. 

(5) Potuerant [pi. 3], they had been able tuerant. 

"Ui." (6) Future Perfect. 

SINGULAR. 

(6) Potuero [1], I shall have been able tuero. 

(6) Potueris [2], thou wilt have been able tueris. 

(6) Potuerit [3], he will have been able tuerit. 

PLURAL. 

(6) Potuerimus [pi. 1], we shall have been able,. tuerimus. 

(6) Potueritis [pi. 2], you will have been able tueritis. 

(6) Potuerint [pi. 3], they will have been able tuerint. 



1**2 VERBS — SUM. 



SB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

"Sim." sb. (1) Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

sb. (1) Possim [1], I may be able 4 ssim. 

sb. (1) Possis [2], thou mayst be able ssis. 

sb. (1) Possit [3], he may be able ssit. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (1) Possimus [pi. 1], we may be able ■ ssimus. 

sb. (1) Possitis [pi. 2], you may be able ssitis. 

sb. (1) Possint [pi. 3], they may be able ssint. 

"E." sb. (2) Imperfect. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (2) Possem [1], I might be able.. ssem. 

sb. (2) Posses [2], thou mightst be able sses. 

sb. (2) Posset [3], he might be able sset. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (2) Possemus [pi. 1], we might be able ssemus. 

sb. (2) Possetis [pi. 2], you might be able.. ssetis. 

sb. (2) Possent [pi. 3], they might be able ssent. 

"Ui." sb. (4) Perfect Tense. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (4) Potuerim [1], I may have been able tuerim. 

sb. (4) Potueris [2], thou mayst have been able tueris. 

sb. (4) Potuerit [3], he may have been able tuerit. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (4) Potueriraus [pi. 1], we may have been able tuerimus. 

sb. (4) Potueritis [pi. 2], you may have been able tueritis. 

sb. (4) Potuerint [pi. 3], they may have been able tuerint. 

"US." sb. (5) Pluperfect Tense. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (5) Potuissem [1], I had been able tuissem. 

sb. (5) Potuisses [2], thou hadst been able tuisses. 

eb. (5) Potuisset [3], he had been able ^tuisset. 



VERBS — SUM. 133 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

sb. (5) Potuissemus [pi. 1], we had been able tuissemus. 

sb. (5) Potuissetis [pi. 2], you had been able tuissetis. 

sb. (5) Potuissent [pi. 3], they had been able tuissent. 

IN. INFINITIVE MOOD. 

"E." in. (1) Present. 

in. (1) Posse, to be able sse. 

"UV in. (4) Perfect. 
in. (4) Potuisse, to have been able tuisse. 

All the moods, tenses, numbers and persons of possum 
may be considered, in the above conjugation, as formed by 
placing po before all of these terminations. 

Lesson 55. 

..pu Fractos ^^ • • ui - p1 - 6 quibus m - p1 - 6 proeliis que- 

Broken by which battles and 

as-atis.pi.6 ca lamitatibus*, ui - pM qui ante plurimum 

calamities, | (those) who before had- 1 been most 

(«zm-e*e).e- | ui..b.(5) p t U i SS ent [pL3] * * 

1 able [those who before had been the most po^ 
in 6 Gallia, et 6 sua us " tute - 6 virtute (/.)•* et m - 6 10 

in Gaul, both by-their valor and 1 by (the) iA _ance 

atque 6 amicitia 8,2 Romani 8,2 populi 

and friendship ' of (the) l Roman people (that they) 

coactos esse ' «-**^»»-(') dare **" nobilissimos 

have-been-forced to-give the-most-noble % 

■""•'civitatis es " idi8 - pU obsides 8 ' pK3 Sequanis, et 

•of (the) * state (as) hostarjs 'to (the) * Sequani, and 

obstringere a8 " atis - 4 civitatem '• ar - avi - atum - 6 jurejurando, [ser - ] °* 

to-bind (the) state | *by (a) 'swearing [by an 

pI - 4 sese/^ ## neque repetituros 

oath], (that) they neither would-hereafter-re-demand 

cs-idis.pi.4 obsides, neque ar ' avi - 1 atum - (3) imploraturos [par, - ] •• 

(their) hostages, nor would-hereafter-implore 

"•"auxilium a. 8 - 6 Romano 8 * 6 populo, neque 

aid from (the) Roman people, nor 

12 





non 


had 


not 




ut 




that 


s.pl.' 


'suos 




his 


ea. 


4 earn 




that 



134 VERBS — SUM. 

ar-avi- 1 atum. ( 3) re cusaturos, [part - ] ** quo minus 

hereafter-refuse that they- 1 might not 

(m»wm) i e-ui.sb. (2 ) essent [p i.3] • • perpetuo sub 

'be perpetually under 

io -' ,ODis - 6 deditione (/.)•* atque m - 6 imperio lepl - 2 illorum. 

(the) subjection and dominion of-these (Germans). 

4g e (3)»« («*m-e5«) | e-ui.in.(l) egge ^UDUIIl eX 

(That) he-himself is (the only) one out-of 

is - is - 6 omni as - a,is6 civitate &pL2 ^Eduorum, uU qui 

all (the) state 'of (the) l ^Edui, who ; 

(sum-esse).e- | ui..b.(4) potuer i t [3] • • adduCl 

1 been-able to-be-brought 

I ar-avi-atum.sb.(2) i-Q^ret ^ ** aut ' ar_< * e<ii '- atum - sb -( 2 ) daret 
he-should-swear, or give 

r - pU liberos ■*»*" b s ides. Ob 

children (as) hostages. (That) on-account-of 

ei,4 rem 4 se (3)# * profugisse ex as_atis - 6 civitate et 

thing he fled from (his own) state and 

venisse 4 Romam ad Qs - 4 senatum MV H atum -postulatum [um]## 

came to-Rome to (the) senate a-requesting 

m - 4 auxilium, quod 8j solus teneretur ueque 

aid, because *he alone ' was-held neither 

| "-avi-atum.6 j ure j urando?[ ger.] • • ne ^ ue es-idis.pl.6 orjS i Jibus. 

x by (a) x swearing [oath], nor by-hostages. 

g accidisse pejus s - pK3 Sequanis 

g uc "hat) it-had-happened worse ' to (the) ' Sequani 

or-oris.pi.^ . ictoribus, quam s * p '- 3 iEduis '^victis; propterea 
con /iuerors, than 1 to (the) x iEdui conquered; because 

quod sl Ariovis^J ls ? x_gisl rex s,pU G-ermanorum consedisset 

that Ariovistus, kin g * of (the) l Germans had-settled 

in is - pl - 2 eorum js - is - p1 - 6 finibtfs, que- ar " • avi - atnm - sb(5) occupavisset [3] * • 
j n their territories, and had-occupied 

4 tertiam- rs - rtis * 4 partem ^b^quam er - 2 agri, uiJ qui 

(the) third part » of (the) l ^quanian land, which 

(mm-eiie) | e-ui.sb.(2) ggggj. [3] • • 8. 1 optimUS (&SUJ US, S.) * * a " ius * 2 totiuS 
was (the) best of-ali 

6 Galli3e; et nunc juberet 8 - pU Sequanos decedere de 

Gaul; and now he-ordered (the) Sequani to-depart from 

a - ius - 6 altera 6 terti§, r8 " rti '- 6 parte. 

another third part. 



VERBS — SUM. 135 



Lesson 58. 



Quibus prceliis calamitatibusque, fractos, qui et sua virtute 
et populi Romani hospitio atque amicitia, plurimum ante in 
Gallia potuissent, coactos esse Sequanis obsides dare nobilis- 
simos civitatis, et jurejurando civitatem obstringere, sese 
neque obsides repetituros, neque auxilium a populo Romano 
imploraturos, neque recusaturos, quo minus perpetud sub 
illorum ditione atque imperio essent. Unum se esse ex 
omni civitate iEduorurn, qui adduci non potuerit, ut juraret 
aut suos liberos obsides daret; ob earn rem se ex civitate 
profugisse, et Romani ad senatum venisse, auxilium postu- 
latum ; quod solus neque jurejurando, neque obsidibus tene- 
retur. Sed pejus victoribus Sequanis, quam iEduis victis 
accidisse; propterea quod Ariovistus rex Germanorum in 
eorum finibus consedisset, tertiamque partem agri Sequani, 
qui esset optimus totius Galliae, occupavisset, et nunc de 
altera parte tenia Sequanos decedere juberet. 

Exercises on Lessons 55 and 56. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Civitas. Possit. Fuistis. Fuerint. Potes. Juravit. 
Liberi. Dabo. Obsides. Postulatum. Jurejurando. Pejus. 
Victor. Rex. Ager. Esset. Totius. Optimus. Alter. 
Decedere. Prcelium. Virtus. Amicitia. Dedi. Nobilis. 
Auxilium. Imperium. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

The best. To depart. Subjection. State. He might 
be able. They have sworn. Children. Valor. Hostages. 
Friendship. He gave. To bind. The most noble. Aid. 
Battle. Before. They might have been able. He was. 
He may have been. 



136 VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Sed pejus Sequanis, quarn iEduis accidisse. Ariovistus 
in eorum finibus consedisset. Tertiam partem agri Sequani 
occupasset. Ununi se adduci non potuerit. Ut juraret, aut 
obsides daret. Ob earn rem se profugisse. Se venisse auxi- 
Hum postulatum. Qui sua virtute plurimum ante in Gallic 
potuissent. 'Se coactos esse obsides dare. Jurejurando civi- 
tatem obstringere. Quo minus sub illorum imperio essent. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

He ordered them to depart. That he came to Rome a 
requesting aid. It had happened worse to the Sequani. 
Because the king of the Germans had settled in their terri- 
tories. They gave the most noble of the state as hostages. 
He implored aid from the Romans. That he is the only one 
that did not give hostages. Those who before had been 
most powerful. 

FIRST CONJUGATION. 
Passive Voice. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

"Ar." p. (1) Present Tense. I, &c, am loved. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

p. (1) Amor [1], I am loved or. 

p. (1) Amaris or amare [2], thou art loved aris or are. 

p. (1) Amatur [3], he is loved atur. 

PLURAL. 

p. (1) Aniarnur [pi. 1], we are loved amur. 

p. (1) Amamini [pi. 2], ye or you are loved amini. 

p. (1) Amantur [pi. 3], they are loved antur. 

"Ar." p. (2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c., was loved. 
SINGULAR. 

p. (2) Amabar [1], I was loved abar. 

p. (2) Amabaris or amabare [2], thou wast loved abaris or abare. 

p. (2) Amabatur [3], he was loved abatur. 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 137 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

p. (2) Ainabamur [pi. 1], we were loved abamur. 

p. (2) Amabamini [pi. 2], you were loved abaniini. 

p. (2) Amabantur [pi. 3], they were loved abantur. 

tl Ar" p. (3) Future. I, &c, shall or will be loved. 
SINGULAR. 

p. (3) Amabor [1], I shall be loved abor. 

p. (3) Amaberis or amabere [2], thou wilt be loved aberis or abere. 

p. (3) Amabitur [3], he will be loved abitur. 

PLURAL. 

p. (3) Auiabimur [pi. 1], we shall be loved abirour. 

p. (3) Amabimini [pi. 2], you will be loved abimini. 

p. (3) Amabuntur [pi. 3], they will be loved abuntur. 

"Atum." p. (4) Perfect. I, dec., have been loved. Formed by the perfect 
participle " amatus — loved," and "sum — lam," or "fui — I have been." 



p. (4) Arnatus sum or fui [1], I have been loved, 
p. (4) Amatus es or fuisti [2], thou hast been loved. 
p. (4) Amatus est or fuit [3], he has been loved. 



p. (4) Amati sumus or fuimus [pi. 1], we have been loved. 

p. (4) Amati estis or fuistis [pi. 2], you have been loved. 

p. (4) Amati sunt or fuerunt or fuere [pi. 3], they have been loved. 

"Atum." p. (5) Pluperfect. I, &c, had been loved. Formed by the per- 
fect participle "amatus — loved," and " eram — I was," or "fueram — / 
had been." 

SINGULAR. 

p. (5) Amatus eram or fueram [1], I had been loved, 
p. (5) Amatus eras or fueras [2], thou hadst been loved. 
p. (5) Amatus erat or fuerat [3], he had been loved. 



p. (5) Amati eramus or fueramus [pi. 1], we had been loved, 
p. (5) Amati eratis or fueratis [pi. 2], you^had been loved, 
p. (5) Amati erant or fuerant [pi. 3], they had been loved 

12* 



138 VERBS FIRST CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 

«A*M» p. (6) Future Perfect. I, &c, shall or will have been loved. 
Formed by the perfect participle " amatus — loved," and "ero — Ishall 
be," or *'fuero — I shall have been." 

SINGULAR. 

p. (6) Ainatus ero or fuero [1], I shall have been loved. 
p. (6) Amatus eris or fueris [2], thou wilt have been loved, 
p. (6) Amatus erit or fuerit [3], he will have been loved. 



p. (6) Amati erimus or fuerimus [pi. 1], we shall have been loved, 
p. (6) Amati eritis or fueritis [pi. 2], you will have been loved, 
p. (6) Amati erunt or fuerint [pi. 3], they will have been loved. 

The present, imperfect, and future tenses of the indicative 
passive, are formed from the first principal part, ar ; the 
perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect, are formed from the 
third principal part, atum ; or, rather, the perfect or passive 
past participle is formed from the third principal part. 

In the present tense, singular, ar is changed into or in the 
first, into arts or are in the second, and into atur in the 
third person ; in the plural, ar is changed into amur in the 
first, into amini in the second, and into antur in the third 
person. 

In the imperfect, in the singular, ar is changed into abar 
in the first, into abaris or abare in the second, and into 
abatur in the third person; in the plural, ar is changed into 
abamur in the first, into abamini in the second, and into 
abantur in the third person. 

In the future, in the singular, ar is changed into abor in 
the first, into aberis or abere in the second, and into abitur 
in the third person; in the plural, ar is changed into abimur 
in the first, into abimini in the second, and into abuntur in 
the third person. 

The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses, have 
properly no termination, they being formed by the perfect or 
past passive participle, and the tenses of sum. The perfect 
participle is used in the nominative, in the three genders, 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 139 

and in the singular and plural, according to the gender and 
number of the passive nominative : as, singular, amatus, 
amata, amatum ; plural, amati, amatae, ctmata. 

In the perfect tense, either sum — lam, or fui — I was, 
may be used in the perfect sense, with the perfect or passive 
participle. So, also, era?n or fuer am, both in the pluperfect 
sense ; likewise, ero or fuero, both in the perfect future sense. 

Lesson 57. 
•• plJ Nonnulli s - pU adducti r partJ •• or -° ri8 - 6 pudore, ut 

Some induced by-shame, that 

I ar-avi-atum.sb.O) v itarent pU3] ** io-ionis.4 SUS pi c i 0nem (/.) * * 

they-niight-avoid (the) suspicion 

or "° rh ' 2 timoris remanebant. ta * L, Hi neque 

of-fear did-remain. These x were neither 

(sum-esse) | e -ui.(2) poterant [pl.3] •• finger S ' 4 VultUffi, 

'able to-compose (their) countenances, 

neque interdum tenere pU lacrymas ; splJ abditi [part - ] * # 

nor sometimes to-restrain (their) tears; hidden 

in m - pK6 tabernaculis, aut querebantur m4 suum 

in (their) tents, 'they either l did-bewail their 

m - 4 fatum, aut cum 8 - pL6 suis is - is - pl - 6 familiaribus 

fate, or with their intimate-friends 

I ar -avi-atum.d.(2) m i ser abantur tpl - 3] *° e " is - 4 commune m - 4 perieulum. 
did-deplore (their) common danger. 

Vulgo m - pK4 testamenta ' **«*"*—+* obsignabantur £ pK3] * * 
Generally j wills were sealed [wills were 

m - p1 - 6 totis m - p '- 6 castris. x " ci8 - pL6 Yocibus ac 

made] 'in (the) l whole camp. 'By (the) ' words and 

or-ori,6 timore ic.pi.2 norum et i am «.pu jj, uLplJ qui, in m - p1 - 6 castris 

1 by (the) 'fear of-these also those, who, in (the) camp 

habebant s - 4 magnum Qs - 4 usum, """^niilites que- 

had great experience, (namely) (the) soldiers and 

io-ionis.pi.i centuriones-, que- ui - p,1 qui- 

centurions, and (those) who 

(sum-esse) i e-ui. ( 2) pr8ee rant t pL3] * * Gs - 3 equitatui paulatim 

commanded (the) cavalry 'were gradually 

|ar-avi-atum.p.(2) pertur | :)abantur>[ pl.3]«. ^ ic - p1 ' 6 hi S Ui - pU qul 

disturbed. (Those) of these who 



140 VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

volebant 4 S e(P L3 >* # existimari minus 8 - pU timidos, dicebant 

wished themselves to-be-thought less timid, said 

4 ge (pi.3)»« non verer i is - is - 4 hostem, sed 

(that) they Mid not * dread (the) enemy, but (that they) 

timere pl,4 angustias er ~ ineris,2 itineris (??.)* * et 

feared | (the) denies [difficulties] l of (the) * march and 

d ^ inU - 4 magnitudinem (/.) * • pU2 syl varum, ua5,pU quae 

(the) greatness * of (the) * woods, which 

intercederent inter is,pL4 eos et s,4 Ariovistum, aut, ut 

intervened between them and Ariovistus, or, that 

4 frumentariam eL4 rem («nwiie> i e- U i.sb. ( 2) p 0Sset [3j • • 

corn affair [provisions] l might (not) * be-able 

commode satis supportari. Etiam 8,pU nonnulli 
to- 1 be conveniently enough Supplied. Also some 

I ar-avi-atu n a. ( 2) reil untiabant [pl - 3] • • ar ' aris - 3 Csesari quum 

reported to-Caesar when 

jussisset m,pU castra moveri, et m - pU signa 

he-had-ordered (the) camp to-be-movcd, and (the) standards 

ferri, es - i,is - pL, milites 

to-be-borne-forwards [and the troops to advance], (that) (the) soldiers 

non (mm-e We )je- U i.in.(i )fore au dientes m - 3 dicto, 

1 would not *be obedient *to (the) i word (of com- 

neque 8p, - 4 laturos tP"^ ## mpU signa 

mand), nor would-they-bear-forward (the) standards 

propter or ' oris - 4 timorem. 
on-account-of fear. 

Lesson 58. 

Nonnulli pudore adducti, ut timoris suspicionem vitarent, 
reman ebant : hi neque vultum fingere, neque interdum lac- 
rymas tenere poterant : abditi in tabernaculis aut suum fatum 
querebantur, aut cum familiaribus suis commune periculum 
miserabantur. Vulgd totis castris testamenta obsignabantur. 
Horum vocibus, ac tirnore, paullatim etiam ii, qui magnum 
in castris usum habebant, inilites, centurionesque, quique 
equitatui praeerant, perturbabantur. Qui se ex his minus 
timidos existimari volebant, non se hostem vereri, sed angus- 
tias itineris, et magnitudinem silvarum, quae inter eos atquo 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 141 

Ariovistum intercederent, aut rem frumentariam, ut sati& 
commode supportari posset, timere dicebant. Nonnulli etiam 
Caesari renuntiabant, cum castra moveri, ac signa ferri jus- 
sisset, non fore dicto audientes milites ; neque propter timo- 
rem signa laturos. 

Exercises on Lessons 57 and 58. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Nonnulli. Renuntiavit. Signa. Dictum. Timor. Ti- 
midus. Yolebant. Hostis. Iter. Silvse. Posset. Dice- 
bant. Vulgo. Testamentum. Yox. Paullatim. Castris. 
Miles. Equitatui. Perturbabantur. Pudor. Vitabo. 
Vultus. Lacrymas. Poterant. Tabernaculis. Periculum. 
Miserabantur. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Standards. Fear. The greatness. Between. Them. 
Might be able. To be supplied. He reported. Camp. 
To be removed. A soldier. Experience. The command. 
Gradually. Cavalry. They were disturbed. They wished. 
The enemy. He might avoid. He did remain. Counte- 
nance. Fears. Tents. Danger. Will. In camp. Shame. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Totis castris testamenta obsignabantur. Horum timore 
perturbabantur. Se minus timidos existimari volebant. Se 
vereri angustias itineris. Silvse, quae intercederent. Se 
hostem timere dicebant. Nonnulli Caesari renuntiabant. 
Castra moveri jussisset. Non fore dicto audientes milites. 
Ut timoris suspicion em vitarent. Neque vultum fingere 
poterant. Abditi in tabernaculis suum fatum querebantur. 
Commune periculum miserabantur. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

That the soldiers would not be obedient to the word of 
command. The woods which intervened between them. 



142 VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

Caesar ordered the camp to be moved. The soldiers, who 
had great experience. They commanded the cavalry. He 
wished to be thought less timid. They said that they did 
not fear the enemy. That they might avoid suspicion. 
These were not able to restrain their tears. They deplored 
their common danger. Wills were made. Some induced 
by shame. 

SB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD — PASSIVE VOICE. 

"Ar." p. sb. (1) Present Tense. I, &c, may or can be loved, if I be 
loved, &c. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

p. sb. (1) Amer [1], I may or can, &c, be loved -.. er. 

p. sb. (1) Ameris or amere [2], thou mayst, &c., be loved eris or ere. 

p. sb. (1) Ametur [3], he may, &c., be loved etur. 

PLURAL. 

p. sb. (1) Amemur [pi. 1], we may, &c, be loved emur. 

p. sb. (1) Amemini [pi. 2], you may, &c, be loved emini. 

p. sb. (1) Amentur [pi. 3], they may, &c, be loved entur. 

"Ar." p. sb. (2) Imperfect. I, &c, might, could, would, or should be loved. 

SINGULAR. 

p. sb. (2) Amarer [1], I might, &c, be loved arer. 

p. sb. (2) Amareris or amarere [2], thou mightst be loved... areris orarere. 
p. sb. (2) Amaretur [3], he might be loved aretur. 

PLURAL. 

p. sb. (2) Amaremur [pi. 1], we might be loved aremur. 

p. sb. (2) Amaremini [pi. 2], you might be loved aremini. 

p. sb. (2) Amarentur [pi. 3], they might be loved arentur. 

"Atum" p. sb. (4) Perfect. I may have been loved. Formed by the per- 
fect participle " amatus," and (i sim — / may be," or "fuerim — / may 
have been." 

SINGULAR. 

p. sb. (4) Amatus sim or fuerim [1], I may have been loved, 
p. sb. (4) Amatus sis or fueris [2], thou mayst have been loved. 
p. sb. (4) Amatus sit or fuerit [3], he may have been loved. 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 143 



p. sb. (4) Amati simus or fuerimus [pi. 1], we may have been loved, 
p. sb. (4) Amati sitis or fueritis [pi. 2], you may have been loved, 
p. sb. (4) Amati sint or fuerint [pi. 3], they may have been loved. 

"Atinn." p. sb. (5) Pluperfect. I, &c, might, could, would, or should 
have been loved. Formed by the perfect participle "amatus," and 
il essem — I might be," or "fuissem — I might have been" 

SINGULAR. 

p. sb. (5) Amatus essem or fuissem [1], I might have been loved. 
p. sb. (5) Amatus esses or fuisses [2], thou mightst have been loved. 
p. sb. (5) Amatus esset or fuisset [3], he might have been loved. 



p. sb. (5) Amati essemus or fuissemus [pi. 1], we might have been loved, 
p. sb. (5) Amati essetis or fuissetis [pi. 2], you might have been loved, 
p. sb. (5) Amati essent or fuissent [pi. 3], they might have been loved. 

"ar." p. im. imperative mood. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

p. im. Amare or amator [2], be thou loved are or ator. 

p. im. Amator [3], let him be loved ator. 

PLURAL. 

p. im. Amamini [pi. 2], be ye loved amini. 

p. im. Amantor [pi. 3], let them be loved antor. 

P. IN. INFINITIVE MOOD. 

"Ar." p. in. (1) Present Tense, 

p. in. (1) Amari, to be loved arf. 

i( Atum." p. in. (4) Perfect Tense. 
p. in. (4) Amatus esse or fuisse, to have been loved. 

"Atum." p. in. (3) Future Tense. 
p. in. (3) Amatum iri, to be about to be loved. 

PARTICIPLES [PART.]. 

"Atum." p. (4) Perfect Tense [part.]. 

p. (4) Amatus [part.}, loved or having been loved.... atus. 



144 VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

"Ar." p. (3) Future Tense [part.]. 

Terminations. 

p. (3) Amandus [part.], to be loved, or necessary to be loved.... andus. 

"atum." p. supine in u. 
p. Amatu [u], to be loved u. 



The present and imperfect tenses of the subjunctive pas- 
sive, the imperative, and the present tense of the infinitive, 
and the future participle, are formed from the first principal 
part, ar. The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive, the perfect 
and future infinitive, the perfect participle, and the supine 
in u, are formed from the third principal part, atum; or, 
rather, the perfect participle and the supine in u are thus 
formed. 

In the present tense, in the singular, ar is changed into 
er in the first person, into eris or ere in the second, and in 
the third person into etur ; in the plural, ar is changed into 
emur in the first, into emini in the second, and into entur in 
the third person. 

In the imperfect tense, singular, ar is changed into arer 
in the first person, into areris or arere in the second, and 
into aretur in the third person ; in the plural, ar is changed 
into aremur in the first, into aremini in the second, and into 
arentur in the third person. 

The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive passive have pro- 
perly no terminations ) for the perfect is formed by adding 
sim, sis, sit, &c, or fuerim, fueris, &c, to the perfect parti- 
ciple, both in the sense of I have been ; the pluperfect is, in 
like manner, formed by adding essem or fuissem, both in the 
sense of I had been. 

The imperative mood is formed, in the second person sin- 
gular, by changing ar into are or ator ; in the third person 
singular, by changing ar into ator; the second person plural 
is formed by changing ar into amini; and the third person 
plural by changing ar into antor. 

In the infinitive, present tense, ar is changed into ari. 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — DEPONENTS. 145 

The perfect tense of the same is formed by the perfect parti- 
ciple and esse or fuisse, both in the sense of to have been. 
The future is formed by the supine in um and iri — to go, in 
the sense of to be about to be. 

The perfect participle is formed by changing the third 
principal part, atum, into atus ; the future participle is 
formed by changing the first principal part, ar, into andus. 

The supine in u is formed by changing um into u. 

The syllable er is sometimes added to the end of the infi- 
nitive present passive : as, amarier — to be loved, for amari 
— to be loved. This may take place in all the conjugations. 

The participles, which form the perfect and future infini- 
tive, are used in all genders and numbers, but only in the 
nominative and accusative. 

Deponent Verbs. 

There are many verbs of the first conjugation, that have 
the passive form, but with an active signification. There 
are, also, verbs in the second, third, and fourth conjugations, 
which also have the passive form, with an active signification. 
Such verbs are called deponents. 

Hortor — I exhort, is a deponent verb. It has all the moods 
of the passive voice, with the participles and supine in u 
of the same: exactly like amor — I am loved.. Besides 
these, it has the present and future participles of the active 
voice, the gerunds of the active voice, and the supine in um. 

These deponents, in the lessons, are denoted by a d, in 

place of a p. 

Lesson 59. 

i8 - 6 Eodem us -° ris - 6 tempore 0C ' pU hgec m - pU mandata 
'At (the) l same time these charges 

referebantur ar " aris - 3 Caesari ; et s - pU legati veniebant ab 

were-brougbt to-Caesar; and ambassadors came from 

8 - pl - 6 iEduis et r>6 Treviris. 8>pU iEdui questum, quod 
(the) iEdui and (the) Treviri. (The) JSdui a-complaining, that 

pM " Harudes, qui nuper 

" (the) Harudes, who ■ had lately 

13 



146 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 



ar-avi- 1 at U m. P .sb. ( 5) tr ansportati essent CpU] # • 

1 been-carried-over 

| ar-avi-atum.d.sb.<3) p p U l are n tlir [pL3J * * IS ~ iS ' pM fineS 

laid-waste (the) J territories 

pl.4 



*sese 



(3)«« 



[their territories]; (that) 

redimere x ~ cis ' 4 pacem 

to-purchase peace 

ai-dedi- | atum.p.(4).pl.6 rlofia [P art -3 •• 

having-given 

r-p».iTreviri 



in 4 Galliam 

into Gaul 

is-pl.2 eorurn . 

of- them 
I ui.in.(4) p 0tu i sse 



they ^ave (not) l been-able 

s,2 Ariovisti, ne quidem 

of-Ariovistus, not 

es-idis.pl.6 obgidibus ^ 

hostages." 
" centum 



even 

Autem 

But 
8,pU pagos 

cantons 



ter-tris.pl.l£ ratrcs «NaSUam 

(the) brothers Nasua 


et 

and 


(sum-esse)e- | ui.in.(l) -npgogggQ is.pl.3jjg >> 

command them." 


ui.pl. 6 
J 



(the) Treviri (complained, that a) "hundred 

8,p1,2 Suevorum consedisse ad 4 ripam 8,2 Rheni, ui • p, • , qui 

x of (the) ^uevi had-settled on (the) banks x of (the) ' Rhine, who 
I ar-avi-atum.d.sb. ( 2) ccm arentur cpl<3] • • transire s - 4 Khenum ; 

were-endeavoring to-cross-over (the) Rhine; (that) 

s - 4 Cimberium 

Cimberius 

ipU6 Quibus eiph6 rebus 

By-which things 

,wri8,1 Caesar vehementer 8 - 1 commotus [par,,3# * 

Caesar ■ being exceedingly * moved 

ar- 1 avi-atum. ( 4) ex istiniavit [3] * * 3 sibi (3) *• 

thought that-it-would-be- 1 necessary for-himself 

|a M vi-atu m .p.(3). m .6 maturan(3i:iin ^part.].« n ^ gi ' n0 va ^ IlianUS (/.)* # 

1 to-hasten, lest, if (a) new band 

8,p1,2 Suevorum conjunxisset 4 sese (3) * # cum 

*of (the) * Suevi should-have-joined itself with 

us - eris - pL6 veteribus pM5 copiis s,2 Ariovisti, 

(the) old forces of-Ariovistus, | it-might- 1 be 

(sum-esse) | e-ui.sb.(2) p 0Sget [3] • • f ac il^ resisti. 

J able easily to-be-withstood [he might be the 

Itaque 6 frumentaria eL6 re 
less able to resist them]. Therefore | corn 

ar-avi- | atam.p.(4).6 COni p ara t£ ? tP art - ] # # quam 

being-provided, as 

(8um-esse).c- | ui.(4) p t U it, & • COUtendlt 

he-could, he-marched 

ter-tiner»,.pi.6 iti ner ibus (w.) * * 

journey* [by forced marches] 



minus 

less 



thing [provisions] 

celerrime 

most speedily (as) 

m - p, - 6 magnis 
I by-great 

ad M Ario vis turn. 

to Ariovistus. 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 147 

Lesson 60. 

Haec, eodem tempore, Csesari man data referebantur, et 
legati ab JEduis et Treviris veniebant; iEdui, questum, qu6d 
" Harudes, qui uuper in Galliam transportati essent, fines 
eorum popularentur : sese, ne obsidibus quidem datis, pacem 
Ariovisti redimere potuisse f Treviri autem, " pagos centum 
Suevorum ad ripam Rheni consedisse, qui Rhenum transire 
conarentur; iis praeesse Nasuam et Cimberium fratres." 
Quibus rebus Caeser vehementer commotus, maturandum sibi 
existimavit, ne, si nova manus Suevorum cum veteribus 
copiis Ariovisti sese conjunxisset, minus facile resisti posset. 
Itaque re frumentaria, quam celerrime potuit, comparata, 
magnis itineribus ad Ariovistum contendit. 

Exercises ox Lessons 59 and 60. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Vebementer. Sibi. Existimavit. Manus. Vetus. 
Facile. Possent. Celerrime. Contendit. Tempus. Legati. 
Questum. Nuper. Transportati essent. Finis. Popula- 
rentur. Pax. Potuisse. Pagus. Ripa. Transire. Frater. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Tbey laid waste. To purchase. Territories. Peace. 
Hostages. Hundred. Banks. Canton. To cross over. 
Brothers. Time. Charges. They came. A complaining. 
Moved. He thought. New. Old. Less. Forces. Easily. 
Therefore. Journey. Most speedily. He marched. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Quibus rebus commotus. Minus facile resisti posset. Be 
frumentaria comparata. Ad Ariovistum contendit. Eodem 
tempore mandata referebantur. Legati veniebant. Nuper 
in Galliam veniebant. Harudes, fines eorum popularentur. 



148 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Obsidibus Ariovisto datis. Ad ripam Rheni consedisse. 
GermaDi transire conarentur. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Caesar being exceedingly moved. He thought it 'would 
be necessary. Therefore provisions being provided. He 
marched by forced march. They laid waste their territories. 
To purchase peace. Hostages having been given. On the 
banks of the Rhine. Ambassadors came from the Treviri 
to Caesar. 

SECOND CONJUGATION. 

The second conjugation has its principal parts in 
er—ui—itum ; but they are more irregular than these prin- 
cipal parts in the first conjugation , especially in the second 
and third parts. 

Active Voice. 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 
Present Indicative. Present Infinitive. Perfect Indicative. Supine. 

Moneo. Monere (er). Monui (ui). Monitum (itum). 

I-adviso. to-advise. I-have-advised. an advising. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

" Er." (1) Present Tense. I, &c, advise. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

(1) Moneo [1], I advise eo . 

(1) Mones [2], thou advisest es. 

(1) Monet [3], he advises et. 

PLURAL. 

(1) Moneinus [pi. 1], we advise emus. 

(1) Monetis [pi. 2], ye or you advise etis. 

(1) Monent [pi. 3], they advise , ent. 

"Er." (2) Imperfect Tense. 1, &c., was advising, or did advise. 

SINGULAR. 

(2) Monebam [1], I was advising ebam. 

(2) Monebas [2], thou wast advising ebas. 

(2) Monebat [3], he was advising ebat. 



VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 149 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

(2) Monebamus [pi. 1], we were advising ebamus. 

(2) Monebatis [pi. 2], you were advising ebatis. 

(2) Monebant [pi. 3], they were advising ebant. 

" Er." (3) Future. I, &c, shall or will advise. 

SINGULAR. 

(3) Monebo [1], I shall advise ebo. 

(3) Monebis [2], thou wilt advise ebis. 

(3) Monebit [3], he will advise ebit. 

PLURAL. 

(3) Monebimus [pi. 1], we shall advise ebimus. 

(3) Monebitis [pi. 2], you will advise ebitis. 

(3) Monebunt [pi. 3], they will advise ebunt. 

"Ui." (4) Perfect. I, <$cc. y have advised. 
SINGULAR. 

(4) Monui [1], I have advised ui. 

(4) Monuisti [2], thou hast advised uisti. 

(4) Monuit [3], he has advised uit. 

PLURAL. 

(4) Monuimus [pi. 1], we have advised uimus. 

(4) Monuistis [pi. 2], you have advised uistis. 

(4) Monuerunt or monuere [pi. 3], they have advised uerunt or uere. 

"Ui." (5) Pluperfect. I, &c, had advised. 

SINGULAR. 

(5) Monueram [1], I had advised ueram. 

(5) Monueras [2], thou hadst advised ueras. 

(5) Monuerat [3], he had advised uerat. 

PLURAL. 

(5) Monueramus [pi. 1], we had advised ueramus. 

(5) Monueratis [pi. 2], you had advised ueratis. 

(5) Monuerant [pi. 3], they had advised uerant. 

"Ui." (6) Future Perfect. I, &c, shall have advised. 

SINGULAR. 

(6) Monuero [1], I shall have advised uero. 

(6) Monueris [2], thou wilt have advised ueris. 

(6) Monuerit [3], he will have advised uerit. 

13* 



150 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

(6) Monuerirnus [pi. 1], we shall have advised uerimus. 

(6) Monueritis [pi. 2], you will have advised ueritis. 

(6) Monuerint [pi. 3], they will have advised uerint. 

The present, imperfect, and future tenses, are formed from 
the first principal part, er. The perfect, pluperfect, and 
future perfect, are formed from the second principal part, ui. 

In the present tense, in the singular, the er is changed 
into eo in the first, into es in the second, and into et in the 
third person ; in the plural, er is changed into emus in the 
first, into etis in the second, and into ent in the third person. 

In the imperfect tense, in the singular, the er is changed 
into ebam in the first, into ebas in the second, and into ebat 
in the third person ; in the plural, er is changed into ebarnus 
in the first, into ebatis in the second, and into ebant in the 
third person. 

In the future, in the singular, the er is changed into ebo 
in the first, into ebis in the second, and into ebit in the third 
person ; in the plural, er is changed into ebimus in the first, 
into ebitis in the second, and into ebunt in the third person. 

In the perfect tense, in the singular, ui is changed into ui 
in the first, into uisti in the second, and into wit in the third 
person ; in the plural, ui is changed into uimus in the first, 
into uistis in the second, and into uerunt or uere in the third 
person. 

In the pluperfect, in the singular, ui is changed into 
ueram in the first person, into ueras in the second, and into 
uerat in the third person ; in the plural, ui is changed into 
ueramus in the first, into ueratis in the second, and into 
uerant in the third person. 

In the future perfect, in the singular, ui is changed into 
uero in the first, into ueris in the second, and into uerit in 
the third person ; in the plural, ui is changed into uerimus 
in the first person, into ueritis in the second person, and into 
uerint in the third person. 



VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 151 



Lesson 61. 

Quare quoniam ^-'"^•Waudeo 1 "** non a um f ac ere 

Wherefore because I-dare not-yet do 

id - 4 id otM quod <*""►**«> » «M« es t &* 9 "-'primum atque 
that, which is (the) first and 

■ u propriuni oc - 2 hujus "^imperii que- 

peculiar (duty) | of-this command [of this consular power] and 

2 discipline* or ~ orispl,2 majorum; faciam id - 4 id 

1 of (the) l institutions l of our Ancestors; I-shall-do that 

od.l quQ( J (sum-esse) | e-ui.(l) egt [3] • • us-oris.l J^^g ^y ftd 

which is milder as-respects 

•««■.< severitatem, et u " ri ' J utilius(c.) ## ad 

severity, and more-useful as-respects 

is - is - 4 communem us " utis ' 4 salutem ;(/.)*" nam si 

(the) common safety; for if 

(b)er- 1 ssi-ssumce) j ussero [»] • • 2 te (2) • • i nt erfici ! reliqua 

I-shall-have-ordered you to-be-slain (the) remaining 

^ inanus (/)• * or-oris.pi.2 con j ura torum 

bands *of (the) Conspirators 

l^cDer-^edi-sessunxs) residebit [3] * * in eW - and 6 republica ; sin ! tu (2) * * 
will-settle in (the) republic; but-if you 

exieris (quod jamdudum ' b+*+-mv hortor ^ ## 

will-depart (which now-for-a-long-time I exhort 

4 te/ 2) ) * magna et ^erniciosa *sentina ei 2 and 2 reipublicse 

you (to do), (that) great and pernicious sink x of (the) 'republic 

^'•Huorum es-ili, - pl -- 2 comitum exhaurietur ex 

(consisting) of-your companions will-be-drawn-off from 

b - bis - 6 urbe. ui(U Quid (-MBWMe) l +*&£&•* 5 Catilina? Num 

(the) city. What is-it, O-Catiline? Whether 

I ar-avi-^tumd) dubitas [2] * * facere id - 4 id, 6 me (1) 

do-you-hesitate to-do that I 

I ar-avi-atum ( i)ns-ntis.6 i m perante, [part ' ] * * od - 4 quod jam faciebas 
commanding, which just-now | you-did 

6 tua n8 - ntis6 sponte ? Wisl consul 

[were about to do] of-your-own accord? (the) consul 

< b > 6r ^* am(,) jubet [31## i8 " is - 4 hostem exire ex bs ~ bis - 6 urbe; 
orders (you) (an) enemy to-go-out from (the) city; 

|ar-avi-atum(l)j nterr0 g as [2l«« 4 me (l)»« num | Q mA ex [\[ VLm ? 

do-you-ask me whether into exile? 



152 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

Noil Kb)er-ssi-ssu m (1)j ubeo .[l]». g^ g j consu li s < me < l > ## 

I-'do not 'command but if you-consult me 

| (d)gr-asi-asum(l) g ua( J eo> [*] • • 

I-persuade (you to do so). 

Lesson 62. 

Quare quoniam id, quod primum, atque hujus imperii dis- 
ciplinaeque majorum proprium est, facere nondum audeo; 
faciam id, quod est ad severitatem lenius, et ad communem 
salutem utilius; nam, si te interfici jussero, residebit in 
republica reliqua conjuratorum manus; sin tu (quod te jam- 
dudum hortor), exieris, exhaurietur ex urbe tuorum comitum 
magna et perniciosa sentina reipublicae. Quid est, Catilina? 
Num dubitas id, me imperante, facere, quod jam tua sponte 
faciebas ? Exire ex urbe consul hostem jubet; mterrogas 
me, num in exilium ? Non jubeo; sed si me consulis, 
suadeo. 

Exercises on Lessons 61 and 62. 
Latin words to be translated into English. 

Num. Dubito. Imperavi. Urbs. Hostis. Interro- 
gavit. Jussit. Suadeo. Facere. Audemus. Severitas. 
Salus. Lenius. Interfici. Residebo. Manus. Hortor. 
Comes. Disciplina. Utilius. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

To go out. He will ask. He persuades. They will 
settle. But if. He has exhorted. Companions. City. 
They hesitate. He commands. He orders. Enemy. Be- 
cause. He dares. Peculiar. Command. Milder. I shall 
have ordered. Hand or band. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Quod te hortor. Sin tu exieris ex urbe. Quid est ? Du- 
bitas id facere ? Quod tu& sponte faciebas. Non jubeo, sed 
suadeo. Quod proprium est, facere nondum audeo. Faciam 



VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 1 53 

id, quod est ad communem salutern utilius. Si te interfici 
jussero. Residebit in republica reliqua coojuratorum manus. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Will you ask me. I do not command, but I persuade. 
He will settle in the republic. He exhorts me. What is it? 
Whether did you hesitate to do it. You did it of your own 
accord. The consul orders you. Because I dare to do it. 
Which is the first and peculiar duty of this command, which 
is more useful as respects the common safety. 

SB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD — ACTIVE VOICE. 
"Er" sb. (1) Present Tense. I, &c, may, &c, advise. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

sb. (1) Moneam []], I may, &c, advise earn. 

sb. (1) Moneas [2], thou mayst, &e., advise eas. 

sb. (1) Moneat [3], he may, &c., advise... eat. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (1) Moneamus [pi. 1], we may, &e., advise eamus. 

sb. (1) Moneatis [pi. 2], you may, &c, advise eatis. 

sb. (1) Moneant [pi. 3], they may, &c, advise eant. 

"Er." sb. (2) Imperfect. I, &c, might, could, &c, advise. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (2) Monerem [1], I might, <fcc., advise erem. 

sb. (2) Moneres [2], thou mightst, &c, advise eres. 

sb. (2) Moneret [3], he might, &c, advise eret. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (2) Moneremus [pi. 1], we might, &c, advise eremus. 

sb. (2) Moneretis [pi. 2], you might, Ac, advise eretis. 

sb. (2) Monerent [pi. 3], they might, &c, advise erent. 

Ui." sb. (4) Perfect. I, &c, may have advised. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (4) Monuerim [1], I may have advised uerim. 

sb. (4) Monueris [2], thou mayst have advised ueris. 

sb. (4) Monuerit [3], he may have advised uerit 



15-1 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

sb. (4) Monuerimus [pi. 1], we may have advised uerimus. 

sb. (4) Monueritis [pi. 2], you may have advised ueritis. 

sb. (4) Monuerint [pi. 3], they may have advised uerint. 

"Ui." sb. (5) Pluperfect. I, &c, might, could, &c, have advised. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (5) Monuissem [1], I might, &c, have advised uissem. 

sb. (5) Monuisses [2], thou inightst, &c, have advised uisses. 

sb. (5) Monuisset [3], he might, &c, have advised uisset. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (5) Monuissemus [pi. 1], we might, &c, have advised uissemus. 

sb. (5) Monuissetis [pi. 2], you might, &c, have advised uissetis. 

sb. (5) Monuissent [pi. 3], they might, &c., have advised uissent. 

"ER." IM. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

\ 

SINGULAR. 

im. Mone or moneto [2], advise thou e or eto. 

im. Moneto [3], let him advise eto. 

PLURAL. 

im. Monete or monetote [pi. 2], advise ye ete or etote. 

im. Monento [pi. 3], let them advise ento. 

IN. INFINITIVE MOOD. 

"Er." in. (1) Present Tense. 

in. (1) Monere, to advise ere. 

"Ui." in. (4) Perfect Tense. 
in. (4) Monuisse, to have advised uissc. 

"hum." in. (3) Future. 
in. (3) Moniturus esse, to be about to advise iturus esse. 

PARTICIPLES [PART.]. 

"Er" (I) Present Tense. 

(1) ens-entis. 1. Monens [part.], advising ens. 

"Itum." (3) Future Tense. 
(3) us-a-um. 1. Moniturus [part.], about to advise us-a-um. 



VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 155 

"er." gerunds [ger.]. 

Terminations. 
% G. Monendi [ger.], of advising endi. 

3. D. Monendo [ger.], to advising ... endo. 

4. A. Monendum [ger.], advising endum. 

6.^.6. Monendo [ger.], in, with, &c, advising endo. 

UM. SUPINE. 
Monitum [urn], an advising itum. 

In the above, the present and imperfect subjunctive, with 
the imperative, and all their numbers and persons, are formed 
from the first principal part, er ; also, the present infinitive, 
present participle, and the gerunds, are formed from the 
same er. The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive are formed 
from the second principal part, ui ; also, the perfect infinitive 
is formed from the same. The future participle, the future 
infinitive, and the supine in wm, are formed from the third 
principal part, itum. 

In the present tense, in the singular, er is changed into 
earn in the first person, into eas in the second, and into eat 
in the third person \ in the plural, er is changed into eamus 
in the first person, into eatis in the second, and into eant in 
the third person. 

In the imperfect tense, in the singular, er is changed into 
erem in the first person, into eres in the second, and into eret 
in the third person; in the plural, er is changed into eremus 
in the first person, into eretis in the second, and into erent in 
the third person. 

In the perfect tense, in the singular, ui is changed into 
uerim in the first person, into ueris in the second, and into 
uerit in the third person * in the plural, ui is changed into 
uerimus in the first person, into ueritis in the second, and 
into uerint in the third person. 

In the pluperfect, in the singular, ui is changed into uissem 
in the first person, into uisses in the second, and into uisset 
in the third person ; in the plural, ui is changed into uissemus 



156 VERBS- -SECOND CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

in the first person, into uissetis in the second, and into uissent 
in the third person. 

In the imperative mood, er is changed, in the second 
person, into e or eto ; in the third person, into eto. In the 
plural, er, in the second person, is changed into ete or etote ; 
in the third person, into ento. 

In the infinitive mood, present tense, er is changed into 
ere ; in the perfect of the same, ui is changed into uisse ; in 
the future of the same, itum is changed into iturus esse. 

In the participles, in the present tense, er is changed into 
ens; in the future, itum is changed into iturus. 

In the gerunds, er is changed, in the genitive, into endi ; 
in the dative, into endo ; in the accusative, into endum ; in 
the ablative, into endo. 

In the supine, itum remains itum. 

The same omission of ve or vi, that has been indicated in 
the first conjugation, may also take place in this second, when 
ve or vi occurs, in the second principal part : as, implerunt 
for impleverunt — they have filled. 

Lesson 63. 

Ex od>6 quo <»»-««> I e-ui.sb. (2 ) posset m • • I ar - avi - atam -p- ,n -( 1 ) judicari 

From which it-might be-judged 

quantum m ' 2 boni, ■ constantia ' »«wn-ui>.« haberet [3] * * in 

how-much of-good, constancy might-have in 

6 se; (3)## propterea quod ui,pU quos aliquandiu 

itself; because that (those) whom they- 1 had for-some-time 

er iriA^timuiggentQLS]" s i ne e caug - is - i8 -P ,J inermes, 

1 feared without cause (when) unarmed, 

postea ar " I «*+—*& superassent [p, - 3] •• ic -P u hos 
they- 1 had afterwards l conquered those 

s - p, - 4 armatos et or -° rispU victores. Denique, 

(same, when) armed and conquerors. In-fine, (that) 

ic - pU hos 8 - pU Germanos («*«««) I e - fui esse is ' pM eosdem, cum- 
these Germans were (the) same, with 

u,pK6 quibus- 5pM Helvetii ssepenumer6 

whom (the) Helvetii 'having often 



VERBS SECOND CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 157 

■* u congressi [part,] ** plerumque ar_ ' avi - atum - sb - (5) superassent [p, - 3] •• 

1 engaged 'had mostly 'overcome 

non solum in 8 - pli6 suis, sed etiam in 

(them) not only in their-own (territories), but also in 

i-^finibus ,e ' pl - 2 illorum ; ui - pU qui 

(the) territories | of-them [of these Germans], who [the Helvetii] 
tamen non (3um-esse).e- 1 ui.*^) p tuerint [ph33 * * 

however 'have not 'been-able 

(sum-esse) | e-ui.in.(l) egge r-ris.pl. 1 p areg er.3 nos t r0 us.3 exerc i tu i. Si 

to-be equal to-our army. If 

^adversum mA proelium et 'fuga 8pL2 G-allorum 

(the) adverse battle and flight l of (the) ' Gauls 

I er-i-tum.sb. ( 2) commoV eret [3] • • uKpM quos, ic ' pU hos 

should-disturb any, (that) those 

(sum-esse)|e-uUn.(i)p 0Sse reperire, si quaererent, 

would-be-able to-find, if they-inquired, (that) 

s - p1 - 6 Gallis ar_avi " ' atum -^- s - p1 - 6 defatigatis [part - ] * * as " atis - 6 diuturnitate 
(the) Gauls being-wearied ' by (the) 'long-duration 

m - 2 belli, 8,4 Ariovistum, quum 

1 of (the) 'war, (that) Ariovistus, when 

( in).er-ui-entum. S ub.(5) con tinuisset [3] * * 4 se (3) * * 8,pU multos 

he-had-kept himself many 

ls - i8pU menses (m.) ## m,p,,6 castris ac U8 - udis - pK6 paludibus (/.)•* 
months in-camps and marshes 

neque fecisset a8 ~ atis - 4 potestatem 2 sui (3)# * 

| nor had-made power of-himself [nor had given an 

subito 8 - 4 adortumt par, - ] ** 
opportunity of battle] 'having suddenly 'attacked (the Gauls) 

jam Iar-avi-atum.(1).ns-ntis.pl.4 des p erantes[ part.]». fe 6p Ugn £ et 

now despairing of battle and 

B,p,,4 dispersos, [part,J# * vicisse magis io " ionis,6 ratione ac 

scattered, conquered more *by (his) 'skill and 

m - 6 consilio quam us ' utis - 6 virtute (/.) •• 

*by (his) 'counsel than 'by (his) 'courage. 

Lesson 64. 

Ex quo judicari posset, quantum haberet in se boni con- 
stantia; propterea. qu6d, quos aliquandiu inermes sine causa 
timuissent, hos postea armatos ac victores superassent. De- 
14 



158 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

nique hos esse eosdem Germanos, quibuscum saepenumero 
Helvetii congressi, non solum ia suis, sed etiam in illorum 
finibus, plerumque superassent, qui tamen pares esse nostro 
exercitui non potuerint. Si quos adversum proelium, et fuga 
Gallorum corninoveret, hos, si qusererent,' reperire posse, diu- 
turnitate belli defatigatis Gallis, Ariovistum, quum multos 
menses castris ac paludibus se continuisset, neque sui potes- 
tatem fecisset, desperantes jam de pugna, et dispersos, subito 
adortum, magis ratione ac consilio, quam virtute vicisse. 

Exercises on Lessons 63 and 64. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Proelium. Fuga. Eeperire. Diuternitas. Belluui. 
Mensis. Castris. Potestas. Palus. Desperavit. Pugna. 
Consilium. Virtute. Eosdem. Denique. Ssepenumer6. 
Finis. Superavissent. Tamen. Par. Exercitus. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Months. Marshes. Power. Suddenly. Despairing. 
Battle. Mostly. Only. Territories. Equal. Flight. To 
be able. Being fatigued. They inquired. War. He had 
kept. To be judged. Might have. Because. Without. 
Unarmed. They had conquered. Conquerors. In fine. 
Often. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Germanos ssepenumero superassent. Pares non sunt nos- 
tro exercitui. Quantum haberet in se boni constantia. Quos 
sine causa timuissent. Hos armatos superassent. Si quos 
fuga Gallorum commoveret. Hos reperire posse. Ariovistus 
castris se continuisset. Galli desperantes de pugna. Magis 
consilio quam virtute. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

They had overcome them in their own territories. Who 
have not been able. They are not equal to our army. If 



VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 159 

the flight of the Gauls should disturb any. They may be 
able to find. He kept himself many months in camp. He 
conquered more by counsel than by courage. From which 
it might be judged. Because they had feared them without 
cause. 

SECOND CONJUGATION. 
Passive Voice. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
u Mr»" p. (1) Present Tense. I, &c, am advised, 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

p. (1) Moneor [1], I am advised eor. 

p. (l).Moneris or monere [2], thou art advised eris or ere. 

p. (1) Monetur [3], he is advised etur. 

PLURAL. 

p. (1) Monemur [pi. 1], we are advised emur. 

p. (1) Monemini [pi. 2], you are advised eniini. 

p. (1) Monentur [pi. 3], they are advised entur. 

"JSr" p. (2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c, was advised. 

SINGULAR. 

p. (2) Monebar [1], I was advised ebar. 

p. (2) Monebaris or monebare [2], thou wast advised ebaris or ebare. 

p. (2) Monebatur [3], he was advised ebatur. 

PLURAL. 

p. (2) Monebamur [pi. 1], we were advised ebamur. 

p. (2) Monebamini [pi. 2], you were advised ebamini. 

p. (2) Monebantur [pi. 3], they were advised ebantur. 

" £r." p. (3) Future. I, &c. y shall or tcill be advised. 

SINGULAR. 

p. (3) Monebor [1], I shall be advised ebor. 

p. (3) Moneberis or monebere [2], thou wilt be advised eberis or ebere. 

p. (3) Monebitur [3], he will be advised ebitur. 

PLURAL. 

p. (3) Monebimur [pi. 1], we shall be advised ebimur. 

p. (3) Monebiinini [pi. 2], you will be advised ebimini. 

p. (3) MonebuDtur [pi. 3], they will be advised ebuntur. 



160 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 



"Itum." p. (4) Perfect Tense. I, &c, have been advised. Formed by the 
perfect participle " monitus — advised/' and "sum — lam" or "fui — I 
have been." 



p. (4) Monitus sum or fui [1], I have been advised, 
p. (4) Monitus es or fuisti [2], thou hast been advised, 
p. (4) Monitus est or fuit [3], he has been advised. 



p. (4) Moniti sumus or fuiinus [pi,. 1], we have been advised. 

p. (4) Moniti estis or fuistis [pi. 2], you have been advised. 

p. (4) Moniti sunt or fuerunt or fuere [pi. 3], they have been advised. 

"/turn." p. (5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c, had been advised. Formed by 
the perfect participle "monitus — advised," and " eram — / was," or 
"fueram — / had been." 

SINGULAR. 

p. (5) Monitus eram or fueram [1], I had been advised. 
p. (5) Monitus eras or fueras [2], thou hadst been advised. 
p. (5) Monitus erat or fuerat [3], he had been advised. 



p. (5) Moniti eramus or fueramus [pi. 1], we had been advised, 
p. (5) Moniti eratis or fueratis [pi. 2], you had been advised. 
p. (5) Moniti erant or fuerant [pi. 3], they had been advised. 

"Itum." p. (6) Future Perfect. I, &c, shall or will have been advised. 
Formed by the perfect participle "monitus — advised," and " ero — I shall 
be," or "fuero — / shall have been." 



p. (6) Monitus ero or fuero [1], I shall have been advised, 
p. (6) Monitus eris or fueris [2], thou wilt have been advised, 
p. (6) Monitus erit or fuerit [3], he will have been advised. 



p. (6) Moniti erimus or fuerimus [pi. 1], we shall have been advised, 
p. (6) Moniti eritis or fueritis [pi. 2], you will have been advised. 
p. (6) Moniti erunt or fuerint [pi. 3], they will have been advised. 

The present, imperfect, and future tenses of the indicative 
passive, are formed from the first principal part er ; the per- 



VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 161 

feet, pluperfect, and future perfect, are formed from the 
third principal part, itum ; or, rather, the perfect participle 
is formed from the third principal part. 

In the present tense, in the singular, er is changed into 
eor in the first person, into en's or ere in the second, and into 
etur in the third person ; in the plural, er is changed into 
emur in the first person, into emini in the second, and into 
entur in the third person. 

In the imperfect tense, in the singular, er is changed into 
ebar in the first person, into ebaris or ebare in the second, 
and into ebatur in the third person ; in the plural, er is 
changed into ebamur in the first person, into ebamini in the 
second, and into ebantur in the third person. 

In the future tense, er is changed, in the singular, into 
ebor in the first person, into eberis or ebere in the second, 
and into ebitur in the third person ; in the plural, er is 
changed into ebimur in the first person, into ebimini in the 
second, and into ebuntur in the third person. 

The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses, have 
properly no terminations, they being formed by the perfect 
participle and the tenses of sum. 

In the perfect tense, either sum — I am, or fui — 1 was, 
combined with the perfect participle, may be used to denote 
the perfect tense. So, likewise, eram or fueram for the plu- 
perfect, and ero or fuero for the perfect future. 

Lesson 65. 
Vero nunc, "-'quae <«*»««) i -«-(» es t ^ • • u - ! ista ! tua Vita? 

But now, what is this your life ? 

Enim jam loquar cum- 6 te* (2)# * sic, ut videar non 

For now I-will-speak with you so, that I-may-seem not 

( ,um-««) i e-ui.in. ( i) esge ^ permotus m - 6 odio, od - 6 quo 

to-be moved ■ with (the) ' hatred, with-which 

" gr - ui - itum - (I) debeo, [,] **sed ut 6 misericordia, 

I-ought, but that (I may seem to be moved) by-pity, 

'nulla -^'quae l^ w ^*< ! >debctur t 3],# 3 tibi. (2)## Venisti 
none (of) .. which is-due to-you. You-came 

14* 



162 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

paullo ante in Gs,4 senatum; ois,1 quis ex uae6 hac 

a-little before (this) into (the) senate ; who out-of this 

6 tanta 6 frequentia ex tot 8 - pL6 tuis ■ pL6 - amicis 

so-great (an) assemblage out-of so-many (of) your friends 

ac 8 - p1 - 6 necessariis ar -' avi - atum -( 4) salutavit [3]## 4 te? (2)e# Si 
and acquaintances saluted you? If 

^hoc contigit °" inis nemini post 4 memoriam 

this (thing) has-happened to-no-one, since (the) memory 

o-inis.pi.2 no minum ; ' ******•& expectas t2] •• 4 contumeliam 

of-inan, do-you-wait (for the) reproaches 

x " cis - 2 vocis, cum <«"»-««> I •"■*■* «J sis [2J * * sA oppressus 

of (their) voices, when you-are (already) oppressed 

m - 6 gravissimo(s.) # * m,6 judicio as_a,is - 2 taciturn ita tis ? 

1 by (the) * most-grave (condemning) judgments * of (the) 'silence 

uidJ quid, quod 

(of these here present)? j what [but what shall I say of this], that 

8(5 tuo 0s - 6 adventu ,a - pU ista mplJ subsellia vacuefacta sunt ? 
at-your arrival these seats were-made-vacant ? 

Quod is ~ is,pL1 omnes is " is - pll consulares ? 

What all (the) consular (persons) [persons of consular 

ulpU qui persaepe 

rank, or who had been consuls], who very-often 

(«m-«*).e- I ui.(4) f uemrj t [P'.3] •• s.pl.l COnS titllti [part - ] ** 3 tibl (2) * * 

have-been assigned by-you 

ad e *' is - 4 caedem reliquerunt ta ' 4 istam rs_rtis - 4 partem 

for slaughter left that part 

m - pl - 2 subselliorum 4 nudam atque is_is ' 4 inanem, simul atque 

of-the-seats naked and empty, as-soon as 

(d)er- I di- 5 essum.(4) asse(i i st i ? [2] •• uis.6 Q UQ s.6 anim() tan ^ em 

you-sat-near (them)? With-what mind in-fino 

1 4 r-avi-atum.(i) putas [2] •• oc.i hoc ferendum 3 tibi ? (2) * • 

do-you-think this is-to-be-born by-you? 

es6 Mehercle, si spL1 mei spM servi metuerent 4 me (1) ** tud - 6 isto 
By-Hercules, if my slaves should-fear me in-that 

m - 6 pacto, ut is - 5s - pU1 omnes s - pll tui is - is - pU cives metuunt 

manner, that all your citizens fear 

4 te (2) • • J ar-avi-atuxa.sb.^) putarem [!]*• 4 meam 

you, I-would-think (that) my 

8 - 4 domum (/.)•* relinquendam : Hu^** non 

house (ought) to-be-left: *do-you . . not 



VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 163 

I ar-avi- a tum.d.(i) ar kit r aris [2] " bs ' bis - 4 urbem 

1 think (that) the-city (ought to be left) 

3 tibi. (2)## 

by-you. 

Lesson 66. 

Nunc vero, quae tua est ista vita ? Sic enim jam tecum 
loquar, non ut odio permotus esse videar, quo debeo, sed ut 
misericordia, quae tibi nulla debetur. Venisti paullo ante in 
senatum ; quis te ex hac tanta frequentia, ex tot tuis amicis 
ac necessariis salutavit? Si hoc post hominum memoriam 
contigit nernini, vocis expectas contumeliam, cum sis gravis- 
simo judicio taciturnitatis oppressus ? Quid, quod adventu 
tuo ista subsellia vacuefacta sunt ? Quod omnes consulares, 
qui tibi persaepe ad caedem constitud fuerunt, simul atque 
assedisti, partem istam subselliorum nudam atque inanem 
reliquerunt ? Quo tandem animo hoc tibi ferendum putas ? 
Servi mehercle mei si me isto pacto metuerent, ut te metuunt 
omnes cives tui, domum meam relinquendam putarem; tu 
tibi urbem non arbitraris ? 

Exercises on Lessons 65 and 66. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Adventus. Subsellium. Consulares. Caedes. Nudus. 
Reliquerunt. Animus. Putavit. Servus. Pactum. Cives. 
Domus. Putassem. Urbs. Nunc. Vita. Tecum. Odium. 
Debet. Misericordia. Nullus. Tibi. Paullo. Frequentia. 
Amicus. Salutant. Nemo. Vox. Judicium. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Part. Slaughter. Empty. You sat near. In fine. Do 
you think. Slaves. They fear. I think. City. So many. 
Acquaintances. It has happened. Of men. No one. Re- 
proaches. Silence. Arrival. Seats. Very often. Life. 
Moved. Hatred. City. Assemblage. 



164 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

Latin sentences to he translated into English. 

Quo animo tibi ferendum putas ? Servi mei si me metue- 
rent. Tibi urbem relinquendam putares. Adventu tuo sub- 
sellia vacuefacta sunt. Ad caedem constituti fuerunt. Sic 
tecum loquar. Nulla misericordia tibi debetur. Quis te ex 
tuis amicis salutavit. Hoc contigit nemini. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

They left that part of the seats. As soon as you sat near 
them. All the citizens fear you. I would think that my 
house ought to be left. Who out of your friends saluted 
you ? This has happened to no one. At your arrival these 
seats were made vacant. What ! is this your life ? That I 
may seem to be moved. Not with the hatred, with which I 
ought. The pity, which is due to you. 

SB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD PASSIVE VOICE. 

11 Er." p. sb. (1) Present Tense. I, &c, may or can be advised. 

singular. Terminations. 

p. sb. (1) Monear [1], I may, Ac, be advised ear. 

p. sb. (1) Monearis or moneare [2], thou mayst, Ac, be ad- 
vised earis or eare. 

p. sb. (I) Moneatur [3], he may, Ac, be advised eatur. 

PLURAL. 

p. sb. (1) Moneamur [pi. 1], we may, Ac, be advised.. eamur. 

p. sb. (1) Moneamini [pi. 2], you may, Ac, be advised eamini. 

p. sb. (1) Moneantur [pi. 3], they may, Ac, be advised eantur. 

"Er." p. sb. (2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c, might, could, would, &c, be 
advised. 

SINGULAR. 

p. sb. (2) Monerer [1], I might, Ac, be advised erer. 

p. sb. (2) Monereris or Monerere [2], thou mightst, Ac, be ad- 
vised ereris or erere. 

p. sb. (2) Moneretur [3], he might, Ac, be advised eretur. 



VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 165 



PLURAL. Terminations. 

p. sb. (2) Moneremur [pi. 1], we might, &c, be advised eremur. 

p. sb. (2) Moneremini [pi. 2], you might, &c, be advised ereuiini. 

p. sb. (2) Monerentur [pi. 3], they might, &c, be advised crentur. 

"Itum." p. sb. (4) Perfect Tense. I, &c, may have been advised. Formed 
by the perfect participle " monitus — advised" and " sim — I may be," or 
"fuerim — I may have been." 

SINGULAR. 

p. sb. (4) Monitus sim or fuerim [1], I may have been advised. 
p. sb. (4) Monitus sis or fueris [2], thou mayst have been advised, 
p. sb. (4) Monitus sit or fuerit [3], he may have been advised. 



p. sb. (4) Moniti simus or fuerimus [pi. 1], we may have been advised, 
p. sb. (4) Moniti sitis or fueritis [pi. 2], you may have been advised. 
p. sb. (4) Moniti sint or fuerint [pi. 3], they may have been advised. 

"Itum." p. sb. (5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c, might, could, icould, or 
should have been advised. Formed by the perfect participle "monitus 
— advised," and u essem — I might be," or "fuissem — I might have been" 



p. sb. (5) Monitus essem or fuissem [1], I might, &c, have been advised. 
p. sb. (5) Monitus esses or fuisses [2], thou mightst have been advised. 
p. sb. (5) Monitus esset or fuisset [3], he might have been advised. 



p. sb. (5) Moniti essemus or fuissemus [pi. 1], we might have been advised, 
p. sb. (5) Moniti essetis or fuissetis [pi. 2], you might have been advised. 
p. sb. (5) Moniti essent or fuissent [pi. 3], they might have been advised. 

"er." p. im. imperative mood. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

p. im. Monere or monetor [2], be thou advised ere or etor. 

p. im. Monetor [3], let him be advised etor. 

PLURAL. 

p. im. Monemini [pi. 2], be ye advised emini. 

p. im. Monentor [pi. 3], let them be advised entor. 



166 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

P. IN. INFINITIVE MOOD. 

"Er." p. in. (1) Present Tense. To be advised. 

Terminations. 
p. in. (1) Moneri, to be advised eri. 

"Itum." p. in. (4) Perfect Tense. To have been advised. 
p. in. (4) Monitus esse or fuisse, to have been advised. 

"Itum." p. in. (3) Future Tense. To be about to be advised, 
p. in. (3) Monituin iri, to be about to be advised. 

PARTICIPLES [PART.]. 

"Itum." p. (4) Perfect Tense [part.]. Advised, 

p. (4) Monitus [part.], advised itus. 

"Er." p. (3) Future Tense [part.]. To be advised, or necessary 
to be advised, 

p. (3) Monendus [part.], to be advised, or necessary to be advised, endus. 

"ITUM." P. SUPINE IN [u]. 
p. Monitu [u], to be advised u. 



The present and imperfect tenses of the subjunctive pas- 
sive, the imperative passive, the present tense of the infinitive 
passive, and the future participle passive, are formed from 
the first principal part, er. The perfect and pluperfect sub- 
junctive passive, the perfect and future infinitive passive, the 
perfect participle, and the supine in u, are formed from the 
third principal part, itum ; or, rather, the perfect participle, 
and the supine in w, are thus formed. 

In the present tense, in the singular, er is changed into 
ear in the first person, into earis or eare in the second, and 
into eatur in the third person ; in the plural, er is changed 
into eamur in the first person, into eamini in the second, and 
into eantur in the third person. 

In the imperfect tense, er is changed into erer in the first 
person, into ereris or erere in the second, and into eretur in 



VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 167 

the third person ; in the plural, er is changed into eremur in 
the first person, into eremini in the second, and into erentur 
in the third person. 

The perfect and pluperfect tenses, subjunctive passive, 
have properly no terminations ; for the perfect is formed by 
the perfect participle monitus, and sim or fuertm, either 
forming the perfect subjunctive, 7", cfcc, may have advised. 
The pluperfect is formed by the same participle and essem or 
fuissem, either in the sense of I, &c., might, (Sec., have been 
advised. 

In the imperative mood, er is changed into ere or etor, in 
the singular, second person, and into etor in the third person ; 
in the plural, er, in the second person, is changed into emini ; 
in the third person, er is changed into entor. 

In the infinitive, in the present tense, er is changed into 
eri. The perfect tense of the same is formed by the perfect 
participle and esse or fuisse. The future by the supine in 
um and iri. 

The perfect participle is formed by changing the third prin- 
cipal part, itum, into itus ; the future participle is formed by 
changing er into endus. 

The supine in u is formed by changing um into v. 

Lesson 67. 

Ubi r_ri? - 1 Caesar intellexit, i,,4 eum 

When Caesar understood, (that) he [Ariovistus] 

| er-ui-itum.in.(l) tenere 4 gege (3) • • m.pl.6 cagtr i^ ne 

kept himself in-camp, (that) he- 1 might no 

diutius l *r-ui-itu m .p.sb. ( 2) p ro hiberetur w • • Qs - 6 commeatu, 

longer ^e-prohibited from-provisions, 

delegit 8 - 4 locum 8,4 idoneum m ' F '- 3 castris ultra is,4 eum 

he-chose (a) place suitable for-camps beyond that 

8,4 locum circiter 8,pU sexcentos fi8 - pU passus ab is * pL6 eis, in 

place about six-hundred paces from them, in 

ni - 6 quo 8>6 loco 8 -P IJ Grermani (^-i^^-^consederant,^- 3 ^ 

which place (the) Germans had-encamped, 



168 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

que- ex " ici8,6 triplici eU5 acie* 6 instruct&, venit ad is,4 eum 

and (a) triple line being-drawn-up, he-caine to that 

"•Mocum. (b)er-|ssi-ssum. ( 4)j ussit [3]«« 4 p - mam et 4 secundam 

place. He-ordered (the) first (line) and (the) second 

cU aciem <""»-«*> I «tMD esse j n »-p'-« a rmis, 4 tertiam 

line to-be under arms, (the) third (line) 

munire mpL4 castra. ic,1 Hic 8j locus, uti dictum est, 
to-fortify (the) camp. This place, as has-been-said, 

< sun '- e8se)|e - ui - (2) aberat [3] ** ab is -' 18 - 6 hoste circiter 8>pU sexcentos 

was-distant from (the) enemy about six-hundred 

aspl,4 passus. E6 8,1 Ariovistus misit 8,4 numerurn 

paces. Thither Ariovistus sent (a) number 

°- inis - p1 - 2 hominum circiter sexdecim ia,pl - 4 inillia m - pU expedita, 

of-men about sixteen thousand light-armed, 

cum ls - !s,6 omni Qs<3 equitatu ; ""-^quae pU copise 

with all (the) cavalry ; which forces 

I er-ui-itum.sb.(2) perterrerent [pL3] * * er ' pU nostros, et 

should-frighten our (men), and 

1 6 r-ui-itum.sb. ( 2) p ro hiberent rpl,3] • • io - onis ' 6 munitione. (/.)" 

prohibit (them) from-fortifying. 

m,6 Nihilo secius r - ris,1 Ca3sar, ut 

I By-nothing otherwise [nevertheless] Caesar, as he- 1 had 

ante constituent, (b)5r - ' ■ W ""-Wjnssit w## pL4 duas eKpU acies 

before determined, ordered (the) two lines 

I ar-avi-atum.in.(i) p r0 p U i sare is - is 4 hostem, 4 tertiani perficere 

to-repel (the) enemy, (the) third to-complete 

us-eri s .4 p Ug< ™.p'- 6 Castris m - p, - 6 munitis, cparf>:i## reliquit ibi 
(the) work. (The) camp being-fortified, he-left there 

pU duas io-ionis.pi.4 i e gi on es (/. ) * * et rs ~ rti8 - 4 partem 

two legions and (a) part 

m,p1 - 2 auxiliorum ; reduxit quatuor pL4 reliquas 

1 of (the) Auxiliaries; he-brought-back (the) four remaining 

in U8 - oris - pU majora m - pU castra. 
(legions) into (the) greater camp. 

Lesson 68. 

Ubi eum castris sese tenere Caesar intellexit, ne diutius 
commeatu prohiberetur, ultra eum locum, quo in loco G-er- 
mani consederant circiter passus sexcentos ab eis, castris ido- 



VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 169 

neum locum delegit, acieque triplici instructs, ad eum locum 
venit. Primani et secundam aciem in armis esse, tertiani 
castra munire jussit. Hie locus ab hoste circiter passus sex- 
centos, uti dictum est, aberat ; eo circiter hominurn numerum 
sexdecim millia expedita cum omni equitatu Ariovistus misit, 
quae copiae nostros perterrerent, et munitione prohiberent. 
Nibilo secius Caesar, ut ante constituerat, duas acies bostem 
propulsare, tertiam opus perficere jussit. Munitis castris, 
duas ibi legiones reliquit, et partem auxiliorum : quatuor 
reliquas in castra majora reduxit. 

Exercises on Lessons G7 and 68. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Passus. Abest. Homo. Expedita. Equitatus. Misit. 

Copiae. Prohibeo. Acies. Duo. Hostis. Opus. Jubet. 

Reliquit. Reduxit. Teneo. Diutius. Commeatus. Ultra. 
Locus. Idoneus. Delegit. Venit. Munire. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Thitber. He sent. About. Ligbt armed. Forces. 
They prohibit. He determined. He ordered. Before. 
He bas repelled. Tbe works. The enemy. He left. Two. 
He led back. The remaining. He holds. He would be 
prohibited. Suitable. Beyond. He came. They have 
ordered. To fortify. Is distant. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Hie locus ab hoste passus sexcentos aberat. E6 hominum 
numerum sexdecim millia misit. Quae copiae munitione pro- 
hiberent. Duas acies hostem propulsare jussit. Beliquas 
legiones in castra reduxit. Castris sese tenent. Ne com- 
meatu prohiberetur. Quo in loco consederant. Castris ido- 
neum locum delegit. Ad eum locum venit. Tertiam aciem 
castra munire jussit. 
15 



170 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin, 

Caesar, as he had before determined. He ordered the 
two lines to repel the enemy. He left there a part of the 
auxiliaries. He led back the legions into camp. He 
ordered the two legions to be under arms. As has been 
said. This place was distant from the enemy six hundred 
paces. Who should frighten our men. Caesar chose a 
suitable place for the camp. In which place the Germans 
had encamped. He came to that place. 

THIRD CONJUGATION. 

The third conjugation has its principal parts in er-i-tum; 
but they are more irregular than in any of the four conju- 
gations. 

Active Voice. 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

Present Indicative. Present Infinitive. Perfect Indicative. Supine. 

Rego, Regere (er), Rexi (i), Rectum (turn), 

I-rule. to-rule. I-have-ruled. a-ruling. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

"{G)er." (1) Present Tense. I, &c, rule. 

singular. Terminations. 

(1) Rego [1], I rule go. 

(1) Regis [2], thou rulest gis. 

(1) Regit [3], he rules git. 

PLURAL. 

(1) Regimus [pi. 1], we rule gimus. 

(1) Regitis [pi. 2], you rule gitis. 

(1) Regunt [pi. 3], they rule gunt. 

"(G)er." (2) Imperfect Tense. 1 ruled, or was ruling, or did rule. 
SINGULAR. 

(2) Regebam [1], I was ruling or did rule gebam. 

(2) Regebas [2], thou wast ruling, <fcc gebas. 

(2) Regebat [3], he was ruling, <fcc gebat. 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 171 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

(2) Regebamus [pi. 1], we were ruling, &e gebamus. 

(2) Regebatis [pi. 2], you were ruling, <fcc gebatis. 

(2) Regebant [pi. 3], they were ruling, <fec gebant. 

" (G)er." (3) Future Tense. I, &c, shall or will rule, 

SINGULAR. 

(3) Regam [1], I shall rule gam. 

(3) Reges [2], thou wilt rule ges. 

(3) Reget [3], he will rule get. 

PLURAL. 

(3) Regemus [pi. 1], we shall rule gemus. 

(3) Regetis [pi. 2], you will rule getis. 

(3) Regent [pi. 3], they will rule gent. 

"Xi" (4) Perfect Tense. I have ruled. 
SINGULAR. 

(4) Rexi [1], I have ruled xi. 

(4) Rexisti [2], thou hast ruled xisti. 

(4) Rexit [3], he has ruled xit. 

PLURAL. 

(4) Reximus [pi. 1], we have ruled. ximus. 

(4) Rexistis [pi. 2], you have ruled xistis. 

(4) Rexerunt or rexere [pi. 3], they have ruled xerunt or xere. 

"Xi." (5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c, had ruled, 

SINGULAR. 

(5) Rexeram [1], I had ruled xeram. 

(5) Rexeras [2], thou hadst ruled xeras. 

(5) Rexerat [3], he had ruled xerat. 

PLURAL. 

(5) Rexeramus [pi. 1], we had ruled xerauius. 

(5) Rexeratis [pi. 2], you had ruled xeratis. 

(5) Rexerant [pi. 3], they had ruled xerant. 

"Xi." (6) Future Perfect. I, &c, shall or will have ruled. 

SINGULAR. 

(6) Rexero [1], I shall have ruled xero. 

(6) Rexeris [2], thou wilt have ruled xeris. 

(6) Rexerit [3], he will have ruled xerit. 



172 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

plural. Terminations. 

(6) Rexerimus [pi. 1], we shall have ruled xerimus. 

(6) Rexeritis [pi. 2], you will have ruled xeritis. 

(6) Rexerint [pi. 3], they will have ruled xerint. 

The present, imperfect, and future tenses, are formed from 
the first principal part, er. The perfect, pluperfect, and 
future perfect, are formed from the second principal part, i. 

In the present tense, in the singular, the er is changed, 
in this particular word, in the singular, into go in the first 
person, into gis in the second, and into git in the third per- 
son ; the terminations o, is, and it, in the first, second, and 
third persons, in the singular, always remain the same in the 
words of this conjugation; in the plural, er is changed into 
gimus in the first person, into gitis in the second, and into 
gunt in the third person. The terminations imus, ids, and 
tint, in the first, second, and third persons plural, are always 
the same. 

In the imperfect tense, in the singular, the er of this word 
is changed into gebam in the first person, into gebas in the 
second, and into gebat in the third person ; in the plural, er 
is changed into gebamus in the first person, into gebatis in 
the second person, and into gebant in the third person. The 
terminations ebam, ebas, ebat, in the singular, and ebamus, 
ebads, ebant, in the plural, are permanent. 

In the future tense, in the singular, the er of this word 
is changed into gam in the first person, into ges in the 
second, and into get in the third person ; in the plural, er is 
changed into gemus in the first person, into getis in the 
second, and into gent in the third person. The terminations 
am, es, et, in the singular, and emus, etis, ent, in the plural, 
are permanent. 

In the perfect tense, in this word, in the singular, % is 
changed into xi in the first person, into xisti in the second, 
and into xit in the third person ; in the plural, i is changed 
into xtmus in the first person, into xutis in the second, and 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 173 

into xerunt or xere in the third person. The terminations, 
% % isti, it, in the singular, and irtius, istis, erunt or ere, in the 
plural, are permanent. 

In the pluperfect tense, in this word, in the singular, i is 
changed into xeram in the first person, into xeras in the 
second, and into xerat in the third person ; in the plural, i 
is changed into xeramus in the first person, into xeratis in 
the second, and into xerant in the third person. The ter- 
minations eram, eras, erat, in the singular, and eramus, 
eratis, erant, in the plural, are permanent. 

In the future perfect tense, in this word, in the singular, 
i is changed into xero in the first person, into xerrs in the 
second, and into xerit in the third person ; in the plural, i 
is changed into xerimus in the first person, into xeritis in 
the second, and into xerint in the third person. The ter- 
minations ero, eris, erit, in the singular, and erimus y eritis, 
erint, in the plural, are permanent. 



Lesson 69. 
i Tu (i)o» 6r-i»usd. ( 3) veret)ere[ 2i«« ne q ue «^< a uctoritatem 

I Will-you l reverence neither (the) authority 

"^hujus, neque sequere m * 4 judicium, 

of-this (your country), nor will-you-follow (her) judgment, 

neque «*-»« pertimesces [2] * * is " is - 4 vim ? Quse 

nor will-you-fear (her) power? Which (country 

gi c (g)er-efft-ctum.(I) agit[ 3].« cum . •fo.Of* 

of yours) thus | acts [pleads] with you, 

Catilina, et quodammodo ! tacita loquitur. mA Nullum 

O-Catiline, and in-a-manner (though) silent speaks. No 

us-oris.1 facinug j am er-|titi-titum.(4) exstitit[ 3]«« aliqUOt 

wicked-deed *has now Appeared (for) some 

■• pK6 annis, nisi per 4 te (2)## "^ nullum mJ nagitium 

years, unless through you no scandalous-act 

sine 6 te;< 2 >" 3 tibi (2)# * 8 ' 3 uni 

without you; | for-you one [in your case alone] 

15* 



174 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

x-cis.pi. i neceg s -p'-2 mu ltoruiii i8 - is P K2 civmin, 3 tibi (2)## 
(the) violent-death of-many citizens, | for-you [in your 

io-ionis.i vexa tio (/.)•• que- ,0 - 0DisA direptio •(/)** 
case alone] (the) harassing and plundering 

8 - pU sociorum (*"™-^>- e - 1 ui -< 4 > fuit [3] * * l impunita ac ' libera ; 
1 of (the) 'allies has-been unpunished and free; 

l tu (2)«. er-|ui-itu m .(4) va l uisti [2]«. nQn golum ^ x-gis.pU ] egeg 

| you have-been-able not only for laws 

ac io - ionis ' pK4 qu8estiones (/.)•* pl - 4 negligendas ? Cpart - ]## 

and public-prosecutions to-be-neglected [you have been 

verum 

able not only to evade the laws and public prosecutions], but 

etiam ad pl4 evertendas [part,] ** que- pL4 perfringendas\ 

also for (them) to-be-subverted and broken 

Quamquam lud - pL4 illa 
[but also to subvert and break them]. Although those 

m - p1 - 4 superiora non t™"" 3 *^*- 1 ui -( 4 > fuerunt [pK3] * * 

former (villanies) x ought not * to-have-been 

pU ferenda,£ part]## tanien tuli ut 

borne, yet I-have-borne (them) (as far) as 

(sum - esse) - e - |ui(4) potui; vero nunc 4 totam me 

I-was-able ; but now every (part of) me 

(* W m-e«e) | e-ui.in.(1) egge ^ &».6 metu propter 4 te (2)## sA UDUUl J 

is in fear on-account-of you alone; 

i<M quidquid ar, - ui or 3vWtum or atum - 8b -< 4 > increpuerit, 

whatever may-have-made-a-noise (or alarm), 

Catilinam ' sr - uip - ,n(,) timeri ; m - 4 nullum mA consilium 

Catiline is-to-be-feared ; (that) no design 

I (d)er-di-sum.p.in.(l) v {^ eY [ (sum-^se) | e-ui.in.(l) p 0Sge Iliiri COntra 

seems to-be-able to-be-entered-on against 

me, 0<u quod i 6r - ui - sb - (1) abhorreat [3]# * a 

me, which may-be-abhorrent from (or unconnected 

m - 6 tuo m ' 6 scelere, {Wim - me) ' "*& est [3] * * non 

with) your criminal-participation, is not 

ferendum. Quamobrem W-**— ■■■■ discede, [2] •• atque 

to-be-borne. Wherefore depart, and 

mpi^l(ip)er-ipui-ereptum.i m . er Jp e [2]»» ic.4^ unc or-oris.4 timorem S mihi, (I)M 

take-away this fear from-me, 

De opprimar, si <««»-«*> I *■>•« est [3] * * 8j verus, 

lest I-may-be-oppresr.ed, if it-is (a) true 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 175 

sin sj falsus, ut tandem 

(fear), but-if (it is a) false (one), that at-length 

aliquando desinam ,gr ~ ui -' !n - (I) timere. 
some-time I-may-cease to-fear. 

Lesson 70. 

Hujus tu neque auctoritateni verebere, neque judicum 
sequere, neque vim pertimesces ? Quae tecum, Catilina, sic 
agit, et quodammodo tacita loquitur. Nullum aliquot jam 
annis facinus exstitit, nisi per te ; nullum flagitium sine te : 
tibi uni multorum civium neces, tibi vexatio direptioque soci- 
orum impunita fuit ac libera; tu non solum ad negligendas 
leges ac quaestiones, verum etiam ad everteDdas perfringen- 
dasque valujsti. Superiora ilia, quamquam ferenda non fue- 
runt, tamen, ut potui, tuli ; nunc vero me totam esse in metu 
propter te unum; quidquid increpuerit, Catilinam timeri; 
nullam videri contra me consilium iniri posse, quod a tuo 
scelere abhorreat non est ferendum. Quamobrem discede, 
atque hunc mihi timorem eripe ; si est verus, ne opprimar ; 
sin falsus, ut tandem aliquando timere desinam. 

Exercises on Lessons 69 and 70. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Ferenda. Potuit. Metus. Timeo. Scelus. Timor. 
Discede. Verus. Opprimar. Falsus. Desinam. Vere- 
bere. Yis. Ago. Tacitus. Nullus. Annus. Facinus. 
Multus. Civis. Vexatio. Liberus. Lex. Solum. Va- 
luisti. Etiam. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Fear. True. False. Some time. To fear. They are 
able. Against. Wherefore. Take away. Depart. Scan- 
dalous act. Many. Plundering. Unpunished. Laws. 
Yet. Public prosecutions. Will you reverence. Will you 
follow. Will you fear. To act. Speaks. Year. 



176 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English, 

Quamobrem mihi timorem eripe. Non est verum. Ut 
timere desinam. Ilia ferenda non fuerunt. Ut potui tuli. 
Nunc me esse in metu. Non est ferendum. Yim perti- 
mesces. Quae tecum sic agit. Nullum facinus exstitit, nisi 
per te. Tu solum ad leges perfringendas valuisti. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Lest I may be oppressed, if it is a true fear. That I may 
cease to fear. The violent death of so many citizens. The 
plundering of the allies. You have been able to evade the 
laws and public prosecutions. Yet I have borne them as far 
as I was able. Catiline is to be feared. It is not to be 
borne. Take away this fear from me. But if it is a false fear. 

SB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD — ACTIVE VOICE. 
"Er." sb. (1) Present Tense. I, &c, may, &c, rule. 

singular. Terminations. 

sb. (1) Regain []], I may rule gam. 

sb. (1) Regas [2], thou mayst rule gas. 

sb. (1) Regat [3], lie may rule gat. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (1) Regamus [pi. 1], we may rule gamus. 

sb. (1) Regatis [pi. 2], you may rule gatis. 

sb. (1) Regant [pi. 3], they may rule..... gant 

"fir." sb. (2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c, might, could, would or should rule. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (2) Regerem [1], I might, &c, rule gerem. 

sb. (2) Regeres [2], thou mightst, <fcc, rule geres. 

sb. (2) Regeret [3], he might, &c., rule geret. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (2) Regeremus [pi. 1], we might, &c, rule geremus. 

sb. (2) Regeretis [pi. 2], you might, &c, rule geretis. 

sb. (2) Regerent [pi. 3], they might, <fcc., rule .„ gerent 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. • 177 



" JCi" sb. (4) Perfect Tense. I, &c, may have ruled. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

gb. (4) Rexerim [1], I may have ruled xeriin. 

sb. (4) Rexeris [2], thou mayst have ruled xeris. 

sb. (4) Rexerit [3], he may have ruled xerit. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (4) Rexerimus [pi. 1], we may have ruled xerimus. 

sb. (4) Rexeritis [pi. 2], you may have ruled xeritis. 

sb. (4) Rexerint [pi. 3], they may have ruled xerint. 

"Xi" sb. (5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c, might, could, would or should 
have ruled. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (5) Rexissem [1], I might, Ac, have ruled xissem. 

sb. (5) Rexisses [2], thou mightst, Ac, have ruled xisses. 

sb. (5) Rexisset [3], he might, Ac, have ruled xisset. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (5) Rexissemus [pi. 1], we might, Ac, have ruled xissemus. 

sb. (5) Rexissetis [pi. 2], you might, Ac, have ruled xissetis. 

sb. (5) Rexissent [pi. 3], they might, Ac, have ruled xissent. 

"ER." IM. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
SINGULAR. 

im. Rege or regito [2], rule thou georgito. 

im. Regito [3], let him rule gito. 

PLURAL. 

im. Regite or regitote [pi. 2], rule ye gite orgitote. 

im. Regunto [pi. 3], let them rule gunto. 

IN. INFINITIVE MOOD. 

"Er." in. (1) Present Tense. 

in. (1) Regere, to rule gere. 

u Xi" in. (4) Perfect Tense. 
in. (4) Rexisse, to have ruled xisse. 

" Ctum." in. (3) Future Tense. 
n. (3) Recturus esse, to be about to rule cturus esse. 



178 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

PARTICIPLES [PART.]. 

"Er." (1) Present Tense. 

Terminations. 
(1) gens-gentis. 1. Regens [part.], ruling gens. 

" Cfinm." (3) Future Tense. 
(3) cturus-a-um. Recturus [part.], to be about to rule cturus-a-um. 

"£r." gerunds [ger.]. 

2. G. Regendi [ger.], of ruling gendi. 

3. D. Regendo [ger.], to ruling gendo. 

4. A. Regendum [ger.], ruling gendum. 

6. Ab. Regendo [ger.], by, &c, ruling gendo. 

CTUM. SUPINE [UM] IN UM. 
Rectum [um], a ruling ctum. 

In the above, the present and imperfect subjunctive, and 
the imperative, also the present infinitive, present participle, 
and the gerunds, are formed from the first principal part, er. 
The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive, and also the perfect 
infinitive, are formed from the second principal part, i (but 
here xi). The future participle, the future infinitive, and 
the supine in um, are formed from the third principal part, 
turn (here ctum). 

In the present tense, in the singular, er, of this word, is 
changed into gam in the first person, in the second, into gas, 
and in the third person into gat ; in the plural, er is changed 
into gamus in the first person, into gatis in the second per- 
son, and into gant in the third person. The terminations, 
am, as, at, in the singular, and amus, atis, ant, in the 
plural, are permanent. 

In the imperfect tense, in the singular, er of this word is 
changed into gerem in the first person, into geres in the 
second, and into geret in the third person ; in the plural, er 
is changed into geremus in the first person, into gerett's in the 
second, and into gerent in the third person. The termina- 



VERBS THIRD CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 179 

tions, erem, eres, eret, in the singular, and eremus, eretis, 
erent, in the plural, are permanent. 

In the perfect tense, in the singular, t, of this word, is 
changed into xerim in the first person, into xeris in the 
second, and into xerit in the third person ) in the plural, i is 
changed into xerimvs in the first person, into xeritis in the 
second, and into xerint in the third person. The termina- 
tions, erim, en's, erit, in the singular, and erimus, eritis, 
erint, in the plural, are permanent. 

In the pluperfect tense, in the singular, i, of this word, is 
changed into xissem in the first person, into xisses in the 
second, and into xisset in the third person; in the plural, i is 
changed into xissemus in the first person, into xisset is in the 
second, and into xissent in the third person. The termina- 
tions issem, isses, isset, in the singular, and issemus, issetis, 
issent, in the plural, are permanent. 

In the imperative mood, er, in this word, is changed, in 
the singular, in the second person, into ge or gito ; in the 
third person, into gito ; in the plural, in the second, into gite 
or gitote ; in the third person, into gunto. The terminations 
e or ito, ito, in the singular, and ite or itote, unto, in the 
plural, are permanent. 

In the infinitive mood of this word, in the present tense, 
er is changed into gere ; in the perfect tense, i is changed 
into xisse ; in the future, turn is changed into cturus esse. 
The terminations ere, isse, turns, are permanent. 

In the participles, in the present, er is, in this word, 
changed into gens ; in the future, turn is changed into cturus. 
The terminations ens and turus, are permanent. 

In the gerunds, in this word, er is changed into gendi in 
the genitive, into gendo in the dative, into gendum in the 
accusative, and into gendo in the ablative. The terminations 
endij endo, endum, endo, are permanent. 

In the supine, in this word, turn is changed into ctum. 
The termination, urn, is permanent. 

In the tenses and persons formed from the second prin- 



180 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

cipal part, (?'), is, iss, and sis, are sometimes omitted after 
s or x : as, evasti for evasisti — thou hast escaped; extinxti 
for extinxisti — thou hast extinguished. 

Lesson 71 

8 - 6 Proximo ei - 6 die ; (m.)*° r - risJ Caesar m - 6 suo 

1 On (the) 1 next day, Caesar (according to) his 

ra - 6 institute (^)«r-|dwiHiuctui n .(4) e( j ux j t pi«« P i.4 suas pi-4 CO pi as ex 

custom led-forth his forces from 

m.pi.e u tri S q ue m -P 1 - 6 castris ; que- sA progressus [part ° * • 

each camp; and having-advanced 

paululunr k us - oris - pK6 majoribus ^-l^^-Winstruxit^ 3 ** 

(a) little from (the) greater (camp) he-drew-up 

eU aciem que- (cio)gr - ' /'"- ctum -( 4 > fecit [3] * * 

(his) line-of-battle | and he-made 

i S -i S .pi.6 i 10S tibus • as " ans - 4 potestatem ' »**"■■•« p U g nan di. tser - ] * • 

*to (the) l enemy (the) power of-fighting [and 

Ubi lig(er)-lexi-lectum.<4) intelleXlt « * * 

he offered battle to the enemy]. When he-understood 

ne quidem turn is - p * 4 eos prodire, circiter 
(that) not even then they come-forth, about 

eU meridiem (m.) # * ^ uc ) e ' r - daxi - ductum -^> reduxit [3]# * Gs - 4 exercitum 

noon he-led-back (bis) army 

in m - pU castra. Turn demum '^Ariovistus 

into (the) camp. Then at-last Ariovistus 

(tt)er-|i S i-is S um.(4) m ^ t [3]«« rs-rt. s .4 p ar t e m pU2 suarum p1,2 copiarum, 

sent (a) part of-his forces, 

quae ' ar - avi - atum ' sb - (2) oppugnaret t3]# * ,18 - ori, - pl - 4 minora(c.)* # mph4 castra. 

which might-attack (the) smaller camp. 

ar-avi- 1 at uni .p.(4) p U g na t U m est [3] * * acriter utrinque usque 

It-was-fought sharply on-both-sides until 

ad 8 - 4 vesperum. Cs - 6 Occasu 1_lis - 2 solis 8j Ariovistus 

towards evening. 'At (the) 'setting * of (the) 'sun Ariovistus 

( d,c)er-|duxi-<iuctum.(4) re( j ux i t t3j»» pi.4 guas p>-* CO pias in m - pU castra 

led-back his forces 'into (the) 1 camp 

m.pi.6 mil i t i s u S -ens. P i.6 vu i n e r ibus et m - pK6 illatis t par, - ] • • et 

many wounds ' being both * given and 

(Accipio-accipthre^er-acccpi-accept um.(4). tn.pl.6 a ecet)tis. tP 3rt *^ * # Ouum 

received. When 



VERBS THIRD CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 181 

r - ris - 1 Caesar ' *-•»*««««■*•« quaereret [3] * * ex 8 - pL6 eaptivis, 

Caesar inquired of (the) captives, 

quamobrem sJ Ariovistus non ' ■»»■«*■»■*■<» decertaret [3] * * 

why Ariovistus *did not x contend 

n, - 6 proelio reperiebat ""^hanc 4 causam. Quod 

in-battle he-found this (to be) (the) cause. Because 

ea.l ea do^inis.1 consuetudo ^y;)^ («««-««) | MiAff) e g get 01 • • 

(that) this custom ' | might-be 

apud ,,pU Germanos ut is,p1,2 eorum 

[obtained] with (the) Germans that their 

pU matresfamilias i«^«-^-« declararent [pK3] •• rs - rtis - pL6 sortibus 

mothers-of-families should-declare by-casting-of-lots 

et io - onis - ph6 vaticinationibus, utrum m * 4 proelium 

and by-prophecies, whether battle 

(«*«-««) i e-ui.sb.(2) esset [3] •• committi ex Gs - 6 usu necne; 

was to-be-engaged-in with advantage or-not; 

ea.pl.4 g„g I (c)6r-xi-ctum.in.(1) (JJqqj«q [fa (sum-esse) | e-ui.in.(l) a gggg 

(that) they say, thus "(that) it-is 

non fas s ' pU Germanos ' ar - avi - a,umJn - (l) superare, 

not | lawful [permitted for] (the) Germans to-conquer, 

g - (d)er- 1 di-tum.sb. ( 5) CO ntendissent &**•• m - 6 proelio ante 

if they-engaged in-battle before 

4novam 4 lunam." 
(the) new moon." 

Lesson 72. 

Proximo die, instituto suo, Caesar ex castris utrisque co- 
pias suas eduxit; paululumque a majoribus progressus aciem 
instruxit, hostibusque pugnandi potestatem fecit. Ubi ne 
turn quidem eos prodire intellexit, circiter meridiem exer- 
citum in castra reduxit. Turn demum Ariovistus partem 
suarum copiarum, quae castra minora oppugnaret misit; 
acriter utrinque usque ad vesperum pugnatum est. Solis 
occasu suas copias Ariovistus, multis et illatis et acceptis 
vulneribus, in castra reduxit. Quum ex captivis quaereret 
Caesar, quamobrem Ariovistus proelio non decertaret hanc 
reperiebat causam • quod apud Germanos ea consuetudo 
esset, ut matresfamilias eorum sortibus et vaticinationibus 
16 



182 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

declarent, utrum proelium committi ex usu esset necne; eas 
ita dicere, " non esse fas Germanos superare, si ante novam 
lunam proelio contendissent. 

Exercises on Lessons 71 and 72. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Sol. Vulnus. Occasu. Reduco. Quamobrem. Proe- 
lium. Reperiebat. Consuetudo. Matresfamilias. Sors. 
Usus. Dixerunt. Fas. Superavit. Luna. Dies. Majus. 
Instruere. Pugnandi. Facio. Prodire. Intelligo. Mere- 
dies. Oppugnavit. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

He will say. Lawful. You may conquer. New. They 
may lead back. Wound. They inquire. You may con- 
tend. Custom. Thou mightst have declared. Prophecies. 
They make. Power. I understand. Noon. He will send. 
It was fought. Evening. Sun. Setting. You may lead 
forth. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Suas copias Ariovistus in castra reduxit. Quum quaereret, 
hanc reperiebat causam. Apud G-ermanos consuetudo esset. 
Matresfamilias declararent. Si ante novam lunam prcelio 
contendissent. Proximo die Caesar copias suas eduxit. Pau- 
lulum a majoribus castris aciem instruxit. Hostibus pug- 
nandi potestatem fecit. Turn exercitum in castra reduxit. 
Partem copiarum mittit. Acriter usque ad vesperum pug- 
n a turn est. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

That it is not permitted for the Germans to conquer, if 
they engage in battle before the new moon. Ariovistus led 
back his forces into the camp. When Caesar inquired why 



VERBS THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 183 

Ariovistus did not contend in battle. This custom obtained 
with the Germans. Having advanced a little from the 
greater camp. And he offered battle to the enemy. About 
noon he led back his army into camp. Ariovistus sent a 
part of his forces. It was fought sharply on both sides. 
Caesar, according to his custom, led forth his forces. 

THIRD CONJUGATION. 
Passive Voice. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

"Er." p. (1) Present Tense. I, &c, am ruled. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

p. (1) Regor [1], I am ruled gor. 

p. (1) Regeris or regere [2], thou art ruled geris or gere. 

p. (1) Regitur [3], he is ruled gitur. 

PLURAL. 

p. (1) Regimur [pi. 1], we are ruled gimur. 

p. (1) Regimini [pi. 2], you are ruled gimini. 

p. (1) Reguntur [pi. 3], they are ruled guntur. 

"Er." p. (2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c, teas ruled. 

SINGULAR. 

p. (2) Regebar [1], I was ruled gebar. 

p. (2) Regebaris or regebare [2], thou wast ruled gebaris orgebare. 

p. (2) Regebatur [3], he was ruled gebatur. 

PLURAL. 

p. (2) Regebamur [pi. 1], we were ruled gebnmur. 

p. (2) Regebamini [pi. 2], you were ruled gebamini. 

p. (2) Regebantur [pi. 3], they were ruled gebantur. 

"Er." p. (3) Future Tense. I, &c, shall or ivill be ruled. 

SINGULAR. 

p. (3) Regar [1], I shall be ruled gar. 

p. (3) Regeris or regere [2], thou wilt be ruled geris or gere. 

p. (3) Regetur [3], he will be ruled getur. 



184 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

p. (3) Regemur [pi. 1], we shall be ruled gemur. 

p. (3) Regemini [pi. 2], you will be ruled gemini. 

p. (3) Regentur [pi. 3], they will be ruled gentur. 

" Ctum." p. (4) Perfect Tense. I, &c, have been ruled. Formed by the 
perfect jmrticiple "rectus — ruled," and "sum — I am," or "fui — I was" 

SINGULAR. 
p. (4) Rectus sum or fui [1], I have been ruled. 
p. (4) Rectus es or fuisti [2], thou hast been ruled. 
p. (4) Rectus est or fuit [3], he has been ruled. 



p. (4) Recti sumus or fuiuius [pi. 1], we have been ruled 

p. (4) Recti estis or fuistis [pi. 2], you have been ruled. 

p. (4) Recti sunt or fuerunt or fuere [pi. 3], they have been ruled. 

"Ctum" p. (5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c, had been ruled. Formed by 
the perfect participle "rectus — ruled," and " eram — / was" or "fue- 
ram — I had been." 

SINGULAR. 

p. (5) Rectus eram or fueram [1], I had been ruled, 
p. (5) Rectus eras or fueras [2], thou hadst been ruled, 
p. (5) Rectus erat or fuerat [3], he had been ruled. 



p. (5) Recti eramus or fueramus [pi. 1], we had been ruled. 
p. (5) Recti eratis or fueratis [pi. 2], you had been ruled. 
p. (5) Recti erant or fuerant [pi. 3], they had been ruled. 

"Ctum." p. (6) Future Perfect. I, &c, shall or will have been ruled. 
Formed by the perfect participle "rectus — ruled," and " ero — I shall 
be," or "fuero — I shall have been." 

SINGULAR. 

p. (6) Rectus ero or fuero [1], I shall have been ruled, 
p. (6) Rectus eris or fueris [2], thou wilt have been ruled, 
p. (6) Rectus erit or fuerit [3], he will have been ruled. 



p. (6) Recti erimus or fuerimus [pi. 1], we shall have been ruled, 
p. (6) Recti eritis or fueritis [pi. 2], you will have been ruled, 
p. (6) Recti erunt or fuerint [pi. 3], they will have been ruled. 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 185 

The present, imperfect, and future tenses of the indicative 
passive, are formed from the first principal part er ; the per- 
fect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses, are formed from 
the third principal part, turn ; or, rather, the perfect participle 
is formed from the third principal part. 

In the present tense, in this word, in the singular, er is 
changed into gor in the first person, into geris or gere in the 
second, and into gitur in the third person ; in the plural, er 
is changed into gimur in the first person, into gimini in the 
second, and into guntur in the third person. The termina- 
tions or, eris or ere, itur, in the singular, and imur, imini, 
untur, in the plural, are permanent. 

In the imperfect tense, in the singular, in this word, er is 
changed into gebar in the first person, into gebaris or gebare 
in the second, and into gebatur in the third person ; in the 
plural, er is changed into gebamur in the first person, into 
gebamini in the second, and into gebantur in the third per- 
son. The terminations ebar, ebaris or ebare, ebatur, in the 
singular, and ebamur, ebamini, ebantur, in the plural, are 
permanent. 

In the future tense, in the singular, in this word, er is 
changed into gar in the first person, into geris or gere in the 
second, and into getur in the third person ; in the plural, er 
is changed into gemur in the first person, into gemini in the 
second, and into gentur in the third person. The termina- 
tions ar, eris or ere, etur, in the singular, and emur, emini, 
entur, in the plural, are permanent. 

The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses, have 
properly no terminations, they being formed by the perfect 
participle and the tenses of sum. 

In the perfect tense, either sum — I am, or fui — 1 was, 
combined with the perfect participle, may be used to denote 
the perfect passive tense. So, likewise, eram or fueram for 
the pluperfect tense, and ero or fuero for the perfect future. 
16* 



186 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

Lesson 73. 

Interim " 4Bi * LI milites pl,2 duarum io - ioni8 - pL2 leo;ionum, 

In-the-mean-time (the) soldiers of (the) 'two legions, 

w.pl.1 quge {sum -««)•- | ui.(5) f uenmt [pl.3] • • j n ■-« n0 vissimO (3) * ° 

which had-been in (the) last 

nen-mis.6 a g m i ne? m.s praesidio m ' pU impedimentis, 

troop [in the rear], for-protection ■ to (the) * baggage, 

m - 6 proelio ar - avi " ' atu *»-^ m - 6 nunciato, [part ' ] * * 

(the) battle being-announced, (and their) 

as - 6 cursu ar " avi - • atum -( 4 )- s - 6 incitato [partJ * * 

march being-accelerated 

C icio-icere).er-exi-ectum.p.(2) CO nspiciebantur [pK3J # * in s - 6 summo 

were-seen on (the) top (of) 

is.is.6 C0 ]i e (m)^ aD ifc^hostibusj et ^ Titus ^Labienus 

(the) hill by (the) enemy ; and Titus Labienus 

* A potitus [part - ] •* m,p1 - 6 castris i8 - i8 * pU2 hostium, et 

possessed ' of (the) l camp of (the) enemy, and 

a r-avi- 1 atum. ( 4).s.i CO nspicatus [part - ] * * ex or - oris - 6 superiore (e.) • * 

having-beheld from (the) higher 

8,6 loco "^^quae ei,pU res gererentur in m,p1 - 6 nostris 

place what things were-carried-on in our 

m - pK6 castris (lt)8r - ' si - ssum -< 4 > misit [3] * * 4 decimain 

camp sent (the) tenth 

io - onis - 4 legionem (/.)*• m - 3 subsidio er - ph3 nostris ; uUpU qui 

legion 1 to (the) l aid (of) our (men); who 

qUUm ( nosc -)-Sr-|novi-nit«m.sb.(5) CO g nov ig gent rpl.3]»« ex 6 f U ga 

when they-had-known : from (the) x flight 

es-itis.pl.2 e q U i tum et o-on*pl.2 ca J onum J n ui.6 q UQ 

1 of (the) ' cavalry and ' of (the) ^amp-followers in what 

8 - 6 loco eil res c«nw«o l^M 2 > e sset/ 3 - ]# * que* in m6 quanto- 

situation (the) affair was, and in what-great 

m - 6 periculo et m<pU castra et io - ionis - pU legiones(/)** e * 

danger both (the) camp and (the) legions and 

or-oris.i i mpera tor > ^vi-atum.d.sb. (2 ) V ersaretur ; t 3] • • 

(the) commander were, 

(ci).er- 1 feci-ctun». ( 4) f ecerunt nwi •• nihil Bu2 reliqui p1 - 3 sibi (3) •• 
| made nothing of-left to-themselves 

ad M - ati, - 4 celeritatem. 

to speed [left nothing undone to hasten their march]. 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 187 

1 Tanta io - ionisJ commutatio (/.) •• ei - pK2 rerum 

So-great (a) change of-things 

(/acta-/acere).gr-/e C t-factum.p.(4) fa^ egt [3] • • Qs.6 a( JventU lc 'P L2 hOTUm, 

was-made 'by (the) 'arrival of-these, 

ut etiam er - pL1 nostri ui - pM qui ( ub)gr - |ui - itum - sb - (5) procubuissent ****•• 

that even our (men) who had-lain-down 

s - pM confecti [pa,t>] * •* ik » ,J vulneribus s>pU innixi »"«•• 

spent with-wounds having-leaned 

m - pK3 seutis, ' ar - avi - a,uni - 5b -^ redintegrarent [pL3] * * 

'on (their) 'shields, renewed 

m - 4 proelium. Turn o-o..is. P u ca i ones 

(the) battle. Then (the) camp-followers 

ar-avi- 1 atum(4)s. P i.i conS picati [,,ar, - ] * * is - ispU hostes s - pM perterritos, 

having-beheld (the) enemy dismayed, 

etiam is ' isi;U inermes ' £"&*■■*«■■*■■ occurrerent [pu« • • 

even unarmed opposed 

ar-avi- |atum.(4)s.pl.3 amiatlS tP art, ^ # * 

armed (men). 

Lesson 74. 
Interim milites legicmum duarum, quae in novissimo ag- 
mine praesidio impedimentis fuerant, proelio nunciato, cursu 
incitato, in summo colle ab hostibus conspiciebantur : et T. 
Labienus castris hostium potitus, et ex loco superiore, quae 
res in nostris castris gererentur, conspicatus, decimam le- 
gionem subsidio nostris misit; qui quum ex equitum et 
calonum fuga, quo in loco res esset, quantoque in periculo et 
castra et legiones, et imperator versaretur, cognovissent, nihil 
ad celeritatem sibi reliqui fecerunt. Horum adventu tanta 
rerum commutatio est facta, ut nostri, etiam qui vulne- 
ribus confecti procubuissent, seutis innixi, proelium redin- 
tegrarent. Turn caiones perterritos hostes conspicati, etiam 
inermes armatis occurrerent. 

Exercises on Lessoxs 73 and 74. 
Lathi words to be translated into English. 
Adventus. Commutatio. Yulnus. Scutum. Redinte- 
grarent. Caiones. Conspicatus. Inermis. Armati. In- 



188 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

terim. Miles. Agmen. Impedimentum. Nuntiavit. 
Cursus. Conspexerunt. Mitto. Eques. Fuga. Perieu- 
lum. Celeritas. 

English words to be translated into Latin, 

Armed. Dismayed. Camp-follower. Spent or exhausted. 
Arrival. Higher. Were carried on. He sends. He has 
known. Danger. In the mean time. Two. Protection. 
Baggage. They were seen. Will. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English, 

Qui quum quanto in periculo, imperator versaretur, cog- 
novissent. Horum adventu rerum commutatio est facta. 
Ut nostri, qui procubuissent. Hostes proelium redintegra- 
rent. Calooes inermes armatis occurrerent. Interim milites, 
in summo colle ab hostibus conspiciebantur. Labienus, quae 
res in nostris castris gererentur, conspicatus. Legionem 
subsidio misit. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin, 

So great a change was made by their arrival. Our men 
renewed the battle. The camp followers, unarmed, opposed 
armed men. Having beheld what things were carried on in 
our camp. When they had known from the flight of the 
cavalry. They left nothing undone to hasten their march. 
The soldiers of the legions which were in the rear. They 
were seen on the top of the hill by the enemy. 

SB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD — PASSIVE VOICE, 

tl Er." p. sb. (1) Present Tense. I f &c, may or can be ruled, 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

p. sb. (1) Regar [1], I may, &c, be ruled gar.- 

p. sb. (1) Regaris or regare [2], tbou mayst be ruled garis or gare. 

p. sb. (1) Regatur [3], he may be ruled ;. -. - gatur. 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 189 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

p. sb, (1) Regaraur [pi. 1], we may be ruled gamur. 

p. sb. (1) Regamini [pi. 2], you may be ruled gamini. 

p. sb. (1) Regantur [pi. 3], they may be ruled gantur. 

"Er." p. sb. (2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c, might, could, would or should 
be ruled. 

SINGULAR. 

p. sb. (2) Regerer [1], I might, &c, be ruled gerer. 

p. sb. (2) Regererisoz-regerere [2], thou mightst be ruled. .gereris or gerere. 
p. sb. (2) Regeretur [3], he might be ruled geretur. 

PLURAL. 

p. sb. (2) Regeremur [pi. 1], we might be ruled geremur. 

p. sb. (2) Regeremini [pi. 2], you might be ruled geremini. 

p. sb. (2) Regerentur [pi. 3], they might be ruled gerentur. 

"Ctum." p. sb. (4) Perfect Tense. I may have been ruled. Formed by 
the perfect participle "rectus — ruled," and "sim — I may be," or "fue- 
rim — I may have been." 

SINGULAR. 

p. sb. (4) Rectus sim or fuerim [1], I may have been ruled. 

p. sb. (4) Rectus sis or fueris [2], thou mayst have been ruled. 

p. sb. (4) Rectus sit or fuerit [3], he may have been ruled. 

PLURAL. 

»p. sb. (4) Recti simus or fuerimus [pi. 1], we may have been ruled, 
p. sb. (4) Recti sitis or fueritis [pi. 2], you may have been ruled. 
p. sb. (4) Recti sint or fuerint [pi. 3], they may have been ruled. 

"Ctum." p. sb. (5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c, might, could, would or 
should have been ruled. Formed by the perfect participle "rectus — 
ruled" and " essem — I might be" or "fuissem — I might have been" 

SINGULAR. 

p. sb. (5) Rectus essem or fuissem [1], I might, Ac, have been ruled, 
p. sb. (5) Rectus esses or fuisses [2], thou mightst have been ruled, 
p. sb. (5) Rectus esset or fuisset [3], he might have been ruled. 



p. sb. (5) Recti essemus or fuissemus [pi. 1], we might have been ruled. 
p. sb. (5) Recti essetis or fuissetis [pi. 2], you might have been ruled, 
p. sb. (5) Recti essent or fuissent [pi. 3], they might have been ruled. 



190 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 



4 ER. P. IM. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

singular. Terminations. 



p. im. Regere or regitor [2], be thou ruled gere or gitor. 

p. im. Regitor [3], let hiiu be ruled gitor. 

PLURAL, 

p. im. Regemini [pi. 2], be ye ruled geraini. 

p. im. Reguntor [pi. 3], let them be ruled guntor. 

P. IN. INFINITIVE MOOD. 

"Er" p. in. (X) Present Tense. To be ruled. 

p. in. (1) Regi, to be ruled gi. 

"Ctum." p. in. (4) Perfect Tense. To have been ruled. 
p. in. (4) Rectus esse or fuisse, to have been ruled. 

"Ctum." p. in. (3) Future Tense. To be about to be ruled. 
p. in. (3) Rectum iri, to be about to be ruled. 

PARTICIPLES [PART.]. 

"Ctum." p. (4) Perfect Tense [part.]. Ruled. 

p. (4) Rectus [part.], ruled ctus. 

"Er." p. (3) Future Tense [part.]. To be ruled, or necessary to be ruled.* 
p. (3) Regendus [part.], to be ruled, or necessary to be ruled endus. 

"CTUM." P. SUPINE IN [u]. TO BE RULED, 
p. Rectu [u], to be ruled u. 

The present and imperfect tenses of the subjunctive pas- 
sive, the imperative passive, the present tense of the infinitive 
passive, and the future participle passive, are formed from 
the first principal part, er. The perfect and pluperfect sub- 
junctive passive, the perfect and future infinitive passive, the 
perfect participle, and the supine in u, are formed from the 
third principal part, turn ; or, rather, the perfect participle, 
and the supine in i/ ; are thus formed. 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 191 

In the present tense, in this word, in the singular, er is 
changed into gar in the first person, into garis or gave in the 
second, and into gatur in the third person ; in the plural, er 
is changed into gamur in the first person, into gamini in the 
second, and into gantur in the third person. The termina- 
tions ar, arts or are, atur, in the singular, and amur, amini, 
antur, in the plural, are permanent. 

In the imperfect tense, er, in this word, in the singular, is 
changed into gerer in the first person, into gereris or gerere 
in the second, and into geretur in the third person • in the 
plural, er is changed into geremur in the first person, into 
geremini in the second, and into gerentur in the third person. 
The terminations ever, ereris or erere, eretur, in the singular, 
and eremur, cremini, erentur, in the plural, are permanent. 

The perfect and pluperfect tenses, subjunctive passive, 
have properly no terminations ) for the perfect is formed by 
the perfect participle rectus, and dm or fuerim, either form- 
ing the perfect subjunctive passive, I, &c, may have been 
ruled. The pluperfect is formed by the same participle and 
essem or fuissem, either in the sense of I, <§cc, might, &c, 
have been ruled. 

In the imperative mood, in this word, er, in the singular, 
is changed into gere or gitor in the second person, and into 
gitor in the third person ; in the plural, er is changed into 
gimini in the second person, and into guntor in the third 
person. The terminations ere or itor, itor, in the singular, 
and imini, untor, in the plural, are permanent. 

In the infinitive mood, in the present tense, er, in this 
word, is changed into gi, i being permanent. The perfect 
tense of the same is formed by the perfect participle and esse 
or fuisse. The future by the supine in um and iri. 

The perfect participle is formed by changing, in this word, 
the third principal part, turn, into ctus ; tus being permanent. 
The future participle passive is formed by changing er into 
gendus ; endus being permanent. 



192 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

The supine in u is formed, in this word, by changing um 
into ctu ; tu being permanent. 

In verbs of this third conjugation, ending in io, in the first 
person singular, present tense, indicative mood, the moods 
and tenses derived from the first principal part do not exactly 
correspond, in their terminations, with the form above given, 
in some of their numbers and persons, both in the active 
and passive voices; for in capio — I take, in the present in- 
dicative, the i is dropped in the second and third persons 
singular, and first and second persons plural : as, capio, 
capis, &c, in place of capiis ; but, in the third person 
plural, this * is retained as a part of the verb : as, capiunt, 
and not capunt. The same also takes place in the passive : 
as, caper is, &c, capitur, and capiuntur. 

In the imperfect tense, the i is retained as a part of the 
root of the verb ; so, likewise, it is retained in the future 
tense, and in the subjunctive present tense, both in the 
active and passive voices : but, in both voices of the imper- 
fect subjunctive, this * is omitted. 

The imperative, in the second persons, singular and plural, 
ends as in the above form of rego ; but, in the third person 
plural, it has capiunto and capiuntor. 

The infinitive has, in the present tense, capere and capi. 

The present active and future passive participles, and the 
gerunds, retain the i: as, capiens, capiendus, capiendi, &c. 

All the other numbers, persons, tenses, &c, formed from 
the second and third principal parts, are regularly formed 
from such parts. 

Lesson 75. 

Quum r - ri3 - 1 Caesar («""»*> I ^^m esS et < 3) • * in 

When Caesar was in 

or - orls6 citeriore (>.)*• 6 Gallia in mpK6 hibernis, ita uti 
hither Gaul in winter-quarters, so as 

ar. i av.-atum. ( 4) d e monstravimus tpU] ** supra, er,pU crebri 

we-have-shown above, frequent 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 193 

or-oris.pl.1 rumores I (affero-afferre).altuUi-allatum. V .(2) afferebantur ad 

rumors were-brought to 

eunij que- item fiebat ^"'"^certior^.)** 

him, and also | he-was-made more-sure [he was 

pK6 Uteris, ■ 8 - 2 Labieni, isJspU omnes 

informed] x by (the) 'letters of-Labienus, (that) all 

pU Belgas, " c - 4 quam (c) - gr ~ ' «-< tun >w dixeramus Cpl I] * * 

(the) Belgae, whom we-had-said 

(sum-esse) | e-ui.in(l) egge 4 tert i am rs-r.is.4 p arte m 

| to-be [to have constituted] (the) third part 

8 Galliae, i ar - avi ^ tum - in -( 1 >conjurare contra 8 - 4 Roman urn 

of-Gaul, conspire against (the) Roman 

8 - 4 populum, que- ' ■****"^MU dare es - idis -P 1 - 4 obsides- 

people, and (that they) give hostages 

inter 4 se. (3)# * ■"•P'-'Has («*■«*) I «-rf-foo> esse p'-4 cauS as 

among themselves. (That) these were (the) reasons 

| ar-avi-atum.2 corj j uran di \ [ger - ] ** 

of-conspiring; 

I er-itum.d.sb. ( 2) V ererentur, tpL3] °* 

they-feared, 

ar-avi- | atum.(4).6 p aC ata CparM ** 

being-subdued 

i (c).er- X i-ctum. P .sb.(2) a dduceretur ^ •• 
might-be-led 

be marched into their territories]. Next because 

|ar-avi-atum.p.sb.(2) S0 ] licitarentur[P 1.3]«. ab s.pl.6 nonnu llig P'-« GalHs, 

they-were-solicited by some Gauls, 

partim ui - pU qui, ut noluerant 8,pU Germanos 

partly who, as they-had-been-unwilling (that) (the) Germans 

lar-avi-af U m.d.in. ( i) versar - diutius in 6 Gallic, ita ferebant 

should-remain longer in Gaul, so they-bore 

moleste s4 Romanum 0s - 4 exercitum |ar - avi - a,um - in - rl) hiemare 

grievously (that) (the) Roman army (should) winter 

atque ' (rasc)gr - raTi - in - (1) inveterascere in Gallia, 

and (should) grow-old in Gaul, 

partim uUpU qui a - atis - 6 mobilitate et * 8 - ti8 " 6 levitate 

partly (those) who by-fickleness and lightness 

s2 animi ' 6r ' ul ' (2) studebant m - pl - 3 novis m - p1 - 3 imperils; 
of-mind | studied for-new governments [desired 

17 



primum, 

firstly, 


quod 
because 


ne, is,is,6 omni 


6 Gallia 


lest, all 


Gaul 


erJ noster 


38,1 exercitus 


| our 


army 


ad is - pU eos. 




to . them [our 


' army might 


Deinde 


quod 



194 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

etiam ab 8p1,6 nonnullis, quod in 
a change of government] ; also by some, because in 

Gallia regna vulgo ' ■«*■*—.!"*.« occupabantur [pK3] •• 

Gaul kingdoms ' were commonly Occupied 

a or - oris - p, - 6 potentioribus(c.)** atque is * pl 6 - iis uLpU qui 

by (the) more-powerful and by-those who 

Ier-ui-itum.(2) habebant[ p..3j.. as-atis.pl.4 f acu l tates a( J 

had (the) means | for 

o-in« s .pi.4 hornineg I <c)«r-xHctum.p.<s>s.pi.4 CO riducendos, [part 3 * * 

men to-be-hired [to hire 

ui.pl.l qui (sum-esse) | e-ui.(2) poterant m i nUS facllft 

men], (and) who could less easily 

|(equ)gr-ecutu..d.in. conse q U J i..4 eam ei.4 rem er.6 nogtro -»■« i m p e rio. 

obtain that thing under-our government. 

Lesson 76. 

Quum esset Csesar in citeriore Gallia in hibernis, ita uti 
supra demonstravimus, crebri ad eum rumores afferebantur, 
literisque item Labieni certior fiebat, omnes Belgas, quani 
tertiani esse Gallise partem dixeramus, contra populum Ro- 
manum conjurare, obsidesque inter se dare. Conjurandi has 
esse causas; primum, quod vererentur, ne, omni pacat& 
Gallia, ad eos exercitus noster adduceretur; deinde, quod ab 
nonnullis Gallis sollicitarentur ; partim, qui ut Germanos 
diutius in Gallia versari noluerant, ita populi Romani exer- 
citum hiemare atque inveterascere in Gallia moleste fere- 
bant; partim qui, mobilitate et levitate animi, novis imperiis 
studebant; ab nonnullis etiam, quod in Gallia a potentioribus, 
atque iis qui ad conducendos homines facultates habebant, 
vulgo regna occupabantur ; qui minus facile eam rem imperio 
nostro consequi poterant. 

Exercises on Lessons 75 and 76. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Diutius. Hiemavit. Inveterascere. Moleste. Mobili- 
tate. Studeo. Nonnulli. Facultas. Occupaverant. Con- 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 195 

sequi. Citerior. Demonstravisset. Creber. Dico. Con- 
jurasset. Dabo. Conjuraverunt.. Yereor. Pacatus. Ad- 
duxit. Sollicito. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

He has said. To conspire. He will give. Reason. 
Hostages. Army. Might be marched. He did solicit. 
Some. Longer. He bore. To winter. Fickleness. He 
studies. New. Kingdom. I shall have. Easily. To ob- 
tain. Winter quarters. Frequent. Also. By letters. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Quod in Gallia a potentioribus vulgo regna occupabantur. 
Qui minus facile earn rem consequi poterant. Qui noluerant 
exercitum in Gallia hiemare. Nonnulli novis imperiis stude- 
bant. Quum Caesar in hibernis esset. Literis certior fiebat. 
Omnes Belgas contra populum Romanum conjurare. Obsides 
inter se dant. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Who could less easily obtain that thing. They bore griev- 
ously that the Roman army should winter in Gaul. They 
desired a change of government. Kingdoms were occupied 
by the most powerful. They give hostages among them- 
selves. They feared lest our army might be marched into 
their territories. He was informed. 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

The fourth conjugation has its principal parts in 
ir—ivi—itum. 

Active Voice. 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

Present Indicative. Present Infinitive. Perfect Indicative. Supine. 

Audio, Audire (ir), Audivi (ivi), Auditum (itum), 

I-hear. to-hear. I-have-heard. a-hearing. 



196 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

" Ir." (1) Present Tense. I, &c, hear. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

(1) Audio [1], I hear io. 

(1) Audis [2], thou nearest is. 

(1) Audit [3], he hears..... it 

PLURAL. 

(1) Audimus [pi. 1], we hear imus. 

(1) Auditis [pi. 2], you hear itis. 

(1) Audiunt [pi. 3], they hear iunt. 

"Ir" (2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c, loas hearing, or did hear. 

SINGULAR. 

(2) Audiebam [1], I was hearing iebam. 

(2) Audiebas [2], thou wast hearing iebas. 

(2) Audiebat [3], he was hearing iebat. 

PLURAL. 

(2) Audiebamus [pi. 1], we were hearing iebamus. 

(2) Audiebatis [pi. 2], you were hearing iebatis. 

(2) Audiebant [pi. 3], they were hearing iebant. 

'fir." (3) Future Tense. I, &c, shall or toill hear. 
SINGULAR. 

(3) Audiam [1], I shall hear iam. 

(3) Audies [2], thou wilt hear ies. 

(3) Audiet [3], he will hear iet. 

PLURAL. 

(3) Audiemus [pi. 1], we shall hear iemus. 

(3) Audietis [pi. 2], you will hear ietis. 

(3) Audient [pi. 3], they will hear lent. 

"Ivi." (4) Perfect Tense. I, &c, have heard. 

SINGULAR. 

(4) Audivi [1], I have heard j v ; # 

(4) Audivisti [2], thou hast heard ivisti. 

(4) xiudivit [3], he has heard ivik 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 197 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

(4) Audivimus [pi. 1], we have heard ivimus. 

(4) Audivistis [pi. 2], you have heard ivistis. 

(4) Audiverunt or audivere [pi. 3], they have heard iverunt or ivere. 

"Ivi." (5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c, had heard. 
SINGULAR. 

(5) Audiveram [1], I, Ac, had heard iveram. 

(5) Audiveras [2], thou hadst heard iveras. 

(5) Audiverat [3], he had heard iverat. 

PLURAL. 

(5) Audiveramus [pi. 1], we had heard iveramus. 

(5) Audiveratis [pi. 2], you had heard iveratis. 

(5) Audiverant [pi. 3], they had heard iverant. 

"Ivi." (6) Future Perfect. I, &c, shall or will have heard, 

SINGULAR. 

(6) Audivero [1], I shall have heard ivero. 

(6) Audiveris [2], thou wilt have heard iveris. 

(6) Audiverit [3], he will have heard iverit. 

PLURAL. 

(6) Audiverimus [pi. 1], we shall have heard iverimus. 

(6) Audiveritis [pi. 2], you will have heard iveritis. 

(6) Audiverint [pi. 3], they will have heard iverint. 

The present, imperfect, and future tenses, are formed from 
the first principal part, ir. The perfect, pluperfect, and 
future perfect, are formed from the second principal part, ivi. 

In the present tense, in the singular, ir is changed into 
io in the first person, into is in the second, and into it in the 
third person; in the plural, ir is changed into imus in the 
first person, into itis in the second, and into iunt in the third 
person. 

In the imperfect tense, in the singular, ir is changed into 
iebam in the first person, into iebas in the second, and into 
iebat in the third person ; in the plural, ir is changed into 
iebamus in the first person, into iebatis in the second, and 
into iebant in the third person. 
17* 



198 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

In the future tense, in the singular, ir is changed into 
iam in the first person, into ies in the second, and into iet in 
the third, person ; in the plural, ir is changed into iemus in 
the first person, into ietis in the second, and into ient in the 
third person. 

In the perfect tense, in the singular, ivi is changed into 
ivi in the first person, into ivisti in the second, and into ivit 
in the third person ; in the plural, ivi is changed into ivimus 
in the first person, into ivistis in the second, and into iverunt 
or ivere in the third person. 

In the pluperfect tense, in the singular, ivi is changed into 
iveram in the first person, into iveras in the second, and 
into iverat in the third person ; in the plural, ivi is changed 
into iveramus in the first person, into iveratis in the second, 
and into iverant in the third person. 

In the future perfect tense, in the singular, ivi is changed 
into ivero in the first person, into iveris in the second, and 
into iverit in the third person ; in the plural, ivi is changed 
into iverimus in the first person, into iveritis in the second, 
and into iverint in the third person. 



Lesson 77. 
Neque ic -P u hi solum, as_atisl auctoritas 

Neither (do) these (senators) only (do so), (the) authority 
m.pl.2 quorum videlicet (sum-esse) I e-ui.(I) egt [3] • • 1 capa 

of-whom indeed (it seems) is dear 

8 tibi, (2)# * x vita 2 vilissima; (s.) ## sed 

to-you, (though their) life (is) most-cheap; but 

etiam le - pL1 illi s - pU1 Romani e8 - itis - pU equites 8 - pU1 honestissimi(s.)** 
also those Roman knights (the) most-honorable 

atque ** u oiptimi (bonus, s.)** r,pU viri, que- 8 - pU ceteri- 
and best (of) men, and (the) other 

■* L1 fortissimi (s.) * • b ** LI cives, ui - pU qui 

most-brave citizens, who 

I ar - eti - atam -< 1 ) circumstant [pK31 * * as ' 4 senatum, et 4 frequentiam 
stand-around (the) senate, and (the) concourse 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 199 

ui.pi.2 quorum ' tu (2) * * c— w-")^- 1 ui w po tuisti [2] * * 

of-whoin you have-been-able 

• (d)er-di-sum.in.(l) yi(J ere e fc I (icio-icere).er-exi-ectum.in.(2) perSpiCere 

to-see, and to-perceive (their) 

m - pl4 studia, et paulo ante I ir - ivi - itum - in -(^ exaudire 

desires, and (a) little before (this) to-hear (their) 

x-ci 8 .pu voces: ui.pi-2q UOrum 0s -P u manus (/.)•* ac m - pU tela 

shouts : whose hands and weapons 

jam diu ! ego (1)## vix 

already long-since I (could) scarcely 

| (tmeo-tinere).er-tinui-tentum.(l) con tineO [,] * * abs 6 te/ 2) * * 

restrain from you, I- 1 can 

facile j (c)er-*i-ctum.sb. ( i) adducam W V is - pM eosdem ut 

easily Mead (the) same (citizens) that 

I (quor-i).er-cutus.d.sb. ( i) p rose quantur [pU] * * usque ad pU portas, 

they-may-follow unto — (the) gates, 

4 £ e (3) • • | (inqu)er-iqui-ictum.(l).ns-ntis.4 relinquenteDl tpart,] * * ° C,pU hSGC 

you leaving these 

od - p1 - 4 quse 1 6r - uL(1) studes [2] * * jampridem 

(things), which you-study for-a-long-time-since 

I ar-avi-atum.in.(i) vas t are . Quamquam idA quid 

to-lay-waste. And-yet what 

| (quor-i).gr-cutu 8 .d.(l) l q UOr ?[!]•• u t ' ulk * U YeS 

do-I-say? | that any thing 

| (ang)Sr-egi-actum.sb.(l) frano-at [3] * * 4 te ? (2) * # 

can-break you [that any thing could curb 

ut ! tu (2) • • unquam 

your wicked spirit] ? | that you ' can ever 

| (ig)gr-exi-ectum.sb.(l) corr io. as t*J • • 4 ^ Q (2) • • 

Correct you [that you can ever amend] 

Ut tU I (or-ari).ar-avi-atum.d. 8 b.(l) me ditere C 2] ** 4 ullam 

that you (ever) meditate any 

4 fugam ? ut tu I «**-*«»-*-0> cogites [2] * • m - 4 ullum 

flight? that you (ever) think-of any 

mA exsilium ? Utinam is - is - pU immortales 8 - pU Dii duint 

exile ? O-that (the) immortal Gods may-give 

*- 4 istam DS - Dti8 - 4 men tern 3 tibi ! < 2)# * 
this mind to-you ! 



200 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

Lesson 78. 

Neque hi solum, quorum tibi auctoritas est videlicet cara, 
vita vilissima; sed etiam illi equites Romani, honestissimi 
atque optimi viri, ceterique fortissimi cives, qui circumstant 
senatum, quorum tu et frequentiam videre-, et studia perspi- 
cere, et voces paulo ante exaudire potuisti ; quorum ego vix 
abs te jam diu manus ac tela contineo, eosdem facile addu- 
cam, ut te haec, quae jampridem vastare studes, relinquentem, 
usque ad portas prosequantur. Quamquam quid loquor ? te 
ut ulla res frangat ? tu ut unquam te corrigas ? tu ut ullam 
fugam meditere? tu ut ullum exsilium cogites? Utinam 
tibi istam mentem Dii immortales duint. 

Exercises on Lessons 77 and 78. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Loquor. Frango. Unquam. Fuga. Meditor. Cogi- 
tamus. Mens. Vix. Manus. Telum. Adduco. Vas- 
tavit. Relinquens. Porta. Prosequar. Cara. Vita. 
Equites. Vilissima. Civis. Fortis. Optimus. Cireumsto. 
Frequentia. Perspicere. Video. Vox. Exaudio. Honestus. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

You meditate. that. Mind. Shouts. He has heard. 
Hand. Voice. I. Weapons. He restrains. To lead to. 
To follow. Gates. I study. They will lay waste. I speak. 
He breaks. Neither. Dear. Life. Cheap. Knights. 
The best. Other. Brave. They stood around. I saw. 
I perceive. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Quid loquor. Te ut unquam corriges. Ullam fugam 
cogites. Quorum tela vix abs te contineo. Facile adducam, 
ut te ad portas prosequantur. Hsec, quae vastare studes. 
Illi equites Romani optimi viri. Ceteri cives ; qui circum- 
stant. Voces exaudire potuisti. 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 201 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

You meditate flight. that the immortal gods would 
give this mind to you ! Whose hands I could scarcely re- 
strain. I can easily lead the same. They follow you to the 
gates. You study to lay those things waste. What do I 
say ? Can any thing curb your wicked spirit ? That you 
can ever amend. The authority of whom is dear to you. 
Though their life is most cheap. Those Roman knights, the 
best of men. The other citizens, who stand around. You 
have been able to perceive their desires. 

SB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD — ACTIVE VOICE. 

"Ir." sb. (1) Present Tense. I, &c. f may hear. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

sb. (1) Audiarn []], I may hear iam. 

sb. (1) Audias [2], thou mayst hear ias. 

sb. (1) Audiat [3], he may hear iat. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (1) Audiamus [pi. 1], we may hear iamus. 

sb. (1) Audiatis [pi. 2], you may hear iatis. 

sb. (1) Audiant [pi. 3], they may hear iant. 

u Ir" sb. (2) Imperfect Tense. I might, could, would or should hear. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (2) Audirem [1], I might, Ac, hear irem. 

sb. (2) Audires [2], thou mightst hear..., ires. 

sb. (2) Audiret [3], he might hear iret. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (2) Audiremus [pi. 1], we might hear iremus. 

sb. (2) Audiretis [pi. 2], you might hear iretis. 

sb. (2) Audirent [pi. 3], they might hear irent. 

"Ivi." sb. (4) Perfect Tense. I, &c, may have heard. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (4) Audiverim [1], I may have heard iverim. 

sb. (4) Audiveris [2], thou mayst have heard iveris. 

sb. (4) Audiverit [3], he may have heard iverit. 



202 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

sb. (4) Audiverimus [pi. 1], we may have heard iverimus. 

sb. (4) Audiveritis [pi. 2], you may have heard iveritis. 

sb. (4) Audiverint [pi. 3], they may have heard iverint. 

" Ivi." sb. (5) Pluperfect Tense. I might, could, would or should have 

heard. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (5) Audivissem [1], I might have heard ivissem. 

sb. (5) Audivisses [2], thou mightst have heard ivisses. 

sb. (5) Audivisset [3], he might have heard ivisset. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (5) Audivissemus [pi. 1], we might have heard ivissemus. 

sb. (5) Audivissetis [pi. 2], you might have heard ivissetis. 

sb. (5) Audivissent [pi. 3], they might have heard ivissent. 

"iR." IM. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
SINGULAR. 

im. Audi or audito [2], hear thou i or ito. 

im. Audito [3], let him hear ito. 

PLURAL. 

im. Audite or auditote [pi. 2], hear ye ite or itote. 

im. Audiunto [pi. 3], let them hear iunto. 

IN. INFINITIVE MOOD. 

" Ir." in. (1) Present Tense. 

in. (1) Audire, to hear ire. 

"Ivi." in. (4) Perfect Tense. 
in. (4) Audivisse, to have heard ivisse. 

"hum." in. (3) Future Tense. 
in. (3) Auditurus esse, to be about to hear.... iturus esse. 

PARTICIPLES [PART.]. 

"Ir." (1) Present Tense. 

(1) ns-ntis. 1. Audiens [part.], hearing iens. 

"Itum" (3) Future Tense. 
(3) us-a-um. 1. Auditurus [part.], about to hear us-a-um. 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 203 

"iR." GERUNDS [GER.]. 

Terminations. 

2. G. Audiendi [ger.], of hearing iendi. 

3. D. Audiendo [ger.], to hearing iendo. 

4. A. Audiendura [ger.], hearing iendum. 

6. Ab. Audiendo [ger.], by, &c, hearing iendo. 

ITUM. SUPINE [UM] IN UM. 
Auditum [um], a hearing itum. 

In the above, the present and imperfect tenses of the sub- 
junctive, and the imperative, also the present infinitive, pre- 
sent participle, and the gerunds, are formed from the first 
principal part, ir. The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive, 
and also the perfect infinitive, are formed from the second 
principal part, ivi. The future participle, the future infini- 
tive, and the supine in um, are formed from the third prin- 
cipal part, itum. 

In the present tense, in the singular, ir is changed into 
iam in the first person, into ias in the second, and into iat 
in the third person ; in the plural, ir is changed into iamus 
in the first person, into iatis in the second person, and into 
iant in the third person. 

In the imperfect tense, in the singular, ir is changed into 
irem in the first person, into ires in the second, and into iret 
in the third person ; in the plural, ir is changed into iremus 
in the first person, into iretis in the second, and into irent in 
the third person. 

In the perfect tense, in the singular, ivi is changed into 
iverim in the first person, into iveris in the second, and into 
iverit in the third person ; in the plural, ivi is changed into 
iverimus in the first person, into iveritis in the second, and 
into iverint in the third person. 

In the pluperfect tense, in the singular, ivi is changed into 
ivissem in the first person, into ivisses in the second, and 
into ivisset in the third person ; in the plural, ivi is changed 
into ivissemus in the first person, into ivissetis in the second, 
and into ivissent in the third person. 



204 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

In the imperative mood, in the singular, ir is changed into 
i or ito in the second person, and into ito in the third 
person ; in the plural, ir is changed into ite or itote in the 
second person, and into iunto in the third person. 

In the infinitive mood, in the present tense, ir is changed 
into ire; in the perfect tense, ivi is changed into ivisse ; 
and, in the future tense, itum is changed into iturus, with 
esse. 

In the participles, in the present tense, ir is changed into 
iens ; and, in the future tense, itum is changed into iturus. 

In the gerunds, ir is changed into iendi in the genitive, 
into iendo in the dative, into iendum in the accusative, and 
into iendo in the ablative. 

In the supine in um, itum remains itum. 

In the tenses formed from ivi, vi is sometimes omitted, 
when followed by s : as, audissem for audivissem. Some- 
times v alone is omitted : as, audiero for audivero. 

Lesson 79. 

Quum l prima i °-° n,s - 1 legio (/.) * * ir " ' i - tum - sb -^ venisset [3J * # 
When (the) first legion should-have-come 

in m - pU castra, que* pU reliquae* ^^-Uegiones (/.)*• 

into (the) camp, and (the) remaining legions 

(sum-esse) i e-ui.sb. ( 2) a b essen t &*i • • *-i magnum mA spatium, 

might-be-distant (a) great space, (they 

adoriri 8ec4 hanc sub 

were advised) to-attack this (first legion) under (their load of) 

P 16 -sarcinis; u *- 6 qua 6 pulsa,^ ## que- 

baggage j which (legion) being-routed, and 

^-p 1 - 6 impedimentis- m ' p] ' 6 direptis Cpar, - ] * * 

(the) camp-equipage being-plundered 

r«um-e 5 se).e-ui.(3).m.l£ uturum [part.]»« ^ P^'reKqUSe 

it-would-be that (the) remaining (legions) 'would 

non | gr-a«,u*- SW m.sb.(2) au d eren t D« • • I Csis.)£r-stiti-stitu m .m.(l) cons i stere 

not x dare to- stand 

contra-. Etiam ' ■*""« i -« adjuvabat & ## 

against (them). Also (this) did-assist 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 205 

mA consilium is ' pL2 eorum, ui - pU qui 

(the) advice of-those who 

(fero-ferre)-tuli-latum(2) d e f ere ban t CpL3] * * eU rem, 

| did-bring [reported] (this) thing, (namely) 

quod 8pU Nervii antiquitus, quum 

that (the) Nervi anciently, when 

( S um-es S e) i e-ui. s b.(2) p 0SseD t »!.«•• nihil Qs - 6 equitatu, (enim 

they-could-do nothing by-cavalry, (for 

neque ad oc - 4 hoe us - ori8 - 4 tempus |gr - uL(1) student [p, - 3]e * 

neither to this time do-they-study 

is - 3 ei ei - 3 rei, sed id ' 4 quidquid (sum " es8e) ' e - ui - (1) possun t [pL3J * * 

this thing, but whatever they-are-able-to-do 

| 6r -ui-itum.(i) valent [ P i.3]»» is.is.pi.6 pe( 3estribus pU5 copiis) ; 

they-accomplish by-foot soldiers) ; (in order) 

quo l' r - ivi - irum - sb ( 2 )impedirent [pl - 3J ** facilius Qs - 4 equitatum 
that they-might-hinder (the) inore-easily (the) cavalry 

8 - pK, nnitimorum, si "-'^-^venissett 33 ** ad eos 

l of (their) Neighbours, if it-should-have-come to them 

e causa I ar-avi-atum.2 p rg edandi, t5er - ] •• p1 - 6 incisis [part - ] • • 

'for (the) purpose of-plundering, having-cut-into 

6 teneris or - oris>p1 - 6 arboribus, (/.)** atque 6 inflexis, Cpart - ]# * 

tender trees, and (these) being-bent 

que* er,pL6 crebris 8 - pK6 ramis 8 ph6 enatis [part - ] * * in 

and (having) thick boughs springing-forth in 

d<M,inir4 latitudin em, (/.)•• et 8 - pL6 rubis que- 

(a) lateral-direction, and having brambles and 

is-is.pi.6 gentibus- (m.) ## 8 - p1 - 6 interjectis, [part - J •• 

thorns 'cast-in-between, 

(ic^gr- 1 eci-ectum.(5) e ffeeerant, [pl - 3] * * ut aec - pU hse 

they-had-accomplished (so much), that these 

es-is.pu gepes i er-ui-itum.sb. ( 2) p rae berent [pl<3] • * m - pM munimenta 

hedges did-present fortifications 

instar 8,2 muri; qu6 non 

like (that) 'of (a) 'wall; whither it-'was not 

(sum-esse) | e-ui.sb.(2) p 0gset ^^ mQ fo | ar-avi-a.u m .p.in.(l, ^raH, 

'possible not only (not) to-enter, 

sed ne quidem [fcofr-i-ei— .mkh perspici. 

but not indeed (even) to-see-through (them). 

18 



206 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 

Lesson 80. 

Quum prima legio in castra venisset, reliquaeque legiones 
magnum spatium abessent, hanc sub sarcinis adoriri : qu& 
pulsa, impedimentisque direptis, futurum ut reliquae contra 
consistere non auderent. Adjuvabat etiam eorum consilium, 
qui rem deferebant, quod Nervii antiquitus, quum equitatu 
nihil possent (neque enim ad hoc tempus ei rei student sed, 
quidquid possunt, pedestribus valent copiis), quo facilius 
finitimorum equitatum si praedandi causa ad eos venisset, im- 
pedirent, teneris arboribus incisis atque inflexis-, crebrisque 
in latitudinem ramis enatis, et rubis sentibusque interjectis, 
effecerant, ut, instar muri, hae sepes munimenta praeberent ; 
quo non modo non intrari, sed ne perspici quidem posset. 

Exercises on Lessons 79 and 80. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Tener. Inflexus. Arbor. Creber. Latitude Ramus. 
Rubus. Instar. Murus. Sepes. Intrat. Perspicio. 
Venio. Absum. Sarcinae. Consisto. Audeo. Adjuvabo. 
Antiquitus. Tempus. Studeo. Pedestris. Facilius. 
Finitimus. Impedirent. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

To enter. He might hinder. Cavalry. Neighbor. 
Should he have come. Tender. Being bent. Tree. 
Bough. Brambles. Thorns. Did present. Like. Wall. 
To dare. Personal baggage. Camp equipage. He will 
assist. Time. I study. I come. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Teneris arboribus inflexis. Rubis sentibusque interjectis. 
Ut, instar muri, hae sepes munimenta praeberent. Quo non 
intrari posset. Qui rem deferebant. Nervii equitatu nihil 
possent. Neque ei rei student. Quo facilius equitatum 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 207 

impedirent. Quum legio in castra venisset. Reliquse mag- 
num spatium abessent. Hanc sub sarcinis adoriri. Con- 
sistere non auderent. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

It was not possible to enter. Whatever they were able to 
do, they accomplished by foot soldiers. In order that they 
might more easily hinder the cavalry. If he should come 
to them. Tender trees being cut into. Having boughs 
springing forth in a lateral direction. Branches and thorns 
being cast in between. The hedges presented a fortification 
like a wall. The camp equipage being plundered. They 
dared Dot stand against them. The Nervii could do nothing 
by cavalry. They do not study this thing. The remaining 
legions were distant. 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
Passive Voice. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

"Ir." p. (1) Present Tense. I, &c, am heard. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

p. (1) Audior [1], I am heard ior. 

p. (1) Audiris or audire [2], thou art heard iris or ire. 

p. (1) Auditur [3], he is heard itur. 

PLURAL. 

p. (1) Audimur [pi. 1], we are heard imur. 

p. (1) Audimini [pi. 2], you are heard imini. 

p. (1) Audiuntur [pi. 3], they are heard iuntur. 

"Ir." p. (2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c, was heard. 

SINGULAR. 

p. (2) Audiebar [1], I was heard iebar. 

p. (2) Audiebaris or audiebare [2], thou wast heard iebaris or iebare. 

p. (2) Audiebatur [3], he was heard ■ iebatur. 



208 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

p. (2) Audiebamur [pi. 1], we were heard iebnraur. 

p. (2) Audiebamini [pi. 2], you were heard iebamini. 

p. (2) Audiebantur [pi. 3], they were heard iebantur. 

" Ir." p. (3) Future Tense. I, &c. } shall or will be heard. 
SINGULAR. 

p. (3) Audiar [1], I shall be heard iar. 

p. (3) Audieris or audiere [2], thou wilt be heard ieris or iere. 

p. (3) Audietur [3], he will be heard ietur. 

PLURAL. 

p. (3) Audiemur [pi. 1], we shall be heard iemur. 

p. (3) Audiemini [pi. 2], you will be heard iernini. 

p. (3) Audientur [pi. 3], they will be heard..... ientur. 

"Itum" p. (4) Perfect Tense. I, &c. y have been heard. 

SINGULAR. 

p. (4) Auditus sum or fui [1], I have been heard. 
p. (4) Auditus es or fuisti [2], thou hast been heard. 
p. (4) Auditus est or fuit [3], he has been heard. 



p. (4) Auditi sumus or fuimus [pi. 1], we have been heard. 

p. (4) Auditi estis or fuistis [pi. 2], you have been heard. 

p. (4) Auditi sunt or fuerunt or fuere [pi. 3], they have been heard. 

"Itum." p. (5) Pluperfect Tense. I } &c, had been heard. 
SINGULAR. 

p. (5) Auditus eram or fueram [1], I had been heard, 
p. (5) Auditus eras or fueras [2], thou hadst been heard, 
p. (5) Auditus erat or fuerat [3], he had been heard. 

PLURAL. 

p. (5) Auditi eramus or fueramus [pi. 1], we had been heard, 
p. (5) Auditi eratis or fueratis [pi. 2], you had been heard, 
p. (5) Auditi erant or fuerant [pi. 3], they had been heard. 

"Itum." p. (6) Future Perfect. I, &c, shall or will have been heard. 

SINGULAR. 

p. (6) Auditus ero or fuero [1], I shall have been heard, 
p. (6) Auditus eris or fueris [2], thou wilt have been heard, 
p. (6) Auditus erit or fuerit [3], he will have been heard. 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 209 



p. (6) Auditi erimus or fuerimus [pi. 1], we shall have been heard, 
p. (6) Auditi eritis or fueritis [pi. 2], you will have been heard, 
p. (6) Auditi erunt or fuerint [pi. 3], they will have been heard. 

The present, imperfect, and future tenses of the indicative 
passive, are formed from the first principal part, ir ; the per- 
fect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses, are formed from 
the third principal part, itum; or, rather, the perfect participle 
is formed from the third principal part. 

In the present tense, in the singular, ir is changed into 
ior in the first person, into iris or ire in the second, and into 
itur in the third person • in the plural, ir is changed into 
imur in the first person, into imini in the second, and into 
iuntur in the third person. 

In the imperfect tense, in the singular, ir is changed into 
iebar in the first person, into iebaris or iebare in the second, 
and into iebatur in the third person ; in the plural, ir is 
changed into iebamur in the first person, into iebamini in 
the second, and into iebantur in the third person. 

In the future tense, in the singular, ir is changed into iar 
in the first person, into ieris or iere in the second, and into 
ietur in the third person ; in the plural, ir is changed into 
iemur in the first person, into iemini in the second, and into 
ientur in the third person. 

The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses of the 
indicative passive, have properly no terminations, as they are 
formed by the perfect participle and the tenses of sum. 

In the perfect tense, either sum — I am, or fui — 1 was, 
combined with the perfect participle, may be used to denote 
the perfect passive tense. So, likewise, eram or fuer am for 
the pluperfect tense, and ero or fuero for the future perfect 
tense. 

18* 



210 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 



Lesson 81. 
Postridie is - 2 ejus eL2 diei, prius quara is ~ is,pU hostes 

(The) day-after that day, before that (the) enemy 

I (reayiO-rcct33fcre).er- t rec)epi-(rec)eptum.sb.(2) recipereilt [F>1 ' 3 - 1 * * 4 Se (3) * * eX 

might-recover themselves from 

or^ris.6 terrore &Q 6 f ug £ r-ris.l Q^^j. (c)6r- | xi-c. Um .(4) duxit [3] • • 

(their) terror and flight Caesar led 

Qs - 4 exercituni in is_ispL4 fines is ~ is - p1 - 2 Suessionum 

(his) army into (the) territories 'of (the) * Suessiones 

ui.pu q ui (»««) i e-ui. ( 2) emnt [pi.3] • • 8.pi.i p rox i ni i ( s .) • • 

who were (the) nearest 

s - p1 - 3 Rhemis ; et m - 6 magno er-ineris.e i t i nere 

1 to (the) x Rhemi ; and (a) great march 

(icio-icere).er-eci- | ectum.p.(4).s.6 qq^qq^q fP art -] • • (d)er- | di - tum -( 4 ) C ontendi.t t3] °* 

having-been-accomplished, he-hastened 

ad m - 4 oppidum m - 4 Noviodunum. «*■ I *»ac»- iConatus rpart - ] * # 
to (the) town (of) Noviodunum. Having-attempted 

lar-avi-atum.in.(i) p pugnare id.4 ft ex er - ineris - 6 itinere, quod 

to-assault it on (his) march, because 

| ir-ivi-itum.(2) au( Ji e kat [3] * * (mm-esse) | e-ui.in.(l) QSSQ m.l y acuum 

he-heard (that it) was destitute 

• ab or - oris - p1 - 6 defensoribus, non (>™-*^*- 1 ui -( 4 > potuit [3] * * 

of defenders, (yet) he- 1 was not ' able 

l ar-avi-atum.in.ci) expU g nare) propter d0 - din]sA latitudineni (/.)*• 

to-storm (it), on-account-of (the) breadth 

2 fossae, que- d0 - diuis * 4 altitudineni (/.)** ^murr, 

'of (the) 'ditch, and (the) height 'of (the) * wall, 

•• pL6 paucis ' W*-*™* 1 *"- »««*i.« defendentibus. [part - ] * * 

few (men) (however) defending (it). 

m - p1 - 6 Castris ir_ivi w "' ' itum -( 4 )- m - pl - 6 niunitis [partl * * 

(The) camp having-been-fortified 

{capio-coepere).er- | (ca;p)t-(ccep)tum.(4) QQgpj^ [3] • • (ago-agere) | er-^-i-(a)ctum.in.(2) ao -ere 

he-began to-move-forward 

pU vineas ' ■**»* i « to '»-Mi) comparare uid,pL4 quseque 

(the) mantlets, (and) to-prepare whatever 

(mm-esse) | e-ui.(2) erant [3] • • Gs.3 usu ' &( j 

(things) were (of) use for 

Oppugn an duru. [5er,]## Interim 

assaulting (the town). In-the-mean-time 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 211 

is - is ^nmis d0 - dinisJ multitude) (/.)** is_is ' p1 ' 2 Suessionum ex 

all (the) multitude *of (the) ' Suessiones from 

6 fuga ^-'^^^^convenit^** iu m - 4 oppidum 6 proxima- 

(the) flight came into (the) town 'on (the) * next 

x-c:is.6 nQC ^ e> pl-6 Yineis (ago-agere) er-egi- | (a)crum.p.(4).pl.6 ac ^ g [part.] •• 

night. (The) mantlets being-moved-forvvard 

celeriter ad m - 4 oppidum, r " ris - 6 aggere 

quickly to (the) town, (a) mound 

(jacio-jocerei-er-jeci- 1 (ja)ctum.(4).s.6* c ^ fpart.]»« que* is_is,p1,6 turfibuS* 

having-been-thrown-up, and towers 

er-i- 1 tum.(4). P i.6 CO nstitutis, [part - ] e ° s>pU Galli 

having-been-erected, (the) Gauls 

er-vi- I tum.(4).s.pl.6 p ermot i [part.] • • dcwlmis.6 ma g n it U dine (/.) ## 

alarmed 'by (the) greatness 

U s-eris.pi.2 p erum ^ od ; pU qu8e neque 

1 of (the) ' works, which they-'had neither 

er- 1 i-^.(5) yideran t [pU] * * ante neque 

'seen before nor 

ir- 1 ivi or n-itum.(5) au( }ierant, [pK3J • • et as " atis ' 6 celeritate 

had-heard-of, and *by (the) 'celerity 

•• p1 - 2 -Romanorum, ' *-™*-™'^-( 1 > mittun t [pl>3] * * s " pU legatos 

1 of (the) 'Romans, send ambassadors 

ad r " ri8 - 4 Csesarem de io - ionis - 6 deditione, (/.)** et 

to Caesar about (a) surrender, and 

•• pU6 Rhemis ' gr - ivi or «-^-(U.ns-ntis. P i.6 petentibus, CparL] ~ ut 

(the) Rhemi petitioning, that 

I ar-avi-atu m . P .6b.(2) CO nservarentur [pU] •• ' «**«■■•(« impetrant &** •• 
they-might-be-preserved they-obtain (it). 



Lesson 82. 

Postridie ejus diei Caesar, prius quam se hostes ex terrore 
ac fug£i reciperent, in fines Suessionum, qui proximi Rhemis 
erant, exercitum duxit : et magno itinere confecto, ad oppi- 
dum Noviodunum contendit. Id ex itinere oppugnare cona- 
tus, quod vacuum ab defensoribus esse audiebat; propter 
latitudinem fossae murique altitudinem, paucis defendentibus, 
expugnare noa potuit. Castris munitis, vineas agere, quaeque 
ad oppugnandum usui erant ; eomparare coepit. Interim 



212 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

omnis ex fug& Suessionum multitude* in oppidum proxima 
nocte convenit. Celeriter vineis ad oppidum actis, aggere 
jacto, turribusque constitutis, magnitudine operum, quae 
neque viderant ante Galli, neque audierant, et celeritate Ro- 
manorurn permoti, legatos ad Csesarem de deditione mittunt; 
et petentibus Rheniis, ut conservarentur, impetrant. 

Exercises on Lessons 81 and 82. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Vinea. Agger. Turris. Opus. Magnitudo. Video. 
Audierant. Celeritas. Deditio. Conservabam. Impetratis. 
Munitus. Ago. Oppugnant. Usus. Nox. Postridae. 
Finis. Proximus. Duco. Vacuus. Auditur. Fossa. 
Auditi sunt. Expugnavit. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Tower. Alarmed. Work. He has seen. They will be 
heard. They have sent. Surrender. He is preserved. 
Flight. I say. The nearest. Accomplished. We hasten. 
They assaulted. Ye have heard. On account of. Breadth. 
Ditch. Few. He began. Mantlets. I shall prepare. 
Use. Night. Quickly. Mound. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Caesar vineas agere ccepit. Quaeque usui erant comparavit. 
Omnis multitudo in oppidum convenit. Vineis ad oppidum 
actis, turribusque constitutis. Quae neque viderant ante, 
neque audierant. Galli legatos ad Caesarem mittunt. In 
fines Suessionum exercitum duxit. Ad oppidum contendit. 
Id oppugnavit. Vacuum ab defensoribus esse audiebat. 
Propter latitudinem fossae, expugnare non potuit. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Alarmed by the greatness of the works. The Gauls send 
ambassadors to Caesar. The Rhemi petitioning that they 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 213 

might be preserved. Few men defending it. They began 
to move forward the mantlets. They assaulted the town. 
In the mean time, the Suessiones came into the town. The 
Gauls, alarmed, send ambassadors to Caesar. Which they 
had neither seen before, nor had heard of. 

SB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD — PASSIVE VOICE. 
44 /r." p. sb. (1) Present Tense. I, &c., may or can be heard. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

p. sb. (1) Audiar [1], I may or can be heard iar. 

p. sb. (1) Audiaris oraudiare [2], thou mayst, &c, be heard.... iaris or iare. 
p. sb. (1) Audia'ur [3], he may be heard iatur. 

PLURAL. 

p. sb. (1) Audiamur [pi. 1], we may be heard iamur. 

p. sb. (1) Audiamini [pi. 2], you may be heard iamini. 

p. sb. (1) Audiantur [pi. .3], they may be heard iantur. 

u Ir." p. sb. (2) Imperfect. I, &c, might, could, would or should be heard. 

SINGULAR. 

p. sb. (2) Audirer [1], I might, &c, be heard irer. 

p. sb. (2) Audireris or audirere [2], thou mightstbe heard.. ..ireris or irere. 
p. sb. (2) Audiretur [3], he might be heard iretur. 

PLURAL. 

p. sb. (2) Audiremur [pi. 1], we might be heard iremur. 

p. sb. (2) Audiremini [pi. 2], you might be heard iremini. 

p. sb. (2) Audirentur [pi. 3], they might be heard irentur. 

" Ttum." p. sb. (4) Perfect Tense. I, &c. may have been heard. 

SINGULAR. 

p. sb. (4) Auditus sim or fuerim [1], I may have been heard, 
p. sb. (4) Auditus sis or fueris [2], thou mayst have been heard, 
p. sb. (4) Auditus sit or fuerit [3], he may have been heard. 

PLURAL. 

p. sb. (4) Auditi simus or fuerimus [pi. 1], we may have been heard, 
p. sb. (4) Auditi sitis or fueritis [pi. 2], you may have been heard. 
p. sb. (4) Auditi sint or fuerint [pi. 3], they may have been heard. 



214 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

"Itum." p. sb. (5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c, might, could, would or 
should have been heard, 

SINGULAR. Terminations, 

p. sb. (5) Auditus essem or fuissem [1], I might, &c, have been heard. 
p. sb. (5) Auditus esses or fuisses [2], thou mightst have been heard. 
p. sb. (5) Auditus esset or fuisset [3], he might have been heard. 



p. sb. (5) Auditi essemus or fuissemus [pi. 1], we might have been heard, 
p. sb. (5) Auditi essetis or fuissetis [pi. 2], you might have been heard. 
p. sb. (5) Auditi essent or fuissent [pi. 3], they might have been heard. 

"iR." P. IM. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
SINGULAR. 

p. im. Audire or auditor [2], be thou heard ire or itor. 

p. im. Auditor [3], let him be heard itor. 

PLURAL. 

p. im. Audimini [pi. 2], be ye heard imini. 

p. im. Audiuntor [pi. 3], let them be heard iuntor. 

P. IN. INFINITIVE MOOD. 

"Ir." p. in. (1) Present Tense. To be heard. 

p. in. (1) Audiri, to be heard iri. 



"Itum." p. in. (4) Perfect Tense. To have been heard. 
p. in. (4) Auditus esse or fuisse, to have been heard. 

"Itum." p. in. (3) Future Tense. To be about to be heard. 
p. in. (3) Auditum iri, to be about to be heard. 

PARTICIPLES [PART.]. 

"Itum." p. (4) Perfect Tense [part.]. Heard. 

p. (4) Auditus [part.], heard itus. 

"Ir." p. (3) Future Tense [part.]. About to be heard, or to be heard. 
p. (3) Audiendus [part.], about to be heard endus. 

"itum." p. supine in [u]. to be heard. 
p, Auditu [u], to be heard u. 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 215 

The present and imperfect tenses of the subjunctive pas- 
sive, the imperative passive, the present tense of the infinitive 
passive, and the future participle passive, are formed from 
the first principal part, ir. The perfect and pluperfect sub- 
junctive passive, the perfect and future infinitive passive, the 
perfect participle, and the supine in w, are formed from the 
third principal part, itum ; or, rather, the perfect participle, 
and supine in w, are thus formed. 

In the present tense, in the singular, ir is changed into 
iar in the first person, into iaris or tare in the second, and 
into iatur in the third person ; in the plural, ir is changed 
into iamur in the first person, into iamini in the second, and 
into iantur in the third person. 

In the imperfect tense, in the singular, ir is changed into 
irer in the first person, into ireris or irere in the second, and 
into iretur in the third person ; in the plural, ir is changed 
into iremur in the first person, into iremini in the second, 
and into irentur in the third person. 

The perfect and pluperfect tenses, subjunctive passive, 
have properly no terminations ; for the perfect is formed by 
the perfect participle auditus, and sim or fuerim, either form- 
ing the perfect subjunctive. The pluperfect, in like manner, 
is formed by the perfect participle and essem or fuissem. 

In the imperative mood, ir, in the singular, is changed 
into ire or itor in the second person, and in the third person 
into itor ; in the plural, ir is changed into imini in the 
second person, and into iuntor in the third person. 

In the infinitive mood, in the present tense, ir is changed 
into iri. The perfect tense of the infinitive is formed by the 
perfect participle and esse or fuisse. The future tense of the 
same by the supine in um and iri. 

The perfect participle is formed by changing itum into itus. 
The future participle passive by changing ir into iendus. 

The supine in u is formed by changing itum into itu. 

In the future passive participle of the third and fourth 
conjugations, undus is often used in place of endus. 



216 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 



Lesson 83. 

Vero "•^vincula et !d - pM ea 

But bonds (and imprisonments) and these 

m,pU sempiterna certe 

enduring-for-ever (or for life) 'have certainly 

«r-i-|tum. P .(4)j nventa sunt rpi-3] • • a( j i-fc.4 s i n g U larem 4 poenam 

* been-invented for (the) singular punishment 

m - 2 nefarii us - eris - 2 sceleris. ! (■»««*«»■•(» j u ^ et p] •• 

of-nefarious crimes. 'He [Caesar] 'orders (them) 

I ir-ivi or iwtum.p.in.(i) ( jj g p ert j n m.pi.3 m unlcipiis- *•' Ista 

to-be-distributed to-the-inunicipal-towns. This 

ei.l reg I (d)er-di-sum.p.(l) yjdetur [3] * * ' er-ui-itum.in.(I) habere 

thing seems to-have 

as -at ls .4 i n iq U itatem, si (voto " ' ^H»^«*. ( i) velis [2] • • 

injustice (in it), if you-wish 

| are-avi-atum.in.(l) i m p erare j -^tfe.4 (Jifficultatem, 

to-command (it of the municipalities); difficulty, 

si l ar -™-atum.in.(i) r0 g are . tamen 

if (you wish) to-ask-for (it of them); however 

I (cern)er-crevi-cretum.p.sb.(l) $ecematur t3] ** si ' 6r - u '- itum '( 1 ) rjlacet [3J * * 

let-it-be-decreed, if it-pleases (you). 

Enim 'ego *** ^P'0-ciP^e)|gr-cepi-ceptum.(3) susc |p- an ^[1]«. 

For I will-take-it-upon-myself (to see 

et, Ut |ar-av«tum.(l) S p er0) [l]»» 

your decree executed), and, as I-hope, 

i ir-i-tum. ( 3) re periam, [1] * • ui ' pU qui 

I-will-find (those municipalities), that 

| ar-avi-atum.sb.(l) -p-Q^ent Cpl,3] * * 11011 ( mrn_ewe) ' •"■M»(l) esse 

may-think (it) not to-be (the part) 

SU86 aS - ati3 - 2 dignitatis ' ■***■■!— -MA recusare id.4 J^ 

of-their dignity to-refuse (to do) that, 

od - 4 quod *" ' ui - u,um - sb -< 4) statueritis [pl ' 2] * * 6 causa 

which you-may-have-enacted for-the-sake 

us -utis.2 salutis (jry i»-is.pi.2 omn i um . I w*«*«ta».(i) Adjungit [3J •• 
'of (the) 'safety of-all. ' He [Caesar] 'adds 

is - is - 4 gravem 4 poenam cep ^ ipisp, - 3 nmnicipibus 

(a) heavy punishment 'to (the) 'inhabitants-'of (the) 'municipal-towns 

si uis - ' quis is - pK2 eorum (rup)gr " ' pi ' ptum - (6) ruperi t r3] * • 

I if any-one of-them shall-have-broken 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 217 

■upij yincula; 

(the) bonds [if any one of the conspirators shall have escaped]; 

, ( d)ar-((fc)di-(d)atu m .(i) c i rculI1 dat [3] * * is " is - p1 - 4 horribiles 

he-places-round (them) dreadful 

^ custodias et • ir " ivi or u or xWtum w tum ' (1) sancit t 3J * * 

guards and (irrevocably) ordains 

m.pi. 4( ^-g na u»-eris.6 sce j ere s .pi.2 perditorum 

(whatever things are) worthy 1 of (the) l guilt of-abandoned 

o-ioi S .pi.2 h om m uni; ne ui&1 quis («"*-«*) I wu.«*.(U possit [3] •• 

men, lest any-one may 

| ar-avi-atum.in.d) J evare 4 p^an^ ».pl,2 eorum ui.pl.4 ^g 

lighten (the) punishment, of-those whom 

|w-avi^tum.(l) con( J emnatj [3]«« aut per Q»-< Sen atum, aut 

he-condemns, either through (the) senate, or 

per ^pOpulllin. Etiam ' ft"**"******'"*') irfpit [3]«« 

through (the) people. Also he-takes-away 

ci - m spent, ua5j quse 'sola l* M "*-<*>goIet B,M l tMtu, - d - ln -< , >consolari 
hope, which alone is-accustomed to-console 

°- ,ms - 4 hoininem in pK6 miseriis. Prseterea 

(a) man in misery. Moreover 

I ( b)e«i^um.(i) j u ^ et [3] •• »-P u bona • ar " avi ■"—»*■« publican ; 

he-orders (their) goods to-be-confiscated; 

I (linquo-linquerej.er-liaui-lictum.d) rC linqTiit l3J ## 4 vitam 4 SOlam 

he-leaves life alone 

■• p1 - 3 nefariis °- ,Dis - 1 honiinibus. 

*to (these) Nefarious men. 

Lesson 84. 

Vincula vero, et ea seinpiterna, certe ad singularern poenam 
nefarii sceleris inventa sunt. Municipiis dispertiri jubet. 
Habere videtur ista res iniquitateni, si imperare velis ; diffi- 
cultatem, si rogare; dicerDatur tamen, si placet. Ego enim 
suscipiani, et, ut spero, reperiam, qui id, quod salutis om- 
nium causa statueritis, non putent esse suae dignitatis recu- 
sare. Adjungit gravem poenam municipibus, si quis eorum 
vincula ruperit : horribles custodias circumdat, et digna 
scelere bominum perditorum sancit, ne quis eorum poenam, 
quos condemnat, aut per senatum, aut per populum levare 
19 



218 VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 

possit. Eripifc etiam spem, quae sola hominem in miseriis 
consolari solet. Bona praeterea publicari jubet; vitam solam 
relinquit nefariis hominibus. 

Exercises on Lessons 83 and 84. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Adjunxit. Municeps. Poena. Vinculum. Custodiae 
Circumdedit. Scelus. Perditus. Levare. Eripio. Sues 
Consolabo. Jubetis. Vita. Reliquit. Sempiterna. Dis- 
pertiri. Imperabis. Volo. Rogavisti. Decernatur. Sus- 
cipiet. Sperabam. Reperiam. Salus. Causa. Puto. 
Recusavit. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

You condemn. To take away. He has consoled. Misery. 
They have ordered. They will be confiscated. He left. 
You have enacted. Safety. He will add. Punishment. 
Shall have broken. You place around. Guards. Guilt. 
Worthy. They order. Municipal towns. You have com- 
manded. We ask for. It pleases. He will take it upon 
himself. He hopes. I have found. He may think. They 
have refused. Have been invented. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Eripit spem. Quae hominem consolari solet. Bona pub- 
licari jubent. Vitam solam relinquit hominibus. Adjungunt 
gravem poenam municipibus. Si quis vincula ruperit. Ne 
quis poenam levare possit. Municipiis jubet. Habere vide- 
tur ista res dimcultatem. Si placet. Ut spero, reperiam. 
Non putet esse suae dignitatis recusare. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Whom you condemn. He takes away hope. He consoles 
the man in misery. He leaves life alone to the men. For 
the sake of the safety of all. If any one of them shall have 



VERBS — IRREGULAR. 2 19 

escaped. He placed guards round them. To lighten the 
punishment. He orders them to be distributed to the muni- 
cipal towns. If it pleases you. They will take it upon 
themselves. They think it not a part of their dignity. 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 

The irregular verbs are those which not only depart from 
the formation of the principal parts, but also are irregular in 
the formation of the tenses and persons formed from these 
principal parts, especially in the first part. They are sum — 
I am, which, with its compounds, has already been treated 
of; volo — / am willing, fero — I bear or carry, jio — / am 
made or become, edo — / eat, eo — / go, queo — I can or am 
able. The compounds of all these being also irregular. 

Yolo — lam willing, or I wish. 

Some of the parts of volo, and of its compounds, are 
wanting. 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

Present Indicative. Present Infinitive. Perfect Indicative. 

Volo, Velle, Volui, 

I-ain-willing. to-be-willing. I-have-been-willing. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
"E." (1) Present Tense. I, dec., am willing, or I wish. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

(1) Volo [1], I am willing olo. 

(1) Vis [2], thou art willing is. 

(1) Vult [3], he is willing ult. 

PLURAL. 

(1) Volumus [pi. 1], we are willing olumus. 

(1) Vultis [pi. 2], you are willing ultis. 

(1) Volunt [pi. 3], they are willing olunt. 

Imperfect tense, volebam — I was willing, is conjugated 
regularly after the third conjugation; so is also the future, 



220 VERBS IRREGULAR. 

volam — I will be willing ; also the present participle, volens 
— being willing. 

All the tenses formed from the second principal part, ui, 
are conjugated regularly after the third conjugation: as, 
perfect, volui — I have been willing ; pluperfect, volueram — 
I had been willing; perfect future, voluero — I shall have 
been icilling. Also, the subjunctive perfect, voluerim — I 
may have been willing, is regular, as, likewise, the pluperfect 
subjunctive, voluissem — I might have been willing, and the 
infinitive perfect, volui sse — to have been willing. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

"E." sb. (1) Present Tense. I, &c, may be willing. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

sb. (1) Velini [1], I may be willing elim. 

sb. (1) Velis [2], thou mayst be willing elis. 

sb. (1) Velit [3], he may be willing elit. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (1) Velimus [pi. 1], we may be willing......... elimus. 

sb. (1) Velitis [pi. 2], you may be willing elitis. 

sb. (1) Velint [pi. 3], they may be willing elint. 

U E" sb. (2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c, might, could, &c, be willing. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (2) Vellem [1], I might be willing ellem. 

sb. (2) Velles [2], thou mightst be willing elles. 

sb. (2) Vellet [3], he might be willing ellet. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (2) Vellemus [pi. 1], we might be willing ellemus. 

sb. (2) Velletis [pi. 2], you might be willing elletis. 

sb. (2) Vellent [pi. 3], they might be willing ellent. 

"E." in. (1) Infinitive. Present Tense. 
in. (1) Velle, to be willing elle. 

The irregularity of volo is in the indicative present tense, 
in the subjunctive present and imperfect tenses, and in the 



VERBS — IRREGULAR. 221 

infinitive present, all as above given. V is placed before all 
the above terminations, in these irregular parts, to form the 
moods and tenses. 

Volt and voltis, for vult and vultis, sometimes occur. 

The compounds of volo are nolo — I am unwilling, com- 
pounded from non — not, and volo — I am willing ; malo — / 
am more willing, compounded of magis — more and volo. 

Nolo — I am unwilling, is formed by dropping the final n 
of non, and by omitting the commencing v in volo, making 
noolo ; but the two vowels, oo, are contracted into o, thus 
forming nolo, and this takes place in all the moods, tenses, 
numbers and persons of nolo, except the second and third 
persons singular indicative, and the second person plural of 
the same, in which the n of non, and the v of volo, are not 
dropped: as, singular, nolo ll] , nonvis [2i , nonvult 131 ; plural, 
nolumus [p]A \ nonvultis [pK2] , nolunt lpL31 ; so that nolo, formed 
by contracting non and volo, as above' described, is exactly 
conjugated like volo, with the exceptions here above indicated. 

Nolo has also the imperative : as, singular, noli or no- 
lit o [2] , be ye not willing ; plural, nolite or nolitote [pl,3] , let them 
not be willing. 

Nevis and nevolt sometimes occur for nonvis and nonvult. 

Malo — / am more willing, is formed by dropping the final 
syllable, gis, of magis, and by omitting the commencing v 
of volo, making maolo ; but ao is contracted into a, thus 
forming malo : and this takes place in all the moods, tenses, 
numbers, and persons of volo, except the second and third 
persons singular indicative, and the second person plural of 
the same, in which the v of volo is not dropped, though the 
gis of magis is : as, singular, malo, U] mavis, [2] ma vult ; t3] plu- 
ral, malumus, lvLl] mavultis, ipl ' 2] malunt; [vL3] so that malo, 
formed by contracting magis and volo, as above described, is 
exactly conjugated like volo, with the exceptions here indicated. 
19* 



222 VERBS — IRREGULAR. 



Lesson 85. 

Tarn (quor-qui)er- 1 cutus.d. (4) assecu t U s sum ™ • • od4 - quod 

I- 1 have-already Attained what 

»r-|avi-atum.(4) exS p ectav ^[l].« ut pU vos « • «1 nineS 

I-expected, that you all 

1 ( d)er-di-sum.sb.2 v ideretis, [pK2] • • io - ionis - 4 conjurationem (/.) •• 

might-see, (that) (a) conspiracy 

(cio-cere)er-/m- | ctum.p.in.4 f actam esge aperte COIltra 

has-been-made openly against 

ei.4 and 4 rem publicam. Nisi vero si (««««) I ^-0) est [3] * * 

(the) republic. Unless indeed there (may) be 

uiU qUlS, ° U qui, ' ar - a vi-atum.sb.(l) p utet [3] •• 

any-one, who, thinks (that those who are 

fe-is.pi. i siroiles 2 Catilinse non ' wiw*— J».(i) sentire cuni 

(the) likes of-Catiline *do not ^eel with 

6 Catilina. < mm - MM > ' mL « Est [3] # • non jam * A locus 

Catiline. There is not now place 

as-atis.3 leriltati ', eU reS 8a ' ! ipsa > «-»vi-atuin.<l> fl ag i tat [ P 1.3] 

for-mildness ; (the) thing itself demands 

as - atis4 severitatem. Etiani nunc 

severity. I- 1 may even now 

| (ced)er-cessi-essum.sb.(l) conce dam [1] * * m - 4 UnUHl I 

1 concede one-thing: 

(eo-ire) | ir-ivi or ii-itum.sb.(I) gxeant ^ pI ' 3 ^ * * (ficiscor-ficisi) | Sr-fectus.d.sb.(J) r^Qfl 

let-them-go-forth let- 

ciscan tur ; [pl>3] * * ne (ior - i) ' a^«*-««»-*-*-(i) patiantur rpl - 3 ■ * 

them-depart; let- 1 them not buffer 

%A niiserum 4 Catilinam ' (^sr-bui.in cu tabescere m - 6 desiderio 
(the) wretched Catiline to-pine-away for (the) want 

2 sui ; (3) * * ' aM ^ tum -^ demonstrabo [1] * # »J«*rf iter# 
of-them; I- will-point-out (the) road. 
(fici S cor-fici S oer-|fectus.d.(4)p ro f ectus est [3j«» 6 Aurelia 6 via : si 

He-has-departed *by (the) l Aurelian way: if 

(voio-veBe) i e-ui. 8 b.(3) y lent Lpl " 3 - 1 * * ' ar - avi - atum ' in -( 1 ) accelerare 

they-will-desire to-hasten 

(sequor-sequi) i gr-cutus-su m .d.(3) conS equentur ad 6 vesperam.. 

they-will-overtake (him) at evening. 

O, 4 fortunatam ei,4and4 rempublicam, si quidem 
0, fortunate republic, if indeed 



VERBS — IRREGULAR. 223 

(jk£c-jk»e)gr- | jeci-jectum.sb.4 e j ecer ^ [3] • • aec.4 J ianc 4 gen tinam 

she-may-have-cast-oufc this sink 

■"•"hujus b8 - bis - 2 urbis! e8 " is - 6 Mehercule, 6 Catiliua 86 uno 

of-this city ! By-Hercules, Catiline alone 

coir-si- 1 s tum.p.(4).6 ex hausto, [part - ] •• eU and ! respublica 

being-drawn-off, (the) republic 

| (d)er-di-sum.p.(l) yi(j e ^ ur [3] • • 3 mihi (,) * * ar-avi- | atum.p.(4).l re ] e _ 

seems to-me re- 

vata rpart - ] * * et ar -* vi " ' ^-p-w- 1 recreata. tpart - ] * * Euim 

lieved and refreshed. For 

idl quid m2 mali aut us " cris - 2 sceleris (ram - e " ) ' ™ 0) potest & •• 

•what evil or crime can 

(g)Sr-x.-ctum.p.in.(l) g^j ^ | ar-avi-atuni.p.in.(l) exC0 gitari, ° d - 4 quod 

be-formed or devised, which 

* ] ille non ("P^p^er- 1 cepi-ce P tum.sb.(4) conc eperit. l3] * * 

he 'may not 'have-conceived. 

Lesson 86. 

Quod exspectavi, jam sum assecutus, ut vos omnes, factam 
esse aperte conjurationem contra rempublicam, videretis. 
Nisi vero si quis est, qui Catilinae similes cum Catilina sen- 
tire non putet. Non est jam lenitati locus ; severitatem res 
ipsa flagitat. Unum etiam nunc concedam ; exeant, profi- 
ciscantur, ne patiantur desiderio sui Catilinam miserum ta- 
bescere; demonstrabo iter; Aurelia via profectus est; si 
accelerare volent, ad vesperam consequentur. fortunatam 
rempublicam, si quidem hanc sentinam hujus urbis ejecerit ! 
Uno mehercule Catilina exhausto, relevata mihi et recreata 
respublica videtur. Quid enim mali aut sceleris fingi aut 
excogitari potest, quod non ille conceperit ? 

Exercises on Lessons 85 and 86. 
Latin words to be translated into English. 

Relevatus. Vides. Fingo. Excogitaverunt. Conce- 
perit. Exeo. Proficiscor. Tabescit. Demonstravistis. 
Via. Profectus erat. Accelerabo. Vespera. Respublica. 



224 VERBS — IRREGULAR. 

Urbs. Ejicio. Expectabam. Aperte. Yiderem. Similis* 
Putarnus. Lenitas. Flagito. Concede Volo. Mavis. 
Vult. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Refreshed. Crime. To devise. To conceive. Fortunate. 
He casts out. Sink. City. I see. To the republic. To 
attain. I will wait for. A conspiracy. I have thought. 
He has felt. Place. Now. Mildness. He demands. 
They have conceded. He may depart. I suffer. Wretched. 
I have pointed it out. I wish. You do not wish. Evening. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English, 

Relevata mihi respublica videtur. Quid sceleris excogitari 
potest. Ne patiantur Catilinam miserum tabescere. Iter 
demonstravi. Urbe profectus est. Si accelerare nolent. Si 
hanc sentinam ejecerit. Quod expectavit assecutus est. Ut 
factam esse aperte conjurationem. Vos omnes videretiy. Si 
quis est, qui non putet. Unum concedam. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin 

He has departed by the Aurelian way. If they will desire 
to hasten, they will overtake him. The republic seems to 
me relieved and refreshed. What crime can be devised, 
which he may not have conceived. There is not place for 
mildness. One thing I may concede. Let them not puffer 
Catiline to pine away. I will point out the way. I have 
attained what I expected. That a conspiracy has Win 
formed against the republic. 

Fero — 1, &c, bear or carry. It has both an active and 
passive form. Excepting in the forms given below, it i* 
conjugated regularly, like a verb of the third conjugation. 



VERBS — IRREGULAR. 225 





PRINCIPAL PARTS. 




Present Indicative. 


Present Infinitive. Perfect Indicative. 


Supine. 


Fero, 


Ferre, Tuli, 


Latum, 


I-bear. 


to-bear. I-bore* 


a-bearing. 



Active Voice. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

"K" (1) Present Tense. I, &c. } bear. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

(1) Fero [1], I bear o. 

(I) Fers [2], thou bearest s. 

(1) Fert [3], he bears t. 

PLURAL. 

(1) Ferimus [pi. 1], we bear imus. 

(1) Fertis [pi. 2], you bear , tis. 

(1) Ferunt [pi. 3], they bear unt. 

The irregularity is here in the second and third persons 
singular, and in the second person plural. The irregularity 
consists in the singular by omitting the i before s of the 
second person, and the i before t of the third person ; in the 
plural, by omitting the i before tis of the second person. 
All the other tenses of the indicative active are formed 
regularly. 

In the passive active present, the irregularity occurs in 
the second person singular, which has ferris or ferre in 
place of fereris or ferere, the e before ris and re being 
omitted; and in the third person singular, which has fertur, 
the i before tur being omitted. The second person plural, 
which has ferimini, is regular. All the other tenses and 
persons of the indicative passive are formed regularly from 
their principal parts. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

It is only the imperfect tense, subjunctive mood, that is 
irregular, and this consists in omitting e before rem } in all its 



226 VERBS — IRREGULAR. 

numbers and persons : as, fer rem in place of fererem. The 
same omission of e takes place in all the numbers and persons 
of the passive subjunctive imperfect tense, which has ferrer 
for fererer. All the other tenses and persons of the sub- 
junctive; both active and passive, are formed regularly. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

The imperative mood has, in the second person active, fer 
for fere, and fer to for fer ho, in the third person, ferto for 
ferito ; in the plural, in the second person, ferte for ferite, 
fertote for feritote ; the third person plural, ferun to, is re- 
gular. The imperative passive voice, in the singular, in the 
second person, has ferre for ferere, and fertor for feritor, 
and, in the third person, fertor for feritor ; in the second 
person plural, ferimini is regular, as is also feruntor, in the 
third person. 

INFINITIVE. 

The infinitive has, in the present tense active, ferre for 
ferere, and, in the present tense passive, ferri for fer i. All 
the other tenses, both active and passive, are regular, accord- 
ing to the principal parts they are derived from. 

The participles, gerunds, and supine, are all formed regu- 
larly, according to the principal parts they are derived from. 

The compounds of fer o, which are of frequent occurrence, 
are conjugated like fero. 

Flo — to he made or to become, has partly the active form, 
and partly the passive form ; but, in all its fornls, it has a 
passive meaning, being used as the passive of facto — I make. 
If the i of fio be considered as a part of its root, it will then 
belong to the third conjugation. 





VERBS — IRREGULAR. 


2 




PRINCIPAL PARTS. 




Present Indicative. 


Present Infinitive. 


Perfect Participle. 


Fio, 


Fieri, 


Factus, 


I-am-made. 


to-be-made. 


made. 



227 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
u Er." p. (1) Present Tense. 

singular. Terminations. 

p. (1) Fio [1], I am made o. 

p. (1) Fis [2], thou art made s. 

p. (1) Fit [3], he is made t. 

PLURAL. 

p. (1) Fimus [pi. 1], we are made mus. 

p. (1) Fitis [pi. 2], you are made tis. 

p. (1) Fiunt [pi. 3], they are made unt. 

The irregularity here consists in the second and third per- 
sons singular, and in the first and second persons plural. 
The i of the terminations is and it, in the singular, being 
omitted, for the i here belongs to the root of the verb. So, 
also, the i of the terminations imus, itis, is omitted in the 
plural. 

The imperfect and future tenses indicative are regular, as 
are, also, the present and imperfect tenses of the subjunctive. 

The perfect, pluperfect, and perfect future tenses of the 
indicative, have the regular passive form, as derived from 
/actus: as, /actus sum or fui — I have been made. The 
perfect and pluperfect tenses of the subjunctive have also 
the same regular passive form, derived from /actus : as, 
/actis sim or /uerlm — I may have been made. 

The imperative mood has, in the second person singular, 
fi in place of fie, and fi to in place of fiito ; and, in the third 
person, fito in place of fiito ; in the plural, in the second 
person, it has jite for fiite, and fitote for fiitote. Fiunto, in 
the third person plural, is regular. 

The infinitive has fieri in place of fiere, in the present 



228 VERBS — IRREGULAR. 

tense ; in the perfect it has, regularly, f actus esse or fuisse, 
and in the future, regularly, factum iri. 

There is no present participle. The perfect participle, 
/actus , and the future, faciendus, are both regular. 

The supine in u is regular, factu. 

The compounds of facto that retain the a have fio for 
their passive ; but those that change a into i form their pas- 
sives regularly. Though the defectives, confit — it is done ; 
deft — it is wanting ; infit — he begins, occur. 

Edo — I eat, edere — to eat, edi — Ihave eaten, esum — an 
eating, is a regular verb of the third conjugation. Its irre- 
gularity consists in taking, with the regular forms, some of 
the forms of sum — I am, in some of the moods, and in a few 
of the tenses : as in the indicative present. 



««TJ 



'ER. SINGULAR. Terminations. 

(1) Edo [1], I eat o. 

(1) Edis or es [2], thou eatest is or es. 

(1) Edit or est [3], he eats it or est. 

PLURAL. 

(1) Edimus [pi. 1], we eat imus. 

(1) Editis or estis [pi. 2], you eat itis or estis. 

(1) Edunt [pi. 3], they eat unt. 

"Er" sb. (2) In the Subjunctive, imperfect tense. 
SINGULAR. 

8b. (2) Ederem or essem [1], I might eat erem or essem. 

sb. (2) Ederes or esses [2], thou mightst eat eres or esses. 

sb. (2) Ederet or esset [3], he might eat.... eret or esset. 

PLURAL. 

sb. (2) Ederemus or essemus [pi. 1], we might eat eremus or essemus. 

sb. (2) Ederetis or essetis [pi. 2], you might eat eretis or essetis. 

sb. (2) Ederent or essent [pi. 3], they might eat erent or essent. 

"Er" Im. In the Imperative Mood. 

SINGULAR. 

im. Ede or es, edito or esto [2], eat thou e or es, ito or esto. 

im. Edito or esto [3], let him eat .« ito or esto. 



VERBS — IRREGULAR. 229 

PLURAL. Terminations. 

im. Edite or este, editote or estot-e [pi. 2], eat ye...ite or este, itote or estote. 
im. Edunto [pi. 3], let them eat unto. 

in. (1) In the infinitive, in the present tense, edere or esse. 

In the passive voice, edifur or estur, in the third person 
present indicative, and ederetur or essetur, in the imperfect 
subjunctive passive, are used. 

In all the other moods and tenses, the parts of sum are not 
used in place of the regular conjugation. 

Eo — I go, is a verb of the fourth conjugation. It is irre- 
gular in all the moods and tenses formed from the first prin- 
cipal part, but regular in those moods and tenses formed from 
the second and third principal parts. 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

Present Indicative. Present Infinitive. Perfect Indicative. Supine. 
Eo, Ire, Ivi, Itum, 

I-go. to-go. I-have-gone. a-going. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

"Jr." (1) Present Tense. I, &c, go. 

SINGULAR. Terminations. 

(I) Eo [1], I go o. 

(1) Is [2], thou goest is. 

(1) It [3], he goes „ it 

PLURAL. 

(1) Imus [pi. 1], we go.... imus. 

(1) Itis [pi. 2], you go itis. 

(1) Eunt [pi. 3], they go unt. 

Here all the numbers and persons are irregular. The 
second and third persons singular, and the first and second 
20 



230 VERBS — IRREGULAR. 

persons plural, are irregular by omitting the root of the verb 
e, and retaining only the terminations of numbers and per- 
sons. The third person plural is irregular by omitting the 
* of the fourth conjugation ; it having eunt in place of eiunt. 
The first person singular might also be considered as irre- 
gular, for it wants the characteristic i of the fourth conju- 
gation. 

The imperfect tense is also irregular in all its numbers and 
persons, for it consists only of the terminations of the fourth 
conjugation, and omits the root of the verb : as, ibam, &c, 
for eibam. 

The present tense, subjunctive mood, is irregular by 
omitting the characteristic i of the fourth conjugation, it 
having earn, &c, in place of eiam. 

The imperfect tense, subjunctive mood, is irregular by 
having only the terminations of the imperfect subjunctive, 
without the root of the verb : as, irem, &c, for eirem, &c. 

The imperative is irregular by omitting the root of the 
verb, e, and only having the terminations of the imperative, 
fourth conjugation, in the second and third persons singular, 
and second person plural : as, i, &c, for ei, &c. The third 
person plural is irregular by the omission of the characteristic 
i of the fourth conjugation, having eunto in place of eiunto. 

The infinitive present is irregular by only having the ter- 
mination of the fourth conjugation, without the root : as ; ire 
for eire. 

The present participle is irregular by having only the ter- 
minations of the fourth conjugation in its nominative sin- 
gular, without the root : as, tens for eiens. The genitive, 
thereof is euntis, irregular. 

The gerunds are irregular, they having eundi, &c, in place 
of eiendij &c. 

In the passive voice, there is the infinitive, iri. The third 
persons are sometimes used in the passive : as, itur. 

The compounds of eo are conjugated like eo. 



VERBS — IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE. 231 

Queo — I can j and nequeo — / cannot, are conjugated like 
eo. They want the imperative mood and gerunds. 

Four verbs, in the imperative, often reject the final e. 
They are die — say, due — lead, fac — make or do, fer — carry. 
So, also, do their compounds, except those compounds of 
facio which change a into i : as, per/ice — accomplish. Here 
the e is retained. 

DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

Defective verbs are those which are only used in some 
moods, tenses, numbers, or persons. The following is a list 
of the principal verbs of this class : 



1. Odi; I hate. 

2. Coepi; I have begun. 

3. Memini; I remember. 

4. Aio ; I say. 

5. Inquam; I say. 

6. Fari; to speak. 

7. Quaeso; I pray. 

8. Ave; hail. 



9. Salve; hail. 

10. Apage; begone. 

11. Cedo; tell or give way. 

12. Confit; it is done. 

13. Dent; it is wanting. 

14. Infit; he begins. 

15. Ovat; he rejoices. 

16. Novi; I know. 



Odi — I hate, memini — / remember, and novi — I know, 
though in the perfect tense, have the sense of the present ; 
in the pluperfect tense, they have the meaning of the imper- 
fect ; in the perfect future, they have the meaning of the 
simple future. 

Lesson 87. 

8 ' l DivitiaCUS (cic^re)|er-/ec.--ctum.(l)f acit[ 3]«# m.pl.4^^ pn) 

Divitiacus | makes words [spoke] for 

i:,pl,6 his (nam post Gs * 4 discessum pK2 Belgarum, pK6 copiis 

these (for after (the) departure * of (the) 'Belgaa, (the) forces 

■• pl,2 ^Eduorurn owtotawBH- 1 missum.p.(4).pi.6 diurissis [P art -1 • • 

* of (the) l JEdui being-dismissed, 

(t)er- 1 ti-sum. ( 5) rev erterat [3] •• ad is - 4 eum) 

he-had-returned to him [Caesar] ) "(that) 



232 VERBS — IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE. 

'• pU "Bellovacos e - is6 omni us ~ oris - 6 tempore («*«»«>• e - 1 ui - in - < 4 > fuisse 

(the) Bellovaci at-all times have-been 

in eL6 fide atque 6 amiciti& 2 iEduae 

in (the) bonds-of-fidelity and in-friendship * with (the) 'iEduan 

aS "* tis - 2 civitatis; (P ell )gr- P uli-|pulsum.(4).s.pl.4j m p U ] S0S tpart.]»» ^ "-p^suis 

state; impelled by their 

•i»-ipu.pi.6 principibus, qui I .go*"*-*"-*-* dicerent [pU] ** 

chiefs, who said (that) 

8,pU iEduOS, te>Sr-egi- | actum.p.(4).s.pl.4 re d ac tos ^"^ # * in 

(the) JSdui, reduced to 

^ utis - 4 servitutem (/.)•* a- r - ris - 6 Csesare, 

slavery by Caesiir, (had) 

(fero-ferre) | e-tuli-latum.in.(l) p er f erre b-fepU omnes M -» ti «-P u indignitateS 

to-endure all indignities 

<jue # pU contumelias^ et 

and contumelies, and (that) they [the Bellovaci] 

(icio-icere).Sr- 1 eci-ectu m .in.(4) d e f ec i sse ^ s.pl.6 JgduiS, et 

had-fallen-off from (the) iEdui, and 

(fero-ferre).^ | tuii-ia. um .in. ( 4) i ntu lisse m - 4 bellum 8 - 3 Romano 

had-brought-on war 2 against (the) l Roman 

•* 3 pOpub. U, ' PL1 Qui ('urn-es,e).e- 1 /u.\sb.(5) f u i ssen t [pL3J * 

people. (Those) who had-been 

eepMipb-pUprincipes oc - 2 hujus m - z consilii, quod 

(the) leaders (in) this advice, as 

I (ii g)S r-iexi-iectum.sb.(2) i nt elligerent [pK3] *• 4 quantam 

they-understood how-great 

as-atis.4 ca ] am itatem (fero-ferre).e- | tuli-latum.sb.(5) intullssent [pL3] * * 

(a) calamity they-had-brought-on 

a^atis.3 c i v i tat i (gi^ggre).gr- 1 gi-gitum.i H . ( 5) p ro f U gi sse i n 4 Britanniam. 

(the) state fled into Britain. 

Non solum 8 - pU Bellow acos ! gMvi or »- itum - in -( , > petere, 

(That) not only (the) Bellovaci entreated, 

sed etiam 8 - pU iEduos pro icpK6 his, ut 

but (that) also (the) JEdui for them, that 

(or-i). | er-usus.d.sb.(l) utatur [3] • • 6 ^ 6 c l emen t i§, ac 

he-would-use his clemency and 

d0 - dini3 - 6 mansuetudine in ispU eos. od4 Quod, si 

mildness towards them. Which, if 

<focio-facere).er- | ftci-factum.{6) f ec g r ^ [3] • • j ar-avi-atum.(3j.m. 1 a rDT)lifica- 

he-do-it would-be- 



VERBS — IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE. 233 

tur um fpirt - ] * * ^ tis - 4 auctoritatem 8 ' pL2 iEduoruni apnd 

enlarging (the) authority *of (the) '^Edui among 

is-. s . P i.4 omnes pi.4B e ]g as . m -P 16 auxiliis atque p8 - pis - pK6 opibus 

all (the) Belgas; 'by (the) l aid and resources 

ui.pl.2 q uorum (esc)er- | evi-etum.sb.(4) conSlie veriDt [pK3] ** 

of- whom they-have-been-accustomed 

I ar-avi-atum.in. ( i) sus tentare, si id,pU qua m ' pM bella 

to-sustain (themselves), if any wars 

(cid)er- J cidi-casum.sb.(4) irjciderint." [P 1 - 3 ! * 

may-have-happened." 



Lesson 88. 

Pro his Divitiacus (nam post discessum Belgarum, di- 
missis iEduorum copiis, ad eum reverterat) facit verba; 
11 Bellovacos omni tempore in fide atque arnicitia civitatis 
JEdudd fuisse; impulsos a suis principibus, qui dicerent 
jEduos a Caesare in servitutem redactos, omnes indignitates 
contumeliasque perferre, et ab iEduis defecisse, et populo 
Romano bellum intulisse. Qui hujus consilii priDcipes fuis- 
sent ; quod intelligerent quantam calamitatem civitati intu- 
lissent, in Britanniam profugisse. Petere non solum Bello- 
vacos, sed etiam pro his iEduos, ut sua clemei tia ac 
mansuetudine in eos utatur : quod si fecerit, JEc aorum 
auctoritatem apud omnes Belgas amplificaturum, quorum 
auxiliis atque opibus, si qua bella inciderint, sustentare 
consueverint." 

Exercises on Lessons 87 and 88. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Pete. Mansuetudo. Utor. Facio. Amplifivjaturus. 
Ops. Incido. Sustentaverunt. Consuesco. Princeps. 
Intellexit. Civitas. Intulit. Profugio. Quantum. Dis- 
cessus. Dimissus. Copiae. Reverto. Fecit.. Tempus. 
Fides. Impello. Dico. Servitus. Redigere. PertuU 
runt. Deficio. Infero. 
20* 



234 VERBS — PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

He has sustained himself. I am accustomed. Resources. 
Chiefs. I understand. Calamity. They have fled. Only. 
I entreat. They use. Mildness. We do or make. Ye 
have enlarged. Time. State. I have impelled. He may 
say. He will reduce. Slavery. Ye fall off. He has 
brought it on. Thou makest. Departure. Forces. I 
dismiss. He will return. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Qui principes sunt. Calamitatem civitati infert. Id non 
intelligo. In Britanniam profugiunt. Bellovacos petere, 
ut sua dementia utatur. Quod si fecerit. iEduorum aue- 
toritatem amplificaturum. Quorum opibus sustentare con- 
sueverint. Divitiacus post discessum Belgarum ad eum rever- 
terat. Omni tempore in fide civitatis fuisse. In servitutem 
redactos omnes contumelias perferre. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

By the resources of whom they have been accustomed to 
sustain themselves. If any wars may have happened. They 
understood how great a calamity they had brought on the 
state. The leaders fled into Britain. The iEdui entreated 
for them. It would be enlarging the authority of the iEdui 
among all the Belgae. Impelled by their chiefs. That the 
iEdui were reduced to slavery. The Bellovaci had brought 
on war against the Boman people. He spoke for them. 
Divitiacus had returned to Caesar. 

PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 

When a participle is compounded with the verb sum, to 
form a tense, such compound tense is often termed a peri- 
phrastic one. The participles thus compounded are, the per- 
fect or past passive, amatus: as, amatus sum — 1 have been 



VERBS — PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 235 

loved; the future active participle, scripturus : as, scripturus 
sum — I am about to write; and the future passive, aman- 
dus : as, amandus sum — 1 must be loved. The perfect or 
past passive participle is used, as has been stated in the con- 
jugations above, to form the tenses of the passive voice 
derived from the second and third principal parte. When 
this past participle is used merely as a part of the compound 
tense, to indicate time, then either sum or fui, eram or fue- 
ram, ero or fuero, may be used; but, generally, sum, eram, 
and ero, are used, in this case, in the indicative mood, and 
sim, essem, in the subjunctive. But, when the perfect 
passive participle is used in its proper sense of adjective par- 
ticiple, and qualifies the noun, as, epistola seripta fuit — the 
written letter was, that is, it once existed, then, in this case, 
fuit alone would be used to denote the past; for epistola 
seripta est would denote the perfect tense passive — the letter 
has been written. 

FUTURE PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 

The future active participle, combined with the tenses of 
sum, denotes intention, or being about or on the point of 
doing something. When the future periphrastic conjugation 
is to be particularly designated, /. is placed in the paren- 
theses, before the numbers denoting tense: as ; {{A) amaturus 
sum [l] — lam about to love. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
(/. 1) Present Tense. I, &c, am about to love. 

SINGULAR. 

(f. 1) Amaturus sum [1], I am about to love, 
(f. 1) Amaturus es [2], thou art about to love, 
(f. 1) Amaturus est [3], he is about to love. 

PLURAL. 

(f. 1) Amaturi sumus [pi. 1], we are about to love, 
(f. 1) Amaturi estis [pi. 2], you are about to love. 
(f. 1) Amaturi sunt [pi. 3], they are about to love. 



236 VERBS — PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 

(/. 2) Imperfect Tense. 1, &c, icas about to love, 

SINGULAR. 

(f. 2) Arnaturus eram [1], I was about to love. 
&c, &c. 

(f. 3) Future Tense. I, &c, shall be about to love. 

SINGULAR. 

(f. 3) Arnaturus ero [1], I shall be about to love. 
&c, &c. 

(/. 4) Perfect Tense. I, &c, have been about to love. 

SINGULAR. 

(f. 4) Arnaturus fui [1], I have been about to love. 
<fcc, <fcc. 

(f. 5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c, had been about to love 

SINGULAR. 

(f. 5) Arnaturus fueram [1], I had been about to love. 
<fcc, <fec. 

(/. 6) Perfect Future. I, &c, shall have been about to love [but it is very 
seldom used]. 

SINGULAR. 

(f. 6) Arnaturus fuero [1], I shall have been about to love. 
&g., &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

sb. (/. 1) Present Tense. I, &c, may be about to love, 
SINGULAR. 

sb. (f. 1) Arnaturus sim [1], I may be about to love. 
&c. f &0. 

sb. (f. 2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c. f would be about to love, 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (f. 2) Arnaturus essem [1], I would be about to love. 

sb. (f. 4) Perfect Tense. I, &c, may have been about to love, 

SINGULAR. 

•b. (f. 4) Arnaturus fuerirn [1], I may have been about to love. 
&c, &c. 



VERBS — PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 237 

*b. (/. 5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c, loould have been about to love. 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (f. 5) Amaturus fuissem [1], I would have been about to love. 

IN. INFINITIVE MOOD. 
in. (1) Present Tense. 
in. (f. 1) Amaturus esse, to be about to love. 

in. (4) Perfect Tense. 
in. (f. 4) Amaturus fuisse, to have beeD about to love. 

PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION OF NECESSITY. 

The future passive participle iu dus, combined with the 
tenses of sum, denotes the necessity or propriety of the action 
to be done, or the necessity or propriety of doing the action 

When the periphrastic conjugation of necessity is to be 
particularly designated, n is placed in the parentheses before 
the numbers denoting tense : as, (n,1) amandus sum 1 * 1 , I must 
be loved. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

(n. 1) Present Tense. I, &c, must be loved. 

SINGULAR. 

(n. 1) Amandus sum [1], I must be loved, 
(n. 1) Amandus es [2], thou must be loved, 
(n. 1) Amandus est [3], he must be loved. 



(n. 1) Amandi sumus [pi. 1], we must be loved, 
(n. 1) Amandi estis [pi. 2], you must be loved, 
(n. 1) Amandi sunt [pi. 3], they must be loved. 

(n. 2) Imperfect Tense. 1, &c, was to be loved. 

SINGULAR. 

(n. 2) Amandus eram [1], I was to be loved. 

&C, &Q. 



238 VERBS — PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 

(n. 3) Future Tense, I, &c, must hereafter be loved* 

SINGULAR. 

(n. 3) Amandus ero [1], I must hereafter bo loved. 

&Q.f &C. 

(n. 4) Perfect Tense, I, &c, must have been loved, 

SINGULAR. 

(n. 4) Amandus fui [1], I must have been loved. 
&c, &c. 

(n. 5) Pluperfect Tense, I, &c, must had been loved, 

SINGULAR. 

(n. 5) Amandus fueram [1], I must had been loved. 
&c., &G. 

(n. 6) Perfect Future. I, &c> must hereafter have been loved, 
SINGULAR. 

fn. 6) Amandus fuero [1], I must hereafter have been loved. 

<fcc, <fec. 

SB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
sb. (n. 1) Present Tense. I, &c, may necessarily or properly be loved* 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (n. 1) Amandus sim [1], I may necessarily or properly be loved. 

&C, &G. 

eb. (n. 2) Imperfect Tense. I, &c, might necessarily or properly be loved, 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (n. 2) Amandus essem [1], I might necessarily or properly be loved. 
&c, <fcc. 

sb. (n. 4) Perfect Tense. I, &c, may necessarily have been loved, 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (n. 4) Amandus fuerim [1], I may necessarily have been loved. 
&c., &G. 

sb. (n. 5) Pluperfect Tense. I, &c. y might necessarily have been loved, 

SINGULAR. 

sb. (n. 5) Amandus fuissem [1], I might necessarily have been loved, 
&c, &G. 



VERBS — IMPERSONAL AND PERIPHRASTIC. 239 

IN. INFINITIVE MOOD. 

in. («. 1) Present Tense, 
in. (n. 1) Amandus esse, necessary to be loved. 

in. (n. 4) Perfect Tense, 
in. (n 4) Amandus fuisse, necessary to have been loved. 

The above form of necessity may also have another form 
by putting the participle in the neuter, and the agent, which 
in English is in the nominative, in the dative : as, mihi scri- 
bendum est — to me it is necessary to write, that is, 1 must or 
am obliged to icrite; mihi scribendum erat — I was obliged 
to write ; mihi scribendum erit — I shall be obliged to icrite ; 
and, in like manner, through all the tenses, as above — the 
verb sum being always in the third person. 

IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Impersonal verbs, strictly speaking, are those which are 
only used in the third person singular: as, decet — it becomes, 
plwit — it rains, &c. 

Lesson 89. 

Nunc, i<u quidquid c*»^>l«Ui> est [S]" quocunque 

Now, whatever it-is (or) whithersoever 

er p u vestrse ns - ntis - pU nientes atque plJ sententiae 

your minds and opinions 

I ar-avi-atum.a) i nc linaTit rpU3] * * ' e " r - i - ,um -< n - , > statuendum est t3] # • 

incline it-inust-be-determined 

3 vobis (2) • e ante x " c,is - 4 noctem. I »■**—•« Videtis ^- 2] • • 
by-you before night. You-see 

mJ quantum US -° risJ facinUS (fero-ferre).e-tuli-|latu m .p.sb.(4) delatum gj t [!>]•• 

how-great (a) crime | has-been-brought 

ad •"• 4 vos;< 2 >" si 

to you [has been reported to you] ; if 

| ar**vi-*tun..(l) p U tatis rpL2] ° * 8 ' pU paUCOS <"""-*"> ■ •**■« esse 

you-think (that) few are 



240 VERBS — IMPERSONAL AND PERIPHRASTIC. 

Is-is.pl.4 a ffi neg ic P K3 huic » ar-*vi-atu m .(l) errat i g [pl.2] • • 

partakers (in) this (affair) you-err 

veh em enter. 0Ci1 Hoc mA malum 

greatly. This evil 

ar-avi- 1 a.um.p.(4) di sse miiiatum est [3] * * latius io - ionis - 6 opinione 

has-been-disseminated more -widely | (than) opinion 

ar-|avi-atu m .(4) manavit .[3]«» nQn g() | um per 

[than is supposed] it-has-flowed not only through 

4 Italiam, verum etiam (d)gr " ' di - sum -< 4 ) transcendit f3] * • 
Italy, but also has-passed-over 

es-$um.pl.4 A ]p eS) et | Sr-si-tum.(l).ns-ntis.l ser p ens [part.] • • obsCUre 

(the) Alps, and creeping obscurely 

jam ar -' avi - atun, ( 4) occupavit [3] * # pU multas pK4 provincias. 

^as already 1 occupied many provinces. 

id.l J^ (sum-est) I e-ui.(l) potest [3J • • m.6 nu JJ m.6 pact() 

It can by-no means 

| (im)er-essi-essum.p.in.(l) pp r i ni i I ar-avi-atum.6 g us t en tan do C?en] * * aC 

be-suppressed by-enduring (it) and 

j a r-avi-atum.6 pro l a tando [ser - ] * * uaj - 6 qu&cunque 

by-putting-off (the time of action) by-whatever 

ionis.6 ra tione ' *■*■■*■•« placet r3] * • I «*«*--M vindican- 

means it-pleases it-must-be 

dum est Pi * * 3 vobis < 2) * * celeriter. ' «>*■*-«»■<»> Video [1J • • 

punished (by) you speedily. I-perceive 

adhuc c««-^)|e-ui.in.(i) esse P u duas pU sententias; 

(that) as-yet there-are (but) two opinions; 

4 unam D. ^Silani, niI qui l**»»ceiwey* M 

(namely) (the) one of-D. Silani, who is-of-opinion, 

is.pl.4 eog? ui.pl 1 ^ (conor-conari).ar- | atus.d(4) conat i sunt [pl.3] • • 

(that) those, who have-endeavored 

|er evi-etum.in.(l) ^ e l ere oc.pl.4 ^g^ | ar-avi-atuia.(n.in.l) mu ltand0S eSSe 

to-destroy these (things) ought-to-be-punished 

r»-rti S .6 mor | :e . 4 alteram C. r_ri3,2 Csesaris, qui 

with-deathj (the) other of-C. Caesar, who 

\ (v) 6 r-vi-.um.(i) remove t « ' •• 4 poenam rs - r{]s - 2 mortis, 

removes (the) penalty of-death, (but) 

, ector-ecti).er-exus.d.(i) am plectitur [S] * * i8 - is ' pU omnes a »- atis P u acerbitates 
embraces all (the) bitterness 

m - pK2 ceterorum ro - p '- 2 suppliciorum. eM Uterque 

of-other punishments. Each 



VERBS — IMPERSONAL AND PERIPHRASTIC. 241 

\ ar-avl-atum.d.(l) versatur W • • ' m 6 gumm ^ iMtifc6 seVeritate, 

is-occupied (with) (the) greatest severity, 

et pro 6 sua as_atis - 6 dignitate, et pro 

both for his-owii dignity, and for 

dcwiinis.e ma g n it u diDe (/*) * * ei - pK2 rerum. 

(the) magnitude * of (the) Affair. 

Lesson 90. 

Nunc, quidquid est, quocunque vestraB mentes inclinant 
atque sententiae, statuendum vobis ante noctem est. Quan- 
tum facinus ad vos delatum sit, videtis ; huic si paucos 
putatis affines esse, vehementer erratis. Latius opinione 
disseminatuni est hoc malum ; manavit non solum per 
Italiam, verum etiam transcendit Alpes, et obscure serpens, 
multas jam provincias occupavit. Id opprimi sustentando ac 
prolatando, nullo pacto potest. Quacunque ratione placet, 
celeriter vobis vindicandum est. Video duas adhuc esse 
sententias; unam D. Silani, qui censet, eos, qui hsec delere 
conati sunt, morte esse multandos; alteram C. Csesaris, qui 
mortis pcenam removet, ceterorum suppliciorum omnes acer- 
bitates amplectitur. Uterque et pro sua dignitate, et pro 
rerum magnitudine in summa severitate versatur. 

Exercises on Lessons 89 and 90. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Videtis. Sententia. Censeo. Delevit. Conor. Mors. 
Multare. Poena. Removeo. Supplicium. Acerbitas. 
Versor. Quocunque. Mens. Inclinavit. Nox. Facinus. 
Delatum est. Videbo. Putavere. Pauci. Erravi. Vehe- 
menter. Disseminatum erat. Manavit. Transcendo. 
Serpens. Prolate Pactum. Placet. Vindicabo. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Bitterness. He is occupied. By putting off. It pleases. 
Speedily. I have perceived. As yet. Opinion. They are 
of opinion. He had endeavored. Penalty. Embraces. I 
21 



242 PARTICLES — ADVERBS. 

have thought. They have erred. Evil. More widely. It 
flows. They have passed over. Whatever. Obscurely. 
Already. To be suppressed. Whithersoever. Minds. 
Night. Crime. How great. They see. 

Latin sentences to he translated into English. 

Uterque in sutnma severite versatur. Censet eos morte 
esse multandos. Mortis poenam removet. Omnes amplec- 
titur. Statuendum vobis ante noctem est. Quocunque 
mentes inclinant. Quantum facinus ad vos delatum erat. 
Latius disseminatum est hoc malum. Manavit per Italiam. 
Transcendit Alpes. Serpens multas provincias occupavit. 
Id opprimi nullo pacto potest. Quacunque placet. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

It embraces all the bitterness of other punishments. By 
whatever means it pleases you. It must be punished by you 
speedily. I perceive that there are two opinions. They 
have endeavored to destroy these things. They ought to be 
punished with death. You think that few are partakers in 
this affair. This evil has been disseminated more widely 
than is supposed. It has already occupied many provinces. 
Whithersoever your minds and opinions incline. It must be 
determined by you before night. 



PARTICLES. 



The parts of speech that are not inflected are termed par- 
tides. They are Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, and 
Interjection. 

ADVERBS. 

As adjectives qualify nouns, so do adverbs qualify ad- 
jectives and verbs : as, felix homo — a happy man ; feliciter 
vivit — he lives happily. 



PARTICLES. 



243 



Adverbs are either primitive or derivative. The number 
of derivative adverbs is very great, formed from the different 
parts of speech ; but especially from adjectives, which last 
generally end in e or ter. 

Adverbs derived from adjectives or participles admit of 
the degrees of comparison, the comparative being denoted by 
ius, the neuter of the comparative of adjectives : as, facile — 
easily ; facilius — more easily. The superlative of adverbs 
is formed by changing the terminating syllable, us, of the 
superlative of adjectives, into e: as, doctissimus — most 
learned ; doctisseme — most learnedly. 

Should it be required to denote the adverb in the compa- 
rative degree, it may be done by placing ad. before the (c.) 
in parentheses, after the adverb: as, facilius (ad. c). So, 
in like manner, ad. may be placed before s., denoting the 
superlative : as, doctissime (ad.s.) 



PREPOSITIONS. 



Prepositions govern either the accusative or ablative case. 
The following prepositions govern the accusative : — 



Ad; to, for, at. 

Adversum, ] 

Adversus ; J ° 

Ante ; before. 

Apud ; with, at, among. 

Circa, ] 

n . > around, about. 

Circum ; J ' 

Circiter ; about, near. 

j,. t y on this side. 
Citra; J 

Contra; against, opposite. 

Erga; towards. 

Extra; without, beyond. 

Infra; beneath, under. 

Inter; among, between. 

Intra; within. 



Juxta; near. 

Ob; on account of, for. 

Penes; in the power of. 

Per; through, by, during. 

Pone ; behind. 

Post; after, since. 

Praeter; beyond, except. 

Prope; nigh, beside. 

Propter; on account of, near. 

Secundum;, according to. 

Supra; above. 

Trans; beyond, over. 

Versus; towards (put after the 

noun). 
Ultra; beyond. 



244 



PARTICLES. 



The following prepositions govern the ablative : — 



A, ""J from, by (d is used before 

Ab, y consonants, ab before vow- 

Abs : J els, and abs before t or q. 

Absque; without. 

Coram ; before, in the presence of. 

Cum; with. 

De; of, concerning, from. 

^ from, of, out of (e is used only 

' . >■ before consonants; ear, before 

j eithervowels or consonants). 

The following prepositions govern either the accusative or 
ablative : — 



Palam ; before, with the know- 
ledge of. 

Prae ; before, for, on account of. 

Pro; before, for. 

Sine; without. 

Tenus ; as far as, up to (is put after 
the noun). 



Clam; without the knowledge of. 

In; in, ab ; into, ac. 

Sub; near, towards, ac ; under, ab. 



Super; above, over, ac; upon, ab. 
Subter ; beneath, under. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 

Conjunctions connect words and sentences, and are usually 
classed under various heads. 

The conjunctions, que — and, ve — or, and ne- — whether, 
or, in the interrogative sense, are always added to the end 
of the word. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

Interjections are mere exclamatory particles, used to ex- 
press some emotion of the mind. 



Lesson 91. 

Itaque 4 se (3) * * ar " avi - > atum -( 3 >- s - 4 reprgesentaturum, rpart - ] ■ • 

Therefore (that) he was-about-immediately-performing, 

qUOd (oonfero-ierre)t-contuli- I collatum.sb.((.2) C0 U a t UrUS eSSe t ™ * # in 

(that) which he-was-about-to-defer unto 

or-om.4 i on gi or em eU diem; et 6 proxima x_tis - 6 nocte de 

(a) more-distant day; and on-the-following night at 

6 quarta 6 vigilia (v)Sr - vi - ' tum -< 3 >- s - 4 moturum t part - ] * * mpl - 4 castra, 
(the) fourth watch (he) would-be-about-moving (the) camp, 

ut (sun,-e S8 e) i e-ui.sb. ( 2) p 0Sset [3] • • quamprinmni 

that he-might-be-able as-soon-as-possibl© 



PARTICLES. 



245 



• (i 5 )«r-exi^ctum.in.(i) i n telligere, 

to-understand, 



utrum 

whether 



or-oris.lp udor 

shame 



atque 

and 



"•'officium, an "-"^timor • er - ui - itum - ,b -®valeret [3] ** plus 



fear 



*eos. 

them. 



Quod 

But 



SI 
if 



tamen 
yet 



duty, 

apud ispU 

with 

(quor-qui) | er-cutus.d.sb.(l) ggquatur [3J 

should-follow, 

(eo-iri)-m- | itum.(3).s.4 jfurUDl ^ par '"-' * * 

| would-be-goiDg [would depart] 
io-ion».6] eg j one (/.)•• 6 sola, de ua qua 
legion alone, 

| ar.avi-atum.sb. (2) d uD itaret J «•• 

1 doubt; 

(#um-e*se)-e-ui.(3).4 futuraiU [part * ] * * 

was-about-being 



would-prevail 

o.inis.l 



nemo 
no-one 



cum 

with 



most 

prseterea 
besides 

se 

(that) he 

6 decima 
(the) tenth 



of 



which 



non 

not 



que # 

and 



earn 
it 



he- 1 did 

ea.4 

(that) 
r& - rtis - 4 cohortem 

cohort 

8 sibi\" (1)## Caesar praecipue (s)€r - |si - tum - (5) indulserat [3] * # 

to-himself." Caesar 'had especially 'indulged 

* c - 3 huic i9 - iDis - 3 legioni (/.)•* et « id)& - idiflri " UM,,ln -f 2 >confidebat I8] ** 

this 



4 praetonam 

(a) praetorian 



maxime 

(in it) chiefly 
This 



legion and he-did-confide 

propter u& " utis - 4 virtutem. (/.)** 

on-account-of (its) valor. 

i3 - 6 oratione (/.)*• gr " ui -' itum - (4) - 6 habita ^^** 

speech | being-had [being made] 

ns-Dtis.pl.l menteg is-is-pl.2 omn i um (t)er-tHsu ffi .p.(4) conyers83 sunt CPl-3] •• 

(the) minds of-all were-changed 

in 8,4 mirum ^modum, que- 'summa- as ~ at:sJ alacritas 

in (a) wonderful manner, and (the) greatest alacrity 

et ^^-'cupiditas m - 2 belli ' ( r ) gr -^-'^-p-(3). m .2 gerendi[F art.]«. 

ind eagerness (for a) war (that it was) necessary-to-wage 

[na S eor.Dasci)er. U atu S - S um.d.(4) i Qnata egt . K •• ^^ , decima 

sprung-up (in them); and (the) tenth 

io-ionis.l JggJQ (/.)*• "P^'P' 5 - 1 prinCepS* a S°- a S^ rt - I egi-actum(4) ^.^ [3j © • 

legion first acted 

P^gratias is ' 3 ei per 8 - pU tribunos 

thanks [returned thanks] to-hiin through (the) tribunes 

e-its.pl.2 m ilitum, qUOd f acio -f ac ^ I feci-factum.sb. { 5) f ec j sset [3] • • 

'of (the) 1 soldiers, because | he-had-mado [had 

m - 4 optimum {bonus, 8.) m,4 judicium de 6 se, (3 > # * 
formed] (the) best opinion of it, 

21* 



246 PARTICLES. 

q ue ar- | ^i-*tum.4 con fi rmav J^[3] •• 4 ge . (3) •• 

and assured (him), (that) it 

(turn.**) i e-ui.in. ( i) egge 4 p ara ti ss imam ad m - 4 bellum 

was most-ready for (the) war 

I (r)gr-w;-stum.p.(3).m.4 crereildum. [part,] °* 

that-ought- to-be-waged. 



Lesson 92. 

Itaque se, quod in longiorem diem collaturus esset, reprae- 
sentaturum, et proxima nocte de quarta vigili& castra motu- 
runi, ut quamprimum intelligere posset, utrum apud eos 
pudor atque officium, an timor, plus valeret. Quod si prae- 
terea nemo sequatur, tamen se cum sola decima legione itu- 
rum, de qua non dubitaret, sibique earn praetoriaui cohortem 
futuram." Huic legioni Caesar et indulserat praecipue, et 
propter virtutem, confidebat maxime. Hac oratione habita, 
mirum in modum conversae sunt omnium mentes, summaque 
alacritas et cupiditas belli gerendi innata est : princepsque 
decima legio per tribunos militum ei gratias egit, quod de se 
optimum judicium fecisset, seque esse ad bellum gerendum 
paratissimam confirmavit. 

Exercises on Lessons 91 and 92. 

Latin words to be translated into English, 

Mirum. Conversus est. Alacritas. G-ero. Princeps. 
Gratiae. Optimus. Faciunt. Paratus. Itaque. Longior. 
Confero. Proximus. Nox. Vigilia. Moveo. Intellexit. 
Pudor. Timor. Praeterea. Sequor. Iturus. Dubitabam. 
Cobors. Indulserat. Propter. Praecipue. 

English words to be translated into Latin, 

Minds. Manner. The highest or greatest. Eagerness. 
Thanks. He has made. Judgment or opinion. Most 
ready. No one. Besides. I follow. Alone. You doubt. 



SYNTAX. 247 

He had indulged. He did trust. Especially. The nearest. 
He moves. I had understood. Shame. Whether. Duty. 
Fear. More. It prevailed. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Quod si nemo sequatur. Tarnen se iturum. De qua non 
dubito. Huic legioni Caesar confidebat maxime. Hac ora- 
tione habita. Conversse sunt omnium mentes. Summa 
alacritas innata est. . Decima legio ei gratias egit. Se esse 
paratissimum. Quod in longiorem diem collaturus esset. 
Se proxima nocte castra moturum. Ut intelligere posset. 
Utrum pudor an timor plus valeret. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

The minds were changed in a wonderful manner. The 
greatest eagerness sprung up in them. He returned thanks 
to him. He had formed the best opinion of it. Whether 
duty or fear would prevail most with them. That he would 
depart with the tenth legion alone. Chiefly on account of 
its valor. Having made this speech. That which he was 
about to defer unto a more distant day. That he might be 
able as soon as possible to understand. 



SYNTAX. 

In this introductory course, it will only be necessary to 
give the essential and leading rules of Syntax. 

Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles agree with 
the noun which they qualify, in number, gender, and case : 
as, bonus vir — a good man. When the adjective belongs to 
two or more nouns it is put in the plural. When the two 
or more nouns denote persons ; and are in different genders, 



248 SYNTAX. 

the adjectives are put in the masculine rather than in the 
feminine gender. When such two or more nouns in different 
genders denote things without life, the adjective is generally 
put in the neuter gender. When one noun denotes an ani- 
mate, and the other an inanimate thing, the adjective is 
sometimes neuter, or it sometimes takes the gender of the 
animate noun. An adjective often agrees in number and 
gender with the noun placed nearest to it, and may be con- 
sidered as understood with the rest. 

Relatives agree with the nouns to which they relate in 
gender and number only. 

The verb agrees with its nominative in number and person : 
as, nos legimus — we read. Two or more nominatives singular 
have generally a plural verb, though not always. When 
each of the nominatives is preceded by et or turn, the verb 
agrees with the last nominative. A nominative singular 
joined to an ablative by the preposition cum — with, has 
sometimes a plural verb. When the nominatives are of dif- 
ferent persons, the verb agrees with the first person in pre- 
ference to the second; and with the second person in prefer- 
ence to the third. 

A noun, following a neuter or passive verb, is put in the 
same case as the nominative of the verb, when such noun 
denotes the same person or thing as the nominative : as ; ego 
incedo regina — I walk a queen. 

Lesson 93. 

Nunc s - pL5 conscripti er ' rispL5 patres, ut 

Now conscript fathers, that 

| ar-avi-atum.d.sb.(l) tester [1] # * aC ' ^^vUtum.d.sb.d) (Jeprgcer ['J • • 

I-may-turn-from and may-deprecate 

a 6 me (1)M "^quandam, prope 4 justam 4 quserimoniam 
from me (a) certain, almost just complaint 

2 patrise ; (ipk>-« P sre) i er-e P i-e P tum.im. p erc ipite ^^ • • diligenter, 

1 of (my) x country j attend diligently, 

\ Sr-ivi-itum.(l) q USeg0 [1] • • od.pl.4 q Uae 

I-pray (you to the things) which 



SYNTAX. 249 

| (c)Sr-xi-ctum.sb.(I) di C am ? [1] • • et | ar-avi-atum.im. man( J a te &•% # ■ 

I-may-say, and commit 

id - pl4 ea penitus er,pK3 vestris 8,pl - 3 animis que- 

them inwardly to-your minds and 

ns ~ ntis,p,3 mentibus\ Etenim si ' patria, ""-'quae est 

understandings. For if (my) country, which is 

multo or - on, - 1 carior(c.) ## 3 mihi (,)## 6 mea 6 vita, si 

much dearer to-me (than) my life, if 

'cuncta 'Italia, si "-'omnia ei,land 'respublica 

all Italy, if all (the) republic 

|(quor-qui).gr-cutus- 8 um.d.sb.(l)] oquatur[ 3]»» CUrn « 6 me*! (,) * # M. 8 - 6 Tulli, 

speaks with me : M. Tullius, 

,d ' 4 quid I ag-o-ag-ere-egi-ac^m.(l) ao .jg ? [2] • • Jfg. 1^. (2)«« 

what are-you-doing? Whether x will you 

(patior-pati) | 8T-pamu-tum.&.(3) patieris ^ * * is#4 eiim 

buffer him 

(eo-ire) | ir-ivi-itum.in.(l) ^'^ ui.4 ^ uem ir- j i-tum.(4) C0 TIiperisti [2] * * 

to-depart, whom you-have-discovered 

(«m-e W e)| M u.in.(l) esse is-is.4 Jj 0stem . ui.4 q uem | (d)er-di-sum.(2) v J deg [2] •• 

to-be (an) enemy; whom you-see 

^m-««).e-ui.(3).s.4 futurum rpart.]»» s-cis.4 J ucem m2 belli ' 

(is) about-being (the) leader 'of (the) l war : 

uU quem (ti0 - ire) ' ir - si - sum -(» sentis [2J * * » ar - a vi-atum. P .in.(i) ex spectari 

whom you-perceive to-be-expected 

in m - p1 - 6 castris is - is ' pK2 hostmm or -° ris - 4 imperatorem, 

in (the) camp 'of (the) ' enemy (as) commander, (him). 

or-om.4 auc torem us_eris - 2 sceleris ce P s-ci P is.4 p r i nc ip em 

(the) author 'of (the) l wickedness (the) chief 

10 -ionis.2 con jurationis,(/) •* or -° ris - 4 evocatorem 

1 of (the) ' conspiracy, . (the) summoner (to war) 

• pL2 serve-rum et 8,pL2 perditorum is ~ is - pL2 civium, ut 

of-slaves and of-abandoned citizens, (so) that 

,(d)er^i-su m .p.sb.(l) v -J eatur [3]»» non (itt)er-isi- | issum.p.in.(4) em i gsug esge 

he-may-seem not to-have-been-sent-out 

ex bs " bis - 6 urbe abs 6 te/ 2) ** sed ( itl ) gr - isi - 1 ■■■-*>*■ immissus [part - ] * # 

from (the) city by you, but sent-in 

in b3 - bis - 4 urbem? Nonne i MVi - tun, - (3 >iraperabis w ** 

into (the) city? Will- 1 you not 'command 

ic - 4 hunc j (c)e««tum. P .m.(i) ( j llc j [ n "-pi-* yincula, 

him | to-be-led into bonds [to be imprisoned], 



250 SYNTAX. 

non (pio-pere) | Sr-pui-ptum.p.in.(l) r • &( J 

(will you) not (command him) to-be-hurried to 

rs-rtis.4 mor tem, non ' ^vi-atu m .p.in.(1) mactar i 

death, (will you) not (command him) to-be-slain 

m - 6 summo m,6 supplicio? idJ Quid tandem 

1 with (the) greatest punishment? What at-length 

|ir-ivi-itum.(l) impedit [3]«« 4 te ? (2) • • Jfg. ^^mOS' 

hinders you? Whether (is it) (the) customs 

or-oris.pl.2 ma j orum ? 

x of (our) 'ancestors? 

Lesson 94. 

Nunc, ut a me ; patres conscripti, quandani prope justam 
patriae quaerinioniarn detester ac deprecer; percipite quaeso, 
diligenter, quae dicam, et ea penitus animis vestris menti- 
busque mandate. Etenim, si mecum patria, quae mihi vita 
mea multo est carior, si cuncta Italia, si omnis respubiica 
loquatur : M. Tulli quid agis ? Tune eum quern esse hostem 
comperisti; quern ducem belli futurum vides; quern ex- 
spectari imperatorem in castris hostium sentis, auctorem 
sceleris, principem conjurationis, evocatorem servorum et 
civium perditorum, exire patieris, ut abs te non emissus ex 
urbe, sed immissus in urbem esse videatur ? Nonne hunc in 
vineula duci, non ad mortem rapi, non summo supplicio mac- 
tari imperabis? Quid tandem impedit te ? mosne majorum. 

Exercises on Lessons 93 and 94. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Impedio. Hostis. Vidisti. Dux.- Sentio. Exspec- 
tabam. Scelus. Princeps. Evocator. Perditus. Civis. 
Video. Etnitto. Urbs. Imperavit. Vinculum. Quaesivi. 
Dixit. Mandabo. Animus. Penitus. Mens. Patria 
Vita. Loquor. Egit. Detester. Deprecor. Justus. 
Quaerimonia. Percipite. 



SYNTAX. 251 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Ancestors. At length. To be slain. They see. About 
being. War. They perceived. I expect. Author. Chief. 
Wickedness. Slave. I may have seen. To be sent in. 
City. I did command. Leader, or general. They might 
say. For. Country. Dear. Life. To speak. To do. 
He suffers. He has departed. I discover. A certain. 
Almost. I attend. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Quern ducem belli vides. Exspectant imperatorem. Auc- 
torem sceleris exire patieris. . Abs te emissus est ex urbe. 
Immissus esse in urbem videatur. Nonne hunc in vincula 
duci imperabis. Quid impedit te. Percipite diligenter, quae 
dicam. Et ea animis vestris mandate. Patria, quae mihi 
vita est carior. Quid agis. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

What at length hinders you. Whether is it the custom 
of our ancestors. Whom you see is about being the leader 
of the war. They expect him in the camp. He is the com- 
mander of the enemy, and the author of the wickedness. 
He is the chief of the conspiracy, and the summoner of 
abandoned citizens. He was sent out of the city by you. 
Will you not command him to be imprisoned. Attend dili- 
gently to the things which I may say. Commit them to your 
minds. My country is dearer to me than life. Will you 
suffer him to depart. 

One noun governs another noun, signifying a different 
thing, in the genitive: as, pater patriae — the father of his 
country. 

Nouns, adjectives, adjective pronouns and adverbs, that 
denote a part or portion,. have the word denoting the whole 



252 SYNTAX. 

in the genitive: as, doctissimus Romanorum — the most 
learned (jnaii) of the Romans. 

An adjective qualifying a noun, either expressed or under- 
stood, referring to or limiting another noun, such limited 
noun is put in the genitive, and in English the relation is 
expressed by of, or on account of: as, homines expertes 
veritatis — men destitute of truth. Here homines is the 
noun, qualified by expertes, the adjective, and which agrees 
with it ; veritatis is the noun limited, or related to, and is 
in the genitive. 

Verbs of valuing govern the genitive of those words that 
denote the degree of valuing : as, magni cestimabat pecu- 
niam — he valued money much. 

W hen the business, office, lot, or property is understood 
with a word used with sum, such word is put in the geni- 
tive : as, hoc est prceceptoris — this is (the business') of the 
teacher. 

Mtsereor — / pity, miseresco — - / compassionate, with the 
impersonals, miseret — it pities me, posnitet — it repents me, 
pudet — it shames me, tcedet — it is annoying, tedious or 
disgusting to me, pi get — it disgusts or repents me, have the 
noun, on which the feeling expressed by the verb is exer- 
cised, in the genitive : as, miserescite regis — pity the king. 

Recordor — 1 remember or recall to mind, memini — I 
remember, reminiscor —I recollect, and obliviscor — I forget, 
have the word denoting the person or thing remembered or 
forgotten, either in the genitive or accusative : as, memini 
vivorum — 1 am mindful of the living ; Cinnam memini — 
1 remember Cinna. 

Verbs of accusing, convicting, condemning and acquitting, 
have the noun denoting the crime in the genitive : as, arguit 
me furti — he accuses me of theft. 

Verbs of admonishing have the word denoting that about 
which the admonition is given in the genitive : as, milites 
temporis monet — he admonishes the soldiers of the occasion. 

Refert — it concerns, and interest — -it concerns or interests, 



SYNTAX. 253 

have the word denoting the person or thing that it concerns 
or interests in the genitive : as, interest omnium recte 
fa-cere — it concerns all to do right. 

The name of a town in which any person or thing exists, 
or in which any thing is done, is put in the genitive when 
Buch name is of the first or second declension and singular 
number : as, habitat Mileti — he lives at Miletus. Sometimes, 
also, names of islands and countries have the genitive, like 
towns. The genitives domi — at home, militia and belli, in 
the sense of abroad, and humi — on the earth or ground, are 
used on the same principle as the names of towns. 

Adverbs of abundance and want are construed with the 
genitive : as, se gloria abunde adeptum — that he had attained 
enough of glory. 

A noun denoting the object, purpose or end to which the 
quality is directed, is put in the dative : as, jucundus 
amicis — agreeable to friends. 

Adjectives signifying pleasant, friendly, advantageous, 
like, fit, inclined, ready, equal, easy, clear, as likewise those 
adjectives of an opposite signification, with those denoting 
near; likewise many compounded with con, together with 
verbal adjectives in bills, have a dative : as, patri similis — 
like his father. 

Nouns have sometimes other nouns in the dative, when 
such other nouns denote end or object : as, caput Italics 
omni — the head to all Italy. 

Verbs denoting the end or object for which any thing is, 
or for which it is done, are put in the dative : as, tibi seris, 
tibi metis — you sow for yourself, you reap for yourself. 

Many verbs denoting to obey, serve, assist, command, 
resist, threaten, and to be angry, have the dative : as, mihi 
minabatur — he did threaten me. 

Many verbs signifying to trust, please, favor, with those 
of a contrary signification, have the dative : as, mihi place- 
bat — he pleased me. 
22 



254 SYNTAX. 

Many verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, ante, 
con, in, inter, ob, post, pra>, pro, sub, and super, have the 
dative : as, antecellere omnibus — to excel all. 

Yerbs compounded with satis, bene, and mall, have the 
dative : as, legibus satis fecit — he satisfied the laws. 

The future passive participle, in dus, has the dative of the 
agent: as, adhibenda est nobis diligentia — ive must use 
diligence. 

Sum — 1 am, in the sense of "to ha^e or possess," has a 
dative : as, sunt nobis mitia poma — we have mellow apples. 
Here nobis, the possessor, is in the dative, poma being the 
nominative or subject of the verb. 

Lesson 95. 

e-i 8 .pu Omnia ' <«*^««>e™p^«»-p-o»-«> agenda erant tpU] M 

All (things) were-to-be-done 

ar-aris.a Q^sm m - 6 uno us ' oris - 6 tempore ; mJ vexillum 

(by) Caesar at-one time; (the) standard 

I n ) )£r-sui-situm. P .(3).m.i p r0 p 0n endum, [part - ] •* 0(U quod 

to-be-displayed, which 

(tm»-«m) i e- U i. ( 2) erat [3] • . e-is.i i ns ig ne ^ quum ' gr - u5 - sb -< 2 > oporteret [3J ## 

was (the) sign, when it-behoved 

J (curr)fr-cucurri or curri-cur S um.p.in.(l) concurr ^ ^ m.pl.4 arma . n,J signUlll 

to-assemble-together to arms; (the) signal 

| ar-4«H-atum.p.(3).in.1 dandlim [part.] • • 6 {^ . es-iti S .pl.l m [][ tes 

to-be-given Svith (the) trumpet; (the) soldiers 

I ar-av.-atum.p.^.s.pl.l revocan( Ji [part.] •• ^ us-eris.6 Q p ere . ui.pl.l ^ 

to-be-recalled from work: (those) who 

(ed)er- | essi-essum.(5) p roCeSSe railt rpl ' 3] * * paull6 longillS, (ad.C.) ** 

had-proceeded a-little farther, 

6 causa er - eris - 2 aggeris ' £r " ivi or »*-*«*■ pe - 

by-reason-of materials-for-a-mound-or-rampart to- 

tendi [part] ° * ' gr -' ivi -' ,tum ^ ■W**" accersendi ; tpart - ] * • eipU acies 

be-sought (were) to-be-recalled; (the) line-of-b;ittle 

I er- X i-ctum. P .(3).i i DS truenda ; rpar, - ] •• «-it». P i.i m i]ites 

to-be-drawn-up; (the) soldiers 

I ar-avi^t UB ).d.(3). 8 .pi.i co } 10 rtandi ; tpart - ] •• " mA signum 

to-be-exhorted; (the) signai 



SYNTAX. 255 

ur^,*t Uffi . Pl (3).m.i. dan j um! [ P art.]»» 4 Magnam r8 " rtis - 4 partem 

to-be-given. (a) Great part 

"■•p 1 - 2 quarum eKpI - 2 rerum as " atis - ' brevitas T,s - oris * 2 temporis, 

of-which things (the) shortness x of (the) ' time, 

et as,1 successus et ^incursus is_ispL2 hostium 

and (the) approach and charge * of (the) * enemy 

I ir-ivi-i»um.(2) i ni p e diebat. [3J •* pU Duse eip,J res 

did-hinder. Two things 

(sum-esse) | e-ui.(2) Q^SiUt fpl ' 3 " 1 ** m ' 3 Subsidio ea P 1 - 3 jjg as-atis.pl.3 dif£_ 

were (an) aid (in) these diffi- 

cultatibus, *scientia atque GsJ usus es_itis,p1 - 2 niilitum, 
culties, (the) knowledge and experience * of (the) ' soldiers, 

quod ar " avi - 1 atum<p - (4) - s -P u exercitati [part - ] * * °*-°™-p»-e superiori- 
because being-experienced in- 

bus (c.) * * m - pL6 proeliis, c—wtf ■ «M» poterant [pl - 3] * * 

former battles, they-were-able 

se.pi.1 jpgj i (ib)er-ipsi-iptum.in.(i) p raesc ribere 3 sibi (3) * * MJ quid 

themselves to-prescribe to-themselves what 

| er-ui.sb.(l) p 0rteret PI • • *H /zm-fac<u S -sunwin.(l) fe^ nQn m ' m ^ s 

it-might-be-necessary to-be-done, not less 

commode, quam ' ^- ui - tu »>-p- in - doceri ab ****** aliis ; et 

properly, than to-be-taught by others; and 

quod ar - ar:sJ Caesar ar -> ui - itum ^vetuerat [3]0 * 8 - pU singulos 

because Caesar had-forbid each 

spU legatOS l(ced)er-es S i-es S um..n.(1) digce(iere ab US -eri s .6 Qpere ^^ 

lieutenant to-depart from (the) work and 

"*" singulis- io - ionis - pI - 6 legionibus, (/.)** nisi m ' p1 ' 6 castris 

from-each legion, unless (the) camp 

ir-ivi- | itum.p.(4).m.pl.6 mun ^-*g^[part.] •• 

having-been-fortified. 



Lesson 96. 

Caesari omnia uno tempore erant agenda; vexillum pro- 
ponendum ; quod erat insigne, quum ad arma concurri opor- 
teret; signum tuba dandum : ab opere revocandi milites : 
qui paullo longius, aggeris petendi causa processerant, accer- 
sendi ; acies instruenda ; milites cohortandi ; signum dan- 
dum. Quarum rerum magnam partem temporis ; brevitas, 



256 SYNTAX. 

et successus et incursus hostium impediebat. lis difneuUa- 
tibus duae res erant subsidio, scientia atque usus militum, 
quod superioribus proeliis exercitati, quid fieri oporteret, non 
minus commode ipsi sibi praescribere, quam ab aliis doceri, 
poterant; et quod ab opere singulisque legionibus singulos 
legatos Caesar discedere, nisi munitis castris vetuerat, 

Exercises on Lessons 95 and 96. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Tempus. Brevitas. Incursus. Impedivit. Subsidium. 
Exercitatus. Oportet. Praescribo. Doeeo. Opus. Dis- 
cedo. Munitus. Vetat. Egit. Vexillum. Proposuit. 
Insigne. Concurro. Tuba. Dederunt. Revocabo. Agger. 
Procedo. Instruo. Cohortavistis. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

I forbid. He has departed. Work. Shortness. The 
approach. They have hindered. Aid. Experience. Battle. 
He had prescribed. It is done. He might have been 
taught. They run or assemble together. They give. You 
might be recalled. We proceed. Farther. They exhorted. 
I did give. He has done or performed. The standard. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

lis erant subsidio. Milites superioribus proeliis exercitati. 
Ipsi sibi praescribere poterant. Ab opere Caesar discedere 
vetuerat. Caesari omnia erant agenda. Vexillum erat 
insigne. Ad arma concurrunt. Signum tuba dat. Milites 
ab opere revocavit. Qui paullo longius processerant. 
Milites cohortavit. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Caesar had forbid the lieutenants to depart. The camp 
having been fortified. The approach of the enemy did 
hinder. They were an aid in these difficulties. The soldiers 



SYNTAX. 257 

being experienced in former battles. They were able to pre- 
scribe to themselves. It might be necessary to be done. 
They are taught by others. They assemble together. He 
has recalled the soldiers from the work. The line of battle 
has been drawn up. He exhorted the soldiers. He gives 
the signal. All things were to be done at one time. 

An active verb has its object in the accusative : as, legatos 
ad eum mittunt — they send ambassadors to him. An active 
verb" with the accusative, often has either the genitive, da- 
tive, or ablative, to express some other additional relation. 

The impersonal verbs piget — it vexes me, or I am vexed, 
pudet — it shames, or I am ashamed, pcenitet — it repents me, 
or / repent, tsedet—^-it disgusts me, or I am disgusted, and 
miseret — it pities me, or I pity, have the person exercising 
such feeling in the accusative; they having, as before re- 
marked, the object on which such feeling is exercised in the 
genitive : as, eorum nos miseret — we pity them. Here nos, 
denoting the persons exercising the feeling, is in the accu- 
sative, and eorum, the object of such feeling, is in the 
genitive. 

Juvat — it pleases, delectat — it delights, fallit — it deceives, 
fugit — it escapes, praeterit — it passes by, and decet — it be- 
comes, with the compounds of decet, have the accusative : as, 
valde me juvat — it pleases me greatly. 

Verbs of naming, calling, choosing, rendering, reckoning, 
esteeming, constituting, have two accusatives when both 
denote the same person or thing : as, me consulem fecistls — 
you have made or constituted me consul. 

Verbs of asking, teaching, demanding, also celo — I conceal, 
have two accusatives, the one of the person, the other of the 
thing: as, rogo te nummos — I ask you for money. 

Some neuter verbs have a noun of like signification with 
themselves in the accusative: as, pugnare proelia — to fight 
battles ; vitam vivere — to live a life. 
22* 



258 SYNTAX. 

Many prepositions have the accusative; for which, see 
prepositions. 

Words denoting the duration of time, or extent of space, 
are generally put in the accusative : as, tres annos rnecum 
habitavit — he dwelt three years with me. 

The name of a town is put in the accusative, without a 
preposition, after verbs denoting motion or transfer to such 
town : as, Romam proficiscitur — he departs for Rome. 

Domus — house, in both numbers, rus — the country , in the 
singular, have the accusative in the same manner as names 
of towns : as, domum meam venit — he came to my house. 

The subject of the infinitive mood is put in the accusative, 
as has been already noticed in the explanatioa of moods and 
tenses, prefixed to the conjugations. 

Many prepositions have the ablative ; for which, see pre- 
positions. 

Many verbs, compounded with the prepositions a., ab, abs, 
de, e, ex, and super, have an ablative : as, abesse urbe — to be 
absent from the city. 

Opus and usus, when they signify need, have generally the 
ablative : as, dux nobis opus est — we need a leader. 

Dignus — worthy, indignus — unworthy, contentus — content, 
prseditus — endowed, and fretus — confiding or trusting to 
or in j have the ablative: as, dignus laude — worthy of 
praise. 

Utor — I use, fruor — I enjoy, fungor — I discharge or per- 
form, potior — / have obtained possession of or enjoy, and 
vescor — I am nourished or live on, have the ablative: as, 
fungitur officio — he performs his duty. 

Nouns denoting the cause, manner, means, or instrument, 
in connection with or modified by adjectives or verbs, have 
the ablative, without a preposition : as, silentio auditus est — 
he was heard in silence. 

Adjectives of plenty or want, as also verbs signifying 
abundance or destitution, have generally the ablative : as, 



SYNTAX. 259 

inops verbis — deficient in words ; urbs redundat militibus — 
the city is full of soldiers. 

The price of a thing is put in the ablative : as, vendidit 
auro patriam — lie sold his country for gold. 

A noun denoting the time at which, or in the duration of 
which time any thing is said to be, or exist, or to be done, is 
put in the ablative, without a preposition : as, hoc tempore — 
at this time. 

The name of a town in which any thing is, or is said to be 
done, is put in the ablative, if such name is of the third de- 
clension, or if it is in the plural number of any of the de- 
clensions : as, natus Tibure — born at Tibur. 

The name of a town, as also domus — house or home, humus 

— ground, and rus — the country, are generally put in the 
ablative, without a preposition, when motion or departure 
from is denoted : as, Brindisio profecti sumus — we departed 
from Brindisium. 

The comparative degree governs the ablative, when qudm 

— than, is omitted: as, nemo Romanorum fuit eloquentior 
Cicerone — none of the Romans was more eloquent than 
Cicero. 

The ablative is used to denote the degree or measure by 
which one thing surpasses, or by which one thing is sur- 
passed by another : as, Hibernia dimidio minor est quam 
Britannia — Ireland is a half less than Britain. 

When a noun, with a participle, is used as an inserted and 
independent clause, both are put in the ablative; this is 
termed the ablative absolute : as, Pythagoras quum, Tar- 
quinio, Superbo regnante, in Itah'am venisset — when Pytha- 
goras, Tarquinius, Superbus reigning, had come to Italy. 

As sum — I am, has no present participle, two nouns, or a 
noun and adjective, having sum understood, as in the present 
participle, and interposed as above, have no participle : as, 
adolescentulo duce — a youth (being') their leader. 



260 SYNTAX. 



Lesson 97. 



1 Ego (1) •* l (d)6r - di -* um<c3) respondebo [,J * # mpU pauca 

I will-reply (in a) few (words> 

* c - p1 - 3 his P L3 sanctissimis (*.)*• «-°ci 8 .oi.3 V0C i DUS 

to-these most-sacred words 

ei.2 and 2 re ip U blicse, et ns - ntis -P L3 mentibus °' inis p '- 2 hominum, 

1 of (the) 'republic, and 'to (the) l minds of-men, 

qui ' (0i«««».(0 sentiunt rpI - 3] * * id - 4 idem. Si 

who feel (in the) same (manner). If 

1 ego (1) * * ' ar - avi - atum - sb -( 2 ) j udicarem [ 1] * * oc * 4 hoc 

I should-judge this 

8 - 4 optimum (bonus, s. ) * * (d««o.a^». | ctum. f actu? N • • 

best to-be-done, 

8 - p1 - 5 conscripti er-tm.pi.5 p atres ^ 4 Catilinam 

conscript fathers, (that) Catiline 

I ar-avi-atu m . P .in.(i) mu i tar i rs " rtis - 6 morte ; non 

be-punished with-death ; I- 1 should not 

(d -dare).ar-|dedi-datum.sb.(5) dedissem[ l]»« 4 usuram ■^"nnhig 2 h()rge 

1 have-given (the) use of-one hour 

ad I (v)sr-xi-c.u m .4 yivendum Cser - ] * * ,e ' 3 isti or -° ris - 3 gladiatori. 

for living to-this gladiator. 

Etenim si ,,pU summi r,pU viri, et s,pL1 clarissimi(s.)*" 

For if (the) highest men (in rank), and most-celebrated 

.s-is.pl. l c ' veg non m0( J non "-!avi-atum.(4) contam - n - mnt)[P 1.3]»» 

citizens 'have not only not Contaminated 

sed etiam ar ~ > a *- atum -< 4 > honestarunt [pK3] ■ * 
(themselves), but even have-honored 

P i.4 se (3).o is-inis.6 sangu - ne ■■aSaturnini, e t 8 ' pK2 Gracchorum, 
themselves 'by (the) 'blood of-Saturninus, and * of (the) ' Gracchi, 
et 8,2 Flacci et es_ium - pL2 complurium 8,pL2 superiorum ; 

and of-Flaccus and of-many (men) of-superior 

Certe nOn ' (^-eri).er-itus-sum.d.(n.2, verendum emt [3] •• 

(rank); certainly it-'was not * to-be-feared 

3 mihi/ 1} •* ne ,,u quid 2 invidise ' ar - avi - atum - sb < 2) redundaret [3] •• 

by-me, lest any (thing) of-odiuui would-redound 

3 mihi (l) ** in as - a,is4 posteritatem ; ic - 6 hoc 6 parricida is - is,p '- 2 ci vium 
to-me into posterity, this parricide of-citizens 

(ido-icere).er-*ci- 1 cctum. P .(4).s.6 interfecto. tpart,] •* Qu6d si eaJ ea 

being-slain. Therefore if | it [this 



SYNTAX. 261 

I ( d)er^i-sum.sb.(2) i mp en deret l3] * * 3 mihi < ]) ■ • 

odium] might-threaten me 

niaxime,(W.s.)** tameu (««^)* I »L».fni W •'• semper ic6 hoc 

very-greatly, yet I-have-been always of-this 

86 amnio, ut ' ar - a -- atum - sb -( 2 > putarem [1] ** invidiam 

mind, that I-thought odium 

(pario-parere).er-pepert-/3arrtumor|yarmm.p.(4).4^^pi. am [part.]»« as - utis - 6 yivf nf p ( f*)* % 

produced by-virtue 

4 gloriam non 4 invidiam. Quamquam 

(was) glory not odium. Although 

(sru 1 -e S se)|e-ui.(l) sunt [pl.3J«« ..pl.l n0 nnulli ' m ic.6 h oc o-ini^6 or dine, 

there-are some in this order 

uL1 qui aut non 

[assembly of the senate], who either *may not 

| (d)er-di-sum.sb.(l) y^eailt [pl,3] * * id,pI ' 4 ea od,pI * 4 QUS6 

see those (things) which 

I er-ui.(i) i mm i n ent, Cp, - 3] •• aut ' «**""fc-0) dissimulent [pK3]# * 

impend, or may-dissemble 

id.pl.4 ea? od.p!.4 ^ uge | (d)er-di-su m .(l) y^ent . [pl.3] •• ui.l ^J 

those (things), which they-see; who 

er- | ui-itum or tum.(4) a l uemn t W-fl • • ei.4 gpem 2 CatillliaB 

hare-nourished (the) hope of-Catiline 

i^is.pi.6 mollibus pL6 sententiis ; que- ar " ' avi - atum -( 4 > corrobo- 

by-mild opinions, and have- 

boraverunt Cpl ' 3 - 1 * * (nascor-nasci) I er-natus-sum.d.(l).ens-entis.4 naSCentem [part *- 1 * * 

strengthened (the) growing 

io-ionis.4 CO njurationem-(/.) *• non l ■"»•*-* credendo. [ger>;i •• 

conspiracy 1 by not Relieving (it). 



Lesson 98. 

His ego sanctissimis reipublicae vocibus, et eorum honii- 
num, qui idem sentiunt, mentibus, pauca respondebo. Ego 
si hoc optimum factu judicarem, patres conscripti, Catilinam 
morte multari ; unius usuram horae gladiatori isti ad viven- 
dum non dedissem. Etenim, si summi viri, et clarissimi 
cives, Saturnini, et G-racchorum et Flacci, et superiorum 
complurium sanguine non modo se non contaniinarunt, sed 
etiam honestarunt; certe mihi verendum non erat, ne quid, 



262 SYNTAX. 

hoc parricida civium interfecto, invidiae mihi in posteritatem 
redundaret. Quodsi ea mihi maxim e impenderet : tamen 
hoc animo semper fui, ut invidiam virtute partam, gloriam, 
non invidiam putarem. Quamquam nonnulli sunt in hoc 
ordine, qui aut ea, quae imminent, non videant; aut ea, quae 
vident, dissimulent; qui spem Catilinae mollibus sententiis 
aluerunt, conjurationemque nascentem non credendo corro- 
boraverunt. 

Exercises on Lessons 97 and 98. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Nonnullus. Immineo. Dissimulo. Spes. Mollis. Aluit. 
Nascitur. Credo. Impendet. Semper.- Invidiam. Pu- 
tavi. Clarissimus. Sanguis. Contamino. Honestavit. 
Vereor. Interficio. Sanctus. Vox. Sentio. Mens. 
Bespondebam. Judicabo. Multo. Hora. Vixit. Dedi. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Produced. Although. I have seen. It impends. They 
dissemble. I see. To nourish. Mild or soft. Opinions. 
He has strengthened. I believe. He has honored. Blood. 
Certainly. I fear. Odium. It redounds. He has been 
slain. Very greatly. Always. I have thought. Republic. 
I feel. I will judge. He is punished. He lived. He 
replies. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Nonnulli sunt, qui non videant. Qui ea, quae vident 
dissimulent. Spem Catilinaa aluerunt, conjurationemque 
corroboraverunt. Quod si ea mihi impenderet. Hoc animo 
sum. Summi et clarissimi cives sunt. Sanguine se non 
contaminarunt. Mihi verendum non erat, ne quid invidiae 
mihi redundaret. His pauca respondebo. Unius usuram 
horae ad vivendum non dedissem. 



SYNTAX. 263 

English sentences to be translated into Latin. 

Some in this assembly, who may not see those things, 
which impend. They dissemble those things, which they 
see. They nourish the hope of Catiline by their mild 
opinions. They strengthen the growing conspiracy by not 
believing it. It was to be feared that odium would redound 
to me. I have always been of this opinion. Who feel in 
the same manner. I judge this best to be done. I should 
not have given the use of one hour. It certainly is not to 
be feared by me. 

The present subjunctive is sometimes used to express a 
command, request, or permission : as, ne me attingas — do 
not touch me. The perfect subjunctive is likewise occa- 
sionally used in this manner, and even the pluperfect sub- 
junctive. 

Participles govern the same cases as their verb : as, fa- 
ventes rebus — favoring the affair. 

The participle in dus denotes necessity or propriety, when 
it agrees with the subject or nominative of a sentence : as, 
delenda est Carthago — Carthage must be destroyed. 

Gerunds govern the same cases as their verbs : as, par- 
cendo victis — by sparing the conquered. 

The gerund of an active verb, governing an accusative, 
may be changed into the participle in dus; the object or 
accusative governed by the gerund is then put in the same 
case as the gerund was, and the participle in dus agrees with 
this object: as, consilium scribendi epistolam — the design 
of writing a letter, may be thus expressed by the participle 
in dus : consilium scribendm epistolce — the design of a letter 
to be written. 

Supines govern the same case as their verb : as, non 
Graiis servitum matribus ibo — I shall not go a serving 
Grecian matrons. 



264 SYNTAX. 

Lesson 99. 

pU6 Necessariis ei ' p16 rebus ar ' avi - ' atum -P- (4) - p1 - 6 imperatis, lpaH - ] ** 

(The) necessary things being-commanded, 

r ' risJ Caesar ad • «**».fl>*pi.« cohortandos fpart ' ] •• 

Caesar for (the purpose of) encouraging 

es-itis.4 rnilif pa (curro-currere)re- | cucurn and curri-cursum.(4) ^pp-i-i-pr'Tf [3] •• 

(the) soldiers ran 

in "- rtis - 4 partem, uxA quam r - rtis - 1 sors 

to (that) part, which chance 

(fero-ferre)- | tuli-latu».(4) ^ t ulit, [3J ° * et '*' ' """^ devemt [3] * # ad 

presented, and came ■ to 

4 decimam io - ionis - 4 legion em, (/.)** ar ~ avl ~ ' ah,m - d -< 4) cobor- 

(the) 1 tenth legion, he- 

tatus est [3]# * efr - itis - pl - 4 milites non or -° ris - 6 longiore 

exhorted (the) soldiers * with not (a) 'longer 

io-ionis.6 oratione, (/.)•• quam uti ' c«n)er-tinui-tentu m .sb.<2) ret ; ne _ 

speech, than that they-should- 

rerit [pi-3] • • 4 memoriam 2 suae 2 pristinae us - utis - 2 virtutis, (/.) ° * 

retain (the) memory of-their former valor, 

neu ' *r-avi-atum.p.sb. ( 2) perturbarentur t pK3] •• s - 6 animo que- 

nor should-they-be-disturbed in-mind and 

fortiter ' m^™-t™*™^&) sustinerent [pK3J * * 

1 should bravely 1 sustain 

Qs - 4 impetum is " is - pI2 h ostium-; et quod is - is - pU hostes 

(the} attack ' of (the) ' enemy; and because (the) enemy * were 

non longius (sum - essc) ' e " ui(2) aberant, CpU] * * quam 

not farther * distant, than 

quo nU telum (sum " esse) ' e " ui ' sb ' (2) posset [3] * # 

whither (a) dart might 

(jicio-jicere) | er-jeci-jectum.p.in.(l) adlicl **" ' ded *- atum -( 4 > dedit [3] * * 

be-cast, he-gave 

mA signum m ' 2 proelii ' ctt)er-isi-i»suin.p.(3> con imittendi [part] •• 

(the) signal | of-battle to-be-engaged [for 

atque (fi^cor-fici S ci)er^ecta^ n i n .d.(4).s.l p ro f ec t US [P"t.] •• J tem 

battle] ; and having-departed likewise 

in 4 alteram rs " rtis - 4 partem, 6 causa 

to another part (of the army), l for (the) ' purpose 

I ar-avi-atum.2 cobortandi,^ •* <rr)6r " l rri - r8um -< 4 > occurrit [3J • * 

of-exhorting he- met (the 



SYNTAX. 265 

f ir-*vi-atum.(l).n.-ntis.pl.3 p U g Dan tibuS. [i> " t] * * Tanta 

Boldiers) fighting. So-great 

(««m^).e-«ui.(4)ftu t[ 3]" aMtisl exiguitas u ^ ris ' 2 teinporis, que- 

was (the) smallness of-time and 

tani "- 1 paratus ^ animus is " is - pU hostiunv ad 

ao prepared (was) (the) mind * of (the) l enemy for 

I ir-avi^tum.4 dimicandum/ ser - ] •• ut us " oris - 1 tempus 

fighting, that time 

^aa-«e).-|ul..b.(4) ( J e f uer J t [3]«« non mQ fo &( J e-is.pl.4 Jngjgnfa 

was-wanting not only for (the) ensigns 

I ar-avi-ai U m.(3). P i.4 acconimodanda, [part - ] * * sed etiam 
(of distinction) to-be-fixed-on, but even 

ad pU galeas ' gr - Wum - (3) - pl - 4 induendas, iP art -i ## que- 

for (the) helmets to-be-put-on, and 

m - pU tegmenta '^ gr - xi - ctum -^-P u detrahenda Cpart - ] ** 

(the) coverings to-be-drawn-off 

■• pK3 scutis\ In ^""quam rs - rtis - 4 partem uisl quisque 

'froin (the) x shields. Into what part every-one 

Qb - 6 casu ir " I i - tum - (,) devenit [31 * * ab u ~> ris - 6 opere, que- 

by-chance came from (his) work, | and 

od - pU quae- m - pU prima m,p1 - 4 signa 

what first standards [and the first standards] 

(icio-icere)er- | exi-ct.nn.(4) conS p ex i t W * # ""I M-»tum.(4) const i t i t [3J • • ^ 

he-beheld he-stood at 

"•^haec, ne ' »*■**—*■« dimitteret [3] * * "^"^ tempus 

them, lest he-might-let-pass-by (the) time 

1 ar-avi-*.um.2 p Ugnan( Ji fe-0 •• i n I ««ivi-*itmn.6 q U ^ ren a ^ • • 

of-fighting in-seeking 

"•P u SUOS. 

his (comrades). 

Lesson 100. 

Caesar necessariis rebus imperatis, ad cohortandos milites, 
quam in partem sors obtulit decucurrit; et ad legionem de- 
cimam devenit. Milites non longiore oratione est cohortatus, 
quam uti suae pristinae virtutis memoriam retinerent, neu 
perturbarentur animo, bostiumque impetum fortiter sustine- 
rent; et qu6d non longius hostes aberant, quam qu6 telum 
adjici posset; proelii committendi signum dedit : atque item 
23 



266 SYNTAX. 

in alteram partem eohortandi causa profectus, pugnantibus 
occurrit. Temporis tanta fuit exiguitas, hostiumque tarn 
paratus ad dimicandura animus, ut, non mod6, ad insignia 
accommodanda, sed etiam ad galeas induendas, scutisque 
tegmenta detrahenda, tempus defuerit. Quam quisque in 
partem ab opere casu devenit, quaeque prima signa conspexit, 
ad hasc constitit, ne, in quaerendo suos, pugnandi tempus 
dimitteret. 

Exercises on Lessons 99 and 100. 

Latin words to be translated into English. 

Exi-guitas. Tantus. Paratus. Dimicaverunt. Animus. 

Accommodabo. Galea. Induo. Scutum. Detraho. De- 
sum. Opus. Casus. Signum. Conspicio. Quaero. Pug- 

naverunt. Tempus. Necessarius. Imperavit. Sors. 

Obfero. Decurrunt. Devenio. Cohortor. Pristinus. 

Retinerem. Perturbo. Sustineo. Adjicio. Commisit. 
Dant. Pugnabo. 

English words to be translated into Latin. 

Work. Standards. To behold. He sought. Likewise. 
They had exhorted. They meet or run together. Prepared. 
They will fight. It was wanting. Even. Coverings. To 
put on. It was drawn off. Chance. Shields. Speech. 
He may have retained. Former or ancient. To disturb. 
Attack. To be distant. Dart. He has cast. He departed. 
He may have commanded. He encourages. To present. 

Latin sentences to be translated into English. 

Temporis exiguitas. Hostium paratus ad dimicandum 
animus. Ad galeas induendas tempus defuerit. Scutis teg- 
menta detraxerunt. Ab opere devenit. Signa conspexit. 
Ne pugnandi tempus dimitteret. Caesar ad cohortandos 
milites decucurrit. Milites oratione est cohortatus. Hos- 
tium impetum fortiter sustinerent. Non longius, quam quo 



PROSODY. 267 

telum adjici posset. Signum dat. In alteram partem pro- 
fectus est. Pugnantibus occurrit. 

English sentences to be translated into Latin, 

The first standard he beheld. He might let the time of 
fighting pass by. He seeks his comrades. For the purpose 
of exhorting. So prepared were the minds of the enemy 
for fighting. Time was wanting for the ensigns of distinction 
tc be fixed on. They drew off the coverings from the shields. 
TLto whatever part he came. The memory of their ancient 
valor. They were disturbed in mind. They bravely sus- 
tained the attack. He gave the signal for battle. He ran 
to that part which chance presented. 



PROSODY. 

To give the rules of Prosody would scarcely be consistent 
with this first or elementary course ; it may be proper, how- 
ever, to observe that Latin verses are formed on quite dif- 
ferent principles from English verses. Latin verse has no 
rhyme, nor does the structure thereof depend on accented 
or unaccented syllables; but is altogether dependent on a 
certain or regular succession of long and short syllables. 

The length of time employed in pronouncing a syllable is 
called the quantity of such syllable. A long syllable is con- 
sidered as being equal in duration to two short syllables. 
There are a great many rules for determining the quantity 
of a syllable. It may only be proper here to state two or 
three of the most general rules ; as, a vowel before another 
vowel, or before a diphthong, is short: as, meus — my; so, 
also, when h is interposed between two vowels, the first vowel 
is short: as, nihil — nothing. Diphthongs are long: as, 



268 PROSODY. 

durum — gold. A vowel before two consonants, or before a 
double consonant, is long: as, helium — war. 

Two or more syllables constitute a foot, of which there are 
many and various kinds, and each has its peculiar denomina- 
tion ; as the spondee, consisting of two long syllables : as, 
fundunt — they pour out; the dactyl, consisting of one long 
and two short syllables : as, corpora — bodies. These two 
feet, the spondee and dactyl, are the feet used in epic or 
heroic verse. 

All verses are composed of a certain number of feet, and 
the verses thus formed are of various kinds, and have different 
denominations : as the hexameter, or epic or heroic verse, 
which consists of six feet, those feet being dactyls and spon- 
dees. The fifth foot, reckoning from the commencement of 
the line, is a dactyl, and the sixth or last a spondee. Th& 
first, second, third and fourth foot may be either a dactyl or 
spondee : as, 

Ltidere | quae veTpieni cala/Jino per"pmisit ;Tp gresti. 
Dact. 1 spon. 2 dact. 3 spon. 4 dact. 5 spon. 6. 

"he permits (me) to play what I will on my rural reed." 



LETTERS. 269 



SECOND, OR SUPPLEMENTARY COURSE. 



[This Second or Supplementary Course contains all that was purposely omitted 
in the First or Elementary Course ; thereby making this Grammar complete in all 
respects. It is so arranged as to he easily referred to. The Lessons are here 
omitted; for they would swell the Grammar to too great and inconvenient a size. 
Moreover, after the experience the learner has obtained in the Lessons of the Ele- 
mentary Course, he can readily help himself by the aid of the numerous Inter- 
linear Translations that have been published.] 



LETTERS. (K13.*) 

1. Consonants have in general the same sound both in Latin 
and English. 

2. C was probably always sounded like k by the Romans. C fol- 
lowed by i has often the sound of sh. Ch has always the sound of h, 

3. G had probably always its hard sound among the Romans. 

4. S was probably in all cases pronounced sharp by the Romans. 

5. T had always its proper sound of t with the Romans, and was 
never sounded like sh before i followed by a vowel, as in modern 
times. 

6. X commencing a syllable sounds like z; but ending it, like Jcs. 

7. There are altogether thirteen diphthongs : namely, ae, ai, au, 
ei, eu, oe, oi, ua, ue, ui, uo, uu, and yi. 

8. AE and oe are sounded like e. These two diphthongs are 
generally written together, as ce, ce. 

9. EL when a diphthong, is generally sounded like i. 

10. A U is pronounced like a in law. 

11. The diphthong eu has the sound of u in tube, when it is a 
diphthong. 

* E. 13 denotes the page of the Elementary Courpe. 

23* 



270 NOUNS — GENDER. 

12. The u in the diphthongs ua, ue, ui, uo, uu, is sounded like w 
in lingua, as if written lingwa. These are always used as diphthongs 
after q sounded like k ; as equus, as if written ekwus. They are 
also generally diphthongs after g and s. 

13. The diaresis (••) placed over a vowel denotes that such vowel 
is to be sounded by itself, and does not form part of a diphthong. 

NOUNS. (E. 11.) 

GENDER. 

1. Besides the gender determined by the last syllable of each de- 
clension, there are some general rules. 

2. Masculines. — Names of men and male beings are masculine; 
also, the names of winds, rivers, and months ; the masculine nouns 
ventus, vt'm<\, fluvius, river, and mensis, month, being understood. 

3. The names of rivers in a, of the first declension, are used 
either in the masculine or feminine gender. The rivers Styx and 
Lethe are feminine. 

4. The names of mountains, when the word mons, mountain, is 
used with them, are masculine ; but when it is not, the genders of 
names of mountains are determined by their terminations ; as, alia 
JEtna. 

5. Feminines. — Names of women and female beings are femi- 
nine ; also, most of the names of trees, countries, towns, islands, 
ships, plants, poems, and gems, are feminine ; because the words 
arbor, tree, terra, land, urbs, town, insula, island, navis, ship, planta, 
plant, fabula, fable, and gemma, gem, are feminine. 

6. Exceptions. — The names of trees and shrubs ending in er, of 
the third declension, are neuter ; to which may also be added robur 
and baccar. Oleaster and pinaster of the second declension, also styrax 
and unedo of the third, are masculine ; likewise many small plants 
and shrubs in us, of the second declension. Names of towns in i, 
plural, are masculine; also, Trusino Hippo, Narbo, Sulmo, Tunes, 
Taras, and Canopus. Names of countries and islands in um, of the 
second declension, are neuter. Names of towns in um or on of 
the second declension, likewise those in e or ur of the third declen- 
sion, indeclinable names in % and y, with some barbarous names, are 
neuter. Some few names of gems in us, of the second declension, 
are masculine. 

7. Common Gender. — Nouns that may be used either in the 
masculine or feminine gender are called common ; as the following 
nouns, which when males take a masculine adjective ; when females, 
a feminine adjective : — 



NOUNS FIRST DECLENSION. 271 

Adolescens, a youth. Exsul, an exile. Palumbes, a wood pig- 

Affinis, a relative by Grus, a crane. Parens, a parent, [eon 

marriage. Hospes, a guest, host. Par, a mate. 

Ales, a bird. Hostis, an enemy. Praeses, a president. 

Antistes, a chief priest. Index, an informer. Prgesul, a chief priest. 

Auctor, an author. Infans, an infant. Princeps, a prince oi 

Augur, an augur. Interpres. an interpre- princess. 

Bos, an ox or cow. Judex, ajudge. [ter. Serpens, a serpent. 

Canis, a dog. Juvenis, a youth. Sacerdos, a priest or 

Civis, a citizen. Martyr, a martyr. priestess. 

Comes, a companion. Miles, a soldier. Satelles, a life-guard. 

Conjux, a spouse. Municeps, a burgess. Sus, a swine. 

Consors, a consort. Mus, a mouse. Testis, a witness. 

Conviva, a guest. Nemo, nobody. Vates, a prophet. 

Custos, a keeper. Obses, a hostage. Verna. a slave. 

Dux, a leader. Patruclis, a cousin. Vindex, an avenger. 

8. Neuters. — All indeclinable nouns, as gummi, pascha, sinapi, 
are neuter. Words used without any reference to their meaning 
are neuter ; as, pater est dissyllabum, pater is a dissyllabic (word). 
The names of the letters of the alphabet are neuter ; though some- 
times feminine — litter a being understood 

FIRST DECLENSION. (E. 14.) 
Exceptions in Declension. 

1. Genitive Singular. — An old form of the genitive singular in as 
is still retained in familia, when placed after the word pater, mater, 
filius, or filia ; as, matrisfamilias. Poets sometimes also formed the 
genitive singular in ai; as, aula, gen. aulai. 

2. Genitive Plural. — Poets form the genitive plural of patronymics 
in es, of several compounds of cola and gena, and of some names of 
nations, in urn, in place of arum; as, JE?ieadum, terrigenum. In a 
similar manner, amphorum, drachmum, were used, even in prose, for 
amphorarum, drachmarum. 

3. Dative and Ablative Plural. — The following words have the dative 
and ablative plural in abus, instead of is, especially when it is re- 
quired to distinguish them from masculines having is in the dative 
and ablative plural of the second declension ; as, anima, the soul ; 
dea, a goddess; filia, a daughter; equa, a mare; mula, a mule; 
asina, a she ass ; nata, a daughter. 

4. Exceptions in Gender. — Though nouns of the first declension are 
properly feminine, yet there are some exceptions. In accordance with 
the general rules above given, all names of men and their offices, as 
Sulla, po'eta, a poet, nauta, a sailor, are masculine (see E. 14, § 2, 



272 NOUNS — SECOND DECLENSION. 

and for rivers, &c, E. 14, J 3). Hadria, the Adriatic Sea, is masculine; 
sometimes, also, dama, a fallow-deer, and talpa, a mole. 

GREEK NOUNS. 

5. Nouns in as and es, masculine, and e, feminine, also sometimes a, 
are Greek. Greek nouns in a are declined like Stella; though they 
sometimes have an in the accusative singular, in place of am. 

6. Greek nouns in as, es, and e, are thus declined : — 
Penelope, Penelope. Anchises, Anchises. JEneas, iEneas. 

N. Penelop-e, N. Anchis-es, N. iEne-as, 

G. Penelop-es, G. Anchis-ae, G. iEne-ae, 

D. Penelop-e, D. Anchis-ae, D- iEne-ae, 

A. Penelop-en, A. Anchis-en, also am, A. iEne-am or an, 

V. Penelop-e, V. Anchis-e or a, V. JEne-a, 

A. Penelop-e. A. Anchis-a or e. A. iEne-a. 

Greek nouns of the first declension admitting of a plural are de- 
clined like Stella, in that number. 

SECOND DECLENSION. (E. 21.) 

1. The few nouns declined like puer are the compounds of gero 
emdfero; as, armiger, an armour-bearer; Lucifer, the Morning Star ; 
also, adulter, an adulterer ; Celtiber, a Celtibrian ; Iber, a Spaniard ; 
Liber, Bacchus; liheri (pi.), children; socer, a father-in-law ; gener, 
a son-in-law ; Vesper, the Evening Star ; presbyter, an elder. Some- 
times also Mulciber, Vulcan, has this form. 

Exceptions in Declension. 

2. Genitive Singular. — When the genitive singular ends in n, it is 
often contracted into i. 

3. Vocative Singular. — Proper names in ius omit e in the vocative; 
as, Virgilius, Virgili ; but Pius has Pie. Filius, a son, and genius, a 
guardian angel, have fili and geni. All other nouns in ius, including 
patrials derived from proper names, have their vocative regularly ic. 

4. Genitive Plural. — The genitive plural of some nouns, particu- 
larly those denoting value, or money, weight, and measure, com- 
monly have the genitive plural in urn, in place of orum. 

5. Deus, a god, is thus declined : — 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Deus. N. Dii or di or dei, 

G. Dei, G. D-eorum, 

D. Deo, D. Diis or dis or deis, 

A. Deum, A. Deos, 

V. Deus, V. Dii or di or dei, 

A. Deo. A. Diis or dis or deis. 



NOUNS — SECOND DECLENSION. 273 

6. Jesus, the name of our Saviour, has um in the accusative, but 
u in all the other oblique cases. 

Exceptions in Gender. 

7. Greek nouns in odus and metros, and their compounds, are 
feminine ; as, synodus, an assembly ; diametros, a diameter. 

8. Names of countries, towns, trees, &c, are feminine by general 
rule (see E. 14, \ 5). The following names of plants, howe^er> ar* 
masculine : — 

Acanthus, bear's foot. Dumus, a bramble. Rhamnos, black thorn. 
Amaranthus, the ama- Ebulus, an elder. Rubus, a blackb. bush, 

ranth. Helleborus, hellebore. Tribulus, a caltrop. 

Asparagus, asparagus. Intubus, endive. And sometimes, also, 

Calamus, a reed. Juncus, a bulrush. Amaracus, marjorum. 

Carduus, a thistle. Raphanus, a radish. Cytisus, snail-clover. 

Often the name of a tree in us, feminine, has a form in um, neuter, 
to denote the fruit of that tree ; as, pomus, pomum. 

The following names of gems are likewise masculine : beryllus, a 
beryl; carbunculus, a carbuncle; chrysoprasus, chrysoprase ; opalus, 
opal ; likewise pyropus, gold bronze. But chrysolithus, chrysolite, 
and smaragdus, an emerald, are doubtful. 

Canopus, pontus, Hellespontus, Isthmus, with plural names in i of 
countries and towns, are masculine. But Abydus is doubtful. 

Names of trees and plants in um are generally neuter ; as are also 
the names of countries and towns in um, or in a, plural. 

9. Names of females in um are feminine (E 14, §5). 

10. The following nouns in us and os are feminine : — 
Abyssus, a bottomless Dialectos, a dialect. Paragraphus, a para* 

pit. Diphthongus, a diph- graph. 

Alvus, the belly. thong. Pharus (os), a light- 

Antidotus, an antidote. Domus, a house, or house. 
Arctos(us), the North- home. Plinthus, the base of a 

ern Bear. Eremus, a desert. column. 

Carbasus, fine flax, or Humus, the ground. Vannus, a winnowing- 

a sail, or linen. Miltos, vermilion. fan. 

11. The following are doubtful, though generally masculine ; 
balanus, a date ; barbitos, a lute ; grossus, an unripe fig ; pampinu\ 
a vine-leaf; phaselus, a light vessel. 

Atomus, an atom, and calus, a distaff, are doubtful, but generally 
feminine. 

Pelagus, the sea, and virus, poison, are neuter. Vulgus } the com- 
mon people, is neuter, seldom masculine. 



274 



NOUNS ■ 



■THIRD DECLENSION. 



12. Greek nouns of the second declension are thus declined : — 
Androgeos (masc.) ; Delos (fern.) ; barbiton, a lyre (neut.). 



Singular. 

N. Androge-os, 

G. Androge-o or i, 

D. Androge-o, 

A. Androge-o or on, 

V. Androge-os, 

A. Androge-o. 



Singular. Singular. 

N.. Del-os, JV. Barbit-on, 

G. Del-i, G. Barbit-i, 

D. Del-o, D. Barbit-o, 

A. Del-on or um, A. Barbit-on, 

V. Del-e, V. Barbit-on, 

A. Del-o. A. Barbit-o. 

13. The plurals of Greek nouns in os are declined like dominus; 
the plurals of those in on, like regnum. The plurals of nouns in os 
sometimes end in 02, in the nominative. 

14. Some nouns in os, in early writers, had a genitive in u. 

15. Greek proper names in eus are declined like dominus ; but the 
vocative ends in eu. Panthus is sometimes Panthu in the vocative. 

16. Sometimes a genitive plural occurs in on, in place of orum. 

THIRD DECLENSION. (E. 29.) 

GREEK NOUNS. OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

1. In the following table the entire word is given in the nomina- 
tive, singular and plural ; but only the terminations in the genitive, 
dative, accusative, vocative, and ablative : — 



Nom. 


Gen. 


Dat. 


Ace. 


Voc. 


Abl. 


s. Lamp-as, 


-adis or -ados, 


-adi, 


-adem or -ada, 


-as, 


-ade. 


jo/.Lamp-ades 


,-adum, 


adibus, 


-ades or -adas, 


-ades, 


-adibus. 


s. Her-os, 


-ois, 


-oi, 


-oem or -ou, 


-OS, 


-oe. 


pi. Her-oes, 


-oum, 


-oibus, 


-oes or -oas, 


-oes, 


-oibus. 


s. Tro-as, 


-adis or -ados, 

r 


-adi, 
-adibus 


-adem or -ada, 


-as, 


-ade. 

-adibus 


jt>Z.Tro-ades, 


-adum, 4 


or -asi 
or -asin, 


-ades or -adas, 


-ades, 


or -asi 
or -asin. 


s. Chel-ys, 


-yis or -yos, 
-is 
or 


-yi> 


-ym or -yn, 


-y> 


-yeor-y. 


s. Poes-is, -1 


-h 


-im or -in, 


-*, 


-i. 


1 


-ios or -eos, 










f 


-is or -ei 




-em 


-es 


-e 


9. Achill-es, -{ 


or 


-i. 


or 


or 


cr 


1 


-i or -eos, 




-ea or -en, 


-©i 


-i. 


s. Orph-eus, 


-eos or -ei, 


-ei, 


-ea, 


-eu, 


-eo. 


s. A-er, 


-eris, 


-eri, 


-era, 


-er, 


-ere. 


s. Dld-o, 


-us or -nis, 


-o or -oni 


, -o or onem, 


-o, 


-o or one. 


s. Phyll-is, 


-idis or -idos, 


-idi, 


-idem or-ida, 
f -idem 


-i or-is 


,-ide. 


«. Par-is, 


-idis or -idos, 


-idi, j 


or 
[ -idim or -idin, 


'h 


-ide. 



NOUNS — THIRD DECLENSION. 275 

FORMATION OF THE GENITIVE SINGULAR. 

2. The formation of the genitive singular is subject to so many 
rules, with such numerous exceptions, that it would seem best to 
learn this from the dictionary, and from observation of particular 
oases. Yet some general rules may be stated. 

3. Nouns in a have atis in the genitive singular. Those in e 
change e into is ; those in i are generally indeclinable. Those in a 
generally have onis ; but those in do and go generally change o into 
inis. 

4. Nouns in I have is added to I; as, consul, gen. consulis. . Those 
in en have for the most part inis ; as, lumen, luminis. Those in ar 
have arts ; as, par, paris. Those ending in er have eris; as, mulier, 
mulieris; but those in ter drop the e before r ; as, pater, patris. Those 
in or have generally oris; as, amor, amoris. Those in ur have 
mostly uris ; as, fulgur, julguris. 

5. Nouns in as mostly form their genitive singular in atis; as 
cetas, cetatis. Those in es, which increase in the genitive, have either 
it is, etis, idis, or edis. Those which do not increase in the genitive, 
change es into is. Those in is have generally the genitive the same 
as the nominative. Those in os have mostly their genitive in oris 
or otis. Those in us generally have their genitive singular in eris or 
oris ; sometimes they have utis or udis, or also uris. Those in s pre- 
ceded by a consonant, change s into is, or sometimes into tis or dis. 

6. Nouns in t form the genitive singular in itis. Nouns in z, pre- 
ceded by a consonant, form their genitive singular by changing x 
into cis or gis. Those ending in ax change ax into acis. Those end- 
ing in ex generally change ex into icis. Those in ix change ix into icis. 
Those in ox generally change ox into ocis. Those in ux for the most 
part change ux into ucis. 

Exceptions in Declension. 

7. Genitive and Dative Singular. — Greek proper names often have 
I, in place of is, in the genitive singular. The dative singular 
anciently ended in e, in place of i. 

8. Accusative Singular. — The following nouns have im in the accu- 
sative : — 

Amussis, a carpenter's Cucumis, a cucumber. Sinapis, mustard. 

or a mason's level or Mephitis, foul air. Sitis, thirst. 

rule. Pelvis, a basin. Tussis, a cough. 

Buris, the plough-tail. Ravis, hoarseness. Vis, strength. 
Cannabis, hemp. Securis, an axe. 

9. Many proper names, denoting names of rivers, towns, and gods, 



276 NOUNS — THIRD DECLENSION. 

not increasing in the genitive, have im in the accusative singular; 
also, Tiber, gen. Tiberis, ace. Tiberim. In these nouns in, in place of 
im, sometimes occurs. 

10. The following nouns have generally im, but sometimes em; 
namely, febris, fever ; puppis, the stern ; testis, a rope ; turrit, a 
tower ; but especially securis, an axe. 

11. The following have em oftener than im : — 
Bipennis, a battle-axe. Messis, a harvest, Prsesepis, a stall. 
Clavis, a key. Navis, a ship. Sementis, a sowing. 
Cutit?, the skin. Neptis, a grandchild. Strigilis, a flesh-brush. 
Lens, lentiles. Pars, a part. 

12. Greek nouns sometimes have a in the accusative singular: 
sometimes also in; likewise sometimes em or im, or en. The form a 
is chiefly confined to proper names. Aer, air, (Ether, the sky, delphin, 
a dolphin, and pcean, a hymn, have generally a in the accusative sin- 
gular ; but Pan has always a. 

13. Vocative Singular. — Sometimes proper names ending in es, 
gen. is, have a vocative in e. The s is dropped in the vocative by 
many Greek nouns ; as, Orpheus, voc. Orpheu. 

14. Ablative Singular. — Exceptions to those neuters in al, ar, and 
e, having i in the ablative. Names of towns in e, and the follow- 
ing neuters in ar, have e in the ablative : baccar, an herb ; far, corn ; 
hepar, the liver; jubar, a sunbeam; nectar, nectar; par, a pair; sal, 
salt. But rete, a net, has either e or i; and mare, the sea, has some- 
times e in poetry. 

15. Exceptions to nouns in is, having im or em in the accusative: 
testis, a rope, and cutis, the skin, have e only ; so also most of the 
Greek nouns having idis in the genitive. 

16. Exceptions to nouns having im only in the accusative: Bcetis ; 
cannabis, hemp, and sinapis, mustard, have e or i. Tigris, the tiger, 
is tigride in the ablative ; but as the name of a river, Tigride or Tigri, 
Rudis, a rod, juvenis, a youth, and volucris, a bird, have e only. 

17. Participles in ns, used as nouns, generally have e in the abla- 
tive — continens however has i. Adjectives in is, used as nouns, gene- 
rally have i in the ablative, though sometimes also e — as proper 
names they have always e. 

18. Though the following nouns have only em in the accusative, 
yet they have e or i in the ablative : — 

Amnis, a river. Classis, a fleet. Ignis, a fire. 

Anguis, a snake. Collis, a hill. Imber, a shower. 

Avis, a bird. Corbis, a basket. Mugilis, a mullet. 

Bilis, bile. Finis, an end. Orbis, a circle. 

Civis, a citizen. Fustis, a staff. Ovis, a sheep. 



NOUNS THIRD DECLENSION. 



277 



Pars, a part. Sors, a lot. Unguis, a nail. 

Postis, a door-post. Supellex, furniture. Vectis, a lever. 

Pugil, a pugilist. Tridens, a three-prong- Vesper, the evening. 

Sordes, filthiness. ed instrument. 

Pus — rure, signifies from the country, but ruri signifies in the 
country. Occiput, the hind-head, has i; so also canalis, a canal. 
Names of towns denoting where any thing is, or is done, have i in 
the ablative. 

19. Genitive Plural. — The following nouns in es and is have urn in 
the genitive plural, in place of ium: viz., apis, a bee; canis, a dog; 
juvenis, a youth ; mugilis, a mullet ; proles, a descendant ; strues> a 
heap of things laid over one another; vales, a prophet; volucris, a 
bird. 

Lynx, a lynx, sphinx, the sphinx, and opes, riches, have urn, in 
place of ium. 

20. The following nouns have ium, in place of urn, in the genitive 
plural : — 

Caro, flesh. Imber, a shower. 

Cohors, a cohort Lar, a household god. 

Compes, a gyve. Linter, a boat. 

Cor, the heart. Lis, a contest or dis- 
Cos, a Whetstone. pute. 

Dos, a dowry. Mas, a male. 

Fauces the jaws. Mus, a mouse. 

Fraus, fraud. Nix, snow. 

Fur, a thief. Nox, night. 

Bos, an ox, has bourn. 

Greek nouns commonly have urn in the genitive plural. 

21. Dative and Ablative Plural. — Exceptions: bos, an ox, has 
bobus or bubus. 

22. The dative plural in si, or when a vowel follows sin, is very 
seldom used, except by poets ; as, herois, dat. pi. heroisi or heroisin. 

Greek nouns in ma often have the dative and ablative plural in 
is, in place of ibus. 

23. Accusative Plural. — The accusative plural of masculines and 
feminines having ium in the genitive plural sometimes ends in is 
or eis, in accordance with the ancient form. Greek nouns sometimes 
have as in the accusative plural. 

24. Jupiter, and vis, power or strength, are thus declined: — 
24 



Os, a bone. 
Par, a pair. 
Quiris, a Roman. 
Ren, the kidneys. 
Samnis, a Samnite. 
Strix, a screech-owl. 
Uter, a bottle. 
Venter, the belly. 



278 





NOUNS - 


-THIRD DECLENi 


3ION. 




Singular. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


y. 


Jupiter, 


N. Vis, 


vires, 


G. 


Jovis, 


G. Vis, 


virium, 


D. 


Jovi, 


D. — 


viribus, 


A. 


Jovem, 


A. Vim, 


vires, 


V. 


Jupiter, 


V. Vis, 


vires, 


A. 


Jove. 


A. Vi. 


viribus. 



EXCEPTIONS IN GENDER. 

Exceptions in Masculines. 

25 Exceptions in 0. — Words ending in do and go, of more than 
two syllables, are feminine ; so are also words ending in io, when 
such words denote abstract things ; as, lectio, a reading ; or when 
they denote collective things ; as, legio, a legion. But, of those end- 
ing in do, cardo, a hinge, comedo, a glutton, ordo, order, unedo, the 
arbute tree, udo, a sock, and cudo, a kind of helmet made of skins, 
are masculine. Of those ending in go, harpago, a grappling-iron, 
ligo, a kind of hoe, and generally margo, a border, are masculine. 

26. When words in io are the names of material things, they are 
masculine; as, scipio, a staff; so are also the numerals binio, tri- 
nio, &c. 

27. Exceptions in ER. — Laver, a water-plant, linter, a boat, and 
tuber, the tree tuber, are almost always feminine; but when tuber de- 
notes the fruit, it is masculine. 

28. The following nouns in er are neuter : — - 

Acer, a maple-tree. Papaver, a poppy. Tuber, a swelling. 

Cadaver, a dead body. Piper, pepper. Uber, a teat. 

Cicer, a vetch. Siler, an osier. Ver, the spring. 

Iter, a journey. Spinther, a clasp Verber, a scourge. 

Lasser, assafoetida. Suber, a cork-tree. Zingiber, ginger. 

29. Siser, the plant skirret, is neuter in the singular, and mascu- 
line in the plural. 

30. Exceptions in ES. — The following nouns in es, though they 
increase in the genitive, are feminine : — 

Compes, a fetter, for Merges, a sheaf of corn. Inquies, restlessness. 
the feet. Quies, rest. Seges, growing corn. 

Merces, a reward. Requies, rest Teges, a mat. 

/Es, brass, is neuter. 

31. Exceptions in OR. — Arbor,, a tree, is feminine. A dor, spelt, 
cequor, the sea, cor, the heart, and marmor, marble, are neuter. 

32. Exceptions in OS. — Cos, a whetstone, dos, a dowry, eos, the 
morning, and also arbos, a tree, are feminine. Os, gen. ossis, a bone, 



NOUNS — THIRD DECLENSION. 279 

and os, gen. oris, the mouth, are neuter. The Greek words chaos, 
ethos, epos, melos, are also neuter. 

33. Exceptions in N. — Gluten, glue, inguen, the groin, pollen, fine 
flour, and unguen, an ointment, are neuter ; also all nouns ending 
in men. 

Aedon, a nightingale, halcyon, the king-fisher, icon, an image, and 
tindon, muslin, are feminine. 

Exceptions in Feminines, 

34. Exceptions in AS. — As, a piece of money, is masculine ; so 
are also the names of any divisions of the as, or any multiples of the 
same, though they may not terminate in as ; as, quadrans, the fourth 
part of an as; tressis, three ases. Masculine are also mas, a male, 
and vas, a surety ; likewise Greek nouns in as, gen. antis. Vas, a 
vessel, with fas and nefas, are neuter; as are also Greek nouns 
ending in as, gen. atis. 

35. Exceptions in ES, not increasing in the genitive. — Acinaces, a 
scimitar, and coles, a stalk, are masculine; hut antistes, a chief priest, 
palumbes, the wood-pigeon, vaies, a prophet, and vepres, a brier, are 
masculine or feminine. The Greek words cacoethes, hippomanes, ne- 
penthes, and panaces, are neuter. 

36. Exceptions in IS. — Latin nouns ending in nis are masculine; 
except amnis, a river, canis, a dog, cinis, ashes, clunis, the haunch, 
finis, an end, and funis, a rope, which are masculine or feminine ; 
but the plurals cineres, the ashes of the dead, and fines, boundaries, 
are always masculine. 

37. The following nouns are masculine : — 

Axis, an axle. Follis, a pair of bel- Quiris, a Roman. 

Aqualis, a water-pot. lows. Samnis, a Samnite. 

Cassis, a net. Fustis, a club. Sanguis, the blood. 

Caulis, a stalk. Glis, a dormouse. Sentis, a brier. 

Colis, a stalk. Lapis, a stone. Sodalis, a companion 

Cenchris, a serpent. Lemures, spectres. Torris, a firebrand. 

Oollis, a hill. Mensis, a month. Unguis, a nail. 

Cossis, a kind of worm. Mugilis, a mullet. Vectis, a lever. 

Cucumis, a cucumber. Orbis, a circle. Vermis, a worm. 

Ensis, a sword. Piscis, a fish. Vomis, a ploughshare. 

Fascis, a bundle. Postis, a post. 

38. The following nouns are masculine or feminine: — 
Anguis, a snake. Contubernalis, a com- Pulvis, dust. 
Collis, a path. rade. Scrobis, a ditch. 
Canalis, a conduit- Corbis, a basket. Tigris, a tiger. 

pipe. Pollis, fine flour. Torquis, a chain. 



280 NOUNS — THIRD DECLENSION. 

39. Exceptions in S, preceded by a consonant. — Dens, a tooth, and 
its compounds, are masculine; so also are — 

Auceps, a bird-catcher. Epops, a hoopoe. Merops, a kind of bird. 
Chalybs, steel. Fons, a fountain. Mons, a mountain. 

Cliens, a client. Gryps, a griffin. Pons, a bridge. 

Ellops, a kind of fish. Hydrops, the dropsy. 

Rudeiis, a rope, is generally masculine. 

Those nouns in ens, originally participles, as conflnens, torrens, OC" 
cidens, oriens, and the like, are masculine. Bidens, a sheep, is 
feminine. 

40. Adeps, grease, forceps, pincers, seps, a kind of serpent, scrobs, 
a ditch, serpens, a serpent, and stirps, the trunk of a tree, are mas- 
culine or feminine. 

Animans is of all genders. 

41. Exceptions in X. — Anthrax, corax, cordax, dropax, styrax, and 
thorax, are masculine ; but Umax is common. 

Nouns in ex are masculine; except fozx, forfex, lex, nex, prex, su- 
pellex, murex, and pellex, which are feminine. Atriplex is generally 
neuter. 

Alex, cortex, imbrex, obex, and silex, are doubtful. Grex, rumex, 
pumex, and senex, are generally masculine. 

42. Exceptions in IX. — Calix, a cup, fornix, an arch, phoenix, a 
kind of bird, spadix, a palm-branch, and sorix, a kind of bird, are 
masculine ; but larix, the beach-tree, perdix, a partridge, and varix, 
a swollen vein, are masculine or feminine. 

43. Exceptions in OX, TJX, and YX. — Box and esox are mascu- 
line ; also tradux, a vine-branch. 

Bombyx, a silk-worm, calyx, the bud of a flower, coccyx, a cuckoo, 
and oryx, a wild goat, are masculine ; but onix and sardonix, with 
calx, the heel, calx, lime, lynx, a lynx, and sandyx, a kind of colour, 
are masculine or feminine. Bombyx, signifying silk, is doubtful. 

Exceptions in the Neuter Gender. 

44. Exceptions in L and C. — Mugil, a mullet, and sol, the sun, are 
masculine. Sal, salt, is masculine or neuter in the singular, but 
always masculine in the plural. Lac is generally neuter, seldom 
masculine. 

45. Exceptions in AR and UR. — Par, a mate, is masculine or 
feminine ; hut par, a pair, is neuter. Salar, a trout, with furfur, 
bran, turiur, a turtle-dove, and vultur, a vulture, are masculine. 

46. Exceptions in US. — Lepus, a hare, with Greek nouns in pus, 
are masculine. Lagopus, a kind of bird, is feminine. Nouns in us, 



NOUNS — FOURTH DECLENSION. 281 

having utis or udis in the genitive, are feminine. Pecus and tellu* 
are feminine. 

Grus, a crane, mus, a mouse, and sits, a swine, are masculine or 
feminine. Rhus, sumach, is generally masculine, seldom feminine. 



FOURTH DECLENSION. (E. 41.) 

Exceptions in Declension. 

1. The genitive singular in is sometimes occurs in ancient writings. 
A genitive singular in i is also sometimes found. 

2. The dative singular in u, in place of ui, sometimes occurs ; but 
the genitive plural urn, in place of uum, very seldom. 

3. Some words of this declension have the dative and ablative 
plural in ubus ; as, acus, a needle ; arcus, a bow ; artus, a joint; ficus, 
a fig ; lacus, a lake ; partus, a birth ; pecu, a flock ; quercus, the oak ; 
specus, a den ; tribus, a tribe. But genu, the knee, portus, a harbour, 
tonilrus, thunder, and veru, a spit, have ibus or ubus. 

Exceptions in Gender. 

4. Acus, a needle, colus, a distaff, domus, a house, idus, the ides, 
manus, a hand, porticus, a gallery, quinquatrus, a feast of Minerva, 
and tribus, a tribe, are feminine. Noctu, by night, used only in the 
ablative, is also feminine. 

5. Penus, a store of provisions, when in the fourth declension, is 
masculine or feminine. Specus, a den, is generally masculine. Secus, 
sex, is neuter. 

Some words are feminine by the general rule (see E. 14, §5). 

FIFTH DECLENSION. (E. 47.) 

There remains nothing to be added to what has been said respect* 
ing the fifth declension in the Elementary Course. 

DECLENSION OF COMPOUND NOUNS. (E. 50.) 

1. In compound words, when both are in the nominative, or both 
retain the form of the nominative singular, both are declined ; but 
should only one of the words be in the nominative, and the other in 
the genitive, the word in the nominative is alone declined, though it 
may be placed first ; and the one in the genitive is not declined, 
even though it may be placed last ; as, 
24* 



282 IRREGULAR NOUNS. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. 

J\T. Respublica, iV. Respublicse, JV. Materfamilias, 

G. Reipublicae, G. Rerumpublicarum, G. Matrisfamilias, 

D. Reipublicae, D. Rebuspublicis, D. Matrifamilias, 

A. Rempublicam, A. Respublicas, A. Matremfamilias, 

V. Respublica, V. Respublicoe, V. Materfamilias, 

A. Republics,. A. Rebuspublicis. A. Matrefamilias, &c. 
Familias is the old genitive singular for families. 

IRREGULAR NOUNS. (E. 50.) 

There are four classes of irregular nouns : namely, Variable, De- 
fective, Redundant,, and those differing in signification in singular 
and plural. 

I. VARIABLE NOUNS. 

Some nouns may vary in gender or declension, or in both. They 
are called Heterogeneous, when varying in gender; Heteroclites, 
when varying in declension. 

Heterogeneous Nouns. 

1. Masculine in singular, but neuter in plural; as, avernus ; pi. 
averna. 

Masculine in singular, but masculine or neuter in plural ; as, 
jocus, a jest ; pi. joci or joca. 

Feminine in singular, but neuter in plural ; as, carbasus, a kind 
of flax ; pi. carbasa, sails made of it. 

Neuter in singular, but masculine in plural ; as, ccelum, heaven ; 
pi. cceli. 

Neuter in singular, but masculine or neuter in plural ; &s,frenum, 
a bridle ; pi. freni or frena. 

Neuter in singular, but feminine in plural ; as, epulum, a feast ; 
pi. epulce. 

Feminine or neuter in singular, but feminine in plural ; as delicia 
or delirium, delight; pi. delicice. 

Heteroclites. 

2. Having the second or third declension in the singular, and the 
third in the plural ; as, jugerum, an acre, gen. jugeri or jugeris ; d1. 
jugera, gen. jugerum. 

Having the third declension in the singular, and the second in the 
plural ; as, vas, gen. vassis, a vessel ; pi. vasa, gen. vasorum. 

Some Greek proper names are declined either in the second or 
third Greek declension. 



IRREGULAR NOUNS. 283 

II. DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 

Nouns may be defective either in case or in number. 
Nouns defective in Case. 

3. Nouns may be either indeclinable, or want one or more cases. 
Indeclinables are those, which remain the same in all the cases. 

They are : the names of the letters of the Greek and Latin alphabets ; 
as, alpha, beta, &c. : foreign words ; as, manna, pascha : some Greek 
nouns in i and y ; as, gummi, misy : Hebrew names, when they do 
not take a Greek or Latin termination ; as, Gabriel. The Latin word 
pondo, a pound, is indeclinable. 

4. Ejectus, a throwing out ; evectus, a carrying out ; glos, a hus- 
band's sister; hir, the palm of the hand; inquics, restlessness; are 
used only in the nominative. 

Bids ; as, dicis gratia, for form's sake ; nauci, of no account or 
value*; are used only in the genitive. 

Despicatui, contempt: divisui, a division; ludificatui, a mockery; 
are used only in the dative. 

Abactus (ph), a driving away: amissum, a loss; commutatum, an 
alteration; essedas (pi.), war-chariots; fulgetras (ph), lightnings; 
hebdomadam, a week; incitas (ph), as ad incitas redactus, reduced to 
extremities; infitias (pi.), denial; are used only in the accusative. 

Accitu, a calling for ; admissu, admission ; admonitu, admonition ; 
arcessitu, a sending away ; coactu, constraint; ccelite (but the plural 
entire), inhabitant of heaven ; concessu, permission ; condiscipulatu, 
companionship at school ; cupressu, a cypress ; datu, a giving ; diu, 
in the daytime ; efflagitatu, importunity ; ergo, for the sake ; fame, 
hunger; fauce (pi. entire), the throat; flictu, a striking; hortatu, an 
exhorting, and pi. hortatibus ; inconsultu, without advice; ingratiis 
(pi.), against one's will ; injussu, without command ; interdiu, by day ; 
jussu, command ; lucu, daylight ; mandatu, a command ; natu, by 
birth ; noctu, by night ; peccatu, a fault ; promptu, readiness ; rogatu, 
a request ; are used only in the ablative. 

Aplustre, the flag of a vessel ; astu, a city ; cacoethes, a bad cus- 
tom ; epos, an epic poem ; fas, right ; instar, a likeness ; nefas, wick- 
edness ; nepenthes, an herb; opus, need; procer (but entire in the 
plural), a peer; secus, sex; suppetice, supplies; are used only in the 
nominative and accusative. 

Veprem, a brier, is used only in the accusative and ablative sin- 
gular; but the plural is entire. 

Impetis, a shock; repetundarum (ph), money taken by extortion; 
sponiis, of one's own accord ; are used only in the genitive and abla- 
tive. 



284 IRREGULAR NOUNS 

Cassem, a net, is used only in the accusative and ablative — the 
plural is entire. 

Relatum, a recital, is used only in the accusative and ablative. 

Permissu, permission, is used only in the ablative, and in the 
accusative permissum. 

Vocatu, a calling, is used only in the ablative singular and accu- 
tive plural. 

Algus, cold; arbitrates, a judgment ; canities, grey hair; chaos, 
chaos; gausape, a rough garment; inferice, sacrifices to the dead; 
obex, a bolt : satias, satiety ; situs, situation ; vesper, the evening ; 
vespera, the evening ; are used only in the nominative, accusative, 
and ablative. 

Panaces, an herb ; tabum, corrupt matter ; viscus, an internal or- 
gan ; are used only in the nominative, accusative, and ablative. 

Opts, help, but plural entire ; sordis, filth ; are used only in the 
genitive, accusative, and ablative. 

Feminis, the thigh, is used only in the genitive, dative, and abla- 
tive. 

Nuptui, marriage ; obtentui, a pretext ; preci, prayer, but plural 
entire ; venui, a sale ; are used only in the dative, accusative, and 
ablative. So also derisui, ridicule, and irrisui, derision. 

Ditionis, power, and pecudis, a beast, want the nominative sin- 
gular. Daps, a feast, and frux, fruit, seldom have the nominative 
singular. 

Faix, dregs ; fax, a torch ; fel, gall ; lux, light ; os, the mouth ; 
pax, peace; ros, dew; soboles, offspring; sol, the sun; want the 
genitive plural. 

Far, corn ; hiems, winter ; mel, honey ; metus, fear ; pus, pus ; 
rus, country ; tus, incense ; are not used in the genitive, dative, and 
ablative plural. 

Astus, craft, is used in the nominative and ablative singular, and 
in the nominative and accusative plural. 

Though compes, gen. compedis, a fetter, is used entire in the plural, 
it has only the genitive and ablative singular ; so also juger, gen. 
jugeris, an acre ; likewise verberis, a stripe. Crates, a hurdle, with 
plural entire, is used only in accusative and ablative singular. 

Vicis wants the nominative singular and genitive plural. 

Nouns defective in Number. 

Nouns may want either the plural or singular. 

1. Many nouns, from the nature of the things which they express, 
can have no plural : such as general abstract nouns ; as, pietas, piety: 
also words denoting a mass or substance ; as, aurum, gold 



IRREGULAR NOUNS. 



285 



The following nouns are also only used in the singular : — 

Adorca, military re- Justitium, a law va- Sal, when properly sig- 

ward. cation. 

JEther, the sky. Lac, milk. 

Album, an album. Letum, death, 

Argilla, potter's clay. Limus, mud. 

Barathrum, a gulf. Lues, a plague. 

Cestus, a girdle. Macellum, shambles. 

Coenum, mud. Mane, the morning. 

Crocum, saffron. Meridies, mid-day. 

Diluculum, the dawn. Mundus, female orna 



Ebur, ivory. 
Fides, faith. 
Fimus, dung. 
Gelu, frost. 
Glarea, gravel. 
Glastum, woad. 
Gluten, glue. 
Glutinum, glue. 



ments. 
Muscus, moss. 
Nectar, nectar. 
Nemo, no one. 
Nihilum, nothing. 
Nitrum, natron. 
Omasum, tripe. 
Opium, opium. 



Gypsum, white plaster. Penum, provisions. 



Hepar, the liver. 
Hesperus, the Even- 
ing Star. 
Hilum, a little thing. 
Humus, the ground. 
Jubar, a ray of light. 



Piper, pepper. 
Pontus, the sea. 
Prolubium, desire. 
Pubes, youth. 
Sabulo, gravel. 
Sabulum, gravel. 



nifying salt. 
Salum, the sea. 
Salus, safety. 
Sanguis, blood. 
Senium, old age. 
Siler, an osier. 
Sinapi, mustard. 
Sitis, thirst. 
Specimen, a sample. 
Supellex, furniture. 
Tabes, a consumption. 
Tabum, corruptmatter. 
Tellus, the earth. 
Tristitia, sadness. 
Ver, spring. 
Vespera, the evening. 
Veternus, lethargy. 
Virus, poison. 
Viscum, bird-lime. 
Viscus, bird-lime. 
Vitrum, woad. 
Vulgus, the common 

people. 



Zingiber, ginger. 

Many names of collective personal things, — many names of com- 
plex things, or of things composed of several parts, are used only in 
the plural. 

The names of the days in the Roman calendar, also of festivals 
and games, are used only in the plural : as, calendcd, the calends ; 
Olympia, the Olympic games. 

The names of some books and places are also used only in the 
plural ; as, Bucolica, a book of Pastorals ; Thermopylae, the straits 
of Thermopylae. 

The following nouns are also only used in the plural: — 
Acta, records. Apinse, trifles. Cani, gray hair. 

Adversaria, a memo- Arma, arms, Caulae, sheep-folds. 

randum-book. Bellaria, sweetmeats. Celeres, the bodyguard 

Estiva, summer-quar- Braccse, breeches. of the Roman kings. 

ters. Branchiae, the gills of Clitellae, a pack-saddle. 

Antae, door-posts. fishes. Codicelli, a writing. 

Antes, rows. Brevia, shallow places. Crepundia, a rattle. 

Antiae, forelock. Cancelli, balustrades. Cunabula, a cradle. 



286 



IRREGULAR NOUNS. 



Curiae, a cradle. 

Divitiae, riches. 

Druides, the Druids. 

Excubiae, watches. 

Exsequiae, funeral rites 

Exta, entrails. 

Exuviae, spoils. 

Flabra, blasts. 

Fraces, the lees of oil. 

Gerrae, trifles. 

Grates, thanks. 

Hiberna, winter-quar- 
ters. 

Ilia, the flank. 

Incunabula, a cradle. 

Indutiae, a truce. 

Induviae, clothes. 

Inferi, the dead. 

Inferiae, sacrifices for 
the dead. 

Insecta, insects. 

Justa, funeral rites, 

Lamenta, lamenta- 
tions, [quarries. 

Lapicidinae, stone- 



Laurices, young rab- 
bits. 

Lautia, presents to 
foreign ambassa- 

. dors. 

Lemures, hobgoblins. 

Lendes, nits. 

Luceres, a division of 
the Roman cavalry. 

Magalia, cottages. 

Majores, ancestors. 

Manubiae, spoils of 
war. 

Minaciae and Minae, 
threats. 

Minores, posterity. 

Multitia, fine-wrought 
garments. 

Munia, official duties. 

Natales, parentage. 

Nugae, jests. 

Nuptiae, marriage. 

Pandecta, the Pan- 
dects. 

Parietinae, old walls. 



Phalerae, trappings. 

Philtra, love-potions. 

Posteri, posterity. 

Praebia, an amulet. 

Praecordia, the dia- 
phragm. 

Primitiae, first-fruits. 

Quisquiliae, refuse. 

Salinae, salt-pits. 

Scopae, a broom. 

Scruta, old stuff. 

Sponsalia, espousals. 

Stativa, a stationary 
camp. 

Superi, the gods above 

Talaria, winged shoes. 

Tesca, rough places. 

Thermae, warm baths. 

Tormina, colic pains. 

Tricae, trifles. 

Utensilia, utensils. 

Vergiliae, the seven 
stars of the pleiades. 

Virgulta, bushes. 



III. REDUNDANT NOUNS. 

Nouns are sometimes redundant in termination, declension, or 
gender; that is, they may have different terminations in the nomi- 
native singular ; as, arbor, or arbos, a tree : different genders, though 
in the same declension ; as, dorsus, and dorsum : or may be in differ- 
ent declensions ; as, laurus, -i, or laurus, -its, a laurel. 

Nouns redundant in Declension. 

The following list contains nouns redundant in declension: — 
Adagium, adagio, a proverb. Anfractum, anfractus, -us, awind- 

Admonitio, admonitus, -us, a re- ing. 

minding. Angiportum, angiportus, -{Is, a 

^Ethra, aether, the clear sky. narrow lane. 

Affectio, affectus, -us, affection. Aranea, araneus, a spider. 
Alimonia, alimonium, aliment. Arcus, arcus, -us, a bow. 
Aliuvio, alluvies, -ei, a flood. Attagena, attagen, a moor-hen. 

Alvearium, alveare, a bee-hive. Avaritia, avarities, avarice. 
Amygdala, amy gdalum, an almond. Augmentum, augmen, an increase. 



IRREGULAR NOUNS. 287 

Barbaria, barbaries, barbarism. Hebdomada, hebdomas, a week. 
Blanditia, blandities, flattery. Incestum, incestus, -us, incest. 
Buccina, buccinum, a trumpet. Lacerta, lacertus, a lizard. 
Bjra, buris, a plough-tail. Laurus, laurus, -us, a laurel. 

Cdepa, caepe, an onion. Luxuria, luxuries, luxury. 

Cancer, -cri, cancer, -eris, a crab. Margarita, margaritum, a pearL 
Canitia, canities, hoariness Materia, materies, materials. 

Capus, capo, a capon. Menda, mendum, a fault. 

Cassida, cassis, a helmet. Mollitia, mollities, softness. 

Cingula, cingulus or cingulum, a Momentum, momen, influence. 

girdle. Mulctra, mulctrum, a milk-pail. 

Cochlearium, cochleare, a spoon. Munditia, mundities, neatness. 
Colluvio, colluvies, filth. Muria, muries, brine. 

Conatum, conatus, us, an attempt. Myrtus, myrtus, -us, a myrtle. 
Concinnitas, concinnitudo, neat- Nequitia, nequities, worthlessness 

ness. Notitia, notities, knowledge. 

Consortium, consortio, partner- Oblivium, oblivio, forgetfulness. 

ship. Obsidium, obsidio, a siege. 

Contagium, contagio, contact. Ostrea, ostreum, an oyster. 
Cornus, cornus, -us, a cornel-tree. Palumba, palunibus, anrfpalumbcs, 
Cratera, crater, a bowl. a pigeon. 

Cupiditas, cupido, desire. Paupertas, pauperies, poverty. 

Cupressus, cupressus, -us, a cy- Pavus, pavo, a peacock. 

press-tree. Penus. -i or -oris, penus, -us, and 

Delicia, delicium, delight. penum, provisions. 

Diluvium, diluvies, a deluge. Pinus, pinus, -us, a pine-tree. 

Durities, duritia, hardness. Pistrina, pistrinum, a bake-house. 

Effigia, effigies, an image. Planitia, planities, a plain. 

Elegia, elegion, an elegy. Plebs, plebes, -ei, the common 

Elephantus, elephas, an elephant. people. 

Epitoma, epitome, an abridgment. Postulatum, postulatio, a request 
Esseda, essedum, a chariot. . Praesepia, praesepium, praesepes, 
Eventum, eventus, us, an event. praesepis, and praesepe, a stable. 
Ficus, ficus, us, a fig-tree. Praetextum, praetextus, -us, a pre- 

Fretum, fretus, -us, a strait. text. 

Fulgetra, fulgetrum, lightning. Prosapia, prosapies, lineage. 
Ganea, ganeum, an eating-house. Rapa, rapum, a turnip. 
Gausapa, gausapes, and gausa- Requies, requies, -ei, rest. 

pum, frieze. Rictum, rictus, -us, the open 

orelu, gelum, frost. mouth. 

Gibba,gibbus, <7/za T gibber, ahump. Ruma, rumen, breast, throat. 
Glutinum, gluten, glue. Ssevitia, saevitudo, and saevities, 

Gobius, gobio, a gudgeon. ferocity. 

Grammatica, grammatice, gram- Scabritia, scabrities, roughness. 

mar. Scorpius, scorpio, a scorpion. 



288 



IRREGULAR NOUNS. 



Segmentum, segmen, a piece. 
Segnitia, segnities, sloth. 
Senecta, senectus, old age. 
Sesama, sesamum, sesame. 
Spurcitia, spurcities, filthiness. 
Strain en turn, stramen, straw. 
Suffimentum, suffimen, perfume. 
Tapetum, tapes, and tapete, ta- 
pestry. 



Teneritas, teneritudo, softness. 

Tergum, turgus, -oris, the back. 

Tiara, tiaras, a turban. 

Titan, Titanus, Titan. 

Tonitruum, tonitrus, -us, thunder 

Tribula, tribulum, a threshing- 
sledge. 

Vespera, vesper, -eri or -eris, the 
evening. 



IV. NOUNS DIFFERING IN MEANING IN SINGULAR AND PLURAL. 



Singular. 
JEdes, a temple. 
Aqua, water. 
Auxilium, assistance. 
Bonum, a good thing. 
Career, a prison. 
Castrum, a fort. 
Comitium, a part of the Roman 

forum, where the comitia were 

held. 
Copia, plenty. 
Cupedia, daintiness. 
Epulum, a solemn feast. 
Facultas, power or ability. 
Fascis, a bundle of twigs or rods. 



Fastus, pride. 

Finis, an end. 

Fortuna, fortune. 

Furfur, bran. 

Gratia, favour or grace. 

Hortus, a garden. 

Impedimentum, a hinderance. 

Litera, a letter of the alphabet. 

Ludus, pastime. 

Mos, custom. 

Naris, a nostril. 

Natalis, a birth-day. 

Opera, labour. 

Opis (gen.), help, power. 

Pars, a part. 

Plaga, a region or tract of country, 



Plural. 
iEdes, -ium, a house. 
Aquae, medicinal springs. 
Auxilia, auxiliary troops. 
Bona, goods or property, [course. 
Carceres, the barriers of a race- 
Castra, a camp. 
Comitia, an assembly for elections. 



Copiae, troops. [dainties. 

Cupediae, -arum, or cupedia, -orum, 
Epulae, a feast or meal. 
Facilitates, property. 
Fasces, a bundle of rods, round an 

axe, carried before the chief 

magistrate of Rome. 
Fastus, or fasti, a calender. 
Fines, boundaries of a country. 
Fortunae, wealth or possessions. 
Furfures, dandruff. 
Gratiae, thanks. 
Horti, pleasure-grounds. 
Impedimenta, baggage. 
Literae, a letter. 
Ludi, public games. 
Mores, manners. 
Nares, the nose. 
Natales, birth, lineage. 
Operae, workmen. 
Opes, wealth. 
Partes, a faction or party. 
Plagae, nets or toils. 



ADJECTIVES — DECLENSION. 289 

Singular. Plural. 

Principium, a beginning or first Principia, the place in camp where 

principle. the general's quarters were. 

Rostrum, the beak of a bird or Rostra, the rostra, or place in the 

the prow of a ship. forum, where the people were 

addressed. 

Sal, salt. Sales, witticisms. 



ADJECTIVES. 

FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSION. (E. 55.) 

Exceptions in Declension. 

1. Those adjectives that form their genitive in ius and dative in t, 
sometimes form them like bonus, tener, or piger ; more especially in 
early writers. 

THIRD DECLENSION. (E. 59.) 

Exceptions in Declension. 

1. Bimestre, cocleste, perenne, and cognomine, sometimes occur as 
ablatives, though generally, according to rule, they have i in the 
ablative. 

2. The following adjectives have only e in the ablative singular, 
in place of e or i, and consequently um in the genitive plural, in 
place of ium; viz., bicorpor, having two bodies; ccelebs, unmarried; 
color, colour; compos, master of; cuspis, point; deses, idle; impos, 
unable; juvenis, young; locuples, rich; pauper, poor; pes, a foot; 
pubes, marriageable ; princeps, principal ; senex, old ; sospes, safe ; 
superstes, surviving. 

3. The following adjectives have only i in the ablative singular, in 
place of e or i; viz., anceps, double; concors, concordant; discors, 
discordant; hebes, dull; immemor, unmindful; iners, unskilful, inert; 
ingens, vast ; inops, indigent ; memor, mindful ; par, equal ; prceceps, 
headlong; recens, recent; repens, sudden ; uber, fertile ; vigil, wake- 
ful ; volucer, swift. Besides these, also most adjectives ending in 
the syllable plex have i only. 

4. The following adjectives, having e or i in the ablative singular, 
have um in the genitive plural; viz., ales, anceps, artifex, celer, cicur, 
compar, degener, dispar, dives, immemor, impar, inops, memor, particeps, 
prceceps, prcepes, supplex, and vigil. But dis, locuples, sons, and insons, 
have either um or ium. Vetus and uber, besides um, have a, in place 
of ia, in the nominative plural. 

2o T 



290 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 

IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. (E. 66.) 
Irregular adjectives are either defective or redundant. 

I. DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. 

5. Adjectives denoting the qualities and attributes of persons, 
mostly want the neuter gender ; as, juvenis t young ; senex, old ; 
coelebs, unmarried ; &c. 

6. Concolor. same colour ; deses, idle ; hebes, dull ; perpes, continual 
or uninterrupted ; reses, stagnant; teres, round and slender; versicolor, 
changeable or different coloured ; are seldom used in the neuter 
gender ; and also want the genitive plural. 

7. Bilicem (ace), double-tissued, and cetera, ceterum, want the 
nominative singular. Expes, hopeless, is used only in the nomina- 
tive. Inquies, restless, is only used in the nominative, accusative, 
and ablative. Mactus, and made, honoured, are used only in the 
nominative and vocative singular; and in the nominative plural, 
macti. Necesse, and necessum, necessary, with volupe, pleasant, are 
used only in the nominative and accusative singular. Primoris (gen.), 
first, wants the accusative and vocative singular ; also, the nomina- 
tive, accusative, and vocative plural. Postera, coming after, wants 
the nominative singular, masculine. Potis, able, is used- only in the 
nominative singular; but in the plural, in all genders. Plus, more, 
is used only in the nominative, genitive, accusative, and ablative 
singular, and only in the neuter ; but in the plural, plures, it is used 
in all genders and cases. Pauci, few, and phrique, the most part, 
are seldom used in the singular. Siremps, and sirempse, alike, are 
used only in the nominative and accusative. Tantidem (gen.), so 
much, is used only in the genitive and accusative. Trilicem (ace), 
treble- tissued, is used only in the accusative singular, and nomina- 
tive and accusative plural. 

8. Frugi, temperate ; nequam, worthless ; sat, or satis, sufficient ; 
semis, half; also, the plurals aliquot, some; quot, how many; tot, so 
many; totidem, just so many; quotquot, and quotcunque, how many ; 
together with the cardinal numbers from quatuor, four, to centum, a 
hundred, both included ; also mille, a thousand ; are all indecline- 
able. 

II. REDUNDANT ADJECTIVES. 

9. The following adjectives of the third declen on ave also a re- 
dundant form of the first and second declensions; viz., acclivis and 
acclivus, ascending ; auxiliaris and auxiliarius, auxiliary ; bijugis and 
bijugus, yoked two together; declivis and declivus, descending; exani- 
mis and exanimus, lifeless ; hilaris and hilarus, cheerful ; imbecillis and 



ADJECTIVES COMPARISON. 291 

imbecillus, weak ; inermis and inermus, unarmed : in/rents and infrenus, 
unbridled ; inquies and inquietus, restless ; ^'ocularis and jocularius, 
laughable; multijugis and multijugus, many yoked together; opulent 
and opulentus, rich ; prcecox or prcecoquis and prcecoquus, early ripe ; 
proclivis and proclivus, sloping ; quadrijugis and quadrijugus, yoked 
four together ; semianimis and semianimus, half alive ; semiermis and 
semiermus, half armed ; semisomnis and semisomnus, half asleep*; «m- 
gularis and singularius, single ; sublimis and sublimits, high ; unanimis 
and unanimus, unanimous ; violens and violentus, violent. 

Impubes, gen. -is, not grown up, has the redundant forms impubcr, 
gen. -em, impubis, gen. HW, and impubescens, gen. -7w. 

Some adjectives in tr have a redundant form in is; as, celeber and 
Celebris, renowned. 

COMPARISON. (E. 69.) 

1. Feftzs, old, has veterimus in the superlative. 

2. There are six adjectives in fit* that form their superlatives in 
limus ; namely, facilis, easy; difficilis, difficult; gracilis, slender; hu- 
mi/is, humble ; similis, like ; dissimilis, unlike. Imbecillis, weak, has 
both imbecillimus and imbecillissimus. 

3. The adjectives ending in ficus, that form their comparatives in 
entior, and superlatives in entissimus — as if the positive ended in ens, 
in place of us — are, beneficus, beneficent ; honorificus, honourable ; 
magnificus, splendid; munificus, liberal; maleficus, hurtful. Dicas and 
volus form their comparatives and superlatives from their other forms, 
dicens and volens. So, in like manner, egenus and providus. 

4. Nequam, worthless, has nequior, nequissimus. Frugi> frugal, has 
frugalior, frugalissimus. 

DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 

5. Citerior, nearer, sup. citimus ; deterior, worse, sup. deterrimus ; 
interior, inner, sup. intimus ; odor, swifter, sup. occissimus ; prior, 
former, sup. proximus ; proprior, nearer, sup. proximus ; ulterior, far- 
ther, sup. ultimus : want the positive. 

6. Consultus, skilful ; inclitus, renowned ; invictus, invincible ; m- 
vitus, unwilling; meritus, deserving; par, equal; persuasus, per- 
suaded ; sacer, sacred : want the comparative. 

Apricus, bellus, comis, diversus, falsus, fidus, novus, vetus, seldom 
have the comparative. 

7. Adolescens, young; agrestis, rustic; alacer, active; ater, black; 
coecus, blind ; deses, idle ; declivis, slanting downwards ; diuturnus, 
lasting; infinilus, infinite; ingens, very great ; jejunus, fasting ; ju- 
venis, young ; licens, unrestrained ; longinquus, distant ; opimus, rich ; 



292 



ADJECTIVES — NUMERALS. 



proclivis, sloping downwards ; pronus, bending down ; protervus, vio- 
lent : propinquus, near ; salutaris, healthy ; satis, sufficient ; satur, 
full ; senex, old ; silvestris, woody ; sinister, left ; supinus, lying on 
the back ; surdus, deaf ; teres, round and slender : have neither a 
comparative nor a superlative. 

Most of the adjectives ending in His, alis, and bills, have no super- 
lative. 

Anterior, anterior, and sequor, worse, are used only in the com- 
parative. 

8. Many adjectives that, from their signification, do not imply 
degrees of comparison, have no degrees of comparison — they denote 
substance, origin, possession, country, number, past definite time, 
and the like ; as, aureus, golden ; hibernus, wintry. 

9. Many adjectives, that from their meaning might admit of de- 
grees of comparison, yet have no degrees of comparison denoted by 
their terminations; as, most adjectives ending in bundus, imus, inus, 
orus, ivus, and us, pure, except quus ; also compound adjectives, 
compounded of nouns or verbs ; likewise diminutives ; besides some 
other adjectives. In most of these adjectives, and sometimes in 
others, the comparative is formed by magis, more ; and the superla- 
tive by maxime, most; as, idoneus, fit; magis idoneus, more fit; maxi- 
me idoneus, most fit. Other particles are sometimes used, to denote 
the state or degree of the quality. 

NUMERALS. (E. 74.) 

1. Prior is used for the ordinal primus, when only two are spoken 
of; and alter is often used for secundus. 

2. There are other classes of numbers, besides the cardinal and 
ordinal numbers: as the distributive numbers, which denote how 
many each ; as, 

Singuli, one by one. Quini deni. 

Bini, two by two. Seni deni. 

Terni or trini. Septeni deni. 

Quaterni. Octoni deni. 

Quini. Noveni deni. 

Seni. Viceni. 

Septeni. Viceni singuli. 

Octoni. Viceni bini, &c. 

Noveni. Triceni. 

Deni, ten by ten. Quadrageni. 

Undeni. Quinquageni. 

Duodeni. Sexageni. 

Terni deni. Septuageni. 

Quaterni deni. Octogeni. 



Nonageni. 

Centeni, 

Duceni. 

Treceni or trecenteni. 

Quadringeni or qua- 

dringenteni. 
Quingeni. 

Sexceni or Sexcenteni. 
Septingeni. 
Octingeni. 
Nongeni. 
Milleni or singula mil- 

lia. 



PRONOUNS. 



293 



Bini is used for duo, to denote things in pairs; as, bini boves, a 
pair of oxen. 

3. Numeral adverbs, which denote how many times ; as, 



Semel, once. Quatuordecies. 

Bis, twice. Quiudecies. 

Ter, thrice. Sedecies. 

Quater, four times. Decies et septies. 
Quinquies, five times. Duodevicies. 

Sexies. Undevicies. 

Septies. Vicies. 

Octies. Semel et vicies. 

Novies. Bis et vicies, &c. 

Decies. Tricies. 

Undecies. Quadragies. 

Duodecies. Quinquagies. 

Terdecies. Sexagies. 

4. Multiplicative numerals denote how many fold; as, simplex, 
single ; duplex, double, or twofold ; triplex, threefold : quadruplex, four- 
fold ; g ui n tuplex, fivefold ; septemplex, sevenfold; dectmplex, tenfold; 
centuplex, a hundredfold. 



Septuagies. 

Octogies. 

Nonagies. 

Centies. 

Ducenties. 

Treeenties or tricenties. 

Quadringenties. 

Quingenties. 

Sexcenties. 

Septingenties. 

Octingenties. 

Noningenties. 

Millies. 



PRONOU1TS. (E. 79.) 

1. The contracted form 771/, for mihi. to me, is sometimes used. 

2. Cum is afhxed to the ablative singular and plural of the per- 
sonal, or substantive pronouns ; as, vobiscum, with you. 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. (E. 87.) 

1. Olli, from the old form ollus, has been sometimes used in the 
dative singular and nominative plural for illi. 

2. The compounds istic (of iste and hie) and illic (of Me and hie), 
are thus declined: — 

Singular. 

M. F. N. 

JV. Istic, istiec, istoc or istuc, 

Ac. Istunc, istanc, istoc oristuc, 

Ab. Istoc, istac, istoc. 

Illic is declined in like manner. 

3. Is is generally used to point to some preceding person or thing, 
without particularly designating the nearest or farthest. 

4. Sic, denoting this, points out some person or thing near, or 
nearest to the speaker, or any thing just mentioned. As the person 

25 * 



Plural. 
M. F. N. 

N. — istaec, — 

Ac. — — istaec. 



294 PRONOUNS. 

of all nearest the speaker is the speaker himself, hie homo, this man 
often denotes the same as ego, I. 

5. Ille, denoting that, points out some person or thing distant, 01 
farthest off or remote from the speaker, or to something before men- 
tioned, or the first mentioned in a sentence ; while hie points out 
the last mentioned in a sentence. Ille is also used to denote general 
notoriety ; as, Medea ilia, the celebrated Medea. Ille likewise refers 
to something spoken about. Ille also points out the past, while 
hie points out the present. 

6. Isle, that, besides sometimes denoting contempt, often points 
out, or refers to, the person addressed, or to something near to him, 
or belonging to or connected with him. So, iste liber may mean this 
(thy) book ; but ille liber would mean the book we are speaking of. 
These distinctions are not always strictly observed. Ille and is are 
sometimes used for one another. 



EMPHATIC PRONOUN IPSE. (E. 95.) 

1. Ipse, in the old language, had the form of ipsus, ipsa, ipsum. 
As ipse may be considered as formed of is and the affix pse, the old 
writers in some cases declined the is, leaving the affix pse undeclined ; 
as, eapse for ipsa, eampse for ipsam, eopse for ipso. After this manner 
the word r eapse, in fact, is formed from re eapse. 

2. Ipse is used with nouns and pronouns in an emphatic sense ; 
as, tu ipse, you yourself ; Jupiter ipse, Jupiter himself. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS. (E. 96.) 

1. Cum is often affixed to the ablatives quo, qud, and quibus ; as, 
quibuscum, with whom. 

2. In quicunque, qui is sometimes separated from cunque by one 
or more interposed words. 

3. Quicquid, sometimes occurs, in place of quidquid. 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. (E. 99.) 

1. Cujus is defective, being only used in the following cases, viz.: 
Singular. Plural. 



Mas. 


Fem. 


Neut. 


Mas. 


Fem. 


N. Cujus, 


cuja, 


cujum, 


ir. Cuji, 


cujae, 


Ac. Cujum, 


cujam, 


— 


Ac. — 


cujas. 



Ab. — - cuja. — 



VERBS — FIRST CONJUGATION. 295 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUS. (E. 102.) 

1. Mens has generally mi in the vocative singular, masculine, in 
place of meus. 

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. (E. 102.) 

1. Quisque has quodque, quidque, or quicque, in the neuter singular. 

2. Quisquam has quidquam or quicquam in the neuter singular; 
and mostly wants the feminine and plural. 

3. Quispiam has quidpiam, quodpiam, or quippiam, in the neute* 
singular. It is scarcely used in the plural ; has however the nomi- 
native plural, feminine, qucepiam. 



VERBS. (E. 103.) 

Formation of the Three Principal Parts. (E. 105.) 

[This is to be placed at the end of the regular conjugation (E. 219). 
Observe that 1 denotes the infinitive, 2 the perfect tense, and 3 the 
supine, whether these numbers be used alone or placed before a verb. 
When a dash follows, as ' — , or 2 — , or 3 — , it denotes that the prin- 
cipal part after which the dash is, is wanting; thus, 3 — denotes 
that the supine is wanting.] 

Deviation from the Regular Formation in the Principal Parts of the 
1. FIRST CONJUGATION. 

Crepo, * crepare, 2 crepui, 3 crepitum, to make a noise. So, in like 
manner, its compounds; but discrepo and increpo have some- 
times -avi in 2 and -atum in 8 . 

Cubo, x cubare, *cubui, B cubitum, to lie, seldom have -avi in 2 . So 
likewise the compounds accubo, excubo, incubo, &c. ; but when 
the compounds take m before b, they are of the third conjuga- 
tion; as, incumbo, x incumber e, *i?icubui, *incubitum. 

Do, * dare, 2 dedi, 3 datum, to give. So also the compounds circumdo, 
pessundo, satisdo, venundo. The other compounds of do — as, 
addo, condo, &c. — are of the third conjugation, and have didi 
in 2 and ditum in 3 . 

Domo, l domare, 2 domui, 3 domitum, to subdue. 

Frico, 1 fricare t 2 fricui, s fricatum or frictum } to rub. So also the com* 
pounds defrico, infrico, refrico. 



296 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Juvo. l juvare, 2 juvi, z jutum, to help — juvaturus in participle. So 
also the compound adjuvo. 

Labo, 1 tabare, 2 — , 3 — , to fall. 

Lavo, * lavare or lavere, 3 lavi or lavavi, 3 lavatum, or lautum or lotum y 
to wash. 

Mico, l micare, 5 wm'cm/, 3 — , to glitter. The compound emico has 
3 -atum ; dimico has 2 -avi, 3 -atum. 

Neco, 1 necare, 2 necavi or wecm*, 3 necatum, to kill. Eneco has a -aw, 
3 -atum, or 3 -cwt, 3 ii/m. Internecio has 8 -atum. 

Nexo, 1 nexare, 3 — , 3 — , to bind. 

P&'co, 1 plicare, 2 — , z plicatum, to fold. The compounds, duplico, 
multiplico, replico, and supplico, are regular, and have 2 . But 
applico, implico, complico, and explico, -have -aw or -we in 2 , and 
-atum or f^wm in 3 . 

Pofo, 1 potare, 2 potavi, 3 potatum or potum, to drink. So the com- 
pounds e/?ofo and perpoto, 

Seco, l secare, 3 secui, 3 sectum (part, secaturus), to cut. So circumseco, 
deseco, disseco. interseco, perseco, and reseco. 

JSono, * sonar e, 2 sonui, 3 sonitum (part, sonaturus), to sound. So like- 
wise its compound consono, dissono, &c. 

Sto, J stare, 2 steti, 3 statum, to stand. The compounds of sfo, with 
prepositions of a single syllable, have stiti in a , in place of -steti; 
as, 2 constiti: but when compounded with prepositions of more 
than one syllable, they have in 2 -steti; as, 2 circumstetL 

Tono, 1 tonare, 2 tonui, 3 (tonitum), to thunder. So also circumtono, 
aitono ; but intono has in 3 -atum. « 

F<^o, 1 vetare, 2 vetui or vetavi, z vetitum, to forbid. 

2. SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Habeo is regular, but changes a into t in its compounds ; as, adhibeo. 

Those having the perfect 2 in -vi, instead of vui : — 
Caveo, 1 cavere, 2 cavi, 3 cautum, to take care. So also its compounds. 
Conniveo, l connivere, 2 connivi or connixi, 3 — , to wink at. 
Faveo, 1 favere, 2 favi } *fautum, to favour. 
Foveo, 1 fovere, 2 fovi, 3 fotum, to cherish. 

Moveo, 1 movere, 2 movi, 3 moium, to move. So also its compounds. 
Paveo, l pavere, 2 pavi, 3 — , to fear. 
Voveo, 1 vovere, 2 vovi, 3 votum, to vow. 

Ferveo, 1 fervere, 2 fervi or ferbui, 3 — , to boil. It has also the form 
fervo, l fervt!re, *fervi, of the third conjugation. 



VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION. 297 

Those which have the perfect 2 in -evi, instead of -ui. 
Aboleo, 1 abolere, 2 abolevi, 3 abolitum, to annul. 
Deleo, l delere, 2 delevi, 3 deletum, to destroy. 
Fleo, iflere, 2 flevi, s fletum, to weep. 
Neo, l nere, 2 nevi, 3 netum, to spin. 

(Form pleo obsolete.) Compleo, l complere, 2 complevi, s completum, to 
fill ; and in the like manner of other compounds. 

Those which omit i before turn in the supine : — 

Doceo, 1 docere, 2 docui, 3 doctum, to teach. 

Misceo, 1 miscere, 2 miscui, z mixtum or mistum, to mix. 

Teneo, 1 tenere, 2 tenui, 3 tentum, to hold. The compounds change e 

in l and 2 into «; as, detineo, 1 detinere f 2 detinui, 3 detentum, 
Torreo, I torrere, 2 torrui, 3 tostum, to roast. 

To these may be added, 
Censeo, x censer e, 2 censui, 3 censum (or censitum), to think. So also 

its compounds. 

The following form the perfect regularly in -ui, but have no supine: 

Arceo, to keep off; but the compounds coerceo and ezerceo have a 

supine. 
Calleo, to be hardened. Madeo, to be wet. Sordeo, to be filthy. 

Candeo, to shine Niteo, to shine. Splendeo, to shine, 

i^eo, to want. 0/«o, to smell. Studeo, to study. 

Fmineo, to stand forth. Palleo, to be pale. Stupeo, to be amazed. 
Floreo, to flourish. Pateo, to be open. Timeo, to fear. 

Frondeo, to have leaves. Rigeo, to be stiff. Torpeo, to be torpid. 

ITorreo, to shudder. Rubeo, to be red. Tumeo, to swell. 

Langueo, to be languid. /SYteo, to be silent. "FT^o, to flourish. 

Lateo, to lie hid. Sorbeo, to sip. FVreo, to be green. 

Besides a number of similar verbs derived from adjectives. 

Those which have -si in the perfect, and -sum in the supine : — 
Ardeo, 1 ardere, 3 arsi, 3 arsum, to burn. 

Hcereo, l hcerere, 2 hcesi, 3 hccsum, to stick. So also its compounds. 
Jubeo, l jubere, 2 jussi, 3 jussum,> to command. 
Maneo, l manere, 2 mansi, 3 mansum, to remain. 
Mulceo, 1 mulcere, 2 mulsi, 3 mulsum, to caress. The compounds de- 

mulceo and permulceo have in 3 demulsum or demulctum, permul- 

sum or permul ctum. 
Mulgeo, l mulgere, 2 mwZ« or mulxi, 3 mulsum or mulctum, to milk. 
Hideo, ! rider e, 2 rm, 3 risum, to laugh. 
Suadeo, l suadere, 2 suasi, 3 suasum, to advise. 
Tergeo, l tergere, 2 terse, 2 tersum, to wipe. Used also in the third 

conjugation; as, ter^o, 1 tergere y 2 tersi } 3 tersum. 



298 VERBS — SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Those which have si in the perfect, but have no supine: — 
Algeo, l algere, 2 alsi, to be cold. Turgeo, 2 tursi, to swell. 
Fulgeo, 1 fulgere, 2 fulsi, to shine. Urgeo or urgueo, 2 ursi, to urge. 

The following have -si in the perfect, and -turn in the supine: — 
Indulgeo, 1 indulgere, 2 indulsi, 3 indultum, to indulge. 
Torqueo, x torquere, 2 ^om, 3 tortum, to twist. 

Those which have the perfect in -xi, and the supine in -turn : — 
Augeo, 1 augere, 2 Aim, 3 auctum, to increase. 
Frigeo, 1 frigere, 2 frixi, 3 — , to be cold. 
Luceo, 1 lucere, 2 te«, 3 — , to shine. But the compound polluceo has 

the supine, polluctum. 
Lugeo, 1 lugere, 2 luxi, 3 — , to mourn. 

Those having the perfect in -i, and the supine in -sum : — 
Prandeo, 1 prandere, 2 prandi, 3 pransum, to dine. 

Sedeo, x seder e, 2 sedi, 3 sessum, to sit. Those compounds with a pre- 
position of only one syllable, change e into i in the first principal 

part ; as, insideo, * insidere, 2 insedi, 3 insessum. 
Strideo, J stridere or stridere, 2 stridi, 3 — , to make a piercing noise. 
Video, l videre, 2 vidi, 3 visum, to see. 

Those which have a reduplication in the perfect : — 
Mordeo, 1 mordere, 2 memordi, 3 morsum, to bite. Its compounds drop 

the reduplication in the perfect. 
Pendeo, 1 pendere, 2 pependi, 3 pe?isum, to hang. Its compounds drop 

the reduplication. 
Spondeo, * spondere, 2 spospondi, s sponsum, to vow. Its compounds 

drop the reduplication. 
Tondeo, 1 tondere>, 2 totondi, 3 tonsum, to shear. Its compounds drop 

the reduplication. 
The following have neither perfect nor supine : — 
Aveo, to desire. Glabreo, to be smooth. Mcereo, to mourn. 

Calveo, to be bald. Hebeo, to be dull. Polleo, to be strong. 

Caneo, to be hoary. Humeo, to be moist. Renideo, to shine. 
Clueo, to be famous. Lacteo, to suck, or to Scateo, to gush forth, to 
Denseo, to become be in milk. be plentiful. 

thick. Liveo, to be livid. Squaleo, to be dirty. 

Flaveo, to be yellow. (Mineo) Immineo, to be Vigeo, to flourish. 
Fceteo, to stink. imminent, tothreaten. 

Cieo, 1 ciere, 2 civi, 3 cifum, to excite, has also the form of the fourth 

conjugation, as from cio. 
The following are in part active and in part deponent in form : — • 
Audeo, 1 audere, 2 ausus sum, to dare. 
Gaudeo, l gaudere, 2 gavisus sum, to rejoice. 
Soleo } l solere, 2 solitus sum f to be accustomed. 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION. 299 



3. THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Those verbs, which have a vowel before o of the first person, pre- 
sent tense, including also vo. 

The following have their perfect and supine regular : — 
Acuo, acui, acutum, to sharpen; so also arguo, to convict; imbuo, to 

imbue ; induo, to put on ; luo, to atone ; minuo, to lessen ; nuo 

(obsolete), its compounds are conjugated like it ; ruo, to fall; 

spuo, to spit ; statuo, to establish ; sternuo, to sneeze; suo, to sew; 

iribuo, to ascribe or give to : solvo, to loosen ; volvo, to roll ; 

but congruo, to agree, meluo, to fear, and pluo, to rain, have no 

supine. 

The following are irregular: — 

Capio, l capere, 2 cepi, 3 coptum, to take. So also antecapio. But the 
other compounds change a into i in the first principal part or 
form, and a into e in the second and third principal parts; as, 
decipio, 1 decipere, 2 decepi, 3 deceptum. 

Cupio, 1 cupere, 2 cupivi, 3 cupitum, to desire. 

Facio, l facere, 2 feci, 3 factum, to do, to make. Facio, when compounded 
with any other word than a preposition, remains unchanged in 
the compound ; as, arefacio, l arefacere, 2 arefaci, 3 aref actum — hav- 
ing also fac in the imperative, and fio, fieri, for its passive; — 
but when facio is compounded with a preposition, it changes 
a into i in the first principal part, and a into e in the third 
principal part; as, officio, l officer e, 2 affeci, 3 affectum — impera- 
tive office. They have also a regular passive ; as, afficior y &c. 

Fluo, 1 fluere, 2 fiuxi, z fiuctum, to flow. 

Fodio, ] fodere, 2 fodi, s fossum, to dig. 

Fugio, 1 fugere, 2 fugi, ' 6 fugitum, to flee. 

Jacio, l jacere, 2 jeci, z jactum, to throw. The compounds change a 
into i in the first principal part, and a into e in the third prin- 
cipal part ; as, rejicio, 1 rejicere, 2 reject, 3 rejectum. 

(Lacio, obsolete.) The compounds derived from it change a into t 
in the first principal part ; as, allicio, 1 allicere, 2 allexi, 3 allectum ; 
but elicio has elicui in 2 , and elicitum in 3 . 

Pario, l parere, 2 peperi, s partum 2 to bring forth — future participle, 
pariturus. 

Qaatio, 1 quatere, 2 — , *quassum, to shake. The compounds change 
qua into cu ; as, conditio, 1 concutere, 2 concussi, 2 concussum. 

Rapio, l rapere, 2 rapui, 3 r upturn, to snatch. The compounds change 
a into I in the first knd second principal parts, and a into e in 
the third ; as, arripio, l arripere, 2 arripui, 3 arreptum. So diripio, &e. 



300 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Sapio t 1 sapere, 2 sapivi and sapui, 3 — , to be wise. The compounds 
change a into i ; as, resipio, l resipere, 2 resipui or resipivi, 3 — . 

{Specio, obsolete.) The compounds derived from it change e into i 
in the first principal part ; as,* aspicio, l aspicere, 2 aspexi, 3 aspec- 
turn, to look at. 

Struo, 1 slruere, 2 struxi, 3 structum, to build. 

Vivo, 1 vivere, 2 vixi, z victum, to live. 

Verbs in -DO and -TO 

The following may be considered as regular: — 
Claudo, 1 claudere, 2 clausi, 3 clausum, to close — but its compounds 
change au into u, or rather have the form cludo ; as, concludo, 
1 concludere, 2 conclusi, z conclusum. So also divido, to divide; 
kedo, to injure — its compounds change ce into i; as, illido; — 
ludo, to sport ; plaudo, to applaud — its compounds, except ap- 
plaudo and circumplaudo, change au into a; — rado, to shave; 
rodo, to gnaw — some of the compounds of rodo want the per- 
fect ; — trudo, to thrust ; vado, to go, has neither perfect nor 
supine, but its compounds, except supervado, have the perfect. 

Verbs which are irregular. 

Those having a reduplication in the perfect : — 

Cado, 1 cadere, 2 cecidi, 3 casum, to fall. The compounds change a into t 
in the first part, and drop the reduplication ; as, occido, l occi- 
dere, 2 occidi, 3 occasum. 

Ccedo, l ccedere, 2 cecidi, 3 ccesum, to cut. The compounds change <b 
into i, and drop the reduplication ; as, abscido, 1 abscidere, 2 ab- 
scidi, 3 abscisum. 

Pedo, l pedere, 2 pepedi, ^peditum, to break wind. 

Pendo, 1 pendere, 2 pependi, s pe?isum, to weigh. The compounds lose 
the reduplication. 

Tendo, l tendere, 2 tetendi, 3 tensum or tentum, to stretch. The com- 
pounds lose the reduplication. Extendo, ostendo, protendo, and 
retendo, have both supines. Detendo has only detensum. All the 
other compounds have only the supine -turn. 

Tundo, 1 tundere, 2 tutudi, 3 tunsum and tusum, to beat. The com- 
pounds lose the reduplication, and have mostly tusum in the 
supine. 
To the above, as respects the reduplication, may be added those 
compounds of do, of the first conjugation, that are in the third 
conjugation; as, abdo, 1 abdere 9 2 abdidi, 3 abditum, &c. 
Those which have -di in the perfect, and -sum in the supine: — 

Accendo, 1 accendere, 2 accendi, 3 accensum, to kindle a fire. 

Cudo, 1 cud ere, 2 cudi, 8 cusum, to forge 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION. 301 

Defendo, l defendere, 2 defendi, 3 defensum, to defend. So also offendo. 

Both are derived from the obsolete fendo. 
Fundo, l fimdere, 2 fudi, 3 fusum, to pour. 
Mando, 1 mandere, 2 mandi, 3 mansum, to chew. 
Prehendo or prendo, l prehendere, 2 prehendi, 3 prehensum, to seize. 
Scando, l scandere, 2 scandi, 3 scansum, to climb. The compounds change 

a into e ; as, ascendo. 1 ascendere, ascendi, 3 ascensum. 
Strido, * stridere, 2 s^ncft, 3 — , to creak. 

Those which have other irregularities : — 
Cedo, l cedere, 2 cessi, 3 cessum, to yield. 
Fido, ifidere, 2 fisus sum, to trust. 
Findo, ifindere, 2 fidi, s fi#sum, to split. 
Frendo, 1 frendere i 2 — , z fressum or fresum, to gnash. 
jl/efo, ' metere, 2 messui, 3 messum, to reap. 
Mitto, * mittere, 2 mm, 3 missum, to send. 
Pando, 2 pandere, 2 pandi, 5 passum or pansum, to open. 
Pefo, 1 petere, *petivi, 3 pe(itum, to ask. 
Scindo, x scindere, 2 scidi, 3 scissum, to cut. 
>SWo, J sscfere, 2 sj'g??, 3 — , to settle down. Its compounds mostly have 

Q secft, 3 sessum, from sedeo. 
^5^0, 1 sistere, 2 stiti, 3 statum, to stop. 
Sterto, 1 stertere, 3 stertui, 3 — , to snore. 
F<?r£o, 2 vertere, 2 uerft', 3 versum, to turn. 

Ferfo m -.£0 arcrf -P0. 

The following may be considered as regular : — 

Carpo, l carpere, 2 carpsi, 3 carptum, to pluck. So also glubo, to peel ; 
nw6o, to marry ; re/?o, to creep ; scalpo, to engrave ; scribo, to 
write ; 5erj30, to creep. 

Those that are irregular : — 

The compounds of cubo, to lie, of the first conjugation, which take 
an m, are of the third conjugation ; as, accumbo, l accumbere 9 2 ac* 
cubui, 3 accubitum. 

Bibo, 1 bibere, 2 bibi, 3 bibitum, to drink. 

Lambo, 1 lambere, 2 Iambi, 3 — , to lick. 

Rumpo, 1 rumpere 9 2 rupi, s ruptum, to break. 

Scabo. 1 scabere, 2 scabi, 3 — , to scratch. 

Strepo, l strepere, 2 strepui, s strepitum, to make a noise. 
26 



302 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Verbs in -GO, -CO, CTO, -HO, -QUO, and -GUO. 

The following may be considered as regular : — 
Cingo, l cingere, 2 cinxi, s cinctum, to gird. So also coquo, to cook; 
dico, to say ; duco, to lead ; fligo, to dash (but its compound, 
profiigo, is of the first conjugation); frigo, to roast; jungo, to 
join ; lingo, to lick ; mungo, to blow the nose ; plango, to lament ; 
rego, to rule ; sugo, to suck ; tego, to cover ; tingo or tinguo, to 
dye ; iraho, to draw ; ungo or unguo, to anoint ; veho, to carry. 

Those that take the reduplication in the perfect : — 

Parco, 1 parcere, 2 peperci, 3 parsum, to spare. 2 Par si is rare. Some 
of its compounds change a into e — as, imperco, — and all lose 
the reduplication. 

Pungo, l pungere, *pupugi, 2 punctum, to prick or pierce. Compounds 
lose the reduplication. 

Tango, x tangere, 2 tetigi, 3 (actum, to touch. The compounds change 
a in the first part into *, and lose the reduplication. 

Pango, when used in the sense of "to make a bargain or contract," 
has pepigi in the perfect. But when used in the sense of "to 
drive in," it has l pangere, 2 panxi or pegi, 3 pactum or panctum. 
Some of its compounds change a in the first part into i; as, 
impingo. 
Those that are irregular : — 

Ago, 1 agere, 2 egi, 3 actum, to drive. So also the compounds circum- 
ago, perago, and coago (contracted cogo) ; but the other com- 
pounds change a into i in the first principal part. 

Ango, 1 anger e, 2 anxi, 3 — , to strangle. 

Clango, l clangere, 2 — , 3 — , to clang. 

Dego, l degere, 2 degi, 3 — , to spend, to live. 

Figo, 1 figere, 2 fixi, 3 fixum (fictum), to fix. 

Fingo, l fingere, 2 finxi, 3 fictum, to feign. 

Flecto, 1 flexere, 2 flexi, 3 fiectum, to bend. 

Frango, 1 frangere, 2 fregi, 3 fractum, to break. Its compounds change 
a into i in the first principal part; as, confringo, &c. 

Ico, x icere, 2 ici, z ictum, to strike. 

jLego, J legere, 2 legi, 3 tectum, to read. So also allego, perlego, prcelego, 
relego, sublego, and translego. The other compounds change 
e into i in the first principal part; as, colligo, l colligere, 2 collegi, 
Zcollectum. Diligo, intelligo, snidnegligo, have -lexi in the perfect. 

Linquo, l linquere, 2 liqui, 3 — , to leave. Compounds have -lictum in 
the supine. 

Mergo, 1 mergere, 2 mersi, 3 mersum, to dip. 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION. 303 

Mingo, l mingere, 2 minxi, 3 mictum, to make water. 

Necto, l nectere, 2 next or nexui, z nexum, to bind or knit. 

Ningo, 1 ningere, *ninxi, 3 — , to snow. 

Pecto, 1 pectere, ' 2 pexi, 3 pexum or pectitum, to comb. 

Plecto, 1 fleeter -e, 2 plexi or plexui, 3 plexum, to plait. 

Pingo, 1 pinger e, 2 pinci, 3 pictum, to paint. 

Spargo, l sfargere, 2 sparsi, spar sum, to scatter. Most of its com« 

pounds change a into e; as, respergo, 1 respergere, 2 respeni^ * r&- 

spersum. 
Stringo, 1 stringere, 2 strinxi, 3 strictum, to bind together. 
Tergo, , lergere, 2 tersi, 3 lersum, to wipe. 
Vergo, l verger e, 2 — , 3 — , to incline toward. 
Vinco, x vincere, 2 vtdj 3 viclum, to conquer. 

Fer&s m -ZO, -i/6>, -iW, awe? -RO. 
The following may be considered as regular : — 
Como, 1 comere, 2 compsi, 3 complum, to adorn. So also demo, to take 
away ; promo, to bring out ; sumo, to take ; temno, to despise. 
Those taking the reduplication in the perfect: — 
Cano, 1 canere, 2 cecini, 3 cantum, to sing. The compounds change a 
into i, and drop the reduplication ; as, concino, 1 concinere, 2 con- 
cinui, 3 concentum; so also, accino, incino, intercino, occino, prcecino, 
recino, and succino. 
Curro, l curere, 2 cucuri, 3 cursum, to run. Some of the compounds 

drop the reduplication, while others retain it. 
Fallo, l Jailer e, 2 fefelli, 3 falsum, to deceive. Refello, 2 refelli, 3 — . 
Pello, Speller e, 2 pepuli, 3 pulsum, to drive. Its compounds do not 
take the reduplication. 

Those that are irregular : — 
Alo, l alere, 2 alui, 3 alitum or altum, to nourish. 
Cello (obsolete). From it are the compounds excello, l excellere, 2 cx- 

cellui, 3 excelsum, to excel; antecello, recello, prcecello ; likewise 

percello, 2 perculi, 3 ferculsum. 
Cerno, l cernere, 2 crevi, *cretum, to decree, to see. In the sense of 

"to see," cerno has neither perfect nor supine. 
Colo, 1 colere, 2 colui, 3 cultum. to till. So likewise its compounds ; 

but when compounded with ob, it has the form occulo. 
Consulo, a consulere, 2 consului, 3 consultum, to consult. 
Emo, l emere, 2 emi, 3 emptum, to buy. In the same manner, coemo ; 

but the other compounds change e into i in the first principal 

part ; as, eximo, J eximere, 2 eximi, 3 exemptum. 



304 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Fremo, 1 /remere, 2 fremui, s fremitum, to roar. 

Furo, l fur ere, 2 — , 3 - — , to be mad, to rage. 

Gemo, l gemere, 2 gemui, 3 gemitum, to groan. 

Gero, x gerere, 2 gessi, z gestum, to bear. 

Gigno, l gignere, (from the obsolete geno it has) 2 genui } 3 gentium, to 

beget. 
Lino, x linere, 2 levi or livi, 3 lilum, to smear. 
Molo, l molere, 2 molui, s molitum, to grind. 
Occulo, 1 occulere, 2 occului, 3 occultum, to conceal. 
Pono, l ponere f 2 posui [posivi obsolete), 3 posiium, to place. 
Fremo, Y premere, 2 pressi, B pressum, to press. Its compounds change 

e into i in the first principal part ; as, imprimo, l imprimere, 2 im- 

pressi, 3 impressum. 
Psallo, ipsallere, 2 psalli, 3 — , to play on stringed instruments. 
Qucero, 1 qu&rere, 2 qucesivi, 3 qucesitum, to seek. The compounds 

change ce into i; as, requiro, l rcquirere, 2 requisivi, 3 requisitum. 
Sero, x serere, 2 sevi, 3 satum, to sow. Its compounds have situm in the 

supine. 
Sero, 1 serere, 2 serui, 3 sertum, to entwine. So also its compounds. 
Sino, 1 sinire, 2 sivi, 3 situm, to permit. 
Sperno, l spernere, 2 sprevi, 3 spretum, to despise. 
Sterno, 1 sternere, 2 stravi, 3 stratum, to strew, 
^ro, * terere, 2 trivi, 3 tritum, to rub. 
Tremo, l tremere, 2 tremui, 3 — , to tremble, 
t/ro, x wrere, 2 ussi, 3 ustum, to burn. 
FeZZo, x vellere 9 2 velli or uwZsi, 3 vulsum, to pluck. 
F<?7T0, * verrere, 2 versi, 3 versum, to sweep out. 
Fbmo, * vomere, 2 vomui, 3 vomitum, to vomit. 

Feres w -50 awtf -X0. 
Arcesso, 1 arcessere, 2 arcessivi, 3 arcessitum, to summon. 
Capesso, 1 capessere, 2 capessivi, 3 capessitum, to undertake, 
Depso, l depsere, 2 depsui, 3 depstum or depsitum, to knead. 
Facesso, 1 facessere, *facessi, *facessitum, to execute. 
Incesso, 1 incessere, 2 incessivi or incessi, 3 — , to attack. 
Lacesso, 1 lacessere, 2 lacessivi, 3 lacessitum, to provoke. 
Pinso, l pinsere> 2 pinsui or jomsi, 3 pinsitum, pistum, or pinsum f to 

pound. 
T^xo, * tezere, 2 texto/, 3 textum, to weave. 
Fwo, x w'w r«, 2 vim, 8 — , to visit. 



VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION. 305 

Verbs in -SCO t not properly Inceptives, 
Compesco, 1 compescere, 2 compescui, 3 — , to restrain. 
Cresco, l crescere, 2 crevi, 3 cretum, to grow. 
Disco, 1 discere, 2 didici, 3 — , to learn. 
Dispesco, l dispescere, 2 dispescui, 3 — , to divide. 
Glisco, x gliscere, 2 — , 3 — , to grow. 
Hisco, hiscere, 2 — , 3 — , to gape. 
Nosco, 1 noscere, 2 novi, z notum (noscitum), to know. G is inserted 

before n in many of the compounds ; as, agnosco. 
Pasco, 1 pascere, 1 pavi, 3 pastum, to feed. 
Quiesco, 1 quiescere, x quievi, 3 quietum, to rest. 
Scisco, 1 sciscere, 2 scivi, 3 scitum, to ordain. 
Suesco, 1 suescere. 2 suevi, 3 suetum, to be accustomed. 

[NCEPTIVES 

Inceptives in -sco are chiefly formed from verbs of the second con- 
jugation by changing -o into -sco ; as, calesco, 2 calescere, 3 calui, to 
grow warm — from caleo, 1 calere, 2 calui, to be warm. The perfect 
tense being always the same as the perfect of the verb from which the 
inceptive is derived, so also the supine, when there is one. These 
are termed verbal inceptives. Inceptives are also sometimes formed 
from nouns and adjectives, and are termed nominal inceptives. They 
are conjugated like verbal inceptives ; as, maturesco, 1 malurescere, 
2 maturui, to grow ripe — from maturus, ripe. 

Verbal Inceptives, having only the Perfect of the simple Verb. 

Acesco (aceo), 2 acui, to grow sour. Excandesco (candeo), 2 excandui, to 

Albesco (albeo)j 2 albui, to grow become a white heat. 

white. Extimesco (timeo), 2 extimui, to fear 

Aresco (areo), 2 ami, to grow dry. greatly. 

Calesco (caleo), 2 calui, to become Floresco (floreo), 2 efflorui, to begin 
warm. to flourish. 

Canesco (caneo), 2 canui, to become Hozresco (hcereo), 2 hozsi, to ad- 
gray, here. 

Conticesco (taceo), 2 conticui, to be- Horresco (horreo), 2 horrui, to be- 
come silent. come rough. 

Contremisco (tremo), 2 contremui, to Ingemisco (gemo), Hngemui, to groan, 
tremble. Intumesco (tumeo), 2 intumui, to swell 

Vefervesco (ferveo), 2 deferbui, to up. 

lose heat; Irraucisco (raucio), 2 irrausi, to be- 

Velitesco (lateo), 2 delitui, to lurk. come hoarse. 

Effervesco {ferveo ), 2 efferbui, to Languesco (langueo), 2 langui, to 
grow hot. grow languid. 

26* 



306 VERBS — THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Liquesco (liqueo), 2 licui, to become Rubesco (rubeo), 2 rubui, to grow 

liquid. red. 

Madesco (madeo), 2 madui, to be- Senesco (seneo), 2 senui, to grow 

come wet. old. 
Marcesco (mar ceo), 2 marcui, to pine Stupesco (stupeo), 2 stupui, to be- 
away, come astonished. 
Occallesco(caUeo), 2 occallui, to be- Tabesco (tabeo), 2 tabui, to waste 

come callous. away. 

Pallesco (palleo), 2 pallui, to turn Tepesco (tepeo), 2 tepui, to grow 

pale. warm. 

Palesco (pateo), 2 patui, to be open. Valesco (valeo), 2 valui, to become 

Putresco (putreo), 2 putrui, to be- strong. 

come putrid. Viresco (vireo), 2 virui, to grow 

Resipisco (sapio), 2 resipui, to re- green. 

cover wisdom. 

Verbal Inceptives, having the Perfect and Supine of the simple Verb, 

Coalesco (coaleo), 2 coalui, z coalitum, to grow together. 

Concupisco (cupio), 2 concupivi, 3 concupitum, to desire. 

Convalesco (valeo), 2 convalui, z conv allium, to recover health. 

Exardesco (ardeo), 2 exarsi, 3 exarsum, to be inflamed. 

Indolesco (doleo), 2 indolui, 3 indolitum, to feel pain. 

Inveterasco (invetero), 2 inveteravi, 3 inveteratum, to grow old. 

Obdormisco (dormio), 2 obdormivi, 3 obdormitum, to fall asleep. 

From olesco (oleo), scarcely used, are formed: abolesco, 2 abolevi, 
3 abolitum ; adolesco, 2 adolevi, 3 adultum ; exolesco, 2 exolevi, 3 ezo- 
letum ; inolesco, 2 inolevi, z inolitum; obsolesco, 2 obsolevi, 3 obsoletum. 

Revivisco (vivo), *revixi, 3 revictum, to recover life. 

Nominal Inceptives, without a Perfect. 

JEJgresco (ceger), to grow sick. Mitesco (mitk), to grow mild. 
Ditesco [dives), to grow rich. Mollesco (mollis), to grow soft. 

Dulcesco (dulcis), to grow sweet. Pinguesco (pinguis), to grow fat. 
Grandesco (grandis), to grow large. Plumesco (pluma), to get feathers. 
Gravesco (gravis), to grow heavy. Puerasco (puer), to become a boy. 
Incur vesco (cur vus), to bee. crooked. Sterilesco (sterilis), to bee. barren. 
Integrasco (integer), to be renewed. Teneresco and tenerasco (tener), tc 
luvenesco (juvenis), to grow young. become tender. 

Nominal Inceptives, with a Perfect. 

Crebresco (creber), *crebui or crebrui, to increase. 
Duresco (durus), 3 durui, to grow hard. 
Evanesco (vanus), a evanui, to disappear. 
Innotesco (notus) t *innotui, to become known. 



VERBS — FOURTH CONJUGATION. 307 

Macresco (macer), *macrui, to grow lean. 
Mansuesco (mansuetus), 3 mansuevi, to grow tame. 
Maturesco (maturus), *maturui, to grow ripe. 
Nigresco (niger), 3 nigrui, to grow black. 
Obmutesco (mutus), 2 obmutui, to become dumb. 
Obsurdesco (sureties), *obsurdui, to become deaf. 
Recrudesco (crudus), 2 recrudui, to open again (of a wound). 
Vilesco (yilis), *vilui, to become cheap. 

4. FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

The desiderative verbs in -urio want both the second and third 
principal parts ; but -esurio has 2 -esurivi, participle -esuriturus. Nup- 
turio and parturio have the perfect or second principal part, but no 
supine or third principal part. 

The following verbs are those which do not conform to the regular 
forms 1 -ir, 2 -ivi, 3 -itum : — 

Amicio, l amicire, 2 amicui or amixi, 3 amictum, to clothe. 
Aperio, 1 aperire, 2 aperui, 3 apertum, to open. So also operio and co- 

operio ; but comperio and reperio have i in the perfect, in place 

of ui. 
Bullio, 1 bullire, 2 bullii, 3 bullitum, to bubble. 
Coecutio, 1 ccecutire, 2 — , 3 — , to be dim-sighted. 
Cambio, 1 cambire, 2 camp si, 3 — , to exchange. 
Dementio, 1 dementire, 2 — , 3 — , to be mad. 
Farcio, l farcire, 2 farsi, 3 fartum or far ciium, to cram. The compounds 

generally change a into e. 
Ferio, 1 ferire, 2 — , 3 — , to strike. 
Ferocio, 1 ferocire, 2 — , 3 — , to be fierce. 
Fulcio, ] fulcire, 2 fulsi, s fultum, to prop. 
GanniOy x gannire, a — , 3 — , to bark. 
Glocio, 1 glocire, 2 — , 3 — , to cluck (as a hen). 
Grandio, 1 grandire, 2 — , 3 — , to make great. 
Haurio, 1 haurire, 2 hausi, 3 haustum, to draw out. 
JSinnio, 1 hinnire, 2 — , 3 — , to neigh. 
Ineptio, l ineptire, 2 — , 3 — , to trifle. 
Lascivio, 1 lascivire, 2 lascivii, 3 lascivitum, to be wanton. 
Prurio, 1 prurire, 2 — , 3 — , to itch. 
Raucio, 1 raucire, 2 rausi, 3 rausum, to be hoarse. 
Rugio, 1 rugire, 2 — , 3 — , to roar (as a lion). 
Sagio, 1 sagire, 2 — , 3 — , to perceive keenly. 
Salio, l salire, 2 salui or salii, 3 sultum, to leap. The compounds change 

a into i. 
Sancio, l sanci^e } *sanxi* z sancitum or sanctum, to ratify. 



308 



VERBS — DEPONENTS. 



Sarcio, 1 sarcire, 2 sarsi, 3 sartum, to patch. 

Sarrio, * sarrire, 2 sarrivi or sarrui, 3 sarritum, to weed. 

Scaturio, 1 scaturire, * — , 3 — , to gush out. 

Sentio, l se?itire, 2 sensi, 3 sensum, to feel. 

Sepelio, 1 sepelire, 2 sepelivi or sepelii, 3 sepultum, to bury. 

Sepio, 1 sepire, 2 sepsi, 3 septum, to hedge in, 

Singultio, x singultire, 2 — , 3 — , to hiccup, 

Tussio, l tussire, 2 — , 3 — , to cough. 

Venio, 1 venire, 2 veni, 3 venturn, to come. 

Vincio, x vincire, 2 vmxz, 3 vinctum, to bind. 



DEPONENT VERBS. (E. 145.) 

1. First Conjugation. 

Deponent verbs of the first conjugation are regular ; as, cono i cv 
nari, conatus sum, to endeavour : — 

Abominor, to abhor. Calumnior, to cavil. Depeculor, to plunder. 
Adhortor, to encourage. Cauponor, to deal,retail.Z>^recor, to deprecate. 



Admiror, to admire. 
Adversor, to oppose. 
Adulor, to flatter. 
JEmulor, to rival. 
Alucinor, to talk idly. 



Despicor, to despise. 
Detestor, to imprecate, 

to detest. 
Deversor, to lodge. 
Digladior, to fight. 



Causor, to allege. 

Cavillor, to ridicule. 

Circulor, to form a 
circle round one. 

Comissor, to feast. 
Amplexor, to embrace. Comitor, to accompany. Dignor, to deem worthy, 
Ancillor, to be a hand- Commentor, to reflect Dominor, to rule. 

maid. on. Epulor, to feast. 

Apricor, to sun oneself. Commiseror, to pity. Execror, to execrate. 
Aquor, to fetch water. Concionor,to harangue. Exhortor, to exhort. 

Confabulor, to coiiYGrsQExpatior, to deviate, 
together. Fabricor, to fashion. 

Conor, to endeavour. Fabulor, to talk. 

Cansilior, to advise, 

Conspicor, to see. 



Arbitror, to think. 

Architector, to build. 

Argumentor, to prove. 

Argutor, to chatter. 

Aspernor, to despise. 

Assector, to accompany. Consector, to pursue. 

Assentor, to agree. Contemplor, to con- 

Auctionor f to sell at plate. 

auction. Convicior, to revile. 

Aucupor, to catch birds. Convivor, to feast. 
Augur or, to practice Cornicor, to chatter 
(as a crow). 

Criminor, to accuse. 

Cunctor, to delay. 

Dedignor, to disdain. 

Dehortor, to dissuade. 

Demiror, to wonder at. 



soothsaying. 
Auspicor, to practice 

soothsaying. 
Auxilior, to help, 
.^versor, to dislike, 
Bacchor, to revel. 



Famulor, to serve. 

Feneror, to lend on in- 
terest. 

Ferior, to keep holiday. 

Frumentor, to forage. 

Frustror, to disappoint 

Furor, to steal. 

Glorior, to boast. 

Grcecor, to live like a 
Greek. 

Grassor, to stride for- 
ward. 

Gratificor, to comply 
with. 



VERBS DEPONENTS. 



309 



Oratulor and Gralor, 
too give thanks. 

Hariolor, to practice 
soothsaying. 

Helluor, to gluttonize. 

Hortor, to encourage. 

Hospitor, to be a guest. 

Imaginor, to imagine. 

Imitor, to imitate. 

Imprecor, to imprecate. 

Jndignor, to disdain. 

lnfitior, to deny. 

Insector, to run after. 

Insidior, to plot. 

Interpreter, to explain. 

Jaculor, to hurl. 

Jocor, to jest. 

Lcetor, to rejoice. 

Lamentor, to lament. 

Lignor, to gather wood. 

Latrocinior, to rob. 

Lenocinor, to flatter. 

Libidinor, to be volup- 
tuous. 

Licitor, to bid at auc- 
tion. 

Lucror, to gain. 

Luctor, to wrestle. 

Ludificor, to ridicule. 

Machinor, to devise. 

Materior, to fell timber. 

Medicor, to heal. 

Meditor, to meditate. 

Mercor, to buy. 

Meridior, to repose at 
noon. 

Metor, to measure out. 

Minor and Minitor, to 
threaten. 

Miror, to wonder. 

Miser or, to pity. 

Moderor, to restrain, 
to govern. 

Modulor, to modulate. 

Morigeror, to comply. 



Moror, to delay. 

Muneror, to reward. 

Mutuor, to borrow. 

Negotior, to traffic. 

Nidulor, to build a nest. 

Nugeor, to trifle. 

Nundinor, to sell openly, 

Nutricor, to nourish. 

Obsonor, to cater. 

Obtestor, to beseech. 

Odoror, to smell. 

Ominor, to prophesy. 

Operor, to work. 

Opinor, to think. 

Opitulor, to help. 

Oscitor, to yawn. 

Osculor, to kiss. 

0^'or, to be at leisure. 

Pabalor, to graze. 

Palor, to wander about. 

Parasitor, to act the pa- 
rasite. 

Patrocinor, to patronize 

Percontor, to inquire. 

Peregrinor, to be a 
stranger. 

Periclitor, to try. 

Perscrutor, to search. 

Philosophor, to philo- 
sophise. 

Pigneror, to take a 
pledge. 

Pigror, to be idle. 

Piscor, to fish. 

Populor, to lay waste. 

Prcedor, to plunder. 

Prcestolor, to wait for. 

Prcevaricor, to act dis- 
honestly. 

Precor, to pray. 

Proelior, to fight. 

Ratiocinor, to reason. 

Recordor, to recollect. 

Refragor, to oppose. 

Remuneror, to reward. 



Rimor, to search. 
Rixor, to wrangle. 
Rusiicor, to live in the 
country. 

Scitor and Sciscitor, to 

inquire. 
.Scrutor, to search. 

Sector, to follow. 

Sermocinor, to hold a 
discourse. 

Solor, to comfort. 

Spatior, to walk about. 

Speculor, to spy out. 

Stipulor, to bargain. 

Stomachor, to be indig- 
nant. 

Suavior, to kiss. 

Suffragor, to assent to. 

Suffuror, to steal. 

Suspicor, to suspect. 

Tergiversor, to tergiver- 
sate. 
.Testor and testificor, to 
testify. 

Tricor, to make diffi- 
culties. 

Tristor, to be sad. 

Trutinor, to weigh. 

Tumultuor, to make an 
uproar. 

Tutor, to defend. 

TJrinor, to dip or plunge 
under water. 

Fzafor, to summon to 
trial. 

Vagor, to wander. 

Vaticinor, to foretell. 

Velificor, to steer to- 
wards. 

Velitor, to skirmish. 

Ferceror, to venerate. 

Fmor, to hunt. [ful. 

Verecundor, to be bash- 

F?rsor, to be employed. 

Vociferor, to vociferate. 



310 VERBS — DEPONENTS. 

2. Deponents of the Second Conjugation. 
Fateor, fassus sum, to confess. The compounds change a into i in 

the first principal part, and a into e in the second principal part; 

as, confiteor, confessus sum ; so diffiteor and profiteor. 
Liceor, licitus sum, to bid a price. 
Medeor, to cure, wants the participle. 
Mereor, meritus sum, to deserve. So likewise its compounds com* 

mereor, demereor, and promereor. 
Misereor, miseritus or misertus sum, to pity. 
Polliceor, pollicitus sum, to promise. 
Reor, ratus sum, to think. 

Tueor, tuitus sum, to protect. So contueor, intueor. 
Vereor, veritus sum, to fear. So its compounds revereor, subvereor. 

3. Deponents of the Third Conjugation. 

Apiscor, aptus sum, to get. Its compounds change a into i in the 

first principal part, and into e in the third ; as, adipiscor, adep- 

tus sum ; so indipiscor. 
Defetiscor, defessus sum, to be weary. 
Expergiscor, experrectus sum, to awake. 
Fruor, fruitus or fructus sum, to enjoy. 

Fungor, functus sum, to perform. So the compounds defungor, confungor, 
Gradior, gressus sum, to walk. The compounds change a into e ; as, 

aggredior, congredior, digredior, egredior, ingredior, progredior, 

regredior. 
lrascor, to be angry. 
Labor, lapsus sum, to fall. 
Liquor, to melt. 
Jjoquor, locutus sum, to speak. So also the compounds alloquor, col- 

loquor, eloquor, interloquor, obloquor. 
Miniscor (obsolete). Comminiscor, commentus sum, to invent. Re* 

miniscor has no perfect. 
Morior, mortus sum, to die. So commorior, demorior, emorior. 
Nanciscor, nactus or nanctus sum, to obtain. 
Nascor, natus sum (nasciturus), to be born. So its compounds enascor t 

innascor, renascor. 
Nitor, nisus or nixus, to strive. So adnitor 9 enitor, obnitor. 
Obliviscor, oblitus sum, to forget. 
Paciscor, pactus sum, to bargain. So depaciscor, 
Patior, passus sum, to suffer. 
Perpetior, perpessus sum, to endure. 



VERBS — DEFECTIVES. 311 

(From plecto, to twine) amplector, amplexus sum, to embrace. So 

complector and circump lector. 
Proficiscor, profectus sum, to depart. 
Queror, questus sum, to complain. So conqueror. 
Ring or, to snarl. 
Sequor, secutus sum, to follow. So assequor, consequor, ezsequor, in- 

sequor, obsequor, persequor, prosequor, subsequor. 
Ulciscor, ultus sum, to revenge. 
Utor, usus sum, to use. So abutor. 
(From veho) circumvehor, circumvectus sum, to travel round. So in- 

vehor and prcetervehor. 
Vescor, to eat. 

4. Deponents of the Fourth Conjugation. 
Assentior, assensus sum, to assent. 
Blundior, blanditus sum, to flatter. 
Experior, expertus sum, to experience or to try. So also comperior, 

bat only in the present tense. 
Largior, largitus sum, to give or to bestow. 
Mentior, mentitus sum, to lie. 

Metior, mensus sum, to measure. So also dimetior, emetior, permetior. 
Molior, molitus sum, to strive, to toil. So also amolior, demolior. 
Opperior, oppertus sum, to wait for. 
Ordior, orsus sum, to begin. So exordior, redordior. 
Orior, ortus sum, to rise or spring up. So also coorior and exorior. 
[Perior, obsolete.) Experior, expertus sum, to try; opperior, oppertus 

or opperitus sum, to wait for. 
Partior, partitus sum, to divide. So also dispertior and impertior. 
Potior, potitus sum, to obtain. 
Sortior, sortitus sum, to cast lots. 

DEFECTIVE VERBS. (E. 231.) 
1. The Parts of AIO, I say or affirm, that are used, are: — 

(1) Aio[l], ais[2J, ait [3], — [pi. 1], — [pi 2], aiunt [pi. 3]. 

(2) Aiebara [1], aiebas [2], aiebat [3] ; aiebamus [pi. 1], aieba- 

tis [pi. 2], aiebant[pl. 3]. 
Bb, (1) — [1], aias [2], aiat [3] ; — [pi. 1], — [pi. 2], aiant [pi. 3]. 
im.AI[2],-[3]; - [pi. 2], - [pi. 3]. 
(1) Aiens [part.]. 

The comic writers use in the imperfect aibam, &c. Ain is used 
for ais ne or aisne. 



312 VERBS — DEFECTIVES. 

1NQUAM, I say. 

(1) In^uam [1], inquis [2], inquit [3] ; inquimus [pi. 1], inquitis 

[pi. 2], inquiunt Tpl. 3]. 

(2) — [1], — [2], inquiebat [3] ; — [pi. 1], — [pi. 2], inquiebant 

[pi. 3]. 

(3) — [1], inquies [2], inquiet [3] ; — [pi. 1], — [pi 2], — [pi. 3]. 

(4) — [1], inquisti [2], inquit [3] ; — [pi 1], — [pi. 2], — [pi. 3]. 
sb. (1) — [1], inquias [2], inquiat [3] ; — [pi. 1], inquiatis [pi. 2], 

inquiant [pi. 3]. 
im. Inque [2], inquito [3] ; inquite [pi. 2], — [pi. 3], 

3. FABI, to speak. 
(1) - [1], - [2], fatur [3] ; - [pi. 1], - [pi. 2], - [pi. 3]. 

(3) Fabor [1], — [2], fabitur [3]. 

(4) Fatus est [3]. 

(5) Fatus eram [1]. 
im. Fare [2]. 

in. (1) Fari or farier; (1) fans [part.] ; (4) fatus [part] ; (3) fan- 

dus [part.] 
G. Fandi [ger.] ; ab. fando [ger.]. 

This defective verb has also the compounds affari, effari, interfari, 
prcefari, profari. 

4. MEMINI, I remember. 

(4) Memini [1], meministi [2], meminit [3] ; meminimus [pi. 1], 

meministis [pi. 2], meminerunt [pi. 3]. 

(5) Memineram [1], memineras [2], meminerat [3] ; memineramus 

[pi. 1], memineratis [pi. 2], meminerant [3]. 

(6) Meminero [1], memineris [2], meminerit [3] ; meminerimus 

[pi. 1], memineritis [pi. 2], meminerint [pi. 3]. 
sb. (4) Meminerim [1], memineris [2], meminerit [3] ; meminerimus 

[pi. 1], memineritis [pi. 2], meminerint [pi. 3]. 
sb. (5) Meminessem [1], meminesses [2], meminesset [3] ; memines- 

semus [pi. 1], meminesetis [pi. 2], meminessent [pi. 3]. 
im. Memento [2], — [3] ; mementote [pi. 2], — [pi. 3]. 
in. (4) Meminisse. 

5. CCEPI, I have begun. 
Ccepi is conjugated like memini, but has no imperative. It has, 
however, the future participle cozpturus, and the perfect c&ptus. 

6. NO VI, I know. 
Novi is conjugated like memini, only it has no imperative. 



VERBS — DEFECTIVES. 8 13 

7. ODI, I hate. 

Odi is conjugated like memini, but has no imperative. It has the 
future participle osurus, and the perfect osus. 

3. Quceso, I beseech. 
(1) Qaaeso[l], — [2], — [3]; qugesumus [pi. 1], — [pi. 2], — [pi. 3]. 

9. AVE, hail. 
im. Ave or aveto [2] ; avete or avetote [pi. 2], in. (2) Avere. 

10. SALVE, hail 

(1) Salveo [1]. (6) Salvebis [2]. in. (1) Salvere. 
im. Salve or salveto [2] ; salvete or salvetote [pi. 2], 

11. im. APAGE, bego?ie[2], 

12. CEDO, tell, give. 

im. Cedo [2], — [3] ; cette [pi. 2], for cedite. 

13. CONFIT, it is done. 

(1) Count [3]. (3) Confiet [3]. 

sb. (1) Confiat [3]. (2) Confieret [3]. in. (1) Confieri. 

14. DEFIT, it is wanting. 

(1) Dent [3] ; defiunt [pi. 3]. (3) Defiet [3]. sb. (1) Defiat 
in. (1) Defieri. 

15. INFIT, he begins. 
(1) Infit [3] ; infiunt [pi. 3]. 

16. OVAT, he rejoices. 

(1 ) Ovat [3J. sb. (1) Ovet [3]. (3) Ovaret [3]. 

(1) Ovans [part.]. (4) Ovatus [part] (3) Ovaturus [part.] 

gen. Ovandi [ger.]. 

17. FOREM, I should be. 

sb. (2) Forem [1], fores [2], foret [3] ; — [pi. 1], — [pi. 2], forent 

[pi. 3]. " 
in. (3) Fore. 

27 



314 IMPERSONAL VERBS — DERIVATION OF NOUNS. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. (E. 239.) 

1. Those generally considered as proper impersonal verbs are: — 
Oportet, it behoves ; pudet, it shames me, or I am ashamed ; tcedet, it 
disgusts me ; miseret, it pities me, or I pity ; piget, it grieves me ; 
poenitet, it repents ; libet, it pleases ; licet, it is permitted ; decet, it 
becomes : liquet, it is evident. (The four last occur also in the thirl 
person plural.) 

2. To the above may be added verbs signifying the state of the 
weather or of the atmosphere, or the operations of nature ; as, pluit, 
it rains ; grandinat, it hails ; tonat, it thunders ; ningit, it snows ; 
gelat, it freezes ; lapidat, it rains stones ; fulget, fulgurat, and ful- 
minat, it lightens ; lucescit and illucescit, it dawns ; vesperascit, adves- 
perascit, and invesperascit, the evening approaches. 

8. Many verbs are used occasionally in the third person as imper- 
sonals ; as, from delecto, I delight, is formed the impersonal delectat, 
it delights. 

4. A great many verbs are used impersonally in the passive ; as, 
pugnatur, it is fought. 

5. As impersonal verbs are not used in the imperative, they take 
the subjunctive in place thereof; as, delectet, let it delight you. 

DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION OF NOUNS, 
ADJECTIVES, AND VERBS. 

DERIVATION OF NOUNS. 
Derivation of Nouns from other Nouns. 

1. Diminutives are generally denoted by the terminations -ulus t 
-ula, -ulum, or in other cases by -cuius, -cula, -culum : each of the three 
according to the gender of the primitive word. These terminations 
are added to the primitive word, after the removal of the oblique 
cases; as, virga, a rod — virgula, a little rod; rex (regis), a king — 
regulus, a little king. -Olus, -ola, -olum, is used for -ulus, -ula, -ulum, 
when the termination -us, -a, -urn, of the primitive word, is preceded 
by i; as, filius — filiola. Some diminutives end m-ellus; as, libra — 
libellus. Others in -iculus ; as, pons — ponticulus. A few end in 
-uleus ; as, equus — equuleus. Some few also in -to ; as, homo — ho- 
muncio. 

2. Augmentatives end in o, or have o added to the primitive 
word ; as, naso, one who has a large nose — from nasus, a nose. 

3. The termination -to often denotes the trade or profession of a 
person ; as, ludio, an actor — from ludus, a play 



DERIVATION OF NOUNS. 315 

4. Ium, added to the primitive word, denotes the office of the 
thing signified by it, and also the persons exercising such office col- 
lectively; as, collegium, an assembloge of men having some object 
or exercising some function ; also, the members of such assemblage. 
When ium is added to verbals in -or it denotes the place where the 
action is done ; as, repositorium, a repository. 

5. Arium denotes a receptacle ; as, granarium, a granary. 

6. Etum added to the names of plants denotes a place where they 
grow in abundance ; as, from quercus, the oak, quercetum, a planta- 
tion of oaks. 

7. lie added to the names of animals denotes the place in which 
they are kept ; as, bovile, a stall for oxen. 

8. Patronimics are names derived from a father, an ancestor, or 
the founder of a nation. They are properly Greek nouns. Mascu- 
culine patronimics end in -ides, -ades, -iades ; as, Piramus — Pri- 
amides, the descendents or sons of Priam. 

The feminine patronimics end in -is, ~eis, -ias ; as, Nereus (mascu- 
line), Nereides (feminine) — Nereis. 

Derivation of Nouns from Adjectives. 

Abstract nouns are formed by adding various terminations to the 
primitive word ; as, 

1. ltas, equivalent to the English termination "ty" or "ity", is 
added to adjectives of each declension ; as, from cupidus, desirous, 
covetous, is formed cupiditas, cupidity. 

2. Etas is added to the primitive when terminating in •; as, pius, 
pious — pietas, piety. 

3. Stas is added in place of -stus ; as, honesius, honest — honestas, 
honesty. 

4. la, in signification like the English "ce" or "cy", is added 
to the primitives of adjectives of one termination in the nominative 
singular for all the genders ; as, clemens, clement — dementia, cle- 
mency, la is also added to some adjectives in -us and -er. 

5. Itudo is added to the primitives of adjectives in -us, and some- 
times to adjectives of the third declension of two or three termina- 
tions ; as, alius, high — altitudo, height ; fortis, strong — fortitudo, 
fortitude. Udo is generally added to polysyllabic adjectives in -tus ; 
as, consuetus — consuetudo. 

6. Monia is added to some adjectives ; as, acer, acrid — acrimonia, 
acrimony. 

7. Itia and (ties sometimes occur, added to adjectives in -us and 
-is ; as, Justus, just — justitia, justice. 

8. Edo is sometimes found added to adjectives ; as, dulcis, sweet— 
dulcedo, sweetness. 



316 DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION OF NOUNS. 

Derivation of Nouns from Verbs. 

1. Or, added to the third principal part of the verb, (that is, in 
place of the supine in -um,) denotes the male performing the action 
implied by the verb; as, auditum, a hearing — auditor, a (male) au- 
ditor. Rix, added in the same manner, denotes the female ; as, au- 
ditrix, a (female) auditor. Some few substantives in -tor are formed 
from nouns ; as, janua, a door — Janitor, a door-keeper. 

2. But or, when added to the first principal part of the verb, espe- 
cially of intransitives, denotes the action or condition expressed by 
the verb ; as, amo, I love — amor, love. 

3. The terminations -to (gen. -ionis) and -us (gen. -tis), when added 
to the third principal part, form abstract nouns; as, from ledum is 
formed lectio, reading. 

4. TJra, added to the third principal part, had sometimes the 
same meaning as the terminations -io and -us; and sometimes it de- 
notes the result of the action ; as, vinctura, a binding. 

6. The termination -ela has often the same meaning as the termi- 
nation -ura ; as, loquela, speech. So likewise the termination -imonia 
or -imonium. 

6. The termination -men or -mentum, added to the first principal 
part, denotes the thing to which the action belongs; as, from fluere, 
to flow, is derived f.umen, a river. 

7. The terminations -ulum, -bulum, -culum, -brum, -crum, and -trum, 
added to the first principal part, denote the instrument or place for 
performing the action; as, jaculum, a javelin — from jacio, I throw. 
(Culum is sometimes contracted into clum.) 

8. lum, added to the first or third principal part, denotes the 
effect of the verb and the place of action ; as, gaudium, joy ; comiti- 
am.. the place of assemblage of the Comitia. 

9. A and o, added to the first principal part of some verbs, denote 
the subject of the action ; as, conviva, a guest. 

10. Igo or ido, added to the first principal part of a verb, denotes 
some state or condition ; as, origo, origin. 

COMPOSITION OF NOUNS. 

1. The Latin language, though destitute of the power of forming 
compound words like the Greek and some other languages, yet has 
many compound words and compound nouns. 

2. Two nouns are sometimes compounded together to form a 
noun ; as, rupicapra, a wild goat — from rupes, a rock, and capra, a 
goat: the connecting vowel of the two words being here i; but 



UKRIVATION OF ADJECTIVES, 317 

sometimes the first word is in the genitive ; as, jurisconsultus, a 
lawyer. In some other compounds both words are declined ; as, 
respublica, the republic — gen. reipublicce, of the republic ; &c. 

3. An adjective and a noun are sometimes compounded together 
to form a noun; as, cequinoctium, the equinox — from cequus, equal, 
and noz, night. 

4. An adverb and a noun are sometimes compounded together to 
form a noun; as, nefas, wickedness — from ne, not, and fas, what is 
right or allowed. 

5. Prepositions and nouns are compounded together; as, incuria, 
want of care — from in and cura. 

DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 
Derivation of Adjectives from Nouns. 

1. The termination -eus, added to the noun, denotes the material 
of which any thing is made ; also sometimes similarity ; as, ligneus, 
wooden. Some adjectives of this kind have a double form in -neus 
and -nus ; as, eburneus and eburnus, of ivory. 

2. The terminations -ahs, -aris, -anus, -ilis, -atilis, -ictus, -icus, -ius, 
-eus, and -inus, generally denote belonging or relating to a person or 
thing ; as, civicus, relating to a citizen ; consularis, consular, or apper- 
taining to a consul. 

3. Arius denotes some general relation to what the noun expresses, 
but more particularly, with faber understood, it denotes the occupa- 
tion, trade, or profession of a person ; as, argentarius, a silversmith. 

4. The terminations -osus and -lentus denote fulness or abundance; 
as, aquosus, watery, or abounding in water; opulentus, opulent, or 
abounding in wealth. Otfus is added to nouns of the fourth declen- 
sion. Lentus takes the connecting vowel u or o before it. 

5. A great many adjectives, though formed from nouns, have end- 
ings like perfect participles, and generally denote furnished with or 
having ; as, barbatus, bearded, or having a beard. 

6. The terminations -ianus and -anus, are generally used to form 
adjectives from Roman names ; and -eus or -inus from Greek names ; 
as, Marcellianus, Philippeus. 

7. The terminations -ensis, -inus, -as, and -anus, are generally 
used to form adjectives from Roman names of places, especially of 
towns ; as, from Catina, Catinensis. Adjectives from Greek names 
of places are formed differently, but often in -ius and -ceus ; as, 
Rhodius. 

8. The terminations -icus and -ius are generally used to form 
adjectives from names of nations ; as, Brilannicus, from Britannus. 

27 * 



318 COMPOSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 

Derivation of Adjectives from other Adjectives. 

1. Diminutives are formed from adjectives by the terminations 
-ulus, -olns, -cuius, and -ellus, in the same manner as for nouns ; as, 
lentulus, a little slow. Diminutives are sometimes used with com- 
paratives ; and sometimes there are double diminutives. 

2. The termination -aneus, added to some few adjectives, denotes 
a resemblance to the quality expressed by the adjective ; as, super 
vacaneus, of a superfluous nature. 

Derivation of Adjectives from Verbs. 

1. Bundus, added to the first principal part of the verb, has in 
general the meaning of the present tense ; but mostly in a strength- 
ened sense ; as, errabundus, erring ; mirabundus, full of admiration. 
Cundus has a similar meaning ; as, facundus, eloquent. 

2. Idus denotes the quality expressed by the verb, and is princi- 
pally added to neuter verbs; as, madidus, wet — from madere, to be 
wet. The termination -uus is of like meaning ; as, congruus, agree- 
ing ; and when used with active verbs it gives them a passive mean- 
ing ; as, conspicuus, visible. 

3. The terminations -His and -bilis denote the possibility of a thing, 
in a passive sense; as, fragilis, fragile. Some however have an 
active sense ; as, fertilis, fertile. 

4. Icius or -itius, added to the third principal part of a verb, has 
a passive meaning; as, fictitius, feigned.- 

5. Ax, added to the verb, denotes a propensity, generally a faulty 
one ; as, pugnax, pugnacious. Adjectives in -ulus have a similar 
meaning; as, credulus, credulous. 

6. Ivus, joined to the third principal part of the verb, denotes fit- 
ness, or ability to produce the action ; as, disjunctivus, disjunctive. 

COMPOSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. Some adjectives are compounded of two nouns; as, ignicomus t 
having fiery hair — from ignis and coma. 

2. Some adjectives are compounded of a noun and an adjective ; 
as, lucifugax, shunning light — from lux and fugax. 

3. Some of a noun and verb ; as, carnivorus, carnivorous — from 
caro and voro. 

4. Some of an adjective and a noun: as, celeripes, swift-footed — 
from celer aud pes. 

5. Some of an adjective and verb; as, magnificus, magnificent — 
from magnus and facio. 



DERIVATION OF VERBS. - 319 

6. Some of two adjectives ; as, multicavus, having many cavities — 
^rom multus and cavus. 

7. Some of an adverb and noun ; as, bicorpor, two-bodied. 

8. Some of an adverb and adjective ; as, maledicax, slanderous. 

9. Some of an adverb and verb ; as, malevolus, malevolent. 
10. Some of a preposition and noun; as, inermis, unarmed. 

- 11. Some of a preposition and adjective; as, concavus, concave. 
12. Some of a reposition and verb ; as, insciens, ignorant. 

DERIVATION OF VERBS. 

Verbs are derived from other verbs, or from nouns or adjectives. 
Verbs derived from other Verbs. 

These are either — 1. Frequentatives ; 2. Desideratives ; 3. Dimi- 
nutives ; 4. Intensities ; or, 5. Inceptives. 

1. Frequentatives denote repetition or increase of the action. 
They are of the first conjugation, and formed from the third prin- 
cipal part of the verb by adding o, or rather changing urn into o. 
In verbs of the first conjugation, -at, before the supine, is frequently 
changed into -ito ; as, dicto, I say often — from dico ; clamito, I cry 
often — from clamo, 8 clamatum. Some frequentatives are formed 
by adding -ito to the first principal part ; as, latito, to keep oneself 
hid — from lateo. 

2. Desideratives denote a desire of doing the action. They are 
of the fourth conjugation, and formed by adding -urio to the third 
principal part ; as, empturio, I desire to buy — from emo, 3 emptum. 
But when the u in -urio is long it does not constitute a desiderative. 

3. Diminutives are not many in number. They denote a trifling 
and feeble action, and are formed by adding -Mo to the verb ; as, 
cantillo, I sing in an under voice — from cano. They are all of the 
first conjugation. 

4. Intensities denote earnest or eager action. They are gene- 
rally formed by adding -esso, -isso, or -so, to the verb ; as, fascesso, 
to act earnestly — from facio. 

5. Inceptives denote the commencement of an action. They are 
formed by adding -sco to the verb; as, calesco, I become warm — 
from caleo. They are all of the third conjugation. 

Verbs derived from Nouns and Adjectives. 

1. These are generally formed by adding -o or -eo to the root of 
the noun or adjective; as, nomino, I name — from nomen ; libero, 1 
set free — from liber ; albeo, I am white — from albus. 



320 COMPOSITION OF VERBS DERIVATION OF ADVERBS, 

COMPOSITION OF VERBS. 

Verbs are variously compounded, viz. : — 

1. Some of a noun and verb; as, belligero, I wage war. 

2. Some of an adjective and verb; as, multiplico, I multiply. 

3. Some of two verbs ; as, patefacio, to make open. 

4. Some of an adverb and verb ; as, maledico, I speak ill of. 

5. Some of a preposition and noun ; as, pernocto, 1 watch, or I 
spend the night. 

6. Some of a preposition and verb ; as, adduco, I lead to. 

ADVERBS. (E. 242.) 
DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 

Adverbs derived from Nouns. 

1. Some adverbs are only the different cases of nouns used adver- 
bially; as, tempore, timely — from the abl. (6) tempore, in time. 

2. -Im, or -atim, denoting manner or mode, is added to some few 
nouns ; as, membratim, limb by limb. 

3. To others -itus, denoting origin, is added ; as, funditus, from 
the bottom. 

Adverbs derived from Adjectives and Participles. 

1. -E is added to the root of adjectives and participles of the 
second declension to form adverbs ; as, longe, far. 

2. -Iter, -itus, -im, and -atim, are added to the roots of some few 
adjectives and participles of the second declension to form adverbs; 
as, divinitus, divinely. 

3. -Iter, or -er, is added to the roots of adjectives and participles 
of the third declension to form adverbs ; as, feliciter, happily. 

4. Some adverbs are only the cases of adjectives ; as, crebro, fre- 
quently. 

5. Numeral adverbs are formed from cardinal numbers by adding 
~ies ; as, decies, ten times — from decern. 

Adverbs derived from Adjective- Pronouns. 

1. -0 and -uc denote the place whither, -de and -inc denote the 
place from which, -i and -ic the place in which, -a and -ac the place 
through which ; as, eo, to that place ; illinc, from that place ; istic, 
in the place in which you are ; ed, the place, through which. 



COMPOSITION OF ADVERBS. 321 

2. There are some few diminutive adverbs formed from other ad- 
verbs ; as, scepiuscule, somewhat often — from scepius. 

3. Some adverbs are derived from prepositions ; as propter, near — 
from prope-. 

COMPOSITION OF ADVERBS 

Adverbs are compounded of different words, viz. : — 

1. Pronoun and noun; as, quomodo, how — from quo and modo. 

2. Adjective and noun ; as, magnopere, greatly — from magnus 
and opus. 

3. Adverb and noun; as, scepenumero, often — from scepe and nu- 
merus. 

4. Preposition and noun; as, admodum, greatly — from ad and 
modus. 

5. Adjective and verb; as, quantumvis, as much as one may wish — 
from quantus and volo. 

6. Adjective and pronoun; as, alioqui, otherwise — from alius and 
qui. 

7. Adverb and adjective; as, nimirum, certainly — from ni and 
mirus. 

8. Preposition and adjective; as, imprimis, especially — from in 
and primus. 

9. Pronoun and adverb ; as, nequctquam, not at all — from ne 
and quisquam. 

10. Preposition and pronoun; as, postea, after that — from p ost 
and is, ea. 

11. Two verbs; as, videlicet, it is evident — from videre and licet. 

12. Adverb and verb ; as, duntaxat, at least — from dum and tazo. 

13. Participle and other parts of speech; as, dextrorsum, to the 
right — from dexter and versus. 

14. Two adverbs; as, quafiidiu, how long (a time) — from quam 
and diu. 

15. Preposition and adverb; as, adhuc, to the present (time) — 
from ad and hue. 

16. Two prepositions; as, inde, thence — from in and de. 

17. Conjunction and adverb; as, sicubi, if in anyplace — from si 
and alicubi. 

18. Three different parts of speech; as, forsitan, perhaps — from 
fors, sit, and an 

v 



322 PREPOSITIONS. 



PREPOSITIONS. (E. 243.) 

Most of the prepositions are used to form compound words, espe- 
cially with verbs. 

1. The final letters of some prepositions remain unchanged in 
composition. In others they remain unchanged when the word be- 
gins with certain letters, especially vowels ; but when the word be- 
gins with certain consonants, the last letter of the preposition is 
assimilated — that is, the last letter of the preposition becomes the 
same as the first letter of the word ; as, aggredior, to approach — 
from ad and gradior. 

2. In cum (cum) the final m is assimilated before some letters; 
before others the ra is changed into n; and before a vowel, or gn or A, 
it is generally omitted. U is also changed into o. 

3. The n in in is sometimes changed into m ; as, impono, I place 
on — from in and pono. 

4. Pro spmetimes takes a d after it, before a vowel ; as, prodesse, 
to be advantageous — from pro and sum. Before I or r, pro some- 
times becomes por and post. 

5. Sub is sometimes assimilated ; sometimes it takes the form of 
sus. The b of sub is omitted before s followed by a consonant. 

6. The following are called Inseparable Prepositions, because 
they are only used in composition : — 

7. Am, or amb, denotes around, about. 

8. Dis, or di, denotes separation, or asunder. 

9. Re, or red, denotes again, or back. 

10. Se denotes aside, or apart. 

11. Ne and ve are negations prefixed to words. 



SYNTAX — CONCORD. 323 



SYNTAX. 



Syntax may be divided into two principal parts : — I. Concord, 
and II. Government. 

I. CONCORD 

Concord is the agreement of words with one another, either in 
number, case, gender, or person. 

[The general rules of Concord are given in the Elementary Part, 
pages 247 and 248.] 

1. A noun added to another noun or pronoun, and denoting the 
same person or thing that it does, is put in the same case with it; 
as, urbs Roma, the city Rome. 

2. The noun or pronoun in answer to a question is generally in 
the same case as the interrogative word ; as, quid quceris? — librum, 
what are you seeking for ? — a book. 

3. An adjective is sometimes used alone, especially in the plural — 
its noun being understood ; as, boni sunt rari, good (men) are scarce. 

4. An adjective, without a noun, and in the neuter gender, is 
often used as a substantive ; as, bonum, a good (thing) ; triste lupus 
stabulis, a wolf is a sad (thing) in the folds. 

5. Adjectives used as substantives frequently have other adjectives 
agreeing with them ; as, alia omnia, all other (things). 

6. Imperatives, infinitives, adverbs, clauses, and words considered 
only as such, may be used as substantives, and then they take a 
neuter adjective in the singular number ; as, supremum vale dixit, he 
pronounced a last farewell. 

7. Adjectives and adjective-pronouns, in place of agreeing with 
their nouns, are sometimes put in the neuter gender, and their 
nouns in the genitive case, with a partitive signification ; as, multum 
temporis, much (of) time. 

8. A noun is often used in the place of an adjective ; as, nemo 
miles Romanus, no Roman soldier. 

9. A neuter adjective, both singular and plural, is sometimes used 
as an adverb ; as, dulce loquentem, speaking sweetly. 



324 SYNTAX — CONCORD. 

10. An adverb is occasionally used as an adjective; as, nunc homi- 
num mores, the present manners of men. 

11. The first, middle, last, or other part of any place, time, &c, 
is generally expressed by primus, medius, ultimus, eztremus, intimus, 
infimus, imus, summus, supremus, reliquus, or cetera; as, summa arbor, 
the top (of the) tree. 

12. Sometimes an adjective, agreeing with a noun, is used in the 
place of an adverb ; as, ecce ! venit Telamon properus, lo ! Telamon 
comes in haste. Nullus is in like manner used for non. 



PRONOUNS. 

I. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. The relative may sometimes be considered as being between 
ewo cases of the same noun, though for the most part only one is 
expressed. With the first of these, or the antecedent, the relative 
agrees in gender, number, and person ; with the latter, generally 
understood, it agrees in gender, number, and case. But sometimes 
both nouns are expressed; as, erant omnino duo itinera, quibus itine- 
ribus domo exire possent, there were only two routes, by which routes 
they could depart from home. However, the antecedent noun is 
generally only expressed ; as, vir sapit, qui pauca loquitur, the man 
is wise, who speaks little. Sometimes the latter noun only is ex- 
pressed — the antecedent being omitted ; as, in quern primum egressi 
sunt locum Troja vocatur — here locus, the antecedent of the relative 
quern, is omitted. 

2. Sometimes neither noun is expressed, especially when it is a 
substantive-pronoun, or when it is designed to be left indefinite; as, 
qui bene latuit, bene vizit, who has well escaped notice, has lived well 
— that is, he who. 

3. The relative is sometimes omitted ; as, urbs antiqua fuit, Tyrii 
tenuere coloni, there was an ancient city, (which) Tyrian colonists 
possessed. 

4. The relative, in place of its own proper case, sometimes take 
the case of the antecedent ; as, quum scribas et aliquid agas eorum, 
quorum consuesti — quorum, referring to eorum, being here used for 
quce. 

5. Sometimes the antecedent has the same case as the relative — 
the said antecedent either preceding or following the relative pro- 
noun ; as, urbevi quam statuo vestra est — urbem, being in the same 
case with the relative quam, is here used for urbs. 

6. When a noun is joined to a relative which explains its antece- 
dent, but is of a different gender or number, the relative generally 



SYNTAX — CONCORD. 325 

agrees with such noun; as, Santones non longe a Tolosatium finibus 
absunt, guce civitas est in provincial the Santones are not far distant 
from the borders of the Tolosates, which state is in the province. 

The relative sometimes does not take the number and gender of 
the antecedent, but of some noun synonymous with it, or equivalent 
thereto, or implied in it ; as, abundantia earum rerum, guce mortales 
prima putant, abundance of those things, which mortals think the 
most important — here guce agrees with negolia understood, as syno- 
nymous with rerum. 

8. The relative is in the plural when referring to two or more 
nouns in the singular; when the nouns are in different genders the 
relative agrees with them in the same manner as adjectives do; as, 
Ninus et Semiramis, gui Babylona condiderant, Ninus and Semiramis, 
who had founded Babylon. 

9. When the antecedents are of different persons, the relative 
agrees with the first person rather than the second, and with the 
second rather than the third ; as, ego et tu, gui eramus, I and you, 
who were. 

II. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, ETC. 

1. Is before a relative, or before ut, has often the sense of talit, 
such ; as, negue enim tu is es, gui guid sis nescias, nor are you such a 
person as not to know what you are. 

2. If an additional predicate or circumstance is added to the noun 
to which is refers, et is, or atgue is, or isgue, or et is guidem, must be 
used ; but with a negative nee is are used ; and when the additional 
predicate stands opposed to the preceding noun sed is are used ; as, 
una in domo, et ea guidem angusta, in the same house, and that indeed 
not roomy. 

3. Is sometimes has the signification of idem ; as, vos — ii, you — 
the same. 

4. When is would be in the same oblique case as the noun to 
which it refers, it is not expressed; as, pater amai liber os, et tamen 
castigat, a father loves his children, and yet he corrects (them). 

5. Ipse, with a substantive-pronoun, used in a reflective sense, 
agrees either with such pronoun when emphatic, or with the subject 
of the proposition when emphatic ; as, agam per me ipse, I will do it 
myself — hero ipse agrees with ego, the subject of the verb agam 
understood. 

6. Ipse, with a possessive pronoun, used in a reflective sense 
generally takes the case of the subject ; as, meam ipse legem negligo, 
I myself neglect my own law — here ipse agrees with ego, the subject 
of negligo. 

28 



826 SYNTAX — CONCORD. 

7. When alius is repeated, or joined to an adverb derived from it, 
it may be translated by two separate propositiuns ; as, aliud alii* 
videtur optimum, one thing seems best to one, another thing to another. 

8. When alius is repeated in different propositions, the first is 
translated by "one," the second by " another"; as, aliud agitur, 
aliud sim,ulatur, one thing is done, another pretended. 

9. Uterque, each of two, is often used in the singular, when only 
two are spoken of, and the plural, utrique, when several pairs of two 
are spoken of. 

10. The possessive pronouns are often omitted, when used in a 
reflective sense; as, quo revertar, in patriam? whither shall I return, 
to (my) country? 

11. Sui and suus refer generally to the subject of the proposition ; 
as, oppidani /acinus in se ac suos fcedum consciscunt, the citizens decide 
on a foul crime against themselves and their friends. 

12. When the principal verb is in the passive voice, the reflective 
does not generally refer to the subject of the passive voice, but to 
the word which would be its subject in the active voice; as, a Cce~ 
sare invitor ut sim sibi legatus, I am invited by Caesar to be his lieu- 
tenant. Sibi here referring to Ccesare, in place of ego, the subject 
of invitor. So also when the subject is a thing without life, the 
reflected pronoun may refer to some other word in the sentence 
having life. 

13. Ipse is sometimes used in place of sui or suus ; as, Jugurtha 
legatos misit, qui ipsi liberisque vitam peterent, Jugurtha sent ambassa- 
dors to ask life for himself and his children. 

14. A demonstrative pronoun is sometimes used for a reflected 
one; as, Helvetii persuadent Rauracis, ut unci cum eis proficiscantur, the 
Helvetii persuade the Rauraci to go with them. 

15. When a noun is omitted, suus, and not hujus, is used ; as, Oc- 
tavius, quern sui Cozsarem salutabant, Octavius, whom his (followers) 
saluted as Caesar. 

THE NOMINATIVE CASE. 

1 The nominative is wanting with all impersonal verbs ; also with 
potest, coepit, cosptum est, incipit, desinit, debet, solet, and videtur, when 
used with the infinitive of an impersonal verb ; as, pigere eum facti 
coepit, it begin to repent him of the deed. 

2 Sometimes the verb is omitted ; as, di meliora piis, may the 
gods (grant) better things to the pious. 

3. The nominative is often used with the present infinitive in the 
historic style ; as, interim quotidie Ccesar jEduos frumentum flagitare, 
in the mean time Caesar was daily demanding corn of the ^Edui. 



SYNTAX — GOVERNMENT. 327 

4. A collective noun has often a plural verb ; as, iurba ruunt, the 
crowd rush. 

5. Tantum, when followed by a genitive plural, has often a plural 
verb ; as, quid hue tantum hominum incedunt ? why are so many men 
coming hither. 

6. A verb in the singular is often used with two or more nomina- 
tives in the singular — more particularly when they denote things 
without life, and express a similar class of ideas; as, beneficentia, 
liberalitas, bonitas, justitia, funditus tollitur, beneficence, liberality, 
goodness, (and) justice, is (are) entirely taken away. 

7. The verb, when it has different qualifications for each nomina- 
tive, agrees with the nearest in number and person; as, ego misere, 
tufeliciter sivis, I (live) miserably, you live happily. 

8. The interjections en! ecce ! and 01 are sometimes followed by 
the nominative ; as, ecce, homo ! behold, the man ! 

9. The verbs which most frequently have a noun or adjective in 
the predicate, or qualifying clause agreeing with the subject of the 
verb, are, sum ■ — as, ego Jovis sum filius, I am the son of Jove — and 
certain neuter verbs that denote position, existence, motion, &c. ; 
likewise the passive of verbs signifying to name or call, to choose, 
to appoint or constitute, to render, to esteem or reckon. These 
verbs are termed Copulative Verbs. 

10. A copulative verb between two nominatives of different num- 
bers generally agrees in number with its subject; as, dos est decern 
talent a. 

11. Opus, need, is frequently used as a predicate with sum; as, 
dux nobis opus est, a leader is needful to us. 

II. GOVERNMENT. 

Government is that power which one word has to require another 
to be put in a certain case, mood, or tense. 

THE GENITIVE CASE. 

[The principal rules for the Genitive are given in pages 251 — 253 
of the Elementary Course.] 

1. The genitive is either subjective or objective. The genitive is 
subjective when the noun that governs it is considered as — being, 
active, feeling, originating, belonging to, &c. ; as, hominum facta, 
the deeds of men. The genitive is objective when the governing 
noun implies some action, feeling, tendency, &c, of which the noun 
governed in the genitive is the object; as, amor virtutis } the love of 
virtue. 



328 SYNTAX GOVERNMENT — GENITIVE. 

2. A noun sometimes has two genitives: one being subjective, the 
other objective; as, Agamemnonis belli gloria, the glory of Agamem- 
non in war. 

3. When the noun added to another noun, and limiting it, denotes 
some property, quality, or character, and has an adjective agreeing 
with itself, such limiting-noun is put either in the genitive or abla- 
tive, as, puer pr oboe, indolis, or puer proba indole, a boy of a good dis- 
position. 

4. The noun limited by the genitive is sometimes omitted; as, 
ad Diance, to (the temple) of Diana. 

The Genitive with Partitives. 

1. Those nouns that denote a part are, pars, nihil, nemo, and the 
like ; also nouns denoting weight and measure ; as, nihil humanarum 
rerum, nothing of human things; medimnum tritici, a medimnum (six 
bushels) of wheat. 

2. The partitives ullus, nullus, solus, uter, uterque, utercumque, uter- 
vis, uterlibet, alius, alter, alteruter, neuter, aliquis, quidam, quispiam, 
quisquis, quisque, quisquam, quicumque, unusquisque, quis? qui? quot? 
quotus ? quotusquisque ? tot, aliquot, multi, plerique, nonnulli, pauci, 
medius, are used with the genitive plural ; but when the noun is a 
collective, with the genitive singular; as, quisquis deorum, whoever 
of the gods. 

3. Words used partitively have the genitive like partitives. Words 
are used partitively in the following sentences: viz., expediti militum, 
the light-armed (of the) soldiers; superi deorum, the gods (of) above. 

4. Comparatives and superlatives are used with a genitive like 
partitives. The comparative in this case generally denotes one of 
two individuals; as, major fratr urn, the elder (of two) brothers. The 
superlative denotes a part of a number greater than two ; as, mazi- 
mus fratr urn, the eldest (of three or more) brothers. 

5. The cardinal and ordinal numbers, likewise singuli, are used 
with the genitive as partitives ; as, equitum centum, one hundred (of 
the) horsemen. 

6. When the genitive denotes a whole, it may be governed by a 
neuter adjective, or adjective-pronoun, and such pronoun is gene- 
rally in the singular, though the plural is sometimes used: as, plus 
eloquentice, more (of) eloquence. Most of the neuter adjectives thus 
used as partitives denote quantity. 

7. The adverbs sat. satis, parum, nimis, abunde, largiter, affatim,. 
and partim, when used partitively, have a genitive; as, satis eloquen- 
tio?; parum sapiential, enough of eloquence, but little of wisdom. 

8. Sometimes the partitive word is omitted ; as, centies scstertium, 
a hundred times (a thousand) (of) sestertii. 



SYNTAX — GOVERNMENT GENITIVE. 329 

The Genitive with Adjectives, 

1. The following classes of adjectives, when denoting a relation 
to a thing, are often limited by a genitive: viz. — 

2. Verbal in -ax ; as, capax, edax, ferax, fugax, pervicax, &c. 

3. Participial adjectives in -ns, with a few in -tus ; as, ama?is 9 
cupiens, &c. 

4. Adjectives denoting desire or aversion ; as, avidus, fastidiosus : — 
denoting participation; as, particeps : — knowledge, experience, ca- 
pacity, and the contrary; as, callidus, gnarus, ignarus: — memory 
and forgetfulness ; as, memor, immcmor : — certainty or doubt: as, 
certus, dubius : — care or negligence ; as, providus, improvidus : — 
guilt or innocence ; as, noxius, innoxius : — fear or confidence ; as, 
timidus, fidens: — plenty or want; as, abundans, inops. 

5. Many of these adjectives, instead of a genitive, have an infini- 
tive ; as, certus ire, determined to go ; and sometimes even an accu- 
sative or ablative, with or without a preposition. 

6. Adjectives denoting plenty or want govern the genitive or abla- 
tive ; as, plenus irce or ira, full of anger ; inops rationis, void of rea- 
son. Some of these adjectives of plenty or want govern the genitive 
only; some the ablative only; some the genitive more frequently ; 
others the ablative more frequently ; and others, again, govern the 
genitive or ablative indifferently. 

The Genitive with Verbs. 

1. Sum is used with a genitive denoting the degree of estimation 
or value ; as, tanti est, it is worth so much. 

2. Verbs of valuing are used with a genitive, when the value is 
expressed either in a general or indefinite manner ; as, by tanti, 
quanti, magni, permagni, pluris, minoris, plurimi, maximi, minimi, parvi, 
tanlidem, quanticumgue, quantivis, quantilibet. Also the nouns assis, 
flocci, teruncii, nihili, pili : likewise pensi and hujus. When however 
the price of a thing is a definite sum, oris expressed by a substantive, 
except assis, flocci, above mentioned, it is put in the ablative. 

3. Verbs of valuing are, estimo, existimo, duco, facio, fio, habeo, 
pendo, puto, deputo, taxo. Verbs of buying, selling, hiring, and let 
ting, have also a genitive of the statement of price, when it is general 
and indefinite. 

4. Satago is sometimes used with a genitive ; as, is satagit rerum 
suarum, he is busily employed with his own affairs. 

5. Verbs of accusing are, accuso, arcesso, ago, arguo, cito, defero, 
increpo, incuso, insimulo, postulo. Verbs of convicting are, convinco, 
coarguo, prehendo, teneor, obstringor, obligor; of condemning, damno, 
condemno, infamo; of acquitting, absolvo, liber o, pur go. An ablative, 

28* 



830 SYNTAX — GOVERNMENT DATIVE. 

with de, is often used, in place of the genitive, with some of these 
verbs; and sometimes also an ablative without a preposition. 

6. Punishment is generally denoted by the genitive ; as, capitis, 
mortis, multce, pecunice : sometimes also by the ablative, and always 
when a definite sum is mentioned ; as, quindecim millibus ceris. 

7. Verbs of admonishing are, moneo, admoneo, commoneo, and com- 
monefacio. These verbs, instead of the genitive, have sometimes the 
ablative with de. 

8. The adjective-pronouns mea, tua, sua, nostra, and vestra, are 
used instead of the genitive of their respective substantive-pronouns ; 
as, mea nihil refert, it does not concern me. 

9. Some adverbs of time and place govern the genitive, though 
sometimes the accusative ; as, pridie ejus diet, the day before that 
day; ubique gentium, every where. 

THE DATIVE CASE. 

[The principal rules for the Dative are given in pages 253 and 254 
of the Elementary Course.] 

The Dative with Adjectives. 

1. Many adjectives of other significations than those noticed in 
the Elementary Course, page 253, have a dative of the object ; in- 
cluding some of the compounds of ob, sub, and super. 

2. Dicto audiens, signifying obedient, is followed by the dative ; 
as, Syracusani nobis dicto audientes sunt, the Syracusans are obedient 
to us. 

3. Affinis, similis, alienus, communis, par, proprius, insuetus, finiti- 
mus, fidus, conterminus, superstes, cequalis, conscius, adversus, contra' 
Hits, and some others, have sometimes the dative and sometimes the 
genitive. 

4. Conscius and some similar adjectives have both the dative and 
genitive ; as, mens sibi conscia recti, a mind conscious to itself of 
rectitude. 

The Dative with Verbs. 

1. Many verbs, such as adulor, auscultor, blanaior, degenero, despero, 
indulgeo, lateo, medeor, medicor, moderor, obirecto, prcestolor, provideo, 
&c, which, as intransitive verbs, govern the dative, sometimes become 
transitive, and govern the accusative. 

2. Intransitive verbs governing a dative are frequently used im- 
personally in the passive, with the same case ; as, mihi invidetur. I 
am envied. 



SYNTAX — GOVERNMENT — DATIVE. 331 

3. Such transitive verbs as mando, impero, ministro, minor, corn- 
minor, prcecipio, renuncio, &c., have, with the dative, an accusative, 
expressed or understood ; as, equites imperat civitatibus, he commanded 
to the states (the providing of) cavalry. 

4. When the compounds ad-, ante-, &c, have a transitive signifi- 
cation, they have an accusative with the dative. 

5. Many verbs compounded with prepositions, principally with 
ad, con, and in, instead of the dative, often take the case of the pre- 
position — which preposition or its equivalent is frequently repeated ; 
as, conferte hanc pacem cum Mo hello. 

6. Some verbs compounded with ah, de, ex, circum, and contra, 
have sometimes the dative ; namely, absum, desum, delabor, despero, 
excido, circumdo, circumfundo, circumjaceo, circumjicio, contradico, con- 
iraeo ; as, serta capiti delapsa, the garlands having fallen from his 
head. 

7. Some verbs of repelling and taking away, mostly compounds of 
ab-, de-, or ex-, have sometimes the dative, though oftener the abla- 
tive: these are, abigo, abrogo, abscindo, aufero, adimo, arceo, defendo, 
demo, depello, derogo, detraho, eripio, eruo, excutio, eximo, extorqueo, 
extraho, exuo, prohibeo, surripio ; as, nee mihi te eripient, nor shall 
they take you from me. 

8. Many verbs of differing, mostly compounds of di- or dis, have 
the dative in place of the ablative, either with or without ab; namely, 
differo, discrepo, discordo, dissentio, dissideo, dis to ; as, Grcecis Tuscance 
slatuce differunt, Tuscan statues differ from Grecian. 

9. Sometimes verbs in the passive voice have a dative of the 
agent; as, neque cernitur ulli, nor is he seen by any. 

10. An impersonal verb generally, though not always, governs 
the dative; as, favetur mihi, I am favoured; expedit reipublicce, it is 
advantageous for the state. 

11. The verbs sum, fore, fio, do, dono, duco, habeo, rdinquo, tribuo, 
verto, curro, eo, mitto, proficiscor, venio, appono, assigno, cedo, comparo, 
pateo, suppedio, emo, with some others, have two datives — the one 
denoting the object, the other the end or design ; as, mihi maximce 
est curcn, it is a very great care to me. 

12. The dative of the object is often omitted after these verbs, 
and the dative of the end or purpose only used ; as, receplui canere, 
to sound a retreat. 

13. Some adverbs derived from adjectives have the dative of the 
object, though sometimes the accusative ; as, proxime castris, very 
near to the camp. 



332 SYNTAX — GOVERNMENT — ACCUSATIVE. 



THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 

[The principal rules for the Accusative are given in pages 257 and 
268 of the Elementary Course.] 

The Accusative with Verbs, 

1. The verb governing the accusative is sometimes omitted — so 
also the accusative itself is often omitted, particularly when the ac- 
cusative is a reflective pronoun; as, nox prcecipitat, the night hurries 
itself (se) on — that is, has far advanced. 

2. An infinitive mood, or part of a sentence, is sometimes used for 
the accusative ; as, da mihi fallere, give me to deceive. 

3. Many verbs with the accusative of the person have also another 
accusative, denoting in what respect or degree the action is exerted ; 
as, Fabius ea me monuit, Fabius reminded me of it. 

4. Verbs generally neuter are sometimes used transitively, and 
have then an accusative ; as, olet unguenta, he smells of perfumes. 

5. Neuter verbs, and also adjectives, may sometimes be used with 
an accusative, denoting in what respect or degree the feeling or con- 
dition is manifested ; as, num id lacrimat vergo ? does the maid weep 
for that? 

6. Many verbs have an accusative depending on the preposition 
with which the verb is compounded. Trans, ad, and circum, thus 
compounded, have sometimes two accusatives ; as, omnem equitatum 
pontem transducit, he leads all the cavalry over the bridge. The 
preposition is often repeated ; as, multitudinem trans Rhenum in Gal- 
liam transducere. 

7. The accusative of the active voice becomes the nominative of 
the passive voice. When the active voice has two accusatives, one 
of the person, the other of the thing, the accusative of the person is 
put in the nominative in the passive, and the accusative of the thing 
remains in the accusative ; as, rogatus est sententiam, he was asked 
his opinion. 

8. Adjective-s, verbs, and perfect participles, have often an accu- 
sative, denoting the part to which the signification of these words 
relates ; as, nudus membra, bare as to his limbs. 

9. Some verbal nouns, also some verbal adjectives in -bundus, have 
an accusative, like the active verbs from which they are derived; 
as, quid tibi hue receptio ad te est, meum virum ? wherefore do yoH re- 
ceive my husband hither to you ? Hanno vitabundus castra hostium 
consulesque. 



SYNTAX — GOVERNMENT — ABLATIVE. 333 

The Accusative of Time, Space, and Place. 

1. Sometimes the accusative or ablative of space is omitted, while 
the genitive governed by it remains ; as, casira quce aberant bidui, th« 
camp was distant (the space) of two day's (journey). 

2. Domus is sometimos in the accusative, with a verbal noun ; as, 
domum reditionis spe sublata, the hope of returning home being taken 
away. 

3. With the exception of towns, domus, and rus, the preposition is 
generally used before the names of countries and other places, in 
which the motion ends, except sometimes the names of small islands ; 
as, ie in Epirum venisse gaudeo, I rejoice that you have come to Epirus; 
Pausaniam cum classe Cyprum miserunt, they sent Pausanius with a 
fleet to Cyprus. 

4. Some Interjections have an accusative; as, ecce, duas tibi, 
Daphni 1 lo, two for you, Daphne ! 



THE ABLATIVE CASE. 

[The principal rules for the ablative are given in pages 258 and 
259 of the Elementary Course.] 

The Ablative after Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs. 

1. Opus and usus have sometimes the ablative of the perfect par- 
ticiple ; as, maturato opus est, there is need of haste. 

2. Dignus and indignus have sometimes the genitive ; as, indignus 
avorum, unworthy of his ancestors. 

3. Sometimes, especially in the passive voice, dignus and indignus 
are used with the infinitive, in place of the ablative; as, dignus 
amari, worthy to be loved. 

4. TJtor, when it takes a second ablative, may be translated by 
"have"; as, ille facile me utetur patre, he will have me an indulgent 
father. 

5. Some other verbs besides these — as, nitor, innitor, fido, confido — 
may have an ablative ; as, hasla innixus, having leaned on the spear. 

6. Perfect participles denoting origin frequently have the name 
of the source whence in the ablative, without a preposition; as, 
Tantalo prognatus, descended from Tantalus. 

7. The preposition ab, de, ex, or super, is often repeated when 
compounded with a verb: as, detrahere de tudfamd nunquam cogitavi, 
I never thought to detract from your fame. 



334 SYNTAX GOVERNMENT — SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

The Ablative of Cause, Manner, Instrument, tyc. 

1. The cause and manner are sometimes denoted by prepositions. 

2. The ablative of concomitancy has generally cum with it; as, 
ingressus est cum gladio, he entered with a sword. 

3. The ablative, either with or without a or ab, is used with a 
passive verb, to denote the means or agent by which the action is 
done, and which is expressed by the nominative in the active voice; 
as (in the active voice), Ciodius me diligit, Clodius loves me ; (in the 
passive,) a Clodio diiigor, I am loved by Clodius. The voluntary 
agent generally takes a or ab ; the involuntary agent generally omits 
the a or ab. 

4. A noun denoting that in accordance with which anything is, or 
is done, is put in the ablative; as, nostro more, according to our 
custom. 

5. A noun, adjective, or verb, may be used with the ablative, 
When denoting in what respect, or with what limitation, its signifi- 
cation is taken ; as, pietate filius, consiliis parens, in affection a son, 
in counsel a parent. 

6. A noun implying the means by which the action is done is put 
in the ablative, after verbs signifying to fill, furnish, load, array, 
equip, endow, adorn, reward, enrich, &c. ; as, instruxere epulis men- 
sas, they furnish the tables with food. 

7. A noun with verbs denoting to deprive, to free from, to remove 
or separate, is often put in the ablative, without a preposition ; as, 
hoc me libera melu, free me from this fear. 

THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. (E. pp. 103, 263.) 

1. The subjunctive may be used to denote a concession or suppo- 
sition ; as, dixerit Epicurus, grant that Epicurus could have said ; 
Vendat cedes vir bonus, suppose an honest man is selling a house. 

2. Tit, ne, quo, quin, and quominus, when they connect a clause 
denoting the end, purpose, object, or result of a preceding proposi- 
tion, with such proposition, have the subjunctive; as, irritant ad 
pugnandum quo fiant acriores, they stimulate them to fight, that they 
may become fiercer. 

3. The subjunctive is used with particles of wishing ; as, utinam 
minus vitce cupidi fuissemus I 0, that we had been less attached to life ! 

4. Licet, although, and quamvis, however, take the subjunctive ; 
also ac si, ut si, velul, velut si, veluti, sicuti, ceu, modo, dum, and dum- 
modo ; as, Veritas licet nullum defensorem obtineat, though truth should 
obtain no defender. 



SYNTAX — GOVERNMENT — SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 335 

5. Cikm (quum), when it denotes time, generally takes the indi- 
cative ; but when it denotes dependence or connection of thought, it 
takes the subjunctive ; as, citni ea ita sint, since these things are so. 

6. The relative qui, after tarn (with an adjective), tantus, talis, 
ejusmodi, hujusmodi, and is, Me, iste, and hie, in the sense of talis, is 
used with the subjunctive; as, quis est tarn lynceus, qui in tantis tene- 
bris nihil offendat? who is so quick-sighted, who would not stumble 
in such darkness ? 

7. The subjunctive is used with a relative clause, after a general 
legation or with an interrogative implying a negation ; as, nemo est s 
qui hand intelligat, there is no one, who does not understand. 

8. A relative clause denoting purpose, aim, or motive, takes the 
subjunctive ; as, Lacedcemonii legatos Athenas miserunt, qui eum absen- 
tern accusarent, the Lacedaemonians sent ambassadors to Athens, to 
accuse him in his absence. 

9. After dignus, indignus, aptus, and idoneus, a relative clause has 
the subjunctive; as, videtur, qui aliquando imperet, dignus esse, he seems 
to be worthy at some time to command. 

10. A relative clause, denoting the reason for what has preceded, 
takes the subjunctive ; as, pecavisse mihi videor, qui a te discesserim, 
I think I did wrong, who left you (because I left you). 

11. The relative takes the subjunctive in oblique or indirect dis- 
course ; as, Socrates dicere solebat, omnes in eo quod scirent, satis esse 
eloquentes, Socrates was accustomed to say that all were eloquent 
enough in that which they knew. 

The discourse is direct when the writer or speaker states his own 
opinions or sentiments : it is oblique when the speaker or writer re- 
lates or implies the sentiments or opinions of another, or what he 
has said. 

THE INFINITIVE MOOD. (E. 104.) 

1. The infinitive, with or without the subject-accusative, may be 
the subject of a verb ; as, nunquam est utile peccare, to do wrong is 
never useful. [For an explanation of the infinitive with a subject- 
accusative see Elementary Course, page 1C4.] 

2. The infinitive may be the object of a verb, either with or with- 
out a subject-accusative ; as, hac vitare cupimus, we desire to avoid 
this. 

3. The infinitive, without a subject-accusative, is used after verbs 
denoting ability, obligation, intention, endeavour; or after verbs 
signifying to begin, continue, cease, abstain, dare, fear, hesitate, be 
wont ; likewise after the passive verbs of saying, believing, reckon- 
ing, &c. ; as, debes esse diligens, you ought to be diligent. 



836 PROSODY — QUANTITY. 

4. The infinitive, with a subject- accusative, is used with verbs de- 
noting to think, say, know, perceive, and the like ; or, in general, 
with all verbs and phrases that denote the exercise of the intellectual 
faculties, or of the external senses, or the communication of thought 
to others; as, gaudeo te valere, I am glad that you are well. (See 
page 104, Elementary Course.) 

ADVERBS. 

A negative adverb, modifying another negative word, commonly 
destroys the negation ; as, non parere noluit, he was not unwilling 
to obey. 



PROSODY. 



Prosody may be divided into two principal parts : — I. Quantity, 
and II. Versification. 

I. QUANTITY. 

1. The length of time employed in pronouncing a syllable is 
termed the quantity of such syllable. 

2. Syllables are either short, long, or common. A short syllable 
may be denoted by ^ placed over the vowel ; a long syllable by - 
placed over it. 

3. A long syllable takes double the time to pronounce it that a 
short one does. 

4. A common syllable is sometimes long, and sometimes short. 

5. The rules for the quantity of syllables are either general or 
special. The general rules apply to all the syllables of a word alike ; 
the special rules only to particular syllables. 

GENERAL RULES. 

I. A vowel before another vowel or diphthong is short; as, e in 
m$us, and t in alius. 

(H. which is considered only a breathing, and not a letter, does 
not affect this rule; as, nihil.) 



PROSODY — QUANTITY. 337 

Exceptions. — 1. In the genitive and dative of the fifth declension 
t in the termination is long, when preceded and followed by i; as, 
faciei. 

2. / in fio is long, except when followed by er ; and in fit; as, flunt. 

3. /is common in genitives in -ius ; as, illius. But in alius it is 
always long, and in alterius generally short. 

4. A and e are long in proper names ending in -e'tus, -a'ius, -e'ia; 
as, Caius, Pompeius ; also in the adjective Graius, Veius. 

5. A is long in the penult of old genitives in -ai of the first de- 
clension ; as, aulai. A is also long in tier, 

6 The first vowel in eheu is long ; but the first vowel in Diana, 
to, and ohe, is common. 

7. In many Greek words a vowel is long before another vowel — 
such vowels being in Greek either diphthongs or naturally long. 

8. When e or i denotes the Greek ei, before a vowel, it is long; 
as, JEneas. Some however — as, Academia, Chorea, Malea, platea — 
have the penult common. 

9. Greek words ending in -ais, -ois, -aius, -eius, -oius, -aon, and 
-ion, generally lengthen the first vowel of these terminations; as, 
Graius, Nereius. But Thebdis, Simois, Phdon, Ducalion, and some 
others, shorten such vowel. 

10. Greek words in -aon and -ion, with o short in the genitive, 
have the penult long ; but when the o is long in the genitive, they 
have it short; as, Amythaon (gen. -aonus), Deucalion (gen. -onis). 

11. Greek genitives in -eos, and accusatives in -ea, having their 
nominatives in -eus, commonly shorten the e; as, Orpheos, Orphea. 

II. A diphthong is long ; as, durum, Ccesar. 

Exceptions. — 1. A diphthong at the end of a word is sometimes 
made short, when the next word begins with a vowel; as, insula 
Ionio. 

2. Pro?-, in composition, is generally short before a vowel; as, 
prceaculus, 

3. TJ, after p and g, does not form a diphthong with a vowel. 

III. A vowel before two consonants, a double consonant, or /, is 
long by position ; as, helium, axis, major. 

Exceptions. — 1. A short vowel at the end of a word, before a 
double consonat or/ beginning the following word, is not lengthened. 

2. The compounds of jug um have i short before/; as, bijugus, 

3. A naturally short vowel, placed before a mute consonant having 
a liquid consonant immediately after it, is common ; as, agris. But 

29 w 



838 QUANTITY — FIRST AND MIDDLE SYLLABLES. 

if the vowel before the mute and liquid is naturally long, it remains 
long; as, salubris. 

4. When a mute and liquid begin a word, they seldom lengthen 
the short vowel terminating the preceding word. 

5. When in compound words the first word of the compound ends 
with a mute, and the second begins with a liquid, a short vowel 
before the mute is made long by position ; as, sublevo. 

6. L and r, in Latin, are the only liquids, following a mute, sub- 
ject to the above ; but in Greek m and n may also be subject to the 
same rules as I and r. 

IV. A contracted syllable is long ; cogo, for coago. 

SPECIAL RULES. 

The First and Middle Syllables. 

1. The perfect tenses consisting of two syllables, have the first 
syllable long, though it may be short in the present tense ; as, per- 
fect vent, present venio. 

Exceptions. — 1. Seven perfects have the first syllable short: 
namely, blbi, dedi, fidi (from findo), scidi, steti, sliti, tuli ; also before 
a vowel the firs«t syllable is short by general rule ; as, rut 

II. Preterites that double the first syllable, shorten both the first 
and second syllables ; as, tetigi, from tango. But sometimes the 
second syllable is made long by its position before two consonants ; 
as, memordi. 

III. Supines of two syllables lengthen the first syllable ; as, molum, 
from moveo. 

Exceptions — 1. Ten supines have the first syllable short : namely, 
citum (from cieo) ) datum, itum, litum, quitum, ratum, rutum, satum, 
situm, and slatum. 

IV. Polysyllabic supines in -atum, -etum, and -utum, have the a, e t 
and u long before turn; as, amdtum. 

V. Polysyllabic supines in -itum have the * before turn short ; as, 
monltum. 

Exceptions. — 1. The supines in -iium, of verbs with the perfect 
in -ivi. have i long before turn; as, audivi, auditum. 

2. / is long in divisum. 

Eo and its compounds have i short before turn in the supines; as, 
reditum. Ambio however has ambltum. 

VI. The participles in -rus have u long in the penult; as, 
amaturus. 



PROSODY QUANTITY DERIVATIVES. 339 



DERIVATIVES. 

1. Derivatives retain the quantities of their primitives or roots ; 
as, amat, from amo ; amoris, from amo ; mdternus, from mater. The 
vowel of the primitive is sometimes made long or short by adding 
or removing a consonant. 

Derivatives from nouns increasing their syllables, in the second 
or third declension, agree in quantity with the increasing-syllable 
before i or is of the genitive ; as, pueritia, from pueri; virgineus, from 
virginis. 

The vowels of the derived tenses, and of derived words, in verbs, 
agree in quantity with those of the principal form of the verb from 
which they are formed or derived ; as, movebam, from moveo — 
the mov of the first principal part being short ; moveram, from mo- 
visse — the mov of the second principal part being long ; motio, motor , 
from mot, the third principal part or supine of which is long. In posui 
and positum the o is short. 

Exceptions. — 1. Ldr, par, sal, and pes, shorten the vowel of the 
nominative in declension ; as, pedis, salis. 

2. Derivative verbs in -urio have u short, though the third prin- 
cipal part, from which they are formed, is long ; as, ccenaturio, from 
coznatum. 

3. Frequentative verbs, that are formed from the third principal 
part of the first conjugation, have i short; as, clamito. 

4. The following words have a long vowel in place of the short 
one in the primitive : viz. — 

Deni, from decern. Lex (legis), from lego. Semen, from sero. 

Fomes, from foveo. Mobilis,/rom moveo. Stlpendium, from stips 
Fomentum,/romfoveo. Penuria,/rom penus. (stipis). 

Humanus, from homo. Persona, /rompersono. Suspicio (-onis), from 

Humor, from humus. Regula,/rora rego. suspicor. 

Jumentum,/romjuvo. Rex (regis), from rego. Tegula,/rom tego. 

Laterua, from lateo. Secius, from secus. Vox (vocis), from voco. 

Litera, from lino. Sedes, from sedeo. 

5. The following words have a short vowel in place of a long one 
in the primitive , viz. — 

Arena, from areo. Labo, from labor. Quasillus,/rom qualus. 

Arista, from areo. Lucerna, from luceo. Sagax, from sagio. 

Dicax, from dlco. Molestus, /rom moles. Sopor, from sopio. 

Ditio,/rom dis (dltis). Nato, from natu. Stabilis, from stabam. 

Dux (ducis), from diico. Noto, from nota. Vadum, from vado. 

Fides, from fido. Odium, from odi. Vocd, from (vox) vocis 



340 PROSODY — QUANTITY — INCREMENTS OF NOUNS. 



INCREMENTS OF NOUNS. 

1. A noun is said to increase when it has more syllables in any 
of its cases than it has in the nominative ; as, nom. pax, gen. pacts. 

2. The number of increments is equal to the number of syllables 
added to the genitive singular. Nouns, &c, have only one incre- 
ment in the singular ; except iter, supellez, and compounds of caput 
ending in -ps. 

3. It is not the last syllable of a word that is considered to be the 
increment ; but the syllable next before it — that is, the penult. 
If there are two increments or two syllables added, the antepenult 
is called the first increment, the penult the second increment. 
Should there be three increments, the syllable before the antepenult 
is called the first increment, the antepenult the second increment, 
and the penult the third increment. 

4. The quantity of the first increment is the same in all the other 
cases that it is in the genitive. 

[The same rules of increments apply to adjectives, participles, and 
pronouns.] 

INCREMENTS OF THE SINGULAR NUMBER. 

Increments of the Second Declension. 

I. In the second declension the increments are short, except Iber 
and Oeliiber, which are long ; as, gener, gen. generi; Iber, gen. Iberi. 

Increments of the Third Declension. 
A long. 

1. The increments in a of the third declension, and singular num- 
ber, are long ; as, animal, animdlis ; audax, auddcis. 

Exceptions. — 1. Masculines in -al and -ar, (except -car and -war,) 
have their increments short ; as, Anibal, Anibalis. 

2. Anas, mas, vas (vadis), baccar, hepar, jubar, lar, nectar, sal, with 
par and its compounds, have their increments short. 

3. Nouns ending in -s, with a consonant before it, increase short ; 
as, daps, ddpis. 

4. The following nouns in -ax have their increments short ; namely, 
abax, anthrax, Arctophylax, Atax, Atrax, climax, colax, cor ax, nycti* 
corax, dropax, fax, similax, harpax, styrax, and smilax. 

5. Greek nouns in -a (-atis) and -as (-adis) increase short; as, 
poerna, poematis ; lampas, lampadis. 



PROSODY — QUANTITY — INCREMENTS OF NOUNS. 341 

long. 
Increments in o, of the third declension, are long. 
Exceptions. — 1. is short in the increments of neuter nouns; 

as, corpus, corporis. But os, oris, and the neuter of comparatives, 
increase long. Ador has its increment common. 

2. Compounds of -pus (-novg), as tripus, polypus, (Edipus, likewise 
arbor, memor, bos, compos, impos, and lepus, have their increments 
short ; as, tripus, tripodis. 

3. Nouns ending in -s, with a consonant before it, have their in- 
crements short; as, inops, inopis, Allobrox, Cappadox, and prcecox, 
also increase short. But Cereops, Cyclops, and hydrops, have their 
increments long. 

4. is generally short in the increments of gentile nouns in o or 
on, whether Greek or barbaric ; as, Macedo, Macedonis. But Eburo- 
nes, Lucones, lones, Nasamones, Suessiones, Vettones, Burgundiones, 
have o long. Brilones however has the o common. 

5. Greek nouns in -o or -on, which have omicron (Gr. o) in the 
oblique cases, increases short; but long when they have omega (w). 

6. Greek nouns in -or have their increments short; as, Hector, 
Hectoris ; rhetor, rhetoris. 

E short. 

The increments in e, of the third declension, are short. 
Exceptions. — 1. Nouns in -en, gen. -enis, have their increments 
long (except Hymen)', as, Siren, Sirenis. 

2. Hceres, locuples, mansues, merces, quies, Iber, ver, lex, alec, nar- 
thex, vervex, plebs, and seps, have their increments long. 

3. Greek nouns in -es and -er (except aer and cether) have their 
increments long ; as, magnes, magnetis ; crater, crateris. 

4. Gentile proper names in -el have their increments long; as, 
Uriel, Urielis. 

1 short. 

The increments in *', of the third declension, are short. 

Exceptions. — 1. Nouns and adjectives in -ix have i long in their 
increments ; as, felix, felicis. But calix, Cilix, coxendix, filix, fornix, 
hystrix, larix, nix, pix, salix, sirix, and sometimes sandix, have the i 
short in the increment. 

2. Dis, glis, lis, vis, Nesis, Samnis, Quiris, with vibex, have their 
increments long. 

8. Greek nouns, with their genitive in -inis, have i long in their 
increments ; as, delpkin, delphinis. 
29* 



342 PROSODY — QUANTITY — INCREMENTS OF VERBS. 

U short. 

The increments in u, of the third declension, are short. 

Exceptions. — 1. Genitives in -udis, -uris, and -litis, from nomina- 
tives in -us, have the increments in u long; as, palus, paludis. But 
intercus, Ligus, and pecus, have their increments in u short. 

2. Far, frux, lux, and Pollux, have the increment in u long. 

Y short. 

The increments in y, of the third declension, are short. 

Exceptions. — 1. Greek nouns, with the genitive in -ynis, have y 
long in their increments; as, Trachyn, Trachynis. 

2. Bombyx, Ceyx, gryps, and mormyr, have their increments long. 
Bebryx and sandyx have their increments common. 

INCREMENTS OF THE PLURAL NUMBER. 

I. A noun is said to increase in the plural, when it has more syl- 
lables than the ablative singular, or the nominative plural, in any 
of its plural cases : such increase only taking place in the genitive, 
dative, and ablative plural. This plural increment is always the penult 
syllable ; as, pi, in ruplum, rupibus. 

II. The plural increments in a, e, and o, are long ; those in t and 
ft are short ; as, bonarum, rerum, generorum, sermombus, Iambus, 

INCREMENTS OF VERBS. 

When a verb has more syllables in any other of its parts than it 
has in the second person singular, it is said to increase ; as, doces, 
docemus. The last syllable of the verb is not counted as an incre- 
ment, but only the additional syllables before it. The number of 
increments in a verb is equal to the number of additional syllables ; 

1 12 12 3 

as, 1 additional syllable (amas), amamus, 2amdbdmus, 3 amave ramus 

12 3 4 

4 audiebamini. 

The active voice may have three increments, the passive four 
The increments of deponent verbs are determined in the same 

manner as if they were active, or as if they had an active form. 

A long. 
The increments in a of verbs are long. 
Exceptions. — 1. The first increment of do and its compounds is 

1 12 1 12 

short; as, dtimus. dabdmus ; circumdare, circumdabdmus. 



PROSODY — QUANTITY — PENULT SYLLABLES. 343 

E long. 

The increments in e of verbs are long. 

Exceptions. — 1. Before -ram, -rim, and -ro, and the persons de- 
rived from them, e is short ; as, amaveram, amaverat. But when 
the verb is contracted by syncope or otherwise, the e before r is 
long ; as, fleram, for fleveram. 

2. In all the present and imperfect tenses of the third conjugation, 
e is short before r, in the first increment ; as, legere, legerem. 

3. E is short in the second increment, in the first and second 
conjugations in -beris and -here ; as, amdberis, amdbere. 

long. 
The increments in o of verbs are long. 
/ short. 

The increments in i of verbs are short. 

Exceptions. — 1. /before v or s, in tenses formed from the second 
principal part, is long ; as, audlvi, divlsit. 

2. I is long in the first increment of the fourth conjugation, ex- 
cept -imus of the perfect indicative ; as, audlrem, auditus, present 
venimus, but perfect venimus : also in Ibam and ibo, from eo. When 
a vowel follows the i, it is short ; as, audiunt. 

3. Gaudeo, arcesso, divido, facesso, lacesso, peto, qucero, recenseo, and 
obliviscor, have the increments in i long, in the syllables formed from 
the third principal part ; as, gavisus, gavisurus. 

4. / is long in the first and second persons plural of simus, sitis, 
velimus, velitis, and their compounds. 

5. / is common in rimus and ritis of the future perfect indicative 
and the perfect subjunctive. 

U short. 

The increments in u of verbs are short. 

Exceptions. — 1. U is long in the increments of supines, and of 
participles formed from the third principal part. 

PENULT SYLLABLES. 

1. Words ending in -abrum, -ubrum, -acrum, and -alrum, lengthen 
the penult ; as, candelabrum. 

2. Words in -acus, -icus, and -icum, shorten the penult ; as, rusticus ; 
except Dacus, merdcus, opdcus, amicus, apricus, ficus, medicus t picus, 
posticus^ pudicus, spicus, umbilicus, vicus. 



344 PROSODY QUANTITY PENULT SYLLABLES. 

3. Patronymics in -ades and -ides shorten the penult — as, Allan 
tiades ; — except some in -ides formed from nouns in -eus ; as also 
Amphiar aides, Belides, Amy elides, Lycurgldes. But patronymics and 
similar words in -ais, -eis, and -ois, lengthen the penult — as, Minois ; 
except Phocais and Thebdis. 

4. Nouns in -ca and verbs in -do lengthen the penult — as, lorica, 
cedo ; — except alica, brassica, dica, fullca, mantica, pedica, perCbca, 
scutica, phalarica, tunica, vomica (and some nouns in -ica derived from 
adjectives) ; eddo, divldo, edo, comedo, Macedo, modo, solido, spado, 
trepldo. 

5. Nouns in -ga and -go lengthen the penult — as, collega ; — ex- 
cept caliga, ossifrdga, toga, pldga,fuga, stega, ecloga, ego, harpdgo, 
ligo. 

6. Words ending in -le, -les, and -lis, as also those ending in -elus, 
-ela. and -elum, lengthen the penult — as, ancile, querela; — except 
male, gelus, yelum, scelus; also verbals in -bilis and -His; and adjec- 
tives in -atilis ; likewise indoles, soboles, periscelis, dapsilis, gracilis, 
humilis, parilis, similis, sterilis, mugllis, strigilis. 

7. E before the terminations -rus, -ra, and -rum, is short ; but the 
other vowels before these terminations are long — as, ceterum, earns, 
mirus, morus, murus, gyrus ; — except austerus, galerus, plerus, pro- 
cerus, sincerus, serus, severus, verus, cratera, cera, pera, panthera, sta- 
tera, barbarus, cammarus, camurus, cantharus, chorus, forus, helleborus, 
nurus, opiparus, oviparus, phosphorus, pirus, satyrus, scarus, sparus, 
tartdrus, torus, zephyrus, amphora, ancora, Kara, cithdra, lyra, mora, 
purpura, pyra, philyra, pyra, satira, forum, pdrum, gdrum, suppdrum. 

8. Words in -ates, -itis, -otis, and those in -ata, -eta, -ota, -uta, 
lengthen the penult — as, vdtes ; — except sitis, potis, drapeta, nota, 
rdta. Nouns in -ita shorten the penult — as, semita ; — except 
pituita. 

9. Nouns in -etas and -Has shorten the penult; as, civllas. 

10. Adjectives in -osus lengthen the penult ; as, famosus. 

11. Adjectives in -inus, denoting time, or a material or inanimate 
substance, shorten the penult — as, crastlnus, faginus ; — except ma- 
tutinus, repentlnus, vespertinus. But other adjectives in -inus or -inum 
lengthen the penult — as, binus ; — except acinus, asinus, coccinus, 
comznus, eminus, copninus, dominus, faclnus, faticinus, protinus, sinus, 
terminus, gemlnus, circinus, minus, vaticlnus, succinum, fascinum. 

12. Adverbs in -iim lengthen the penult; except stdtim (imme- 
diately) and effdtim. Those in -iter and -itus shorten the penult. 

13. Words in -idus shorten the penult, but those in -udus lengthen 
it — as, limpidus, nudus ; — except idus, fldus, infidus, nidus, sidus. 

14. Diminutives in -olus, -ola, -olum, -ulus, -ula t -ulum, likewise 



PROSODY — QUANTITY — PENULT SYLLABLES. 345 

words in ■ ilus, and also those in -ulus, -ula, -ulum, of more than two 
syllables, shorten the penult ; except asilus. 

15. Words in -ma, -na, -ne, -ni, and -nis, lengthen the penult — 
as, famq, lana, arena, carina; — except anima, coma, decilma, lacrlma, 
victima, Kama, advena, cottdna, ptisdna, mina, gena, bene, sine, cdnis, 
cinis,juvenis, buccina, domina, fiscina, lamina, machina, pagina, patina^ 
sarcina, tibicina, trulina. 

16. The terminations -men &nd-mentum have the vowels preceding 
them long — as, flumen ; — except idmen, columen, Hymen, elementum, 
and some few verbal nouns derived from verbs of the second and 
third conjugations ; as, regimen, &c. 

17. Words terminating in -imus shorten the penult — as, animus; 
except blmus, limus, mlmus, oplmus, quadrimus, slmus, trlmus, imus, 
and primus. When -umus is substituted for -imus, in adjectives, the 
penult remains the same as in -imus. 

18. A, e, o, and u, before the finals -mus, -mum, -nus, and num, 
are long — as, ramus, urbdnus ; — except atomus, balsdmus, cinndmum, 
domus, glomus, humus, postumus, thalamus, tomus, calamus, nanus, 
anus, galbdnus, y mdnus, ocednus, platdnus, ebenus, genus, Urn) genus, 
penus, ienus, Venus, onus, sonus, thronus, lagdnum, peuceddnum, popd- 
num, tympdnum, abrotonum. 

19. Verbs ending in -ino and -inor shorten the penult — as, desti- 
no ; — except festino, propino, saglno, oplnor, with the compounds of 
cllno. 

20. Words ending in -ba, -bo, -pa, and-jt?o, have the penult short — 
as, sylldba ; — except gleba, scriba, bubo, glubo, llbo, nubo, scribo, 
slpho, cepa, cupa, papa, pupa, ripa, scopa, stupa, capo, repo, stlpo. 

21. Before the termination -ro or -ror, a and e are short, but i, o, 
and u, are long — as, dro, mtror ; — except decldro, pero, spero, foro, 
moror, soror, voro, furo, saturo. 

22. Words in -al, -ar, -are, and .aris, have the penult long — as, 
tribunal; — except animal, capital, cubital, toral, jubar, sdlar, mare, 
bimdris, hildris, canthdris, cappdris, Icdris. 

23. Words terminating in -dex, -dix, -mex, -nix, -lex, -rex, lengthen 
the penult — as, codex; — except citlex, silex, and rumex. 

24. Nouns ending in -atum, -itum, -utum. lengthen the penult — 
so do also nouns and adjectives ending in -tus — as, aconltus, gratvs; — 
except defrutum, pulpltum, petoritum, lutum, compltum, cdtus, latus, 
impetus, metus, vegetus, vetus, anhelltus, digitus, gratvitus, halitus, 
hospltus, servltus, spiritus, antidolus, notus, quotus, totus, arbutus, 
putus, inclytus. 

25. The vowel in the penult before v is long — as, cldva ; — except 
avis, brevis, gravis-, levis, ovis, cdvo, grdvo, juvo, lavo, Wvo, ovo, dvus, 
cdvus, fdvus, novus, favor, pdvor, novem. 



346 PROSODY — QUANTITY PROPER NAMES. 

The Penult Syllable of Proper Names. 

The following proper names have their penults long: — 

Abdera, Abydus, Adonis, iEsopus, iEtolus, Ahala, Alarlcus, Alci- 
des, Amyclae, Andronicus, Anubis, Archimedes, Ariarathes, Ariobar- 
zanes, Aristides, A v istobulus, Aristogiton, Arpinum, Artabanus, 
Brachmanes, Busiris, Buthrotus, Cethegus, Chalcedon, Cleobiilus, 
Cyrene, Cythera, Cruretes, Darici, Demonicus, Diomedes, Diores, 
Dioscuri, Ebudes, Eriphyle, Eubulus, Euclides, Euphrates, Eumedes, 
Eurlpus, Euxinus, Garganus, Gsetulus, Granicus, Heliogabalus, Hen- 
ricus, Heraclides, Heraclitus, Hipponax, Hispanus, Irene, Lacydas, 
Latona, Leucata, Lugdunum, Lycoras, Mandane, Mausolus, Maxi- 
minus, Meleager, Messala, Messana, Miletus, Nasica, Nicanor, Ni- 
cetas, Pachynus, Pandora, Peloris, Pelorus, Pharsalus, Phoenice, 
Polites, Polycletus, Polynlces, Priapus, Sardanapalus, Sarpedon, 
Serapis, Sinope, Stratonice, Suffetes, Tigranes, Thessalonica, Vero- 
na, Veronica. 

The following proper names have their penults short : — 

Amathus, Amphipolis, Anabasis, Anticyra, Antigonus, Antigone, 
Antilochus, Antiochus, Antiopa, Antipas, Antipater, Antiphanes, 
Antiphates, Antiphila, Antiphon, Anytus, Apulus, Areopagus, Ari- 
minum, Armenus, Athesis, Attalus, Attica, Biturix, Bructeri, Ca- 
laber, Callicrates, Callistratus, Candace, Cantaber, Carneades, Che- 
rilus, Chrysostomus, Cleombrotus, Cleomenes, Corycos, Constantino- 
polis, Craterus, Cratylus, Cremera, Crustumeri, Cybele, Cyclades, 
Cyzicus, Dalmatas, Damocles, Dardanus, Dejoces, Dejotaras, Demo- 
critus, Demipho, Didymus, Diogenes, Drepanum, Dumnorix, Empe- 
docles, Ephesus, Euergetes, Eumenes, Eurymedon, Euripylus, Fuci- 
nus, Gergones, Gyarus, Hecyra, Heliopolis, Hermione, Herodotus, 
Hesiodus, Hesione, Hippocrates, Hippotamos, Hypata, Hypanis, 
Iarcus, Icetas, Illyris, Iphitus, Ismarus, Ithaca, Laodice, Laomedon, 
Lampsacus, Lamyrus, Lapithae, Lucretilis, Libanus, Lipare, Lipara, 
Lysimachus, Longimanus, Marathon, Maenalus, Marmarica, Massa- 
getse, Matrona, Megara, Melitus, Melita, Metropolis, Mutina, Mico- 
nus, Neocles, Neritos, Noricum, Omphale, Patara, Pegasus, Phar- 
naces, Pisistratus, Polydamus, Polyxena Porsena, Praxiteles, Pute- 
oli, Plyades, Pythagoras, Sarmathee, Sarsina, Semele, Semiramis, 
Sequani, Sequana, Sysyphus, Sicoris, Socrates, Sodoma, Sotades, 
Spartacus, Sporades, Strongyle, Stymphalus, Sybaris, Taygetus, 
Telogonus, Telemachus, Tenedos, Tarraco, Theophanes, Theophilus, 
Tomyris, Urbicus, Veneti, Vologesus, Volusus, Xenociates, Zoilus, 
Zopyrus. 



PROSODY — QUANTITY — FINAL SYLLABLES. 347 



ANTEPENULT SYLLABLES. 

1. / in diminutives in -icuius and -icellus, and before the termi- 
nation -tudo, is short; as, colliculus, altltudo. When however a short 
vowel precedes the diminutive, or its primitive i is long, the i is then 
long in the diminutive ; as, cuticula, cornicula, from comix — cornlci. 

2. Verbals in -bills have a long, but * short, in the antepenult ; 
as, amdbilis, credibilis. 

3. Numerals in -ginti, -ginta, -en^ &i.d -esimus, have the antepenult 
long ; as, viginti. 

4. A vowel before the terminations -nea, -neo, -nia, -nio, -nius, and 
-nium, is long — as, linea ; — except castdnea, tinea, mdneo, mineo, mdneo, 
seneo, teneo, ignominia, lascinia, venia, lanio, venio, ingenium, genius, 
s$nio, senium; also words ending in -clnium, and those ending in 
-onius — o being short in the primitive. 

5. and u before the termination -lentus are short; as is also u 
in the antepenult before v ; as, violentus, fiuvius. 

6. Words ending in -arco, -arius, -arium, -erium, -orius, and -orium, 
also adjectives in -aticus and -atilis, have the antepenult long — .as, 
cibdrius, aqudticus ; — except cdreo, vdrius, desiderium, imperium, ?na- 
gisterium, ministerium ; and some Greek words ending in -aticus. 

FINAL SYLLABLES. 

VOWELS. 

Monosyllables. 
All monosyllables ending in a vowel, when not enclited, are long; 
as, da, de, si, &c. 

Polysyllables. 
A final. 

I. All the cases of declineable words ending in -a are short, except 
the ablative in -a of the first declension, and the vocative of Greek 
nouns ending in -as and -es. 

Exceptions. — 1. A final in words not declined by cases, or not 
declined at all, is long — as, ama, ergd ; — except quid, ita, and ejd ; 
also putd, when an adverb. This -a is also sometimes short in the 
prepositions contra and ultra, in numerals ending in -ginta ; likewise 
in the final -a of the names of Greek letters ; as, alpha, beta. 

E final. 

II. E in the final syllable of words of two or more syllables is 
short ; as, patre*, regfre. This includes also the enclitics. 



348 PROSODY — QUANTITY — FINAL SYLLABLES. 

Exceptions. — I. The final -e of nouns of the first and fifth declen- 
sions is long ; as, Tydide, fide. 

2. Greek neuters in the plural are long; as, Tempe, mele ; also 
Greek vocatives from nouns in -es of the third declension. 

3. E final is long in the second person singular of the imperative 
active of the second conjugation — as, doce ; — but sometimes it is 
short at the end of cave, valg, vide. 

4. In adverbs formed from adjectives of the first and second de- 
clensions the final -e is long — as, pulchre, maxime ; — but bene, male", 
in/erne, and superne, have the e short. 

5. The final ~e is long in fere, ferme, and one. 

I final. 

III. / final is long ; as, dominl, classi. 

Exceptions. — 1. The final -i is common in mihi, sibi, tibi, uti, and 
ibi ; also in nisi and quasi, and in cui when a dissyllable ; but in ubivis, 
ubinam, utinam, and utique, as also sometimes in utl, it is short. 

2. 1 final is short in Greek datives and ablatives plural ending in 
-si or -sin ; also in the dative singular of increasing Greek nouns of 
the third declension. It is likewise short in the vocative in -is ; but 
long in those in -is, gen. -entos, of Greek nouns. 

final. 

IV. final in words of two or more syllables is common ; as, amo. 
Exceptions. — 1. The final -o is long in the dative and ablative 

singular ; as, regno. It is also long in ablatives used as adverbs, 
and in Greek nouns ending in omega; as, omino, Clio, likewise in -io. 

2. The final -o is short in cito, illico, profecto, and in the compounds 
of mo do ; as, dummod) ; generally also in ego and homo*. 

U and Y final. 

V. Final -u is long ; as, cornu. But the final -y is short ; as, molp. 

CONSONANTS. 

Monosyllables. 

Substantive-monosyllabics terminating in a consonant are long; 
but all other monosyllables ending in a consonant are short, when 
the consonant is single and preceded by a single vowel; as, sol, Jus; 
ne'e, ab, quid. 

Exceptions. — 1. En, non, quin, sin, eras, plus, car, and/w, like* 



PROSODY — QUANTITY — FINAL SYLLABLES. 349 

wise pronouns and particles ending in -c are long, except nee. The 
monosyllabic plural cases of pronouns, as likewise the monosyllabic 
forms of verbs, are long ; but es, from sum, is short ; and hie and hoc 
are common. 

2. Cor, f el, mel, pol, vir, os (gen. ossis), are short. 

3. The abridged imperatives have the quantity of their primitives ; 
as, die, from dico ; fac, from facio. 

Polysyllables. 
B, D, L, M, R, and T, final. 

1. B, -d, -Z, -m, -r, and -t, in syllables at the end of words, shorten 
them, except when preceded by a diphthong, or the syllable is con- 
tracted. 

Exceptions. — 1. Sol, nil, far, sal, lar, nar, par, cur, and fur, are 
long. 

2. Aer and cether are long ; as are also nouns in ~er (gen. -eris) 
long in their final syllables ; as, crater, 

C final. 

II. Final syllables ending in -c are long ; as, illuc. 
Exceptions. — Nee and donee are short. 

N final. 

III. Final syllables ending in -n are long ; as, non. 
Exceptions. — 1. Forsan, forsitan, in, tamen, an, viden, are short; 

as are also words ending in -en (gen. -inis). 

2. Greek nouns ending in -an, -on, -in, and -yn, originally short, 
are short. 

J^ES, and OS, final. 

IV. The final syllables -as, -es, and -os, are long; as, amas, ser- 
mones, viros. 

Exceptions. — 1. -As is short in anas, and in those Greek nouns 
which have their genitives in -adis -or -ados ; as, areas, Pallas. 

1. -Es is short in nouns and adjectives of- the third declension in- 
creasing short in the genitive; as, hospes (gen. hospitis). But in 
abies, aries, paries, Ceres, and pes, with its compounds, it is long. 
-Es in the present tense of sum and its compounds is short ; also in 
the preposition pengs. -Es is short in Greek neuters, and in Greek 
nominative and vocative plurals of the third declension increasing 
in the genitive. 

8. -Os is short in comptis, impos, and in ds (gen. ossis) with its 
30 



350 PROSODY — QUANTITY — COMPOUNDS. 

compounds. In Greek nouns this -os is short in neuters, in nouns 
of the second declension, and in the genitive singular of the third 
declension. 

IS, US, and YS, final. 

V. The final syllables -is, -us, and -ys, are short ; as, mitts. 

Exceptions. — 1. -Is in the plural cases is long; as, musls, omnis 
(for omnes). -Is in the nominative of nouns having their genitives 
in -itis, -inis, or -ends, is long; as, Samnls. It is also long in the 
second person singular of the present indicative active of the fourth 
conjugation; as likewise in the second persons of the verbs fis, is, 
sis, vis, veils, and their compounds. But -ris in the future perfect 
and perfect subjunctive is common. -Is is long in glls, vis, gratis, 
and /oris, 

2. - Us is long in nouns of the third declension, which increase 
long ; also in the genitive singular and in the plural of the fourth 
declension : as, virtus, fructus. - Us is long in the nominative or 
genitive, when derived from the Greek termination -ous. But the 
compounds of -pus (-novs), when of the second declension, have the 
-us short. 

3. Thetys, and other nouns in ys, that also end in -yn, are some- 
times long. 

COMPOUND WORDS. 

Compounds retain the quantities of the words composing them ; 
as, defero, from de and fero. The change of vowels or of diphthongs 
in the compounds does not alter their quantities. 

1. The long syllables in the simple words become short in the fol 
lowing compounds; viz., agnltus and cognitus, from notus ; dejero and 
pejero, from mro ; hodie, from hoc die; nihUum and nihil, from hllum ; 
causidicus, with other compounds ending in -dicus, from dico. But 
inbecillus, from bacillum, has the second syllable long. 

2. Prepositions of one syllable ending in a vowel are long. But 
those which end in a single consonant are short. Pro- is short in 
the following compounds; viz., pro/anus, profari, profccto, profestus, 
proficiscor, profiteor, profugio, profugus, procella, profundus, pronepos, 
proneptu, and protervus. But in procuro, profundo, propago, propello, 
and propino, it is common. The Greek preposition pro (before) is 
short; as, propheta ; but it is common in prologus and prop o la. 

3. The inseparable prepositions di- or dis- and se- are long ; as, 
dlduco, separo ; but the inseparable preposition re- or red- is short; 
as, remitto. Re- is sometimes long in religo, reliquice, reliquus, reperit, 
retulit, recidit, and reducere. Re- is long in the impersonal verb refert 



PROSODY — QUANTITY — ACCENTS. 351 

A, E, I, 0, U, and Y, in composition. 

4. A terminating the first part of a compound is long; but *, i, o, 
u, and y, are generally short; as, trddo, nefas, biceps, hodie, lucuples, 
Poly dor us. 

Exceptions. — I. A. — The a is short in quasi, and in eadem, when 
not an ablative: likewise in some Greek compounds; as, hexameter. 

2. E. — The e is long in credo, nemo, nequam, nequaquam, nequid- 
quam, nequis, nequitia, memet, mecum, tecum, secum, sese, vecors, vesa' 
nus, veneficus, and sometimes videlicet. Also in words compounded 
with ~se, for sex- or semi ; as, sedecim. In some words compounded 
with -facio, e is common ; as, patefacio. 

3. I. — The i is long in the first part or word of the compound, 
that may be declined ; as, quldem. Also in those compounds that 
can be separated without altering the sense ; as, slquis. I in the 
first part of a compound is sometimes made long by contraction ; as, 
bigce, for bijugoz. lis long in idem when masculine; but short when 
neuter. lis long in ublque, utroblque, ibidem, and nimirum ; likewise 
in the compounds of dies ; as, biduum, merldies. I ending the first part 
of a compound Greek word is generally short; as, Calllmachus. 

4. 0. — In contro-, -retro, -intro, and -quando, of compound words, 
the final o is long; as, introduco. is likewise long in compounds 
of quo- and eo- ; as quomodo, eodem ; but in the conjunction quoque 
it is short. In Greek compounds, which in the original have omega, 
the o is long; as, geometra. 

5. U. — The u is long in Jupiter, judico, judex, and judicium. 

The Final Syllable of the Verse. 

The last syllable of every verse (except the anapestic and Ionic 
a minore) may be made long or short, as the poet may require. 

ACCENTS. 

1. There are properly three accents in the Latin language: the 
acute ( ' ) or rising tone, or ictus ; the grave ( v ) or falling tone, and 
the circumflex ( /v ), consisting of the rising and falling tones. 

2. A short monosyllable takes the acute accent, a long monosyl- 
lable the grave: as, et, spes. 

3. The penult is always accented in words of two syllables ; as, 
pa'-ter, ma'-ter. When the penult is long, and the final syllable is 
short, the penult takes the circumflex accent; but when it is shoit, 
it takes the acute accent ; as, mH-sa, ho f -mo. 

4. In words of more than two syllables, the penult is accented 



352 PROSODY — VERSIFICATION — FEET. 

when it is long; but when the penult is short, the antepenult is 
accented ; as, ami f -cus, dom f -i-nus. When the last syllable is also 
long, the penult takes the circumflex accent; but when it is short, 
the penult takes the acute accent. The antepenult can only 
take the acute accent, nor in any case can the accent be thrown 
farther back than the antepenult. Vocatives of the second declen- 
sion in -t, instead of -ie, and genitives in -i, in place of -it, are 
accented the same as if the omitted letters were annexed, and have 
the accent on the penult, even when it is short. In like manner, the 
compounds of -facio with words, not prepositions, have the accent 
on the penult, though short; as, calefa'-cit. The accent in prose, 
when the penult is common, is on the antepenult; as, voV-u-cris ; 
but the penult is accented in genitives in -ius. 

The enclitics que, ne, and ve, are considered as a constituent part 
of the word, as respects accent; as, Via, i'iaque, vi'rum, virum'quz. 

All the syllables of Latin words on which the acute or circumflex 
accent does not fall are considered as having the grave accent 



II. VERSIFICATION. 



A verse consists of a certain number of long and short syllables, 
divided according to rules. The subdivisions of a verse are called 
feet. 

FEET. 

A foot is two or more syllables of a certain quantity combined 
together; as, arm a, corpora. 

Feet are simple or compound. The simple feet consist of two or 
three syllables, and are twelve in number; four of two feet, and 
eight of three feet. The compound feet consist of four syllables, 
and are sixteen in number. 

Names of Simple Feet of Two Syllables. 

Spondee — — as, fundunt 

Phyrrhic ^ ^ as, deus. 

Iambus ^ — as, erdnt. 

Trochee, or Choree .... — ^ as, dr?.i&. 



PROSODY — VERSIFICATION — FEET — METRE. 353 

Names of Simple Feet of Three Syllables. 

Dactyl — s^ w as, corpora. 

Anapaest w w — as, domini. 

Molossus — — — ...... as, confendunt. 

Tribrach w w -*_• as, fa cere. 

Amphibrach ^— * — w as, amare. 

Amphimachus, or Cretic. — *-- — as, castitas. 

Bacchius *— ' — — as, C atones. 

Antibacchius . — — w as, Romdnus. 

Names of Compound Feet of Four Syllables. 

Dispondee (two sponde-es) as, conflixerunt. 

Proceleusmatic (two Phyrrics) ^ ^ ^ w as, hominibus. 

Diiambus (two iambics) w — r w — as, amaverant. 

Ditrochee (two trochees) — w — ^ as, comprobdvU. 

Greater Ionic (a spondee andPhyrric) — — w *— as, cdlcdribus. 

Smaller Ionic (a Phyrric and spondee) w *-- as, properdbant. 

Choriambus (a trochee and iambus)... — w v— ^ — as, terrif leant. 

Antipast (an iambus and trochee) ^ w as, dmdbdtls. 

First paeon (a trochee and Phyrric)... — ^ w w as, temporlbus. 
Second paeon (an iambus and Phyrric) w — ■ w w as, potentid. 
Third paeon (a Phyrric and trochee).. ^ w — w as, dnimdtus. 
Fourth paeon (a Phyrric and iambus) www — as, celeritds. 

First epitrit (an iambus and spondee) w — as, dmdverunt. 

Second epitrit (a trochee and spondee) — w as, conditores. 

Third epitrit (a spondee and iambus). w — as, discordids. 

Fourth epitrit (a spondee and trochee) w as, adduxistis. 

The dactyl, spondee, anapaest, and proceleusmatic, are called iso- 
chronous, because they are each equal to four short times or feet: 
the long foot being considerpd equal to two short ones. 



METRE. 

Metre is an arrangement of syllables and feet according to certain 
rules ; comprehending either an entire verse, a part of a verse, or 
any number of verses. Metre is divided into dactylic, anapaestic, 
iambic, trochaic, choriambic, and Ionic ; being thus termed from 
the original foot used in each. 

In dactylic, choriambic, and Ionic metres, a measure consists of 
one foot ; in the others, a measure consists of two feet. 
30* x 



354 PROSODY — VERSIFICATION — VERSE, ETC. 



VERSE. 

A verse is a certain number of feet arranged according to rule, 
and forming a line of poetry. Two verses are called a distich ; a half 
verse, a hemistich. 

Verses have three different kinds of denominations: — 1st, Those 
referring to the species or kinds of verse; 2d, those denoting the 
number of feet or measures in the verse; 3d, those implying the 
character of the line, as being complete, deficient, or redundant. 

1. The principal kinds of verses are seven: — 1. The datylic ; 
2. the anapaestic ; 3. the iambic ; 4. the trochaic ; 5. the choriam- 
bic ; 6. the Iouic, and 7. the compound. Each of these have likewise 
several subordinate kinds of verses. 

2. The denomination of a verse, with respect to the metres or feet 
it contains, is: — 1. Monometer, consisting of one measure; 2. di- 
meter, of two measures; 3. trimeter, of three measures; 4. tetra- 
meter, of four measures; 5. pentameter, of five measures; 6. hexa- 
meter, of six measures; 7. senarius, of six feet; 8. octonarius, of 
eight feet. 

3. Verses, with respect to the character of the line, are: — 1. Aca- 
talectic, when the verse is complete in all its parts ; 2. catalectic, 
when deficient in a syllable at the end ; 3. acephalous, when defi- 
cient of a syllable at the beginning; 4. brachycatalectic, when want- 
ing two syllables or a foot ; 6. hypercatalectic, or hypermeter, when 
redundant in a syllable or foot. 

4. A verse, or a portion thereof, containing three half feet, mea- 
sured from its beginning, is called a trihemimeris ; if it contains five 
half feet, it is called a penthemimeris ; if seven half feet, a hepthe- 
mimeris ; if nine half feet, an ennehemimeris. A-hemiolius is one 
whole metre and a half. 

ARSIS AND THESIS. 

1. The elevation of the voice is called arsis, its depression thesis. 
The syllable of the foot on which the arsis falls is termed the ictus; 
the other syllables of the foot have the thesis or depression. 

2. The natural arsis of a foot is on the long syllable ; as, on the 
first syllable of the dactyl or trochee, but on the second of the 
iambus. In those feet having syllables of equal length the place of 
the arsis is undetermined by the foot itself, and is only determined 
by the principal foot of the meter; thus, in dactylic verse, the arsis 
of the spondee falls on the first syllable, but in anapaestic on the last 
syllable When however a long syllable in the arsis of a foot is re- 
solved into two short syllables, the arsis falls on the first of these 
two syllables. 



PROSODY — QUANTITY — CiESURA. 355 



CJ3SURA. 

1. The caesura is the separation of syllables rhythmically or metri- 
cally -united by the ending of a word, so as to leave part of the 
measure or rhythm in one word, and part in the next word follow- 
ing it. 

2. There are three kinds of caesura: — 1, Of the foot; 2, of the 
rhythm, and 3, of the verse. 

I. The caesura of the foot takes place when a word ends before 
the foot is completed ; as, in the second, third, fourth, and fifth feet 
of the following verse : 

Silves | trem teml | I Mu | sam medi | taris a | vena. 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

II. The caesura of the rhythm is the separation of the arsis from 
the thesis by the ending of a word ; that is, the arsis is in one word 
and the thesis in another, as in the second, third, and fourth feet 
of the above verse. 

1. The caesura of the rhythm always coincides with the caesura 
of the foot, as in the second, third, and fourth feet in the line above ; 
but the caesura of the foot does not always coincide with the caesura 
of the rhythm, as in the fifth foot of the verse above. 

2. When the arsis of the caesura of the rhythm falls on a short 
syllable it sometimes has the effect of lengthening it ; as, 

Pectori | bus inhi | ans spi | rantia | consulit | exta. 

12 3 4 5 6 

Here bus, in the second foot, which is naturally short, is lengthened 
by the ictus of the arsis. This is especially the case in hexameter 
verses. 

3. The caesura of the foot or of the verse does not lengthen a syl- 
lable, unless it coincides with the caesura of the rhythm. 

III. The caesura of the verse is a division of the line into two 
parts, thereby affording a pause or rest to the voice, without injuring 
the sense or harmony. This Gaesura of the verse is called the caesu- 
ral pause. In some kinds of verses its place is determined, as in 
the pentameter; in other verses it is left to the choice of the poet, 
as in the hexameter 



356 PROSODY — VERSIFICATION — DACTYLIC METRE. 



DIFFERENT KINDS OF METRE. 

There are seven principal kinds of metre: — 1, The dactylic; 
2, the anapaestic; 3, the iambic; 4, the trochaic; 5, the choriambic; 
6, the Ionic ; 7, the compound. 

Dactylic Metre. (A.) 

I. — The Hexameter, or Heroic verse, consists of six feet, of which 
the fifth is a dactyl; the sixth a spondee: the first, second, third, 
and fourth being optionally either dactyls or spondees ; as, 

Ludere | quae vel- | -lem cala- | -mo per- | -misit a- | -gresti. 

1. When the fifth foot is a spondee, in place of a dactyl, the verse 
is called spondaic. 

2. In a hexameter verse much of its harmony and beauty depends 
on the proper attention to the caesura. The caesural pause most ap- 
proved of in heroic poetry is that which takes place after the arsis 
in the third foot, as indicated by the double line in the following 
verse ; 

At domus | interi- | -or || re- | -gall | splendida | luxa. 
Sometimes the caesura falls after the thesis of the third foot, or 
the arsis of the fourth. 

II. — The Pentameter verse consists of five feet, of which the first 
'and second may each be either a dactyl or spondee; the third is 
always a spondee, and the fourth and fifth are anapests ; as, 

Carmini- | -bus vl- | ves || tern- | -pus in 6m- | -ne mels. 

1. The pentameter is divided into two hemistichs in the middle 
of the third foot, which is also the place of the caesura, indicated by 
the double line. 

2. The pentameter is mostly used with the hexameter in alternate 
verses, forming what is called the elegiac verse. 

III. — The Tetrameter d, prior e, or Alcmanian dactylic tetrameter, 
consists of the first four feet of a hexameter, the fourth being always 
a dactyl ; as, 

Garula | per ra- | -mos, avis | obstrepit. 

IV. — The Tetrameter & posteriore, or spondaic tetrameter, con- 
sists of the last four feet of a hexameter ; as, 

Sic tris- | -tes af- | -fatus a- | -micos. 

V. — The Dactylic Trimeter consists of the last three feet of a 
hexameter; as, 

Grato | Pjrrha sub | antro. 



PROSODY — VERSIFICATION — ANAP^STIC METRE, ETC. 357 

VI. — The Trimeter Catalectic Archilochian consists of the 
first five half feet of a hexameter. The first and second feet are 
mostly dactyls ; as, 

Pulvis et | umbra su- | -mus. 

VII. — The Dactylic Dimeter, or Adonic verse, consists of two 
feet — a dactyl and a spondee : as, 

Terruit | urbem. 

Anapcestic Metre. (B.) 

I. — The Anap^stic Monometer consists of two anapaests ; as, 

tJlulas- | -se canes. 

II. — The Anap2EStic Dimeter consists of two measures or four 
anapaests; as, 

Pharetrai- | -que graves | date see- | -va fero. 

Iambic Metre. (C.) 

I. — .The Iamric Tetrameter, or quadratus, or octonarius, con- 
sists of four iambic measures, or eight iambic feet. The pure iambic 
measure was seldom used by the Roman poets — other feet being 
often used in place of the iambic, except in the last foot. In this 
iambic tetrameter, for the iambics in the first, second, third, fourth, 
fifth, sixth, and seventh feet, a tribrach (^- w w) may be used: 
the last foot however is always an iambus. In the first, third, fifth, 
and seventh feet, a spondee may also be used — and in place of this 
spondee either a dactyl or anapaest may be substituted ; as, 

Nunc hie | dies | aliam | vitam af- || -fert all- | -os mo- | -res pos- | 
-tulat. 

The caesura follows the second measure, as shown by the double 
line. 

II. — The Hipponatic, or the iambic tetrameter catalectic, is the 
iambic tetrameter wanting the last syllable, and having an iambus 
in the seventh place, but in all the other places the same variations 
as the tetrameter ; as, 

Depren- | -sa na. | -vis in | marl, | vesa- || -men- | -te ven- [ -to, 

III. — The Iamric Trimeter, or senarius, consists of three iambic 
measures or six feet. In all the feet, except the last, which is 
always an iambus, the tribrach may be used in place of the iambus ; 
and in the first, third, and fifth feet, being the uneven, a spondee 



358 PROSODY — VERSIFICATION — TROCHAIC METRE. 

may be used in place of the iambus. This spondee may be resolved 
either into a dactyl or anapaest ; as. 

Phase- | -lus 11- | le || quern | vide- | -tis hos- | -pites. 

This is a pure iambic verse. The csesural pause of the senariuw 
is generally in the third foot, as marked by the double line; bu 
sometimes it is also in the fourth foot. The senarius, as varied b) 
other feet: 

Quo quo | sceles- | -ti rui- | -tis aut | ciir dex- | -teiis. 

IV. — The Choltambus, or scazon, is the iambic trimeter, with < 
spondee in the sixth foot, and generally an iambus in the fifth foot , 
as, 

An ide- | -o tan- | -turn ven- | -eras | ut ex- | -ires. 

V. — The Archlochian, or iambic trimeter catalectic, is the iam 
bic trimeter, wanting the final syllable thereof. It admits of spoa 
dees in the first and third places, but not in the fifth ; as, 

Voca- | -tils at- | -que non | voca- | tiis au- | -dit. 

VI. — The Iambic Dimeter consists of two iambic measures ci 
four feet. It has the same variations in the first, second, and third 
feet, and in the first and third feet, as the tetrameter has ; as, 

Forti | seque- | -mur pec- | -tore. 

VII. — The Iambic Dimeter Hypermeter is the iambic dimeter, 
with an additional syllable at its end ; as, 

Rede- | -get In | veros | timo- | -res. 

VIII. — The Iambic Dimeter Catalectic, or Anacreontic, is the 
iambic dimeter, wanting the final syllable, and always having an 
iambus in the third foot ; as, 

Ut ti- | -gris or- | -ba gna- | -tis. 

IX. — The Galliambus consists of two iambic catalectic dimeters, 
— the last or second catalectic dimeter wants the final syllable. 
The catalectic syllable at the end of the first dimeter is long ; the 
second foot of the second dimeter is generally a tribrach ; as, 

Super al- | -ta vec- | -tus A- || -tys || celeri | rate ma- | -ria. 

The caasura always occurs at the end of the first dimeter, as shown 
by the double line. 

Trochaic Metre. (D.) 

I. — The Trochaic Tetrameter, or octonarius, properly consists 
of eight trochees ; as, 

Ipse | siimmis | saxis | f Ixus || aspe- | -ris, e- | -visce- | -ratus. 



PROSODY — VERSIFICATION — CHORIAMBIC METRE. 359 

1. The pure trochaic verse was seldom used. The csesural pause 
occurs after the fourth foot. 

2. In all the feet, except the last, which is a trochee, a tribrach 
may be used in place of the trochee. In the even places, or second, 
fourth, and sixth feet, a spondee may be used in place of a trochee ; 
and this spondee may be resolved into a dactyl or anapaest. 

II. — The Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic consists of seven 
feet, followed by a catalectic syllable. In the first six places it is 
varied in the same manner as the trochaic tetrameter, but in the 
seventh place it has a trochee only ; as, 

Jussus | est in- | -ermis | Ire : || purus | Ire | jussus | est. 

III. — ■ The Sapphic verse consists of five feet. The first is a 
trochee; Jhe second a spondee — sometimes a trochee; the third is 
a dactyl, and fourth and fifth are trochees ; as, 

Inte- | -ger vi- | tse, || scele- | -risque | purus. 

The csesural pause is generally after the fifth half- foot, as indi- 
cated by the double line. 

IV. — The Phal^cian verse consists of five feet. The first foot is 
a spondee, the second a dactyl, and the last three are trochees; as, 

Non est | vlvere | sed va- | -lere | vita. 

V. — The Trochaic Dimeter Catalectic, or acephalous iambic 
dimeter, consists of three feet — all properly trochees, — with a cata- 
lectic syllable ; but it is varied in the second foot or place by a 
spondee or dactyl ; as, 

Non e- | -bur ne- | -que aure- | -um 

Choriambic Metre. (E.) 

I. — The Choriambic Pentameter consists of a spondee, three 
choriambi, and an iambus ; as, 

Tu ne | qusesierls | scire nefas | quern mihi quern | tibi. 

II. — The Choriambic Tetrameter consists of three choriambi 
and a Bacchius; as, 

Omne nemus | cum fluvi is | omne canat | profundum. 

1. For the iambus in the first choriambus Horace substituted a 
spondee ; as, 

Te deos o- ] -ro Sybarus | cur properes | amando. 

III. — The Asclepiadtc Tetrameter consists of a spondee, two 
choriambi, and an iambus ; as, 

Msece- | -nas ata vis || edite reg- | -lbus. 

The caBSural pause occurs at the end of the first choriambus. 



360 PROSODY — VERSIFICATION — IONJC METRE, ETC. 

IV. — The Choriambic Trimeter, or Gluconic, consists of a spon- 
dee, a choriambus, and an iambus ; as, 

Sic te | diva potens | Cypri. 

The first foot is sometimes an iambus or trochee. 

V. — The Choriambic Trimeter Catalectic, or Pherecratic, is 
the Glyconic deprived of its final syllable, and consists of a spondee, 
a choriambus, and a catalectic syllable ; as, 

Grato | Pyrrha, sub an- | -tro. 

Sometimes the first foot was a trochee or anapaest. 

VI. — The Choriambic Dimeter consists of a choriambus and 
Bacchius; as, 

Lydia die | per omnes. 

Ionic Metre. (F.) 

I. — The Ionic a Majors, or Sotadic, consists of three greater 
Ionics and a spondee ; as, 

Saturne ti- | -bl Zoilus | annulos pri- | -ores. 

The Ionic feet are often changed into ditrochees or double trochees ; 
also, either one of the two long syllables in these Ionics may be 
changed into two short syllables. 

II. — The Ionic a Minore consists commonly of three or four feet, 
all of which are Ionics a minore ; as, 

Puer ales | tibi telas | operosse- | -que Minervse. 

Compound Metre. (G.) 

Compound metre is the union of two kinds of metre in the same 
line or verse. 

I. — The Dactylico-Iambic, or elegiambus, consists of a dactylic 
trimeter catalectic (A. VI.) and an Iambic dimeter (C. VI.) ; as, 

Scribere | versicii- | -los || amo- | -re per | ciilsum | gravi. 

II. — The Iambico-Dactylic, or iambelegus, consists of the same 
number of feet as L, but the metres are inverted ; as, 

Nives- | -que de- | -duciint | Jovem || nunc mare | nunc silu- | -se. 

III. — The Dactylico-Trochaic, or Archilochian heptameter, con- 
sists of the dactylic tetrameter & priore (A. III.), followed by three 
trochees ; as, 

SoMtur | acris hi- | -ems gra- | -ta vice || veris | et fa- | -voni. 



PROSODY — VERSIFICATION — HORATIAN METRES. 361 

IV. — The Greater Alcaic consists of two iambic feet and a long 
catalectic, followed by two dactyls ; as, 

Vides | ut al- | -ta || stet nive | candidum. 

The first foot is often a spondee ; and the two dactyls at the end 
of the verse are often scanned as a choriambus and an iambus. 

V. The Lesser Alcaic, or dactylico-trochaic tetrameter, consists 
of two dactyls, followed by two trochees ; as, 

Levia | per sonu- | -ere | saxa. 



COMBINATION OF VERSES. 

A poem may consist of one, two, or three different kinds of 
verses. When it consists of one kind of verse it is called monocolon ; 
When of two kinds, dicolon ; when of three, tricolon. 

2. A stanza, or strophe, consists of two or more verses: one or 
more of which are of different kinds of metre. When the stanza is 
completed it is again repeated, and so on to the end of the poem. 

3. When a stanza consists of two lines or verses it is called 
distrophon ; when of three, tristrophon ; when of four, tetrastro- 
phon; &c. 

4. Poems may be denominated according to the number of lines 
in a stanza and the different kinds of verses : thus — 

Monocolon, which has only one kind of verse in the poem. 

Dicolon distrophon, when there are two kinds of verses, and two 
lines in the stanza. 

Dicolon tristrophon, when there are two kinds of verses, and three 
lines in the stanza. 

Dicolon tetrastrophon, when there are two kinds of verses, and 
four lines in the stanza. 

Tricolon tristrophon, when there are three kinds of verses, and 
three lines in the stanza. 

Tricolon tetrastrophon, when there are three kinds of verses, and 
four lines in the stanza. 



HORATIAN METRES 

Horace, in his lyric compositions, makes use of twenty different 
species of metre, which he has combined in nineteen different forms, 
which forms are numbered in the following order. 

[Observe — the capital letters refer to the principal classes of 
13 



362 PROSODY — VERSIFICATION HORATIAN METRES. 

metres, and the Roman numerals to the different kinds of metres, 
as explained above.] 

No. 1. — The two first lines are greater Alcaics (G. IV.) ; the third 
line is an Archilochian iambic dimeter-bypermeter (C. VII.) ; the 
fourth line is a lesser Alcaic (G. V.). 

No. 2. — The three first lines are Sapphics (D. III.); the fourth 
line is an Adonic (A. VII.). 

No. 3. — The first line is a Glyconic (E. IV.); the second line is 
an Asclepiadic (E. III.). 

No. 4. — The first line is an iambic trimeter (C. III.) ; the second 
line is an iambic dimeter (C. VI.). 

No. 5. — The three first lines are Asclepiadics (E. III.) ; the fourth 
line is a Glyconic (E. IV.). 

No. 6. — The two first lines are Asclepiadics (E. III.) ; the third 
line is a Pherecratic (E. V.) ; the fourth line is a Glyconic (E. IV.). 

No. 7. —The Asclepiadic alone (E. III.). 

No. 8. — The first line is a dactylic hexameter (A. I.) ; the second 
is a dactylic tetrameter a posteriore (A. IV.). 

No. 9. — The choriambic pentameter alone (E. L). 

No. 10. — The first line is dactylic hexameter (A. L); the second 
is an iambic dimeter (C. VI.). 

No. 11. — The iambic trimeter alone (C. I.). 

No. 12. — The first line is a choria.nbic dimeter (E. VI.); the 
second is a choriambic tetrameter (E. II.). 

No. 13. — The first line is a dactylic hexameter (A. I.) ; *he second 
is an iambic trimeter (C. III.). 

No. 14. — The first line is a dactylic hexameter (A. I.) ; the second 
is a trimeter catalectic Archilochian (A. VI.). 

No. 15. — The first line is an iambic trimeter (C. III.) ; the second 
line is a dactylic trimeter catalectic (A. VI.); the third li^e is an 
iambic dimeter (0. VI.). 

No. 16. — The first line is a dactylic hexameter (A. I.) ; the second 
line is an iambic dimeter (C. VI.) ; the third line is a dactylic tri- 
meter catalectic (A. VI.). 

No. 17. — The first line is an ArchilochJan heptameter (G III.) : 
the second line is an iambic trimeter catalectic (C. V.). 

No. 18. — The first line is a trochaic dimeter catalectic (D. IV.^« 
the second is an iambic trimeter catalectic (C. V.). 

No. 19. — The Ionic a. minore alone (F. II.). 



PROSODY — VERSIFICATION HORATIAN METRES. 



363 



METRICAL KEY TO THE ODES OF HORACE, 

Containing, in alphabeticul order, the First Words of each Ode, with 
Numbers annexed referring to the preceding Enumeration of the differ- 
ent Metres of the several Odes of Horace. 



No. 

Mix vetusto 1 

^Equ am memento 1 

Albi ne doleas 5 

Altera jam teritur 13 

/ingustam, amice 1 

At, deorum 4 

Audivere, Lyce 6 

Bacchum in remotis 1 

Beatus ille 4 

Coelo supinas 1 

Coelo tonantem... 1 

Cur me querelis 1 

Delicta majorum 1 

Descende coelo 1 

Dianam, tenerae 6 

Diffugere nives 14 

Dive, quern proles 2 

Divis orte bonis 5 

Donarem pateras 7 

Donee gratus eram tibi 3 

Eheu ! fugaces 1 

Est mihi nonum 2 

Et thure et fidibus 3 

Exegi monumentum 7 

Extremum Tanaim 5 

Faune, nympharum 2 

Festo quid potius die 3 

Herculis ritu 2 

Horrida tempestas. 16 

Ibis Liburnis. 4 

Icci, beatus 1 

Ille et nefasto 1 

Impios parrae 2 

Inclusam Danaen 5 

Intactis opulentior 3 

Integer vitie 2 

Intermissa, Venus, diu 3 

Jam jam efficaci 11 



No. 

Jam pauca aratro 1 

Jam satis terris 2 

Jam veris comites 5 

Justum et tenacem 1 

Laudabunt alii 8 

Lupis et agnis 4 

Lydia, die, per omnes 12 

Maecenas atavis 7 

Mala soluta 4 

Martiis caelebs 2 

Mater saeva Cupidinum 3 

Mercuri, facunde 2 

Mercuri, nam te 2 

Miserarum est 19 

Mollis inertia 10 

Montium custos 2 

Motum ex Metello 1 

Musis amicus 1 

Natis in usum 1 

Ne forte credas 1 

Ne sit ancillae 2 

Nolis longa ferae 5 

Nondum subacta 1 

Non ebur neque aureum 18 

Non semper imbres 1 

Non usitata 1 

Non vide3, quanto 2 

Nox erat 10 

Nullam, Vare, sacra 9 

Nullus argento 2 

Nunc est bibendum 1 

crudelis adhuc 9 

diva, gratum 1 

fons Bandusiae 6 

matre pulchra 1 

nata mecum. 1 

navis referent 6 

saepe mecum J 



364 PROSODY — VERSIFICATION — FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



No. 

Venus, regina 2 

Odi profanum 1 

Otium Divos 2 

Parcius junctas 2 

Parous Deorum 1 

Parenstis Olim 4 

Pastor quum traheret 5 

Persicos odi puer 2 

Petti, nihil me 15 

Phoebe, silvarumque 2 

Phcebu3 volentem 2 

Pindarum quisquis 2 

Poscimur; si quid 2 

Quae cura patrum 1 

Qualem ministrum 1 

Quando repostum 4 

Quantum distet ab Inacho 3 

Quem tu Melpomene 3 

Quem virum aut heroa 2 

Quid bellicosus 1 

Quid dedicatum 1 

Quid fles, Asterie 6 

Quid immerentes 4 



No. 

Quid obseratis 11 

Quid tibi vis 8 

Quis desiderio 5 

Quis multa gracilis 6 

Quo me, Bacche 3 

Quo, quo, scelesti ruitis 4 

Quum tu, Lydia 3 

Rectius vives 2 

Rogare longo 4 

Scriberis Vario 5 

Septimi, Gades 2 

Sic te Diva potens 3 

Solvitur acris hiems 17 

Te maris et terrae 8 

Tu ne quaasieris 9 

Tyrrhena regum 1 

Ulla si juris 2 

Uxor pauperis Ibyci 3 

Velox amceum 1 

Vides, ut alta 1 

Vile potabis 2 

Vitas hinnuleo 6 

Vixi puellis 1 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 

I. — Synalcepha is the cutting off or elision of the final vowel or 
diphthong ending a word, when the next word following it begins 
with a vowel, or with h i having a vowel after it ; thus, terra antiqua 
is read Urr* antiqua ; and Dardanidce infensi, Dardanid" infensi. This 
verse — 

Quidve moror? si omnes uno ordine habetis Achivos — ■ 
is scanned thus: 
Quidve mo- | -ror? s'om- | -nes u | n'ordin'ha- | -betls A- | -chlvos. 

This synalcephia does not always take place; and especially the 
interjections 0, heu, ah, proh, vce, vah, are not elided. 

II. — Ecthlipsis is the elision of a final m, with the vowel before 
it, when the word immediately following it begins with a vowel, or 
with h, followed by a vowel : as — 

Monstrum horrendum, informe, ingens, cui lumen ademptum — 
Bcanned thus : 

Monstr' hor- | -rend' in- | -form* In- | -gens cui | lumen ad- | 
-emptum. 



PROSODY — VERSIFICATION — FIGURES OF PROSODY. 365 

Sometimes this elision was omitted by the early poets, who also 
sometimes elided s, with a vowel before it, in like manner ; and 
6omet2me the s alone was elided by them. 

III. — Synapheia is the influence that the first syllable of a verse 
has on the last syllable of the verse immediately preceding it, either 
by position, synalcephia, or ecthlipsis ; as, 

Preeceps silvas montesque fugit 
Citus Actseon. 
Her the t at the end of the first verse, and the c of the commence- 
ment of the verse next following it, have the effect of lengthening 
the i in fugit, which in itself is naturally short. 

Omnia Mercurio, similis vocemque coloremjtfg 
Et crines .... 
Here que, at the end of the first verse, is elided before et, at the 
commencement of the second verse ; thus, qu' et. 

By this figure, also, the parts of a compound word are divided 
Between two verses : one part, namely, ending the first verse, the 
other part beginning the next following verse. 

IV. — Synthesis, or Crasis, is the contraction of two syllables 
mto one; as, Phceton, for Phaeton; alvo, for alveo ; dorsum, for de- 
er sum. 

A syllable formed by the union of i or u with another vowel imme- 
diately following either of them, has the quantity of such following 
Towel, whatever it may be. The i in these cases being considered 
the same as y consonant, and the u the same as w. 

V — Diuresis separates one syllable into two; as, aulce into auldi; 
TrojcR into Tro'ice ; solvit into soliiit. 

VI. — Systole shortens a long syllable ; as, the penult of tulerunt 
is made tulerunt. 

VII. — Diastole lengthens a naturally short syllable. It generally 
•ccurs in proper name and compounds of re; as, Priamides, religio. 



31* 



*&■ 



-& 




INTERLINEARS. 

S=3*®§<=S 

CLASSICAL WOEKS 

PUBLISHED BY 

Charles De Silver & Sons, Philadelphia. 

HAMILTON, LOCKE, AND CLARKE'S INTERLINEAR CLASSICS. 

The plan of these works is not new. It is merely the adaptation of the experi- 
ence of many of the best and most inquiring minds in educational pursuits — 
methodizing what was vague and loose. When the Latin tongue was the only 
language of diplomacy and scientific international communication, to acquire a 
knowledge of it ivas considered of more importance than now. This method was 
then recommended by Cardinal Wolsey, John Ascham, Latin Secretary to Queen 
Elizabeth, by the best Latin scholar and writer of his time, John Milton, and 
also by John Locke. In teaching classes by oral dictation, these works present 
advantages that no others contain. From the thousands of testimonials as to the 
excellence of the Interlinear System from teachers and eminent literary men, the 
publishers give a few selections as specimens. 

VIRGIL. 

8fa mxU a f ♦ finite pra, 

CONSISTING OF THE 

BUCOLICS, GEORGICS and the MNEID OF YIRGIL. 

With the Original Text reduced to the Natural Order of 

Construction, and an Interlinear Translation, as nearly 

Literal as the Idiomatic Differences of the Latin 

and English Languages will allow. 

ADAPTED TO THE SYSTEM OF CLASSICAL DTSTKUCTION 

Combining the Methods of Ascham, Milton, and Locke. 

By LEVI HART and V. R. OSBORN. 

In One Volume, Royal 12mo, 512 Pages, Half Turkey Morocco. Price, - - $2.25. 

INFORMATION ABOUT BOOKS PROMPTLY GIVEN. 

13 



4 



Publications of Charles De Silver 6° Sons, Philadelphia. 
THE INTERLINEAR OVID. 



SELECTIONS 

FROM THE 

Metamorphoses and Heroides 

OF 

PUBLIUS OVIDIUS NASO, 

WITH 

A Literal and Interlinear Translation on the Hamiltonian 

System as Improved by Thomas Clark, Editor of 

the Greek and Latin Interlinear Classics. 

By GEORGE WILLIAM HEILIG. 
In One Volume, Moyal 12mo f SalfTurUey Morocco* Price, • • $2.25, 



T. S. Floyd, Principal of Chesterfield Academy, Chesterfield, N. H., writes : 
Having carefully examined a copy of Ovid, it gives me great pleasure 
to bear my testimony to the superior merits of your " Interlinear Classics." 
The widely extended and daily increasing intelligence of the age has 
loudly called for a change from the old system of teaching the Classics, 
which I hope we soon shall have by the adoption of the Interlinear system. 
I cordially commend it to teachers and students. 

From the Philadelphia Press. 
The Interlinear Ovid is intended for the use of schools and private learn- 
ers, and confident we are that, by the aid of such books, the principal diffi- 
culties of translation are readily removable. 

From the New York Sun. 
A language, in fact, has to be learned by rote; there is no other way of 
speaking it well. The interlinear translation of Ovid is as nearly literal as 
the idiomatic differences of the two languages will allow. 

From J. A. Hollis, Female College, Columbia, Mo. 
I notice that you are publishing the " Interlinear Classics" — I think 
this a good idea, and that it will conduce much to the progress of those 
studying the classics. They will be especially useful to teachers. 

From the New Orleans Delta. 
A more admirable literal translation of every word in great works it 
would be impossible to meet with. It must serve as the best possible guide 
for the Latin student. 

THE SMALLEST ORDERS PROMPTLY EXECUTED. 
14 



-ffl* 




*&- 



OESAR'S COMMENTARIES, 

With an Analytical and Interlinear Translation 

OF 

THE FIRST FIVE BOOKS, 

jfw % $jf# (ft ^t\wh mi |}rit)at4 ^m^m* 

A New and More Correct Edition, with an Interlinear 
Translation 

OF 

THE SIXTH AND SEVENTH BOOKS. 

By THOMAS CLARK. 

In One Volume, Moyal 12mo, 435 Pages, Half Turlzey Morocco. 
Price, - - - $2.25. 

From H. McBride, Reed Creek, N. Y. 
I am highly in favor of the Interlinear system of learning the Latin and 
Greek languages, and hope to see it universally adopted. 
From J. Frothingham. 
I have used your Interlinear Caesar and Virgil in my classes for several 
months, and am much pleased with the progress that my pupils make. I 
am satisfied that this is the true method to obtain a knowledge of the Latin 
language, or, in fact, of any language. 

From the Philadelphia Ledger. 
These translations of the classics some of the finest minds deem the best 
adapted for learning languages. " Caesar" appears to be produced with 
great care, and in a style which will commend it to every student. 
From the New York Sun. 
Mr. Clark has followed the method of Locke, which has been approved 
by many teachers, and is a most useful innovation, superseding the former 
plan throughout the United States. 

From Andrew J. De Witt, Teacher, Lynchburg, Va. 
Clark's Interlinear Caesar is unquestionably the common-sense system, 
my experience having fully convinced me of the folly of pursuing the old 
plan. My classes have learned more Latin in one week from Clark than 
they formerly acquired in three months without it. 

WRITE FOR "INTERLINEAR" CIRCULARS. 

15 



M 



§* 

Publications of Charles De Silver &> Sons, Philadelphia. 
THE INTERLINEAR JUVENAL. 



THE SATIRES 

OP 

DECIMUS JUNIUS JUVENALIS, 

"With a Literal and Interlinear Translation on the Hamil- 
tonian System as Improved by Thomas Clark, 

WITH THE LIFE OF JUVENAL. 

By "WILLIAM G-IFFORD, Esq., 

jfw \\t ijtu *f $*W* awl ^ink fymm* 

By HIRAM CORSON, M.A., 

Professor of English Literature, Rhetoric, and Oratory in the Cornell University; Edison's 

"Chaucer's Legende of Qoode Women;" late Professor of Rhetoric, and of the 

English Language and Literature, in St. John's College, Annapolis; 

late Professor of Moral Science, History and Rhetoric 

in Girard College, Philadelphia. 

In One Volume, Hoy at 12 mo, Half Turkey Morocco. Price, - - $2.25, 

From the Students' Journal, New York. 
Specially valuable to private students of Greek and Latin. Often those 
instructed in colleges in these languages would be glad to have a more 
extended knowledge than they acquire of the best classical authors. And 
after one has learned grammatical forms, what is the particular service of 
having to turn to a dictionary for any new word or definition? Is not the 
easier method of getting the desired knowledge just as serviceable, namely, 
by reference to an interlinear translation? According to some, language 
is to be mastered by constant use in reading, writing and speaking, and not 
by grammatical definitions, classifications, paradigms and rules. Without 
going to this extreme, we may say that the ready assistance of an interlinear 
translation is far better for progress than thumbing a dictionary, especially 
for classical students sufficiently taxed with business or other studies. 

From the Philadelphia Public Ledger. 
Juvenal, in this form, has never before been published in the United 
States, and the present edition will be exceedingly useful to those persons 
who desire to become acquainted with the writings of the most bitter 
satirist ever known. 

THE MAILING OF ORDERS A SPECIALTY. 
16 



*4- 




SELECT ORATIONS OF CICERO. 

THE FOUR ORATIONS AGAINST OATALINE, 

"With Interlinear Translation on the Hamiltonian System. 

By "WILLIAM UNDEEWOOD, 
Son-in-law and Partner of the late Prof. Hamilton. 



*&- 



The Orations expressly translated by the American Editor of this 
edition are: 

The ORATORIO Pro ARCHIA POETA, Pro MARCELLO, Pro LEGE 

MANILLA, Pro L. MURENA, Pro Q. LEGARIO, Pro rege 

DEIOTARIO, Pro T. ANNIO MIL ONE. 

Thus making a more complete collection of Select Orations of Cicero than 
any published in the United States ; containing all the orations that are 
read in any of the Schools and Colleges of this country, and comprising all 
those in the editions of Anthon, Bullions, Johnson, and others. With 

AN INTERLINEAR TRANSLATION ON THE SYSTEM OF LOCKE. 

By THOMAS CLARK. 

One Volume, Royal 12mo, 508 Pages, Half Turkey Morocco. Price, $2.2Z. 

From the Wheeling Intelligencer. 
The great beauty and merit of this system lies in its labor-saving sim- 
plicity. To students who have mastered the elementary principles of the 
Latin language this work is really invaluable. 

From T. R. Crittenden, Caldwell, Texas. 
I see you are the publisher of the "Interlinear System of Latin and 
Greek Classics," and, am so much pleased with the plan, I would like you 
to forward me the whole series. 

From F. Crafts, Bridgewater Academy, Bridgewater, Mass. 
I think very highly of the " Interlinear'' method of teaching, and wish 
to put a class into your u Cicero" as soon as possible. 

From J. B. Howard, Ann Arbor, Mich. 
I have lately been using your "Cicero Interlinear," from which I have 
received great assistance, by getting out my lesson in a little time, and then 
devoting my leisure to study. 

WRITE FOR "INTERLINEAR" TESTIMONIALS. 

17 



Publications of Charles De Silver 6° Sons, Philadelphia. 
THE INTERLINEAR SALLUST. 



— • — mm i 



C. SALLUSTII CRISPI OPERA: 



CONSISTING OF 



SALLUST'S CATALINE AND JUGURTHA, 

Adapted to the Hamiltonian System 

BY A 

LITERAL ANI> ANALYTICAL TRANSLATION. 

By JAMES HAMILTON, 
Author of the Hamilton System. 



Carefully Revised, Corrected, and Omissions Supplied ; 

and what is Obscure or Unintelligible in 

Hamilton's Translation Explained. 

By THOMAS CLARK. 
One Volume, Moyal 12tno, 309 Pages, Half Turkey Morocco. Price, $2.25. 

From D. Elwood, Wheelock, Texas. 

I saw a copy of " Sallust," a few weeks since, and during the few mo- 
ments I perused it I concluded that with it a close reader and observer 
could acquire a better knowledge of the classics in one-third of the time 
than required by any other method. 

From the Philadelphia Evening Bulletin. 

The "Interlinear Sallust" has just been issued. It is pretty well known 
by this time that the quickest, most accurate, and most scientific method of 
studying Latin or Greek is by means of interlinear translations. During 
the great era of classical scholarship, when Latin was learned so as to be 
fluently spoken, such aids were generally used. As regards the work before 
us, we commend it to all collegians and school-boys. It is prepared with 
the utmost accuracy, and is beautifully printed and bound. 
From W. B. Stickney, Bernardstown, Mass. 

I received your "Interlinear Sallust," and am very much pleased with it, 
as it fully meets my expectations. 

WRITE FOR ANY BOOK YOU MAY NEED. 

18 



-a* 



*® 



THE INTERLINEAR HORACE. 



THE WORKS OF 

QUINTUS HORATIUS FLACCUS: 

CONSISTING OF 

The Fifteen Odes, the Seventeen Epodes, the Secular Poem, 
Satires, Epistles, and Horace on the Art of Poetry. 

THE ORIGINAL TEXT BEING REDUCED TO THE NATURAL CONSTRUC- 
TION, WITH 

STERLING'S TRANSLATION, INTERLINEARLY ARRANGED. 

By P. A. NUTTALL. 



^ fyw JjUitimt* ^W %tmd mi <f dfofei 

By THOMAS CLARK. 
One Volume, Royal 12mo, 435 Pages, Half Turkey Morocco. Price, $2.25, 

From the New Orleans Bulletin. 
The interlinear translation of "Horace" should be in the hands of every 
scholar. It is gotten up in a superior style, and would adorn any library. 

W. S. W. Ruschenberger, the distinguished author and scientist, says : 
I regard this work, together with the " Interlinear translations of the 
Classics," as very valuable and important additions to the means of teach- 
ing the Latin language in a short time, and with much less labor to the 
student than through the medium of books heretofore published. I hope 
the labors of Mr. Thomas Clark in this field may receive the attention and 
regard which they merit. 

From L. W*. Weller, Springfield, Clark Co., Ohio. 
I am highly pleased with " Horace," as I consider such a book calcu- 
lated to extend a knowledge of the Latin language. I must have the other 
Interlinears as soon as possible. 

INFORMATION ABOUT BOOKS PROMPTLY GIVEN. 

19 



$ ; $* 

Publications of Charles De Silver &° Sons, Philadelphia. 
THE INTERLINEAR LIVY. 



TITUS LIVIUS. 

SELECTIONS FROM THE FIRST FIVE BOOKS. 

TOGETHER WITH 

Sfte Stoentg-finst and ©irentg-second looius <B nitre, 

WITH AN 

The Original Text being Reduced to the Natural Order of 
Construction, for the Use of Schools and Private Learners. 

By REV. I. W. BIEBER. 
One Volume, Royal 12mo, 624 Pages? Half Turkey Morocco, Price, $2.25. 

From Locke. 
As the boy advances in acquiring a knowledge of words, he must 
advance, pari passu, in obtaining a thorough and critical knowledge of 
grammar. When, by this way of interlining Latin and English one with 
another, he has got a moderate knowledge of the Latin tongue, he may 
then be advanced a little farther, to the reading of some other easy Latin 
book, such as Justin or Entropius ; and to make the reading and under- 
standing of it the less tedious and difficult to him, let him help himself 
with the English translation. Nor let the objection that he will then know 
it only by rote fright any one. This, when well considered, is not of any 
moment against, but plainly for, this way of learning languages. 

From the New York Courier and Enquirer. 
The use of interlinear translations, such as Livy, in the study of the 
classics, is now considered by many as far preferable to the old system of 
teaching. It postpones the study of grammar, which is generally a bugbear 
to students, until some progress has been made in the language, and a cer- 
tain amount of practical grammar has been acquired. 

From the New York Times. 
The system has the sanction of common sense, and has been warmly 
recommended by such able and erudite men as Cardinal Wolsev, Erasmus, 
Roger Ascham, John Milton, John Locke, and Sydney Smith. We believe, 
with Sydney Smith, that this system, "the time being given,, will make 
better scholars; and the degree of scholarship being given, a much shorter 
time will be needed." 

THE SMALLEST ORDERS PROMPTLY EXECUTED. 

20 



* 




T hs Antadi if Ze 




T 



WITH AN 

INTERLINEAR TRANSLATION, 

For the Use of Schools and Private Learners, on the 
Hamiltonian System as Improved 

By THOMAS CLARK, 

EDITOR OF THE LATIN AND GREEK INTERLINEAR CLASSICS. 

One Volume, Koyal 12mo, 564 Pages, Half Turkey Morocco. Trice, $2.25. 

S. Austin Allibone, the distinguished author, writes : 
The Anabasis of Xenophon is, indeed, a most creditable specimen of 
American book-making — beautiful pages; large, clearly-defined, black, 
lustrous Greek type (a matter of the first consequence to students, but often 
neglected by publisher and printer) ; handsome, substantial binding, and 
convenient proportions for the hand. There is a growing disapprobation, 
both in Great Britain and America, of the disproportionate length of time 
devoted by the youthful student to the acquisition of the dead languages ; 
and therefore nothing will tend so effectually to the preservation of the 
Greek and Latin grammars as their judicious union (the fruit of an intel- 
ligent compromise) with the Interlinear Classics. 

From the Philadelphia Inquirer. 
"Xenophon's Anabasis" is here published with an interlinear transla- 
tion, according to the Hamiltonian system, and we confess that we are 
decidedly in favor of such an easy and literal method of study. 

From Professor W. T. Lowe, Eminence College, Ky. 
I have taught the classics on the old plan, and have often thought that 
too much valuable time was injudiciously spent in poring over the pages 
of a dictionary in search of some word or root of a word which would in 
its turn subject the patience of the student to a severe test in order to 
obtain the form of the word in the text. The interlinear system in the 
hands of a faithful teacher is the philosophical plan of studying foreign 
languages. 

From the Philadelphia North American. 

This work does credit to the American press and to the enterprise of the 
publishers. 

WRITE FOR "INTERLINEAR" CIRCULARS. 
21 



4- 



©* 

Publications of Charles De Silver 6° Sons, Philadelphia. 



HOMER. 

ILIAD OF HOMER, 

WITH AN 

INTERLINEAR TRANSLATION, 

For the Use of Schools and Private Learners, on the 
Hamiltonian System as Improved 

By THOMAS CLARK, 

EDITOR OF THE LATIN AND GREEK INTERLINEAR CLASSICS. 

In One Yolume, Royal 12mo, 368 Pages, Half Turkey Morocco. Price, - - $2.25. 



The first three books of this interlinear edition of the Iliad of 
Homer have been translated by Hamilton ; the rest, namely, the 
fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth, by the editor of this Ameri- 
can edition. These five last-mentioned books have been translated 
on the same plan by the editor as that on which he translated 
Xenophon's Anabasis — being intermediate to the plans of Hamil- 
ton and Locke — the signification of each individual word being 
clearly given, and so combined as to form a clear and intelligible 
sentence. 

From the Philadelphia Evening Bulletin. 
An excellent translation. The Greek type deserves special notice from 
its great beauty and striking legibility. The work is admirably printed on 
fine paper and neatly bound. 

From S. Royce, Liberty Seminary, Liberty, Union Co., Ind. 
I watch with anxiety the progress of your "Interlinear publications of 
Classical Authors." I wish you all success. I labor for it by using your 
publications, knowing the superiority of the method. 

From the Wheeling Intelligencer. 
The great beauty and merit of this system lies in its labor-saving sim- 
plicity. To students who have mastered the elementary principles of the 
Greek language this work is really invaluable. 

From the Philadelphia Sunday Dispatch. 
This interlinear translation of the Iliad of Homer has been prepared 
with much care and learning, upon a system intermediate beween those of 
Hamilton and Locke. To students of the Greek language such a book 
will be very valuable. 

MAILING OF ORDERS A SPECIALTY. 

22 




THE 

GOSPEL OF ST. JOHN 

zisr o-ie^iejieik:, 

!|}itff att (foferittttirc ami j^talntwal ff*M*fettat 
On the Principles of the Hamiltonian System as Improved 

By THOMAS CLARK, 

Late Editor of the Latin and Greek Interlinear Classics, 

TO WHICH IS APPENDED 

A Critical Annotation ; also, the Authorized English Version of the 

Protestant Church, and a Comparative View of the Catholic 

Translation from the Vulgate, with Historical Notes. 



By GEORGE WILLIAM 



HEILIG. 
Price, - 



$2.25. 



In One Yolume, Royal 12mo, Half Turkey Morocco. 

From Eliza D. Willard. 

Having myself spent five weary years at Greek and Latin, I think I 
may safely venture an opinion in favor of the " Interlinear" system. Any 
one who wishes may learn Greek or Latin by means of these interlinear 
translations in one-sixth the time it would take according to the old plan 
of having to refer to their dictionary for every word. 

From the Philadelphia Sunday Transcript. 

The Gospel of St. John is one of the series of Interlinear Classics. 
These interlinears are rapidly superseding every other mode of translation 
for scholastic purposes. The plan adopted by this translator is peculiar, 
being intermediate between the systems of Hamilton and Locke. The 
book will be found of great service to the student of the Greek language, 
as it removes many of the difficulties so perplexing in its study. 
From T. P. Davidson. 

I am much pleased with your interlinear method of translation. I taught 
this system in England for many years, and always found my students to 
make most satisfactory progress. 

From the Cincinnati Gazette. 

We are ready to testify, from our own experience, that these classics are 
leading the pupil over a road comparatively smooth and even, to travel 
which requires no other effort than the natural movement of the body. 



WRITE FOR 



'INTERLINEAR' 
23 



TESTIMONIALS. 



<r* 



4- 



-ffl* 




CLARK'S 
PRACTICAL AND PROGRESSIVE 

LATIN GRAMMAR, 

Adapted to the Interlinear Series of Classics and to all 
other Systems. 

ELEMENTARY COURSE. 

By THOMAS CLARK, 

Editor of the former Association of the Philadelphia Booksellers for the Publication of the 

Latin and Greek Classics; Editor of a Series of Latin Classics with Notes, 

and of the Popular Series of Interlinear Translations, 

comprising Horace, Caesar, Cicero, Sallust, etc. 

^tvh^A ai(d ijtttlarfld ljUitiflt* 

IN WHICH HAS BEEN ADDED 

A SECOND OR FULL COURSE OF THE LATIN GRAMMAR. 

In One Volume, Royal 12mo, 365 Pages, Half Turkey Morocco. Price, - - $1.50. 



The plan of this Grammar is altogether of a practical nature ; 
for, while the scholar is learning the declensions and conjugations, 
he has them exemplified in lessons extracted from the classics. 
Where this method has been properly applied, a more rapid and 
thorough knowledge of the elements of Latin has invariably been 
the result. This Grammar is adapted to the Interlinear Series of 
Classics, as tvell as to all other Systems. 

From C. Seidensticker, Philadelphia. 
I have found " Clark's Latin Grammar," which I lately put into the 
hands of a class of beginners, a very valuable auxiliary in teaching the 
rudiments of the Latin language. It commends itself to the favor of both 
teacher and pupil by the instructive variety of its exercises, combining, as 
it does, Grammar lessons with translations from Latin into English, and 
from English into Latin. Its arrangement, moreover, is such as to furnish 
the learner with a cue, that leads him successfully through the intricacies 
of Latin collocation, helping him over a difficulty that frequently perplexes 
and distresses the tyro. 

WRITE FOR ANY BOOK YOU MAY NEED. 

24 

h$ ^ ©* 








Educational Publications 



Charles De Silver & Sons. 



CONTAINING 

Exercises in Prose and Poetry, Gathered from Among the Most 

Celebrated Orators, Authors, and Popular Debaters, Ancient 

and Modern; A Treatise on Oratory and Elocution; 

With Notes Explanatory and Biographical. 

Designed for Use in Declamation in Schools, Academies, Lyceums, and Colleges. 

By EPES SARGENT. 

In One Demi-Octavo Volume, 538 Pages, Half Roan. Price, $2.25. 



A higher reputation throughout the United States has been ac- 
quired by this Speaker than any other similar work. In its pro- 
duction there has been a great expenditure of original labor, and 
it contains all the great masterpieces of eloquence, while it abounds 
in original translations from the Greek, Latin, and Trench. 

From the New York Tribune. 

A collection of many of the rarest and brightest gems in English literature, 
no less adapted to family reading and literary reference than for schools. 

E. P. Whipple, the distinguished Essayist and Critic, writes i 

The best compilation of the kind, in the . ariety and in the comprehen- 
siveness of its selections, which has yet been made on either side of the 
Atlantic. The various pieces are selected with great judgment, and not 
only is the volume admirably adapted to serve its primal purposes as a 
Speaker, but the general reader will find it to be a most stimulating and 
attractive book, far excelling any work of " elegant extracts" we have seen. 



WRITE FOR 



*■©- 



'INTERLINEAR' 

3 



CIRCULARS. 



T 



Publications of Charles De Silver 6° Sons, Philadelphia. 
SARGENT'S SERIES OF STANDARD SPEAKERS. 

%ht ^jntermedwty Standard <§pmkeii : 

CONTAINING 

Pieces for Declamation, Dialogues, Etc., in Schools and Colleges; 
Introductory or Supplementary to the Standard Speaker. 

In One Yolunie, 12mo, 432 Pages, Half Turkey. Price, §1.80. 



This Speaker contains a capital collection of Dialogues, and 
short, spirited pieces for declamation; and the original Debates 
have acquired for it a well-merited and wide-spread reputation. 
The pieces are quite distinct from those contained in the larger 
Standard Speaker. 

From O. G. Wheeler, South Hero, Vt. 

The "Intermediate Standard Speaker" pleases me so much, that I recom- 
mend it to the booksellers in my vicinity. 



|P^ Qrimarg Standard ^peakey : 

CONTAINING 

Original and Selected Pieces, Especially Adapted to Declamation 
for the Youngest Pupils. Elegantly Illustrated. 

In One 16mo Volume, 160 Pages, Half Roan. Price, 50 Cents. 



For beginners in Declamation, this is the most attractive and 
serviceable work in the language; the selections being admirable, 
the original pieces skilfully adapted to their purpose, and the whole 
style of the book of a superior character. 

From J. D. H. Corwine, Principal of Institute, Crittenden, Ky. 

Having given " Sargent's Primary Speaker" a thorough perusal, I speak 
advisedly when I say it is the best work of the kind ever issued from the 
American press. In the Institute, I am now using it with great satisfaction. 

From the School Visitor, Spencerport, Monroe Co., N. Y. 

The "Primary Standard Speaker" is the title of an admirable hook for 
the little speakers, filled with the most desirable matter and beautiful illus- 
trations. Those teachers familiar with the other works of Mr. Sargent will 
need no other recommendation ihan the name of the author. 

THE MAILING OF ORDERS A SPECIALTY. 
4 



-8H 



^i$^<PT^'WBK£&^B£mFiBB&E^^HH\^^R^u z c£ . lHarr . 'ySSi^S^Sy * , V^l^^'wQA 





INTERLINEARS. 



m- 



OLASSIOAL WORKS 

PUBLISHED BY 

Charles De Silver & Sons, Philadelphia. 

HAMILTON, LOCKE, AND CLARKE'S INTERLINEAR CLASSICS. 

The plan of these works is not new. It is merely the adaptation of the experi- 
ence of many of the best and most inquiring minds in educational pursuits — 
methodizing what was vague and loose. When the Latin tongue was the only 
language of diplomacy and scientific international communication, to acquire a 
knowledge of it was considered of more importance than now. This method was 
then recommended by Cardinal Wolsey, John Ascham, Latin Secretary to Queen 
Elizabeth, by the best Latin scholar and writer of his time, John Milton, and 
also by John Locke. In teaching classes by oral dictation, these works present 
advantages that no others contain. From the thousands of testimonials as to the 
excellence of the Interlinear System from teachers and eminent literary men, the 
publishers pive a few selections as specimens. 

VIRGIL. 

CONSISTING OF THE 

BUCOLICS, GEORGICS and the .ENEID OF YIRGIL. 

With the Original, Text reduced to the Natural Order of 

Construction, and an Interlinear Translation, as nearly 

Literal as the Idiomatic Differences of the Latin 

and English Languages will allow. 

ADAPTED TO THE SYSTEM OF CLASSICAL INSTRUCTION 

Combining the Methods of Ascham, Milton, and Locke. 

By LEVI HART and V. R. OSBORN. 

In One Volume, Royal 12mo, 512 Pages, Half Tnrkey Morocco. Price, - - $2.25. 

INFORMATION ABOUT BOOKS PROMPTLY GIVEN. 

13 




TOMMIES' ^iSWMMHT, 




* ORE than three-quarters of a century have elapsed since the house 
of Charles De Silver & Sons became prominently identified with 
the educational interests of the country, a fact which enables 
them to more pointedly call attention to the accompanying De- 
scriptive Catalogue of their school-books — feeling confident that, 
if equalled, such books cannot be surpassed in value by those of any single 
publishing house in the Union. 

Among the school publications maybe found Histories of the United States, 
by Frost; and of Modern Europe, by John Lord, LL.D., the celebrated histo- 
riographer; Speakers, by Epes Sargent, the most popular books of their class 
in this country, containing, as they do, the gems of oratory which have electri- 
fied the world during past ages, and the admirable Elocutionary Manual, by 
Prof. Corson, of Cornell University ; a series of Algebraical works, by Francis 
H. Smith, A.M., Superintendent of the Virginia Military Institute ; Pinnock's 
Histories of England, France, Greece, and Pome, with Questions, specially 
adapted to the use of schools ; together with Manesca's Oral and Serial Method 
of Teaching the French Language, admitted by competent judges to be far 
superior to any other system. The publishers can also point with pardonable 
pride to the unsurpassed Hamiltonian Series of Interlinear Classics, com- 
prising Virgil, Caesar, Ovid, Juvenal, Cicero, Sallust, Horace, Livy, Xenophon, 
Homer, the Gospel of St. John in Greek, and the Practical and Progressive 
Grammar, as re-edited, improved, and enlarged by Thomas Clark, formerly 
editor of the classical works issued by the Publishers' Association, and who 
has been pronounced one of the most able classical scholars of the age. Mr. 
Clark has been assisted in his labors by such men as Wilson, Heilig, and 
Bieber. 

Every facility will be given to those who desire information in regard to our 
books with a view to their examination or introduction or purchase ; and all 
orders for our own publications, or those of other firms, will be promptly and 
carefully attended to at the lowest market rates. 



<-&■ 



Having numerous applications for specimen copies of books from parties 
NOT ENTITLED TO ANY DISCOUNT, all applicants are respectfully re- 
quested to accompany their application with the Catalogue or Circular of the 
School or College with which they may be connected, showing their name 
upon such catalogue or circular, or other proper evidence. 

Money may be safely sent by Post-Office Order or Draft, made payable to 
the order of Charles De Silver & Sons. 

A full list of our Publications mailed free to any address. Our Descriptive 
Catalogue will be sent on application. 

2 



-SB 



